all | frequencies |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
exhibits | applications |
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
manuals |
app s | submitted / available | |||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
various |
|
(QCNFA222) UserMan-part1 | Users Manual | 2.81 MiB | / July 09 2016 | |||
various |
|
(QCNFA222) UserMan-part2 | Users Manual | 4.33 MiB | / July 09 2016 | |||
various |
|
Host user manual | Users Manual | 3.12 MiB | ||||
various |
|
Manual | Users Manual | 2.16 MiB | November 08 2015 | |||
various |
|
Uer Manual regulatory | Users Manual | 2.05 MiB | ||||
various |
|
User Manual | Users Manual | 3.84 MiB | ||||
various |
|
User Manual Regulatory | Users Manual | 1.58 MiB | June 10 2014 / April 04 2015 | |||
various |
|
User Manual | Users Manual | 4.34 MiB | ||||
various |
|
User Manual 20151229 v1 - (QCNFA222) UserMan | Users Manual | 5.10 MiB | ||||
various |
|
Users Manual | Users Manual | 4.50 MiB | March 09 2014 / February 03 2015 | |||
various | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
various | External Photos | / July 09 2016 | ||||||
various | Internal Photos | / July 09 2016 | ||||||
various | ID Label/Location Info | |||||||
various | ID Label/Location Info | |||||||
various | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
various | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
various | Test Setup Photos | / July 09 2016 | ||||||
various | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
various | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
various | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
various | Internal Photos | |||||||
various | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
various | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
various | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
various | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
various | External Photos | |||||||
various | ID Label/Location Info | |||||||
various | ID Label/Location Info | |||||||
various | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
various | Test Report | |||||||
various | Test Setup Photos | |||||||
various | Test Setup Photos | |||||||
various | Cover Letter(s) | / January 12 2015 | ||||||
various | Cover Letter(s) | / January 12 2015 | ||||||
various | Cover Letter(s) | / January 12 2015 | ||||||
various | Cover Letter(s) | / January 12 2015 | ||||||
various | Cover Letter(s) | / January 12 2015 | ||||||
various | Test Report | / January 12 2015 | ||||||
various | Test Setup Photos | / October 12 2015 | ||||||
various | Cover Letter(s) | November 08 2015 | ||||||
various | Cover Letter(s) | November 08 2015 | ||||||
various | Test Report | November 08 2015 | ||||||
various | Test Setup Photos | November 08 2015 | ||||||
various | Cover Letter(s) | November 08 2015 | ||||||
various | ID Label/Location Info | November 08 2015 | ||||||
various | RF Exposure Info | November 08 2015 | ||||||
various | Test Setup Photos | November 08 2015 | ||||||
various | Cover Letter(s) | November 08 2015 | ||||||
various | Test Setup Photos | November 08 2015 | ||||||
various | Test Report | November 08 2015 | ||||||
various | Test Report | November 08 2015 | ||||||
various | Test Setup Photos | November 08 2015 | ||||||
various | Cover Letter(s) | / August 01 2015 | ||||||
various | Test Report | / August 01 2015 | ||||||
various | Cover Letter(s) | / August 01 2015 | ||||||
various | Cover Letter(s) | / August 01 2015 | ||||||
various | External Photos | |||||||
various | Internal Photos | |||||||
various | ID Label/Location Info | / August 01 2015 | ||||||
various | ID Label/Location Info | / August 01 2015 | ||||||
various | Cover Letter(s) | / August 01 2015 | ||||||
various | RF Exposure Info | / August 01 2015 | ||||||
various | Test Setup Photos | |||||||
various | Test Setup Photos | |||||||
various | Test Report | / August 01 2015 | ||||||
various | Cover Letter(s) | / August 01 2015 | ||||||
various | Test Report | / August 01 2015 | ||||||
various | Test Report | / August 01 2015 | ||||||
various | Cover Letter(s) | June 10 2014 / September 10 2014 | ||||||
various | ID Label/Location Info | June 10 2014 / September 10 2014 | ||||||
various | ID Label/Location Info | June 10 2014 / September 10 2014 | ||||||
various | RF Exposure Info | June 10 2014 / September 10 2014 | ||||||
various | Test Report | June 10 2014 / September 10 2014 | ||||||
various | Test Setup Photos | June 10 2014 / April 04 2015 | ||||||
various | Test Report | June 10 2014 / September 10 2014 | ||||||
various | Test Report | |||||||
various | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
various | External Photos | |||||||
various | Internal Photos | |||||||
various | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
various | Test Setup Photos | |||||||
various | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
various | Cover Letter(s) | March 09 2014 | ||||||
various | Cover Letter(s) | March 09 2014 | ||||||
various | Cover Letter(s) | March 09 2014 | ||||||
various | Cover Letter(s) | March 09 2014 | ||||||
various | Cover Letter(s) | March 09 2014 | ||||||
various | RF Exposure Info | March 09 2014 | ||||||
various | Internal Photos | March 09 2014 / February 03 2015 | ||||||
various | ID Label/Location Info | March 09 2014 | ||||||
various | Cover Letter(s) | March 09 2014 | ||||||
various | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
various | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
various | Attestation Statements | |||||||
various | External Photos | |||||||
various | Internal Photos | |||||||
various | ID Label/Location Info | |||||||
various | ID Label/Location Info | |||||||
various | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
various | Cover Letter(s) | November 06 2014 |
various | (QCNFA222) UserMan-part1 | Users Manual | 2.81 MiB | / July 09 2016 |
E11288 Revised Edition V2 January 2016 E-Manual COPYRIGHT INFORMATION No part of this manual, including the products and software described in it, may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language in any form or by any means, except documentation kept by the purchaser for backup purposes, without the express written permission of ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC. (ASUS). ASUS PROVIDES THIS MANUAL AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT SHALL ASUS, ITS DIRECTORS, OFFICERS, EMPLOYEES OR AGENTS BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF USE OR DATA, INTERRUPTION OF BUSINESS AND THE LIKE), EVEN IF ASUS HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES ARISING FROM ANY DEFECT OR ERROR IN THIS MANUAL OR PRODUCT. Products and corporate names appearing in this manual may or may not be registered trademarks or copyrights of their respective companies, and are used only for identification or explanation and to the owners benefit, without intent to infringe. SPECIFICATIONS AND INFORMATION CONTAINED IN THIS MANUAL ARE FURNISHED FOR INFORMATIONAL USE ONLY, AND ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE AT ANY TIME WITHOUT NOTICE, AND SHOULD NOT BE CONSTRUED AS A COMMITMENT BY ASUS. ASUS ASSUMES NO RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY FOR ANY ERRORS OR INACCURACIES THAT MAY APPEAR IN THIS MANUAL, INCLUDING THE PRODUCTS AND SOFTWARE DESCRIBED IN IT. Copyright 2016 ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC. All Rights Reserved. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY Circumstances may arise where because of a default on ASUS part or other liability, you are entitled to recover damages from ASUS. In each such instance, regardless of the basis on which you are entitled to claim damages from ASUS, ASUS is liable for no more than damages for bodily injury (including death) and damage to real property and tangible personal property; or any other actual and direct damages resulted from omission or failure of performing legal duties under this Warranty Statement, up to the listed contract price of each product. ASUS will only be responsible for or indemnify you for loss, damages or claims based in contract, tort or infringement under this Warranty Statement. This limit also applies to ASUS suppliers and its reseller. It is the maximum for which ASUS, its suppliers, and your reseller are collectively responsible. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES IS ASUS LIABLE FOR ANY OF THE FOLLOWING: (1) THIRD-PARTY CLAIMS AGAINST YOU FOR DAMAGES; (2) LOSS OF, OR DAMAGE TO, YOUR RECORDS OR DATA; OR (3) SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR INDIRECT DAMAGES OR FOR ANY ECONOMIC CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING LOST PROFITS OR SAVINGS), EVEN IF ASUS, ITS SUPPLIERS OR YOUR RESELLER IS INFORMED OF THEIR POSSIBILITY. SERVICE AND SUPPORT Visit our multi-language website at https://www.asus.com/support 2 Notebook PC E-Manual Table of Contents About this manual .....................................................................................................7 Conventions used in this manual .............................................................................8 Icons ....................................................................................................................................8 Typography .......................................................................................................................8 Safety precautions .....................................................................................................9 Using your Notebook PC ..............................................................................................9 Caring for your Notebook PC .....................................................................................10 Proper disposal ................................................................................................................11 Chapter 1: Hardware Setup Getting to know your Notebook PC ...................................................................14 Top View .............................................................................................................................14 Bottom ................................................................................................................................18 Right Side ..........................................................................................................................19 Left Side .............................................................................................................................21 Chapter 2: Using your Notebook PC Getting started ...........................................................................................................24 Charge your Notebook PC ...........................................................................................24 Lift to open the display panel ....................................................................................26 Press the power button ................................................................................................26 Gestures for the touch screen panel and touchpad .....................................27 Using touch screen panel gestures ..........................................................................27 Using the touchpad .......................................................................................................30 Using the keyboard ...................................................................................................34 Function keys ...................................................................................................................34 Windows 10 keys ..........................................................................................................35 Multimedia control keys...............................................................................................36 Using the numeric keypad ..........................................................................................37 Using the touch screen panel as a tablet ..........................................................38 3 Notebook PC E-Manual Chapter 3: Working with Windows 10 Starting for the first time .........................................................................................40 Start menu ...................................................................................................................41 Windows apps ..........................................................................................................43 Working with Windows apps....................................................................................44 Customizing Windows apps .....................................................................................44 Task view .......................................................................................................................47 Snap feature ................................................................................................................48 Snap hotspots ..................................................................................................................48 Action Center ..............................................................................................................50 Other keyboard shortcuts ......................................................................................51 Connecting to wireless networks ........................................................................53 Wi-Fi .....................................................................................................................................53 Bluetooth ..........................................................................................................................54 Airplane mode .................................................................................................................55 Connecting to wired networks .............................................................................56 Configuring a dynamic IP/PPPoE network connection ....................................56 Configuring a static IP network connection .........................................................57 Turning your Notebook PC off ..............................................................................58 Putting your Notebook PC to sleep ....................................................................59 Chapter 4: Power-On Self-Test (POST) The Power-On Self-Test (POST) .............................................................................62 Using POST to access BIOS and Troubleshoot......................................................62 BIOS ................................................................................................................................62 Accessing BIOS ................................................................................................................62 BIOS Settings ....................................................................................................................63 Recovering your system ..........................................................................................73 Performing a recovery option ....................................................................................74 4 Notebook PC E-Manual Tips and FAQs Useful tips for your Notebook PC ........................................................................78 Hardware FAQs ...........................................................................................................79 Software FAQs .............................................................................................................82 Appendices Blu-ray ROM Drive Information (on selected models).......................................86 Internal Modem Compliancy .....................................................................................86 Overview ............................................................................................................................87 Network Compatibility Declaration .........................................................................87 Non-Voice Equipment ..................................................................................................87 Federal Communications Commission Interference Statement ...................89 FCC Radio Frequency (RF) Exposure Caution Statement .................................90 RF Exposure Information (SAR) ..................................................................................91 RF Exposure warning ....................................................................................................91 CE Mark Warning .............................................................................................................92 RF Exposure information (SAR) - CE ........................................................................92 IC Radiation Exposure Statement for Canada ......................................................93 Dclaration dIndustrie Canada relative lexposition aux ondes radio ...94 Radio Frequency (RF) Exposure Information .......................................................95 Informations concernant lexposition aux tilizeive radio (RF) ........................96 Wireless Operation Channel for Different Domains ...........................................97 France Restricted Wireless Frequency Bands .......................................................97 UL Safety Notices ............................................................................................................99 Power Safety Requirement ..........................................................................................100 TV Notices .........................................................................................................................100 REACH .................................................................................................................................100 Macrovision Corporation Product Notice ..............................................................100 5 Notebook PC E-Manual Prevention of Hearing Loss .........................................................................................100 Nordic Lithium Cautions (for lithium-ion batteries) ...........................................101 Optical Drive Safety Information ..............................................................................102 CTR 21 Approval (for Notebook PC with built-in Modem) ..............................103 ENERGY STAR complied product ..............................................................................105 Global Environmental Regulation Compliance and Declaration ..................106 ASUS Recycling/Takeback Services ..........................................................................106 Rechargeable Battery Recycling Service in North America.............................106 Regional notice for California .....................................................................................106 Regional notice for Singapore ...................................................................................107 Regional notice for India ..............................................................................................107 Notices for removable batteries ................................................................................107 Avis concernant les batteries remplaables..........................................................107 6 Notebook PC E-Manual About this manual This manual provides information about the hardware and software features of your Notebook PC, organized through the following chapters:
Chapter 1: Hardware Setup This chapter details the hardware components of your Notebook PC. Chapter 2: Using your Notebook PC This chapter shows you how to use the different parts of your Notebook PC. Chapter 3: Working with Windows 10 This chapter provides an overview of using Windows 10 in your Notebook PC. Chapter 4: Power-On Self-Test (POST) This chapter shows you how to use POST to change the settings of your Notebook PC. Tips and FAQs This section presents some recommended tips, hardware FAQs, and software FAQs you can refer to for maintaining and fixing common issues with your Notebook PC. Appendices This section includes notices and safety statements for your Notebook PC. 7 Notebook PC E-Manual Conventions used in this manual To highlight key information in this manual, some text are presented as follows:
IMPORTANT! This message contains vital information that must be followed to complete a task. NOTE: This message contains additional information and tips that can help complete tasks. WARNING! This message contains important information that must be followed to keep you safe while performing tasks and prevent damage to your Notebook PC's data and components. Icons The icons below indicate the devices you can use for completing a series of tasks or procedures on your Notebook PC.
= Use the touch screen panel.
= Use the touchpad.
= Use the keyboard. Typography Bold
= This indicates a menu or an item that must be selected. Italic
= This indicates sections that you can refer to in this manual. 8 Notebook PC E-Manual Safety precautions Using your Notebook PC This Notebook PC should only be used in environments with ambient temperatures between 5C (41F) and 35C (95F). Refer to the rating label on the bottom of your Notebook PC and ensure that your power adapter complies with this rating. Do not leave your Notebook PC on your lap or near any part of your body to prevent discomfort or injury from heat exposure. Do not use damaged power cords, accessories, and other peripherals with your Notebook PC. While powered on, ensure that you do not carry or cover your Notebook PC with any materials that can reduce air circulation. Do not place your Notebook PC on uneven or unstable work surfaces. You can send your Notebook PC through x-ray machines (used on items placed on conveyor belts), but do not expose them to magnetic detectors and wands. Contact your airline provider to learn about related in-flight services that can be used and restrictions that must be followed when using your Notebook PC in-flight. 9 Notebook PC E-Manual Caring for your Notebook PC Disconnect the AC power and remove the battery pack (if applicable) before cleaning your Notebook PC. Use a clean cellulose sponge or chamois cloth dampened with a solution of nonabrasive detergent and a few drops of warm water. Remove any extra moisture from your Notebook PC using a dry cloth. Do not use strong solvents such as thinners, benzene, or other chemicals on or near your Notebook PC. Do not place objects on top of your Notebook PC. Do not expose your Notebook PC to strong magnetic or electrical fields. Do not use or expose your Notebook PC near liquids, rain, or moisture. Do not expose your Notebook PC to dusty environments. Do not use your Notebook PC near gas leaks. 10 Notebook PC E-Manual Proper disposal Do not throw your Notebook PC in municipal waste. This product has been designed to enable proper reuse of parts and recycling. The symbol of the crossed out wheeled bin indicates that the product
(electrical, electronic equipment and mercury-
containing button cell battery) should not be placed in municipal waste. Check local regulations for disposal of electronic products. Do not throw the battery in municipal waste. The symbol of the crossed out wheeled bin indicates that the battery should not be placed in municipal waste. 11 Notebook PC E-Manual 12 Notebook PC E-Manual Chapter 1:
Hardware Setup 13 Notebook PC E-Manual Getting to know your Notebook PC Top View NOTE: The keyboard's layout may vary per region or country. The Notebook view may also vary in appearance depending on the Notebook PC model. 14 Notebook PC E-Manual Camera The built-in camera allows you to take pictures or record videos using your Notebook PC. Camera indicator The camera indicator lights up when the built-in camera is in use. Microphone The built-in microphone can be used for video conferencing, voice narrations, or simple audio recording. 360-adjustable touch screen panel Your Notebook PCs touch screen panel can be adjusted all the way into a 360 angle. This feature allows you to quickly turn your device from a Notebook PC into a touch-enabled tablet PC. This high-definition touch screen panel provides excellent viewing features for photos, videos, and other multimedia files on your Notebook PC. It also allows you to operate it using touch screen gestures. NOTE: For more details on how to turn your Notebook PC into a tablet device, refer to the Using the touch screen panel as a tablet section in this manual. Keyboard The keyboard provides full-sized QWERTY keys with a comfortable travel depth for typing. It also enables you to use the function keys, allows quick access to Windows, and controls other multimedia functions. NOTE: The keyboard layout differs by model or territory. 15 Notebook PC E-Manual Touchpad The touchpad allows the use of multi-gestures to navigate onscreen, providing an intuitive user experience. It also simulates the functions of a regular mouse. NOTE: For more details, refer to the Using the touchpad section in this manual. Status Indicators The status indicators help identify the current hardware status of your Notebook PC. Airplane mode indicator This indicator lights up when the Airplane mode in your Notebook PC is enabled. NOTE: When enabled, the Airplane mode disables all wireless connectivity. Capital lock indicator This indicator lights up when the capital lock function is activated. Using capital lock allows you to type capitalized letters (such as A, B, C) using your Notebook PCs keyboard. Number lock indicator This indicator lights up when the number lock function is activated. This allows you to use some of the keys on your keyboard for numeric input. 16 Notebook PC E-Manual Numeric keypad The numeric keypad toggles between these two functions: for numeric input and as pointer direction keys. NOTE: For more details, refer to the Using the numeric keypad section in this manual. 17 Notebook PC E-Manual Bottom NOTE: The bottom side may vary in appearance depending on model. WARNING! The bottom of the Notebook PC can get warm to hot while in use or while charging the battery pack. When working on your Notebook PC, do not place it on surfaces that can block the vents. IMPORTANT! Battery time varies by usage and by the specifications for this Notebook PC. The battery pack cannot be disassembled. Audio speakers The built-in audio speaker allows you to hear audio straight from the Notebook PC. The audio features of this Notebook PC are software-controlled. 18 Notebook PC E-Manual Right Side Headphone/Headset/Microphone jack This port allows you to connect amplified speakers or headphones. You can also use this port to connect your headset or an external microphone. USB Type-C port The USB (Universal Serial Bus) Type-C port provides a transfer rate of up to 5 Gbit/s and is backward compatible to USB 2.0. NOTE: Transfer rate of this port may vary per model. USB 3.0 port This USB 3.0 (Universal Serial Bus 3.0) port provides a transfer rate of up to 5 Gbit/s and is backward compatible to USB 2.0. HDMI port This port is for the HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) connector and is HDCP compliant for HD DVD, Blu-ray, and other protected content playback. LAN port Insert the network cable into this port to connect to a local area network. 19 Notebook PC E-Manual Power (DC) input port Insert the bundled power adapter into this port to charge the battery pack and supply power to your Notebook PC. WARNING! The adapter may become warm to hot while in use. Do not cover the adapter and keep it away from your body while it is connected to a power source. IMPORTANT! Use only the bundled power adapter to charge the battery pack and supply power to your Notebook PC. 20 Notebook PC E-Manual Left Side Security slot This security slot allows you to secure your Notebook PC using compatible Notebook PC security products. USB 2.0 port This USB (Universal Serial Bus) port is compatible with USB 2.0 or USB 1.1 devices such as keyboards, pointing devices, flash disk drives, external HDDs, speakers, cameras and printers. Status Indicators The status indicators help identify the current hardware status of your Notebook PC. Drive activity indicator This indicator lights up when your Notebook PC is accessing the internal storage drives. Two-color battery charge indicator The two-color LED provides a visual indication of the batterys charge status. Refer to the following table for details:
21 Notebook PC E-Manual Color Solid Green Solid Orange Blinking Orange Lights off Status The Notebook PC is plugged to a power source and the battery power is between 95% and 100%. The Notebook PC is plugged to a power source, charging its battery, and the battery power is less than 95%. The Notebook PC is running on battery mode and the battery power is less than 10%. The Notebook PC is running on battery mode and the battery power is between 10% to 100%. Volume button This button turns the volume up or down on your Notebook PC. Power button Press the power button to turn your Notebook PC on or off. You can also use the power button to put your Notebook PC to sleep or hibernate mode and wake it up from sleep or hibernate mode. In the event that your Notebook PC becomes unresponsive, press and hold the power button for at least four (4) seconds until your Notebook PC shuts down. Memory card reader This built-in memory card reader supports SD and SDHC card formats. 22 Notebook PC E-Manual Chapter 2:
Using your Notebook PC 23 Notebook PC E-Manual Getting started Charge your Notebook PC A. B. Plug the AC power adapter into a 100V~240V power source. Connect the DC power connector into your Notebook PCs power
(DC) input port. Charge the Notebook PC for 3 hours before using it in battery mode for the first time. NOTE: The power adapter may vary in appearance, depending on models and your region. IMPORTANT!
Power adapter information:
Input voltage: 100-240Vac Input frequency: 50-60Hz Rating output current: 2.37A (45W)* / 3.42A (65W)*
Rating output voltage: 19V
*on selected models only 24 Notebook PC E-Manual IMPORTANT!
Locate the input/output rating label on your Notebook PC and ensure that it matches the input/output rating information on your power adapter. Some Notebook PC models may have multiple rating output currents based on the available SKU. Ensure that your Notebook PC is connected to the power adapter before turning it on for the first time. We strongly recommend that you use a grounded wall socket while using your Notebook PC on power adapter mode. The socket outlet must be easily accessible and near your Notebook PC. To disconnect your Notebook PC from its main power supply, unplug your Notebook PC from the power socket. WARNING!
Read the following precautions for your Notebook PCs battery:
Only ASUS-authorized technicians should remove the battery inside the device. The battery used in this device may present a risk of fire or chemical burn if removed or disassembled. Follow the warning labels for your personal safety. Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Do not dispose of in fire. Never attempt to short-circuit your Notebook PCs battery. Never attempt to disassemble and reassemble the battery. Discontinue usage if leakage is found. The battery and its components must be recycled or disposed of properly. Keep the battery and other small components away from children. 25 Notebook PC E-Manual Lift to open the display panel Press the power button 26 Notebook PC E-Manual Gestures for the touch screen panel and touchpad Gestures allow you to launch programs and access the settings of your Notebook PC. Refer to the following illustrations when using hand gestures on your touch screen panel and touchpad. NOTE: The following screenshots are for reference only. The touch screen panels appearance may vary depending on model. Using touch screen panel gestures The gestures allow you to launch programs and access the settings of your Notebook PC. The functions can be activated by using the hand gestures on your Notebook PCs touch screen panel. Left edge swipe Right edge swipe Swipe from the left edge of the screen to launch Task view. Swipe from the right edge of the screen to launch Action Center. 27 Notebook PC E-Manual Tap/Double-tap Press and hold Tap an app to select it. Double-tap an app to launch it. Press and hold to open the right-
click menu. Zoom in Zoom out Spread apart your two fingers on the touch screen panel. Bring together your two fingers on the touch screen panel. 28 Notebook PC E-Manual Finger slide Drag Slide your finger to scroll up and down and slide your finger to pan the screen left or right. Drag to create a selection box around multiple items. Drag and drop an item to move it to a new location. 29 Notebook PC E-Manual Using the touchpad Moving the pointer You can tap anywhere on the touchpad to activate its pointer, then slide your finger on the touchpad to move the pointer onscreen. Slide horizontally Slide vertically Slide diagonally 30 Notebook PC E-Manual
various | (QCNFA222) UserMan-part2 | Users Manual | 4.33 MiB | / July 09 2016 |
One-finger gestures Tap/Double-tap Tap an app to select it. Double-tap an app to launch it. Drag and drop Double-tap an item, then slide the same finger without lifting it off the touchpad. To drop the item to its new location, lift your finger from the touchpad. 31 Notebook PC E-Manual Left-click Right-click Click an app to select it. Double-click an app to launch it. Click this button to open the right-
click menu. NOTE: The areas inside the dotted line represent the locations of the left mouse button and the right mouse button on the touchpad. Two-finger gestures Two-finger scroll (up/down) Two-finger scroll (left/right) Slide two fingers to scroll up or down. Slide two fingers to scroll left or right. 32 Notebook PC E-Manual Zoom out Zoom in Bring together your two fingers on the touchpad. Spread apart your two fingers on the touchpad. Drag and drop Select an item then press and hold the left button. Using your other finger, slide on the touchpad to drag the item, lift your finger off the button to drop the item. 33 Notebook PC E-Manual Using the keyboard Function keys The function keys on your Notebook PCs keyboard can trigger the following commands:
Puts the Notebook PC into Sleep mode Turns Airplane mode on or off NOTE: When enabled, the Airplane mode disables all wireless connectivity. Decreases display brightness Increases display brightness Turns the display panel on or off Toggles the display mode NOTE: Ensure that the second display is connected to your Notebook PC. 34 Notebook PC E-Manual Enables or disables the touchpad Turns the speaker on or off Turns the speaker volume down Turns the speaker volume up Windows 10 keys There are two special Windows keys on your Notebook PCs keyboard used as below:
Launches the Start menu Displays the drop-down menu 35 Notebook PC E-Manual Multimedia control keys The multimedia control keys allow you to control multimedia files, such as audios and videos, when played in your Notebook PC. in combination with the arrow keys on your Notebook PC, Press illustrated as below. Stop Play or pause Skip to previous track or rewind Skip to next track or fast forward 36 Notebook PC E-Manual Using the numeric keypad NOTE: The numeric keypad layout may differ by model or territory but the usage procedures remain the same. A numeric keypad is available on selected Notebook PC models. You can use this keypad for numeric input or as pointer direction keys. Press to toggle between using the keypad as number keys or as pointer direction keys. 37 Notebook PC E-Manual Using the touch screen panel as a tablet To use your Notebook PCs touch screen panel as a tablet device, you may adjust it all the way into a 360 angle as shown below. Notebook PC mode Adjust to a 360 angle Tablet mode 38 Notebook PC E-Manual Chapter 3:
Working with Windows 10 39 Notebook PC E-Manual Starting for the first time When you start your Notebook PC for the first time, a series of screens appear to guide you in configuring your Windows 10 operating system. To start your Notebook PC for the first time:
1. 2. 3. 4. Press the power button on your Notebook PC. Wait for a few minutes until the setup screen appears. From the setup screen, pick your region and a language to use on your Notebook PC. Carefully read the License Terms. Select I accept. Follow the onscreen instructions to configure the following basic items:
Personalize Get online Settings Your account 5. After configuring the basic items, Windows 10 proceeds to install your apps and preferred settings. Ensure that your Notebook PC is kept powered on during the setup process. 6. Once the setup process is complete, the Desktop appears. NOTE: The screenshots in this chapter are for reference only. 40 Notebook PC E-Manual Start menu The Start menu is the main gateway to your Notebook PCs programs, Windows apps, folders, and settings. Change account settings, lock, or sign out from your account Launch an app from the Start screen Launch Taskview Launch an app from the taskbar Launch Search Launch the Start menu Launch All apps Shut down, restart, or put your Notebook PC to sleep Launch Settings Launch File Explorer You can use the Start menu to do these common activities:
Start programs or Windows apps Open commonly used programs or Windows apps Adjust Notebook PC settings Get help with the Windows operating system Turn off your Notebook PC Log off from Windows or switch to a different user account 41 Notebook PC E-Manual Launching the Start menu Tap the Start button your desktop. in the lower-left corner of Position your mouse pointer over the Start button in the lower-left corner of your desktop then click it. Press the Windows logo key on your keyboard. Opening programs from the Start menu One of the most common uses of the Start menu is opening programs installed on your Notebook PC. Tap the program to launch it. Position your mouse pointer over the program then click to launch it. Use the arrow keys to browse through the programs. Press to launch it. NOTE: Select All apps at the bottom of the left pane to display a full list of programs and folders on your Notebook PC in alphabetical order. 42 Notebook PC E-Manual Windows apps These are apps pinned on the right pane of the Start menu and displayed in tiled-format for easy access. NOTE: Some Windows apps require signing in to your Microsoft account before they are fully launched. 43 Notebook PC E-Manual Working with Windows apps Use your Notebook PCs touch screen, touchpad, or keyboard to launch, customize, and close apps. Launching Windows apps from the Start menu Tap the app to launch it. Position your mouse pointer over the app then click to launch it. Use the arrow keys to browse through the apps. Press to launch an app. Customizing Windows apps You can move, resize, unpin, or pin apps to the taskbar from the Start menu using the following steps:
Moving apps Press and hold the app, then drag and drop it to a new location. Position your mouse pointer over the app, then drag and drop the app to a new location. 44 Notebook PC E-Manual Resizing apps Press and hold the app, then tap tile size. and select an app Position your mouse pointer over the app and right-click it, then click Resize and select an app tile size. Use the arrow keys to navigate to the app. Press then select Resize and select an app tile size.
, Unpinning apps Press and hold the app, then tap the icon. Position your mouse pointer over the app and right-click it, then click Unpin from Start. Use the arrow keys to navigate to the app. Press then select Unpin from Start.
, 45 Notebook PC E-Manual Pinning apps to the taskbar Press and hold the app, then tap Pin to taskbar. Position your mouse pointer over the app and right-click it, then click Pin to taskbar. Use the arrow keys to navigate to the app. Press then select Pin to taskbar.
, Pinning more apps to the Start menu From All apps, press and hold the app you want to add to the Start menu, then tap Pin to Start. From All apps, position your mouse pointer over the app you want to add to the Start menu and right-click it, then click Pin to Start. From All apps, press add to the Start menu, then select Pin to Start. on the app that you want to 46 Notebook PC E-Manual Task view Quickly switch between opened apps and programs using the task view feature, you can also use task view to switch between desktops. Launching task view Tap the edge of the screen. icon on the taskbar or swipe form the left Position your mouse pointer over the taskbar and click it. icon on the Press on your keyboard. 47 Notebook PC E-Manual Snap feature The Snap feature displays apps side-by-side, allowing you to work or switch between apps. Snap hotspots You can drag and drop apps to these hotspots to snap them into place. 48 Notebook PC E-Manual Using Snap or 1. 2. 3. 1. 2. 3. Launch the app you wish to snap. Drag the title bar of your app and drop the app to the edge of the screen to snap. Launch another app and repeat the above steps to snap another app. Launch the app you wish to snap. Press and hold the keys to snap the app. key, then use the arrow Launch another app and repeat the above steps to snap another app. 49 Notebook PC E-Manual Action Center Action Center consolidates notifications from apps and presents a single place where you can interact with them. It also has a really useful Quick Actions section at the bottom. Launching Action Center Click the edge of the screen. icon on the taskbar or swipe from the right Position your mouse pointer over the taskbar and click it. icon on the Press on your keyboard. 50 Notebook PC E-Manual Other keyboard shortcuts Using the keyboard, you can also use the following shortcuts to help you launch applications and navigate Windows 10.
\
Launches Start menu Launches Action Center Launches the desktop Launches the File Explorer Opens the Share panel Launches Settings Launches Connect panel Activates the Lock screen Minimizes all currently active windows 51 Notebook PC E-Manual Launches Search Launches Project panel Opens the Run window Opens Ease of Access Center Opens the context menu of the Start button Launches the magnifier icon and zooms in your screen Zooms out your screen Opens Narrator Settings 52 Notebook PC E-Manual Connecting to wireless networks Wi-Fi Access emails, surf the Internet, and share applications via social networking sites using your Notebook PCs Wi-Fi connection. IMPORTANT! Airplane mode disables this feature. Ensure that Airplane mode is turned off before enabling the Wi-Fi connection of your Notebook PC. Connecting Wi-Fi Connect your Notebook PC to a Wi-Fi network by using the following steps:
or 1. 2. 3. 4. Select the icon from the taskbar. Select the icon to enable Wi-Fi. Select an access point from the list of available Wi-Fi connections. Select Connect to start the network connection. NOTE: You may be prompted to enter a security key to activate the Wi-Fi connection. 53 Notebook PC E-Manual Bluetooth Use Bluetooth to facilitate wireless data transfers with other Bluetooth-
enabled devices. IMPORTANT! Airplane mode disables this feature. Ensure that Airplane mode is turned off before enabling the Bluetooth connection of your Notebook PC. Pairing with other Bluetooth-enabled devices You need to pair your Notebook PC with other Bluetooth-enabled devices to enable data transfers. Connect your devices by using the following steps:
1. 2. 3. or Launch Settings from the Start menu. Select Devices, then select Bluetooth to search for Bluetooth-enabled devices. Select a device from the list. Compare the passcode on your Notebook PC with the passcode sent to your chosen device. If they are the same, select Yes to successfully pair your Notebook PC with the device. NOTE: For some bluetooth-enabled devices, you may be prompted to key in the passcode of your Notebook PC. 54 Notebook PC E-Manual Airplane mode Airplane mode disables wireless communication, allowing you to use your Notebook PC safely while in-flight. NOTE: Contact your airline provider to learn about related in-flight services that can be used and restrictions that must be followed when using your Notebook PC in-flight. Turning Airplane mode on 1. 2. or Launch Action Center from the taskbar. Select the icon to enable Airplane mode. Press
. Turning Airplane mode off 1. 2. or Launch Action Center from the taskbar. Select the icon to disable Airplane mode. Press
. 55 Notebook PC E-Manual Connecting to wired networks You can also connect to wired networks, such as local area networks and broadband Internet connection, using your Notebook PCs LAN port. NOTE: Contact your Internet Service Provider (ISP) for details or your network administrator for assistance in setting up your Internet connection. To configure your settings, refer to the following procedures. IMPORTANT! Ensure that a network cable is connected between your Notebook PCs LAN port and a local area network before performing the following actions. Configuring a dynamic IP/PPPoE network connection or 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Launch Settings. Select Network & Internet. Select Ethernet > Network and Sharing Center. Select your LAN then select Properties. Select Internet Protocol Version 4(TCP/IPv4) then select Properties. Select Obtain an IP address automatically then select OK. NOTE: Proceed to the next steps if you are using PPPoE connection. 56 Notebook PC E-Manual 7. 8. 9. 10. Return to the Network and Sharing Center window then select Set up a new connection or network. Select Connect to the Internet then select Next. Select Broadband (PPPoE). Type your User name, Password, and Connection name then select Connect. 11. Select Close to finish the configuration. 12. 13. on the taskbar then select the Select connection you just created. Type your user name and password then select Connect to start connecting to the Internet. Configuring a static IP network connection or 1. 2. 3. 4. Repeat steps 1 to 5 under Configuring a dynamic IP/PPPoE network connection Select Use the following IP address. Type the IP address, Subnet mask and Default gateway from your service provider. If needed, you can also type the preferred DNS server address and alternate DNS server address then select OK. 57 Notebook PC E-Manual Turning your Notebook PC off You can turn off your Notebook PC by doing either of the following procedures:
or Launch the Start menu, then select Shut down to do a normal shutdown.
>
From the log-in screen, select
> Shut down. to launch Shut Down Press Windows. Select Shut down from the drop-down list then select OK. If your Notebook PC is unresponsive, press and hold the power button for at least four (4) seconds until your Notebook PC turns off. 58 Notebook PC E-Manual Putting your Notebook PC to sleep To put your Notebook PC to Sleep mode:
or Launch the Start menu, then select Sleep to put your Notebook PC to sleep.
>
From the log-in screen, select
> Sleep. Press Select Sleep from the drop-down list then select OK. to launch Shut Down Windows. NOTE: You can also put your Notebook PC to Sleep mode by pressing the power button once. 59 Notebook PC E-Manual 60 Notebook PC E-Manual Chapter 4:
Power-On Self-Test (POST) 61 Notebook PC E-Manual The Power-On Self-Test (POST) The POST (Power-On-Self-Test) is a series of software-controlled diagnostic tests that run when you turn on or restart your Notebook PC. The software that controls the POST is installed as a permanent part of the Notebook PCs architecture. Using POST to access BIOS and Troubleshoot During POST, you can access the BIOS settings or run troubleshooting options using the function keys of your Notebook PC. You may refer to the following information for more details. BIOS The BIOS (Basic Input and Output System) stores system hardware settings that are needed for system startup in the Notebook PC. The default BIOS settings apply to most conditions of your Notebook PC. Do not change the default BIOS settings except in the following circumstances:
An error message appears onscreen during system bootup and requests you to run the BIOS Setup. You have installed a new system component that requires further BIOS settings or updates. WARNING! Using inappropriate BIOS settings may result to system instability or boot failure. We strongly recommend that you change the BIOS settings only with the help of a trained service personnel. Accessing BIOS Restart your Notebook PC then press during POST. 62 Notebook PC E-Manual BIOS Settings NOTE: The BIOS screens in this section are for reference only. The actual screens may differ by model and territory. Boot This menu allows you to set your boot option priorities. You may refer to the following procedures when setting your boot priority. 1. On the Boot screen, select Boot Option #1. Aptio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. Main Advanced Boot Security Save & Exit Boot Configuration Fast Boot [Enabled]
Launch CSM [Disabled]
Driver Option Priorities Boot Option Priorities Boot Option #1 [Windows Boot Manager]
Add New Boot Option Delete Boot Option Sets the system boot order
: Select Screen
: Select Item Enter: Select
+/ : Change Opt. F1 : General Help F9 : Optimized Defaults F10 : Save & Exit ESC : Exit Version 2.16.1243 Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. 63 Notebook PC E-Manual 2. Press and select a device as the Boot Option #1. Aptio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. Main Advanced Boot Security Save & Exit Boot Configuration Fast Boot [Enabled]
Launch CSM [Disabled]
Sets the system boot order Driver Option Priorities Boot Option #1 Boot Option Priorities Windows Boot Manager Boot Option #1 [Windows Boot Manager]
Disabled Add New Boot Option Delete Boot Option
: Select Screen
: Select Item Enter: Select
+/ : Change Opt. F1 : General Help F9 : Optimized Defaults F10 : Save & Exit ESC : Exit Version 2.16.1243 Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. 64 Notebook PC E-Manual Security This menu allows you to set up the administrator and user password of your Notebook PC. It also allows you to control the access to your Notebook PCs hard disk drive, input/output (I/O) interface, and USB interface. NOTE:
If you install a User Password, you will be prompted to input this before entering your Notebook PC's operating system. If you install an Administrator Password, you will be prompted to input this before entering BIOS. Aptio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. Main Advanced Boot Security Save & Exit Password Description If ONLY the Administrators password is set, then this only limits access to Setup and is only asked for when entering Setup. If ONLY the users password is set, then this is a power on password and must be entered to boot or enter Setup. In Setup, the User will have Administrator rights. Administrator Password Status NOT INSTALLED User Password Status NOT INSTALLED Administrator Password User Password HDD Password Status : NOT INSTALLED Set Master Password Set User Password I/O Interface Security System Mode state User Secure Boot state Enabled Secure Boot Control [Enabled]
Key Management Set Administrator Password. The password length must be in the following range:
Minimum length 3 Maximum length 20
: Select Screen
: Select Item Enter: Select
+/ : Change Opt. F1 : General Help F9 : Optimized Defaults F10 : Save & Exit ESC : Exit Version 2.16.1243 Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. Version 2.16.1243 Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. 65 Notebook PC E-Manual To set the password:
1. 2. 3. On the Security screen, select Administrator Password or User Password. Type in a password then press
. Re-type to confirm the password then press
. To clear the password:
On the Security screen, select Administrator Password or User Password. Type in the current password then press
. Leave the Create New Password field blank then press
. Select Yes in the confirmation box then press
. 1. 2. 3. 4. 66 Notebook PC E-Manual I/O Interface Security In the Security menu, you can access I/O Interface Security to lock or unlock some interface functions of your Notebook PC. Aptio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. Security I/O Interface Security LAN Network Interface [UnLock]
Wireless Network Interface [UnLock]
HD AUDIO Interface [UnLock]
USB Interface Security LAN Network Interface Lock UnLock If Locked, LAN controller will be disabled.
: Select Screen
: Select Item Enter: Select
+/ : Change Opt. F1 : General Help F9 : Optimized Defaults F10 : Save & Exit ESC : Exit Version 2.16.1243 Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. To lock an interface:
1. On the Security screen, select I/O Interface Security. 2. Select an interface you would like to lock then press
. 3. Select Lock. 67 Notebook PC E-Manual USB Interface Security Through the I/O Interface Security menu, you can also access USB Interface Security to lock or unlock ports and devices. Aptio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. Security USB Interface Security USB Interface [UnLock]
If Locked, all USB device will be disabled External Ports [UnLock]
CMOS Camera [UnLock]
Card Reader [UnLock]
USB Interface Lock UnLock
: Select Screen
: Select Item Enter: Select
+/ : Change Opt. F1 : General Help F9 : Optimized Defaults F10 : Save & Exit ESC : Exit Version 2.16.1243 Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. To lock the USB interface:
1. On the Security screen, select I/O Interface Security > USB Interface Security. 2. Select an interface that you would like to lock then select Lock. NOTE: Setting the USB Interface to Lock also locks and hides the External Ports and other devices included under USB Interface Security. 68 Notebook PC E-Manual Set Master Password In the Security menu, you can use Set Master Password to set up a password-enabled access to your hard disk drive. Aptio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. Main Advanced Boot Security Save & Exit Aptio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2011 American Megatrends, Inc. Password Description Set HDD Master Password. If ONLY the Administrators password is set,then this only limits access to Setup
***Advisable to and is only asked for when entering Setup. Power Cycle System If ONLY the users password is set, then after Setting Hard this is a power on password and must be Disk Passwords***
entered to boot or enter Setup. In Setup, the User will have Administrator rights. Administrator Password Status NOT INSTALLED User Password Status NOT INSTALLED Administrator Password User Password HDD Password Status : NOT INSTALLED Set Master Password Set User Password I/O Interface Security
: Select Screen
: Select Item Enter: Select
+/ : Change Opt. F1 : General Help F9 : Optimized Defaults F10 : Save & Exit ESC : Exit Version 2.16.1243 Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. To set the HDD password:
1. On the Security screen, select Set Master Password. 2. Type in a password then press
. 3. 4. Re-type to confirm the password then press
. Select Set User Password then repeat the previous steps to set up the user password. 69 Notebook PC E-Manual Save & Exit To keep your configuration settings, select Save Changes and Exit before exiting the BIOS. Aptio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. Main Advanced Boot Security Save & Exit Save Changes and Exit Discard Changes and Exit Save Options Save Changes Discard Changes Restore Defaults Boot Override Windows Boot Manager Launch EFI Shell from filesystem device Exit system setup after saving the changes.
: Select Screen
: Select Item Enter: Select
+/ : Change Opt. F1 : General Help F9 : Optimized Defaults F10 : Save & Exit ESC : Exit Version 2.16.1243 Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. 70 Notebook PC E-Manual To update the BIOS:
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Verify the Notebook PCs exact model then download the latest BIOS file for your model from the ASUS website. Save a copy of the downloaded BIOS file to a flash disk drive. Connect your flash disk drive to your Notebook PC. Restart your Notebook PC then press during POST. From the BIOS menu, Select Advanced > Start Easy Flash, then press
. Aptio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2012 American Megatrends, Inc. Main Advanced Boot Security Save & Exit Aptio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2011 American Megatrends, Inc. Start Easy Flash Internal Pointing Device [Enabled]
Wake on Lid Open [Enabled]
Power Off Energy Saving [Enabled]
SATA Configuration Graphics Configuration Intel (R) Anti-Theft Technology Corporation USB Configuration Network Stack Press Enter to run the utility to select and update BIOS.
: Select Screen
: Select Item Enter: Select
+/ : Change Opt. F1 : General Help F9 : Optimized Defaults F10 : Save & Exit ESC : Exit Version 2.16.1243 Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. 71 Notebook PC E-Manual 6. Locate your downloaded BIOS file in the flash disk drive then press
. ASUSTek Easy Flash Utility FLASH TYPE: Generic Flash Type New BIOS Platform: Unknown Version: Unknown Build Date: Unknown Build Time: Unknown Current BIOS Platform: TP501 Version: 101 Build Date: Jan 26 2015 Build Time: 11:51:05 FSO FS1 FS2 FS3 FS4 0 EFI
<DIR>
[]: Switch []: Choose [q]: Exit [Enter]: Enter/Execute 7. After the BIOS update process, select Exit > Restore Defaults to restore the system to its default settings. 72 Notebook PC E-Manual Recovering your system Using recovery options on your Notebook PC allows you to restore the system to its original state or simply refresh its settings to help improve performance. IMPORTANT!
Backup all your data files before doing any recovery option on your Notebook PC. Note down important customized settings such as network settings, user names, and passwords to avoid data loss. Ensure that your Notebook PC is plugged in to a power source before resetting your system. Windows 10 allows you to do any of the following recovery options:
Keep my files - This option allows you refresh your Notebook PC without affecting personal files (photos, music, videos, documents). Using this option, you can restore your Notebook PC to its default settings and delete other installed apps. Remove everything - This option resets your Notebook PC to its factory settings. You must backup your data before doing this option. 73 Notebook PC E-Manual Go back to an earlier build - This option allows you to go back to an earlier build. Use this option if this build is not working for you. Advanced startup - Using this option allows you to perform other advanced recovery options on your Notebook PC such as:
-
-
Using a USB drive, network connection or Windows recovery DVD to startup your Notebook PC. Using Troubleshoot to enable any of these advanced recovery options: System Restore, System Image Recovery, Startup Repair, Command Prompt, UEFI Firmware Settings, and Startup Settings. Performing a recovery option Refer to the following steps if you want to access and use any of the available recovery options for your Notebook PC. 1. Launch Settings and select Update and security. 74 Notebook PC E-Manual 2. Under the Update and security option, select Recovery then select the recovery option you would like to perform. 75 Notebook PC E-Manual 76 Notebook PC E-Manual Tips and FAQs 77 Notebook PC E-Manual Useful tips for your Notebook PC To help you maximize the use of your Notebook PC, maintain its system performance, and ensure all your data are kept secured, here are some useful tips that you can follow:
Update Windows periodically to ensure that your applications have the latest security settings. Use an anti-virus software to protect your data and keep this updated too. Unless absolutely necessary, refrain from using force shutdown to turn off your Notebook PC. Always backup your data and make it a point to create a backup data in an external storage drive. Refrain from using the Notebook PC at extremely high temperatures. If you are not going to use your Notebook PC for a long period of time (at least a month), we recommend that you take out the battery if the battery is removable. Disconnect all external devices and ensure you have the following items prior to resetting your Notebook PC:
-
-
-
-
Product key for your operating systems and other installed applications Backup data Log in ID and password Internet connection information 78 Notebook PC E-Manual Hardware FAQs 1. A black dot, or sometimes a colored dot, appears onscreen when I turn on the Notebook PC. What should I do?
Although these dots normally appear onscreen, they will not affect your system. If the incident continues and subsequently affects system performance, consult an authorized ASUS service center. 2. My display panel has an uneven color and brightness. How can I fix this?
The color and brightness of your display panel may be affected by the angle and current position of your Notebook PC. The brightness and color tone of your Notebook PC may also vary per model. You may use the function keys or the display settings in your operating system to adjust the appearance of your display panel. 3. How can I maximize my Notebook PC s battery life?
You can try doing any of the following suggestions:
Use the function keys to adjust the display brightness. If you are not using any Wi-Fi connection, switch your system into Airplane mode. Disconnect unused USB devices. Close unused applications, especially those that take up too much system memory. 79 Notebook PC E-Manual 4. My battery charge indicator does not light up. Whats wrong?
Check whether the power adapter or battery pack is attached correctly. You may also disconnect the power adapter or battery pack, wait for a minute, then reconnect them again to the power outlet and Notebook PC. If the problem still exists, contact your local ASUS service center for assistance. 5. Why is my touchpad not working?
Press to enable your touchpad. 6. When I play audio and video files, why cant I hear any sound from my Notebook PCs audio speakers?
You can try doing any of the following suggestions:
Press to turn up the speaker volume. Check if your speakers were set to mute. Check if a headphone jack is connected to your Notebook PC and remove it. 7. What should I do if my Notebook PCs power adapter gets lost or my battery stops working?
Contact your local ASUS service center for assistance. 80 Notebook PC E-Manual 8. My Notebook PC cannot do keystrokes correctly because my cursor keeps on moving. What should I do?
Make sure that nothing accidentally touches or presses on your touchpad while you type on the keyboard. You can also disable your touchpad by pressing
. 9. Instead of showing letters, pressing the U, I, and O keys on my keyboard displays numbers. How can I change this?
Press the key or
(on selected models) on your Notebook PC to turn off this feature and use the said keys for inputting letters. 81 Notebook PC E-Manual Software FAQs 1. When I turn on my Notebook PC, the power indicator lights up but nothing appears on my screen. What can I do to fix this?
You can try doing any of the following suggestions:
Force shutdown your Notebook PC by pressing the power button for at least four (4) seconds. Check if the power adapter and battery pack are inserted correctly then turn on your Notebook PC. If the problem still exists, contact your local ASUS service center for assistance. 2. What should I do when my screen displays this message:
Remove disks or other media. Press any key to restart.?
You can try doing any of the following suggestions:
Remove all connected USB devices then restart your Notebook PC. Remove any optical discs that are left inside the optical drive then restart. If the problem still exists, your Notebook PC might have a memory storage problem. Contact your local ASUS service center for assistance. 3. My Notebook PC boots slower than usual and my operating system lags. How can I fix this?
Delete the applications you recently installed or were not included with your operating system package then restart your system. 82 Notebook PC E-Manual 4. My Notebook PC does not boot up. How can I fix this?
You can try doing any of the following suggestions:
Remove all connected devices to your Notebook PC then restart your system. If the problem still exists, contact your local ASUS service center for assistance. 5. Why cant my Notebook PC wake up from sleep mode?
You need to press the power button to resume your last working state. Your system might have completely used up its battery power. Connect the power adapter to your Notebook PC and connect to a power outlet then press the power button. 83 Notebook PC E-Manual 84 Notebook PC E-Manual Appendices 85 Notebook PC E-Manual Blu-ray ROM Drive Information The Blu-ray ROM Drive allows you to view high definition (HD) videos and other disc file formats such as DVDs and CDs. NOTE: The Blue-ray ROM Drive is available on selected models. Region Definitions Region A North, Central and South American countries, and their territories; Taiwan, Hong Kong, Macao, Japan, Korea (South and North), South East Asian countries and their territories. Region B European, African, and South West Asian countries and their territories; Australia and New Zealand. Region C Central, South Asian, Eastern European countries and their territories; China and Mongolia. NOTE: Refer to Blu-ray Disc website at www.blu-raydisc.com/en/Technical/FAQs/Blu-
rayDiscforVideo.aspx for more details. Internal Modem Compliancy The Notebook PC with internal modem model complies with JATE (Japan), FCC
(US, Canada, Korea, Taiwan), and CTR21. The internal modem has been approved in accordance with Council Decision 98/482/EC for pan-European single terminal connection to the public switched telephone network (PSTN). However due to differences between the individual PSTNs provided in different countries, the approval does not, of itself, give an unconditional assurance of successful operation on every PSTN network termination point. In the event of problems you should contact your equipment supplier in the first instance. 86 Notebook PC E-Manual Overview On 4th August 1998 the European Council Decision regarding the CTR 21 has been published in the Official Journal of the EC. The CTR 21 applies to all non voice terminal equipment with DTMF-dialling which is intended to be connected to the analogue PSTN (Public Switched Telephone Network). CTR 21 (Common Technical Regulation) for the attachment requirements for connection to the analogue public switched telephone networks of terminal equipment (excluding terminal equipment supporting the voice telephony justified case service) in which network addressing, if provided, is by means of dual tone multi-frequency signalling. Network Compatibility Declaration Statement to be made by the manufacturer to the Notified Body and the vendor:
This declaration will indicate the networks with which the equipment is designed to work and any notified networks with which the equipment may have inter-
working difficulties. Statement to be made by the manufacturer to the user: This declaration will indicate the networks with which the equipment is designed to work and any notified networks with which the equipment may have inter-working difficulties. The manufacturer shall also associate a statement to make it clear where network compatibility is dependent on physical and software switch settings. It will also advise the user to contact the vendor if it is desired to use the equipment on another network. Up to now the Notified Body of CETECOM issued several pan-European approvals using CTR 21. The results are Europes first modems which do not require regulatory approvals in each individual European country. Non-Voice Equipment Answering machines and loud-speaking telephones can be eligible as well as modems, fax machines, auto-dialers and alarm systems. Equipment in which the end-to-end quality of speech is controlled by regulations (e.g. handset telephones and in some countries also cordless telephones) is excluded. 87 Notebook PC E-Manual This table shows the countries currently under the CTR21 standard. Country Austria1 Belgium Czech Republic Denmark1 Finland France Germany Greece Hungary Iceland Ireland Italy Israel Lichtenstein Luxemburg The Netherlands1 Norway Poland Portugal Spain Sweden Switzerland United Kingdom More Testing No No Not Applicable Yes No No No No Not Applicable No No Still Pending No No No Yes No Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable No No No Applied Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Still Pending No Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No Yes Yes Yes 88 Notebook PC E-Manual This information was copied from CETECOM and is supplied without liability. For updates to this table, you may visit http://www.cetecom.de/technologies/ctr_21. html 1 National requirements will apply only if the equipment may use pulse dialling
(manufacturers may state in the user guide that the equipment is only intended to support DTMF signalling, which would make any additional testing superfluous). In The Netherlands additional testing is required for series connection and caller ID facilities. Federal Communications Commission Interference Statement This device complies with FCC Rules Part 15. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
This device may not cause harmful interference. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. 89 Notebook PC E-Manual Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. WARNING! The use of a shielded-type power cord is required in order to meet FCC emission limits and to prevent interference to the nearby radio and television reception. It is essential that only the supplied power cord be used. Use only shielded cables to connect I/O devices to this equipment. You are cautioned that changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void your authority to operate the equipment.
(Reprinted from the Code of Federal Regulations #47, part 15.193, 1993. Washington DC: Office of the Federal Register, National Archives and Records Administration, U.S. Government Printing Office.) FCC Radio Frequency (RF) Exposure Caution Statement WARNING! Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate this equipment. The manufacture declares that this device is limited to Channels 1 through 11 in the 2.4GHz frequency by specified firmware controlled in the USA. This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. To maintain compliance with FCC RF exposure compliance requirements, please avoid direct contact to the transmitting antenna during transmitting. End users must follow the specific operating instructions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. 90 Notebook PC E-Manual RF Exposure Information (SAR) This device meets the governments requirements for exposure to radio waves. This device is designed and manufactured not to exceed the emission limits for exposure to radio frequency (RF) energy set by the Federal Communications Commission of the U.S. Government. The exposure standard employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate, or SAR. The SAR limit set by the FCC is 1.6 W/kg. Tests for SAR are conducted using standard operating positions accepted by the FCC with the EUT transmitting at the specified power level in different channels. The FCC has granted an Equipment Authorization for this device with all reported SAR levels evaluated as in compliance with the FCC RF exposure guidelines. SAR information on this device is on file with the FCC and can be found under the Display Grant section of www.fcc.gov/eot/ea/fccid after searching on FCC ID:
MSQ7265NG, PPD-QCNFA222, TX2RTL8192EEBT RF Exposure warning This equipment complies with FCC RF exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. The equipment must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. 91 Notebook PC E-Manual CE Mark Warning This device complies with the R&TTE Directive (1999/5/EC), the EMC Directive
(2004/108/EC), and the Low Voltage Directive (2006/95/EC) issued by the Commission of the European Community. Countries where the device will be sold to:
AT EE IT NO BE ES IS PL BG FI LI PT CH FR LT RO CY GB LU SE CZ GR LV SI DE HU MT SK DK IE NL TR RF Exposure information (SAR) - CE This device meets the EU requirements (1999/519/EC) on the limitation of exposure of the general public to electromagnetic fields by way of health protection. The limits are part of extensive recommendations for the protection of the general public. These recommendations have been developed and checked by independent scientific organizations through regular and thorough evaluations of scientific studies. The unit of measurement for the European Councils recommended limit for mobile devices is the Specific Absorption Rate (SAR), and the SAR limit is 2.0 W/Kg averaged over 10 gram of body tissue. It meets the requirements of the International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP). For next-to-body operation, this device has been tested and meets the ICNRP exposure guidelines and the European Standard EN 50566 and EN 62209-2. SAR is measured with the device directly contacted to the body while transmitting at the highest certified output power level in all frequency bands of the mobile device. 92 Notebook PC E-Manual IC Radiation Exposure Statement for Canada This equipment complies with IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. To maintain compliance with IC RF exposure compliance requirements, please avoid direct contact to the transmitting antenna during transmitting. End users must follow the specific operating instructions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
This device may not cause interference and This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. To prevent radio interference to the licensed service (i.e. co-channel Mobile Satellite systems) this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from windows to provide maximum shielding. Equipment (or its transmit antenna) that is installed outdoors is subject to licensing. This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). CAN ICES-3(B)/NMB-3(B) This device and its antenna(s) must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter, except tested built-in radios. 93 Notebook PC E-Manual Dclaration dIndustrie Canada relative lexposition aux ondes radio Cet appareil est conforme aux limites dexposition aux radiations dIndustrie Canada dfinies pour un environnement non-contrl. Pour maintenir la conformit avec les exigences dexposition RF dIC, veuillez viter tout contact direct avec lantenne pendant lmission. Les utilisateurs finaux doivent suivre les instructions de fonctionnement spcifiques pour satisfaire la conformit aux expositions RF. Son utilisation est sujette aux deux conditions suivantes:
Cet appareil ne peut pas causer dinterfrence, et Cet appareil doit accepter toute interfrence, y compris les interfrences qui pourraient causer un fonctionnement non souhait de lappareil. Pour viter les interfrences radio avec le service sous licence (cest -dire le partage de canal avec les systmes de tlphonie satellite), cet appareil est destin tre utilis en intrieur et loin des fentres pour fournir un blindage maximal. Tout appareil (ou son antenne dmission) qui est install en extrieur est sujet cette licence. Le present appareil est conforme aux CNR dIndustrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. CAN ICES-3(B)/NMB-3(B) Cet appareil et son antenne ne doivent pas tre situs ou fonctionner en conjonction avec une autre antenne ou un autre metteur, exception faites des radios intgres qui ont t testes. 94 Notebook PC E-Manual Radio Frequency (RF) Exposure Information The radiated output power of the Wireless Device is below the Industry Canada
(IC) radio frequency exposure limits. The Wireless Device should be used in such a manner such that the potential for human contact during normal operation is minimized. This device has been evaluated for and shown compliant with the IC Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) limits when operated in portable exposure conditions. Informations concernant lexposition aux tilizeive radio (RF) La puissance de sortie mise par lappareil de sans tilize infrieure la limite dexposition aux tilizeive radio dIndustry Canada (IC). Utilisez lappareil de sans fil de faon tilizei les contacts humains lors du fonctionnement normal. Ce tilizeive a t valu pour et dmontr conforme la Taux IC dabsorption spcifique (SAR) des limites lorsquil est tilize dans des conditions dexposition portatifs. 95 Notebook PC E-Manual Wireless Operation Channel for Different Domains N. America 2.412-2.462 GHz Japan 2.412-2.484 GHz Europe ETSI 2.412-2.472 GHz Ch01 through CH11 Ch01 through Ch14 Ch01 through Ch13 France Restricted Wireless Frequency Bands Some areas of France have a restricted frequency band. The worst case maximum authorized power indoors are:
10mW for the entire 2.4 GHz band (2400 MHz2483.5 MHz) 100mW for frequencies between 2446.5 MHz and 2483.5 MHz NOTE: Channels 10 through 13 inclusive operate in the band 2446.6 MHz to 2483.5 MHz. There are few possibilities for outdoor use: on private property or on the private property of public persons, use is subject to a preliminary authorization procedure by the Ministry of Defense, with maximum authorized power of 100mW in the 2446.52483.5 MHz band. Use outdoors on public property is not permitted. In the departments listed below, for the entire 2.4 GHz band:
Maximum authorized power indoors is 100mW Maximum authorized power outdoors is 10mW 96 Notebook PC E-Manual Departments in which the use of the 24002483.5 MHz band is permitted with an EIRP of less than 100mW indoors and less than 10mW outdoors:
01 Ain 02 Aisne 05 Hautes Alpes 08 Ardennes 11 Aude 24 Dordogne 32 Gers 41 Loir et Cher 55 Meuse 60 Oise 12 Aveyron 25 Doubs 36 Indre 45 Loiret 58 Nivre 61 Orne 03 Allier 09 Arige 16 Charente 26 Drme 37 Indre et Loire 50 Manche 59 Nord 63 Puy du Dme 64 Pyrnes Atlantique 66 Pyrnes Orientales 67 Bas Rhin 68 Haut Rhin 70 Haute Sane 71 Sane et Loire 75 Paris 88 Vosges 94 Val de Marne 82 Tarn et Garonne 84 Vaucluse 89 Yonne 90 Territoire de Belfort This requirement is likely to change over time, allowing you to use your wireless LAN card in more areas within France. Please check with ART for the latest information (www.arcep.fr) NOTE: Your WLAN Card transmits less than 100mW, but more than 10mW. 97 Notebook PC E-Manual UL Safety Notices Required for UL 1459 covering telecommunications (telephone) equipment intended to be electrically connected to a telecommunication network that has an operating voltage to ground that does not exceed 200V peak, 300V peak-to-peak, and 105V rms, and installed or used in accordance with the National Electrical Code (NFPA 70). When using the Notebook PC modem, basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons, including the following:
DO NOT use the Notebook PC near water, for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink or laundry tub, in a wet basement or near a swimming pool. DO NOT use the Notebook PC during an electrical storm. There may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. DO NOT use the Notebook PC in the vicinity of a gas leak. Required for UL 1642 covering primary (nonrechargeable) and secondary
(rechargeable) lithium batteries for use as power sources in products. These batteries contain metallic lithium, or a lithium alloy, or a lithium ion, and may consist of a single electrochemical cell or two or more cells connected in series, parallel, or both, that convert chemical energy into electrical energy by an irreversible or reversible chemical reaction. DO NOT dispose the Notebook PC battery pack in a fire, as they may explode. Check with local codes for possible special disposal instructions to reduce the risk of injury to persons due to fire or explosion. DO NOT use power adapters or batteries from other devices to reduce the risk of injury to persons due to fire or explosion. Use only UL certified power adapters or batteries supplied by the manufacturer or authorized retailers. 98 Notebook PC E-Manual Power Safety Requirement Products with electrical current ratings up to 6A and weighing more than 3Kg must use approved power cords greater than or equal to: H05VV-F, 3G, 0.75mm2 or H05VV-F, 2G, 0.75mm2. TV Notices Note to CATV System InstallerCable distribution system should be grounded
(earthed) in accordance with ANSI/NFPA 70, the National Electrical Code (NEC), in particular Section 820.93, Grounding of Outer Conductive Shield of a Coaxial Cable installation should include bonding the screen of the coaxial cable to the earth at the building entrance. REACH Complying with the REACH (Registration, Evaluation, Authorization, and Restriction of Chemicals) regulatory framework, we publish the chemical substances in our products at ASUS REACH website at http://csr.asus.com/english/
REACH.htm. Macrovision Corporation Product Notice This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S.A. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. Prevention of Hearing Loss To prevent possible hearing damage, do not listen at high volume levels for long periods. 99 Notebook PC E-Manual Nordic Lithium Cautions (for lithium-ion batteries) CAUTION! Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturers instructions. (English) ATTENZIONE! Rischio di esplosione della batteria se sostituita in modo errato. Sostituire la batteria con un una di tipo uguale o equivalente consigliata dalla fabbrica. Non disperdere le batterie nellambiente. (Italian) VORSICHT! Explosionsgefahr bei unsachgemen Austausch der Batterie. Ersatz nur durch denselben oder einem vom Hersteller empfohlenem hnlichen Typ. Entsorgung gebrauchter Batterien nach Angaben des Herstellers. (German) ADVARSELI! Lithiumbatteri - Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig hndtering. Udskiftning m kun ske med batteri af samme fabrikat og type. Levr det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandren. (Danish) VARNING! Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte. Anvnd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren. Kassera anvnt batteri enligt fabrikantens instruktion. (Swedish) VAROITUS! Paristo voi rjht, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu. Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan sousittelemaan tyyppiin. Hvit kytetty paristo valmistagan ohjeiden mukaisesti. (Finnish) ATTENTION! Il y a danger dexplosion sil y a remplacement incorrect de la batterie. Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie du mre type ou dun type quivalent recommand par le constructeur. Mettre au rebut les batteries usages conformment aux instructions du fabricant. (French) ADVARSEL! Eksplosjonsfare ved feilaktig skifte av batteri. Benytt samme batteritype eller en tilsvarende type anbefalt av apparatfabrikanten. Brukte batterier kasseres i henhold til fabrikantens instruksjoner. (Norwegian)
(Japanese)
!
. (Russian) 100 Notebook PC E-Manual Optical Drive Safety Information Laser Safety Information CD-ROM Drive Safety Warning CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT WARNING! To prevent exposure to the optical drives laser, do not attempt to disassemble or repair the optical drive by yourself. For your safety, contact a professional technician for assistance. Service warning label WARNING! INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN. DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM OR VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS. CDRH Regulations The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration implemented regulations for laser products on August 2, 1976. These regulations apply to laser products manufactured from August 1, 1976. Compliance is mandatory for products marketed in the United States. WARNING! Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein or in the laser product installation guide may result in hazardous radiation exposure. Coating Notice IMPORTANT! To provide electrical insulation and maintain electrical safety, a coating is applied to insulate the device except on the areas where the I/O ports are located. 101 Notebook PC E-Manual CTR 21 Approval (for Notebook PC with built-in Modem) Danish Dutch English Finnish French 102 Notebook PC E-Manual German Greek Italian Portuguese Spanish Swedish 103 Notebook PC E-Manual ENERGY STAR complied product ENERGY STAR is a joint program of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency and the U.S. Department of Energy helping us all save money and protect the environment through energy efficient products and practices. All ASUS products with the ENERGY STAR logo comply with the ENERGY STAR standard, and the power management feature is enabled by default. The monitor and computer are automatically set to sleep after 10 and 30 minutes of user inactivity. To wake your computer, click the mouse or press any key on the keyboard. Please visit http://www.energystar.gov/powermanagement for detail information on power management and its benefits to the environment. In addition, please visit http://www.energystar.gov for detail information on the ENERGY STAR joint program. NOTE: Energy Star is NOT supported on FreeDOS and Linux-based operating systems. 104 Notebook PC E-Manual Global Environmental Regulation Compliance and Declaration ASUS follows the green design concept to design and manufacture our products, and makes sure that each stage of the product life cycle of ASUS product is in line with global environmental regulations. In addition, ASUS disclose the relevant information based on regulation requirements. Please refer to http://csr.asus.com/english/Compliance.htm for information disclosure based on regulation requirements ASUS is complied with:
Japan JIS-C-0950 Material Declarations EU REACH SVHC Korea RoHS ASUS Recycling/Takeback Services ASUS recycling and takeback programs come from our commitment to the highest standards for protecting our environment. We believe in providing solutions for you to be able to responsibly recycle our products, batteries, other components as well as the packaging materials. Please go to http://csr.asus.com/
english/Takeback.htm for detailed recycling information in different regions. Rechargeable Battery Recycling Service in North America For US and Canada customers, you can call 1-800-822-8837
(toll-free) for recycling information of your ASUS products rechargeable batteries. Regional notice for California WARNING! This product may contain chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer, birth defects or other reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling. 105 Notebook PC E-Manual Regional notice for Singapore This ASUS product complies with IDA Standards. Complies with IDA Standards DB103778 Regional notice for India This product complies with the India E-waste (Management and Handling)Rule 2011 and prohibits use of lead, mercury, hexavalent chromium, polybrominated biphenyls (PBBs) and polybrominated diphenyl ethers (PBDEs) in concentrations exceeding 0.1 % by weight in homogenous materials and 0.01 % by weight in homogenous materials for cadmium, except for the exemptions listed in Schedule-II of the Rule. Notices for removable batteries Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. The battery and its component must be recycled or disposed of properly. Avis concernant les batteries remplaables La batterie de lordinateur portable peut prsenter un risque dincendie ou de brlure si celle-ci est retire ou dsassemble. La batterie et ses composants doivent tre recycls de faon approprie. 106 Notebook PC E-Manual EC Declaration of Conformity We, the undersigned, Manufacturer:
Address:
Authorized representative in Europe:
Address, City:
Country:
declare the following apparatus:
Product name :
Model name :
conform with the essential requirements of the following directives:
Notebook TP501U,J501U,R518U ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC. 4F, No. 150, LI-TE Rd., PEITOU, TAIPEI 112, TAIWAN ASUS COMPUTER GmbH HARKORT STR. 21-23, 40880 RATINGEN GERMANY 2004/108/EC-EMC Directive EN 55022:2010+AC:2011 EN 61000-3-2:2014 EN 55013:2001+A1:2003+A2:2006 1999/5/EC-R&TTE Directive EN 300 328 V1.8.1(2012-06) EN 300 440-1 V1.6.1(2010-08) EN 300 440-2 V1.4.1(2010-08) EN 301 511 V9.0.2(2003-03) EN 301 908-1 V5.2.1(2011-05) EN 301 908-2 V5.2.1(2011-07) EN 301 893 V1.7.1(2012-06) EN 302 544-2 V1.1.1(2009-01) EN 302 623 V1.1.1(2009-01) EN 50360:2001 EN 62479:2010 EN 50385:2002 EN 62311:2008 2006/95/EC-LVD Directive EN 60950-1: 2006 / A12: 2011 EN 60950-1: 2006 / A2: 2013 2009/125/EC-ErP Directive Regulation (EC) No. 1275/2008 Regulation (EC) No. 642/2009 EN 55024:2010 EN 61000-3-3:2013 EN 55020:2007+A11:2011 EN 301 489-1 V1.9.2(2011-09) EN 301 489-3 V1.4.1(2002-08) EN 301 489-4 V1.4.1(2009-05) EN 301 489-7 V1.3.1(2005-11) EN 301 489-9 V1.4.1(2007-11) EN 301 489-17 V2.2.1(2012-09) EN 301 489-24 V1.5.1(2010-09) EN 302 326-2 V1.2.2(2007-06) EN 302 326-3 V1.3.1(2007-09) EN 301 357-2 V1.4.1(2008-11) EN 302 291-1 V1.1.1(2005-07) EN 302 291-2 V1.1.1(2005-07) EN 50566:2013 EN 60065:2002 / A12: 2011 Regulation (EC) No. 278/2009 Regulation (EC) No. 617/2013 2011/65/EU-RoHS Directive Ver. 150326 CE marking
(EC conformity marking) Position : CEO Name : Jerry Shen Declaration Date: 26/11/2015 Year to begin affixing CE marking: 2015 Signature : __________ 107 Notebook PC E-Manual 108 Notebook PC E-Manual
various | Host user manual | Users Manual | 3.12 MiB |
Aspire Series Generic User Guide 2012 All Rights Reserved. Aspire Series Generic User Guide This revision: 04/2012 Changes may be made periodically to the information in this publication without obligation to notify any person of such revisions or changes. Such changes will be incorporated in new editions of this manual or supplementary documents and publications. This company makes no representations or warranties, either expressed or implied, with respect to the contents hereof and specifically disclaims the implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. Record the model number, serial number, purchase date and place of purchase information in the space provided below. The serial number and model number are recorded on the label affixed to your computer. All correspondence concerning your unit should include the serial number, model number and purchase information. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form or by any means, electronically, mechanically, by photocopy, recording or otherwise, without the prior written permission of Acer Incorporated. Model number: __________________________________ Serial number: ___________________________________ Date of purchase: ________________________________ Place of purchase: ________________________________ Information for your safety and comfort iii E n g l i s h Safety instructions Read these instructions carefully. Keep this document for future reference. Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the product. Turning the product off before cleaning Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners. Use a damp cloth for cleaning. Warnings Accessing the power cord Be sure that the power outlet you plug the power cord into is easily accessible and located as close to the equipment operator as possible. When you need to disconnect power to the equipment, be sure to unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet. Disconnecting the power source Observe the following guidelines when connecting and disconnecting power to the power supply unit:
Install the power supply unit before connecting the power cord to the AC power outlet. Unplug the power cord before removing the power supply unit from the computer. If the system has multiple sources of power, disconnect power from the system by unplugging all power cords from the power supplies. Using electrical power This product should be operated from the type of power indicated on the marking label. If you are not sure of the type of power available, consult your dealer or local power company. Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord. Do not locate this product where people will walk on the cord. If an extension cord is used with this product, make sure that the total ampere rating of the equipment plugged into the extension cord does not exceed the extension cord ampere rating. Also, make sure that the total rating of all products plugged into the wall outlet does not exceed the fuse rating. iv Do not overload a power outlet, strip or receptacle by plugging in too many devices. The overall system load must not exceed 80% of the branch circuit rating. If power strips are used, the load should not exceed 80% of the power strip's input rating. This product's AC adapter is equipped with a three-wire grounded plug. The plug only fits in a grounded power outlet. Make sure the power outlet is properly grounded before inserting the AC adapter plug. Do not insert the plug into a non-grounded power outlet. Contact your electrician for details. E n g l i s h Warning! The grounding pin is a safety feature. Using a power outlet that is not properly grounded may result in electric shock and/or injury. Note: The grounding pin also provides good protection from unexpected noise produced by other nearby electrical devices that may interfere with the performance of this product. The system can be powered using a wide range of voltages; 100 to 120 or 220 to 240 V AC. The power cord included with the system meets the requirements for use in the country/region where the system was purchased. Power cords for use in other countries/regions must meet the requirements for that country/
region. For more information on power cord requirements, contact an authorized reseller or service provider. Protecting your hearing Warning: Permanent hearing loss may occur if earphones or headphones are used at high volume for prolonged periods of time. Increase the volume gradually until you can hear clearly and comfortably. Do not increase the volume level after your ears have adjusted. To protect your hearing, follow these instructions. Do not listen to music at high volumes for extended periods. Do not increase the volume to block out noisy surroundings. Decrease the volume if you can't hear people speaking near you. E n g l i s h Your computer shipped with plastic dummies installed in the card slots. Dummies protect unused slots from dust, metal objects or other particles. Save the dummies for use when no cards are in the slots. v General Do not use this product near water. Do not place this product on an unstable cart, stand or table. If the product falls, it could be seriously damaged. Slots and openings are provided for ventilation to ensure reliable operation of the product and to protect it from overheating. These openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed, sofa, rug or other similar surface. This product should never be placed near or over a radiator or heat register, or in a built-in installation unless proper ventilation is provided. Never push objects of any kind into this product through cabinet slots as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short-out parts that could result in a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind onto or into the product. To avoid damage of internal components and to prevent battery leakage, do not place the product on a vibrating surface. Never use it under sporting, exercising, or any vibrating environment which will probably cause unexpected short current or damage rotor devices, HDD, Optical drive, and even exposure risk from lithium battery pack. The bottom surface, areas around ventilation openings and AC adapter may get hot. To avoid injury, ensure they do not come in contact with your skin or body. Your device and its enhancements may contain small parts. Keep them out of the reach of small children. The surface temperature of the base will rise during normal operation, particularly when AC power is present. Allowing sustained contact with exposed skin can cause discomfort or burn. Product servicing Do not attempt to service this product yourself, as opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltage points or other risks. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Unplug this product from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel when:
The power cord or plug is damaged, cut or frayed. Liquid was spilled into the product. The product was exposed to rain or water. The product has been dropped or the case has been damaged. The product exhibits a distinct change in performance, indicating a need for service. The product does not operate normally after following the operating instructions. vi The product has been dropped or the case has been damaged. The product exhibits a distinct change in performance, indicating a need for service. The product does not operate normally after following the operating instructions. E n g l i s h Note: Adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating instructions, since improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage and will often require extensive work by a qualified technician to restore the product to normal condition. Guidelines for safe battery usage This notebook uses a Lithium-ion battery. Do not use it in a humid, wet or corrosive environment. Do not put, store or leave your product in or near a heat source, in a high temperature location, in strong direct sunlight, in a microwave oven or in a pressurized container, and do not expose it to temperatures over 60 C (140 F). Failure to follow these guidelines may cause the battery to leak acid, become hot, explode or ignite and cause injury and/or damage. Do not pierce, open or disassemble the battery. If the battery leaks and you come into contact with the leaked fluids, rinse thoroughly with water and seek medical attention immediately. For safety reasons, and to prolong the lifetime of the battery, charging will not occur at temperatures below 0 C (32 F) or above 40 C (104 F). The full performance of a new battery is achieved only after two or three complete charge and discharge cycles. The battery can be charged and discharged hundreds of times, but it will eventually wear out. When the operation time becomes noticeably shorter than normal, buy a new battery. Use only the approved batteries, and recharge your battery only with the approved chargers designated for this device. Use the battery only for its intended purpose. Never use any charger or battery that is damaged. Do not short-circuit the battery. Accidental short-circuiting can occur when a metallic object such as a coin, clip or pen causes direct connection of the positive (+) and negative (-) terminals of the battery. (These look like metal strips on the battery.) This might happen, for example, when you carry a spare battery in your pocket or purse. Short-circuiting the terminals may damage the battery or the connecting object. The capacity and lifetime of the battery will be reduced if the battery is left in hot or cold places, such as in a closed car in summer or winter. Always try to keep the battery between 15C and 25C (59F and 77F). A device with a hot or cold battery may not work temporarily, even when the battery is fully charged. Battery performance is especially limited in temperatures well below freezing. Do not dispose of batteries in a fire as they may explode. Batteries may also explode if damaged. Dispose of batteries according to local regulations. Please recycle when possible. Do not dispose as household waste. vii Wireless devices may be susceptible to interference from the battery, which could affect performance. Note: Please refer to www.acer.com for battery shipping documents. Replacing the battery pack The notebook uses lithium batteries. Replace the battery with the same type as that which came bundled with your product. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. E n g l i s h Warning! Batteries may explode if not handled properly. Do not disassemble or dispose of them in fire. Keep them away from children. Follow local regulations when disposing of used batteries. Caution for Optical Drive Device Note: Information in this section may not apply to your computer. CAUTION: This appliance contains a laser system and is classified as a "CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT." In case of any trouble with this device, please contact your nearest AUTHORIZED service station. To prevent direct exposure to the laser beam, do not try to open the enclosure. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT CAUTION: INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN. AVOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM. APPAREIL A LASER DE CLASSE 1 PRODUIT LASERATTENTION: RADIATION DU FAISCEAU LASER INVISIBLE EN CAS DOUVERTURE. EVITTER TOUTE EXPOSITION AUX RAYONS. LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE LASER KLASSE 1 VORSICHT: UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG, WENN ABDECKUNG GEFFNET NICHT DEM STRAHLL AUSSETZEN PRODUCTO LSER DE LA CLASE I ADVERTENCIA: RADIACIN LSER INVISIBLE AL SER ABIERTO. EVITE EXPONERSE A LOS RAYOS. ADVARSEL: LASERSTRLING VEDBNING SE IKKE IND I STRLEN. VARO! LAVATTAESSA OLET ALTTINA LASERSTEILYLLE. VARNING: LASERSTRLNING NR DENNA DEL R PPNAD L TUIJOTA STEESEENSTIRRA EJ IN I STRLEN E n g l i s h ix off your device in health care facilities when any regulations posted in these areas instruct you to do so. Hospitals or health care facilities may be using equipment that could be sensitive to external RF transmissions. Pacemakers. Pacemaker manufacturers recommend that a minimum separation of 15.3 centimeters (6 inches) be maintained between wireless devices and a pacemaker to avoid potential interference with the pacemaker. These recommendations are consistent with the independent research by and recommendations of Wireless Technology Research. Persons with pacemakers should do the following:
Always keep the device more than 15.3 centimeters (6 inches) from the pacemaker Not carry the device near your pacemaker when the device is switched on. If you suspect interference, switch off your device, and move it. Hearing aids. Some digital wireless devices may interfere with some hearing aids. If interference occurs, consult your service provider. Vehicles RF signals may affect improperly installed or inadequately shielded electronic systems in motor vehicles such as electronic fuel injection systems, electronic anti-
skid (anti-lock) braking systems, electronic speed control systems, and air bag systems. For more information, check with the manufacturer, or its representative, of your vehicle or any equipment that has been added. Only qualified personnel should service the device, or install the device in a vehicle. Faulty installation or service may be dangerous and may invalidate any warranty that may apply to the device. Check regularly that all wireless equipment in your vehicle is mounted and operating properly. Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gases, or explosive materials in the same compartment as the device, its parts, or enhancements. For vehicles equipped with an air bag, remember that air bags inflate with great force. Do not place objects, including installed or portable wireless equipment in the area over the air bag or in the air bag deployment area. If in-vehicle wireless equipment is improperly installed, and the air bag inflates, serious injury could result. Using your device while flying in aircraft is prohibited. Switch off your device before boarding an aircraft. The use of wireless teledevices in an aircraft may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, disrupt the wireless telephone network, and may be illegal. Potentially explosive environments Switch off your device when in any area with a potentially explosive atmosphere and obey all signs and instructions. Potentially explosive atmospheres include areas where you would normally be advised to turn off your vehicle engine. Sparks in such areas could cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death. Switch off the device at refueling points such as near gas pumps at service stations. Observe restrictions on the use of radio equipment in fuel depots, storage, x and distribution areas; chemical plants; or where blasting operations are in progress. Areas with a potentially explosive atmosphere are often, but not always, clearly marked. They include below deck on boats, chemical transfer or storage facilities, vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas (such as propane or butane), and areas where the air contains chemicals or particles such as grain, dust or metal powders. Do not switch the notebook on when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. E n g l i s h Emergency calls Warning: You cannot make emergency calls through this device. To make an emergency call you shall dial out through your mobile phone or other telephone call system. Disposal instructions Do not throw this electronic device into the trash when discarding. To minimize pollution and ensure utmost protection of the global environment, please recycle. For more information on the Waste from Electrical and Electronics Equipment (WEEE) regulations, visit www.acer-group.com/public/Sustainability/sustainability01.htm Mercury advisory For bulb-inside projectors or electronic products containing a non-LED-
backlit-LCD/CRT monitor or display: Lamp(s) inside this product contain mercury and must be recycled or disposed of according to local, state or federal laws. For more information, contact the Electronic Industries Alliance at www.eiae.org. For lamp-specific disposal information, check www.lamprecycle.org. ENERGY STAR Acer's ENERGY STAR qualified products save your money by reducing energy cost and protecting the environment without sacrificing features or performance. Acer is proud to offer our customers products with the ENERGY STAR mark. What is ENERGY STAR?
Products that are ENERGY STAR qualified use less energy and prevent greenhouse gas emissions by meeting strict energy efficiency guidelines set by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Acer is committed to offering products and services worldwide that help customers save money, conserve energy and improve the quality of our environment. The more energy we can save through higher energy efficiency, the more we reduce greenhouse gases and the risks of climate change. More information refers to www.energystar.gov or www.energystar.gov/powermanagement. Note: Information in this section may not apply to your computer. xi E n g l i s h Acer ENERGY STAR qualified products:
Produce less heat and reduce cooling loads, and warmer climates. Automatically go into "display sleep" and "computer sleep" mode after 10 and 30 minutes of inactivity respectively. Wake the computer from sleep mode by pushing keyboard or moving mouse. Computers will save more than 80% energy at "sleep" mode. ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are registered U.S. marks Tips and information for comfortable use Computer users may complain of eyestrain and headaches after prolonged use. Users are also at risk of physical injury after long hours of working in front of a computer. Long work periods, bad posture, poor work habits, stress, inadequate working conditions, personal health and other factors greatly increase the risk of physical injury. Aching, soreness or tenderness. Numbness, or a burning or tingling sensation. Incorrect computer usage may lead to carpal tunnel syndrome, tendonitis, tenosynovitis or other musculoskeletal disorders. The following symptoms may appear in the hands, wrists, arms, shoulders, neck or back:
If you have these symptoms, or any other recurring or persistent discomfort and/or pain related to computer use, consult a physician immediately and inform your company's health and safety department. Pain, swelling or throbbing. Coldness or weakness. Stiffness or tightness. The following section provides tips for more comfortable computer use. Finding your comfort zone Find your comfort zone by adjusting the viewing angle of the monitor, using a footrest, or raising your sitting height to achieve maximum comfort. Observe the following tips:
Stand up and walk around regularly to remove the strain on your leg muscles. Avoid slouching forward and/or leaning backward. Refrain from staying too long in one fixed posture. xii Take short rests to relax your neck and shoulders. Avoid tensing your muscles or shrugging your shoulders. Install the external display, keyboard and mouse properly and within comfortable reach. If you view your monitor more than your documents, place the display at the center of your desk to minimize neck strain. E n g l i s h Taking care of your vision Long viewing hours, wearing incorrect glasses or contact lenses, glare, excessive room lighting, poorly focused screens, very small typefaces and low-contrast displays could stress your eyes. The following sections provide suggestions on how to reduce eyestrain. Rest your eyes frequently. xiii Give your eyes regular breaks by looking away from the monitor and focusing on a distant point. Blink frequently to keep your eyes from drying out. E n g l i s h Eyes Display Keep your display clean. Keep your head at a higher level than the top edge of the display so your eyes point downward when looking at the middle of the display. Adjust the display brightness and/or contrast to a comfortable level for enhanced text readability and graphics clarity. Eliminate glare and reflections by:
placing your display in such a way that the side faces the window or any light source, minimizing room light by using drapes, shades or blinds, using a task light, changing the display's viewing angle, using a glare-reduction filter, using a display visor, such as a piece of cardboard extended from the display's top front edge. Avoid adjusting your display to an awkward viewing angle. Avoid looking at bright light sources for extended periods of time. Take short breaks regularly and often. Developing good work habits The following work habits make computer use more relaxing and productive:
Exercise regularly and maintain a healthy body. Breathe fresh air as often as possible. Perform some stretching exercises. Warning! We do not recommend using the computer on a couch or bed. If this is unavoidable, work for only short periods, take breaks regularly, and do some stretching exercises. Note: For more information, please refer to "Regulations and safety notices" on page 54. E n g l i s h xiv First things first We would like to thank you for making an Acer notebook your choice for meeting your mobile computing needs. Your guides To help you use your Acer notebook, we have designed a set of guides:
First off, the setup poster helps you get started with setting up your computer. The Aspire Generic User Guide contains useful information applying to all models in the Aspire product series. It covers basic topics such as using the keyboard and audio, etc. Please understand that due to its nature, the Generic User Guide will occasionally refer to functions or features which are only contained in certain models of the series, but not necessarily in the model you purchased. Such instances are marked in the text with language such as "only for certain models."
The Quick Guide introduces you to the basic features and functions of your new computer. For more on how your computer can help you to be more productive, please refer to the Aspire Generic User Guide. This guide contains detailed information on such subjects as system utilities, data recovery, expansion options and troubleshooting. In addition it contains warranty information and the general regulations and safety notices for your notebook. It is available in Portable Document Format (PDF) and comes preloaded on your notebook. Follow these steps to access it:
1 2 Start > All Programs > AcerSystem. Click Click Aspire Generic User Guide. Note: Viewing the file requires Adobe Reader. If Adobe Reader is not installed on your computer, clicking on Aspire Generic User Guide will run the Adobe Reader setup program first. Follow the instructions on the screen to complete the installation. For instructions on how to use Adobe Reader, access the Help and Support menu. Basic care and tips for using your computer Turning your computer on and off To turn on the computer, simply press and release the power button. Please refer to the setup poster for the location of the power button. To turn the power off, do any of the following:
Use the Windows shutdown command: click Start then Click Shut Down. Use the power button. You can also put the computer in sleep mode by pressing the sleep hotkey
<Fn> + <F4>. xv E n g l i s h Note: If you cannot power off the computer normally, press and hold the power button for more than four seconds to shut down the computer. If you turn off the computer and want to turn it on again, wait at least two seconds before powering up. Taking care of your computer Your computer will serve you well if you take care of it. Do not expose the computer to direct sunlight. Do not place it near sources of heat, such as a radiator. Do not expose the computer to temperatures below 0 C (32 F) or above 50 C (122 F). Do not subject the computer to magnetic fields. Do not expose the computer to rain or moisture. Do not spill water or any liquid on the computer. Do not subject the computer to heavy shock or vibration. Do not expose the computer to dust or dirt. Never place objects on top of the computer. Do not slam the computer display when you close it. Never place the computer on uneven surfaces. Taking care of your AC adapter Here are some ways to take care of your AC adapter:
Do not connect the adapter to any other device. Do not step on the power cord or place heavy objects on top of it. Carefully route the power cord and any cables away from foot traffic. When unplugging the power cord, do not pull on the cord itself but pull on the plug. The total ampere ratings of the equipment plugged in should not exceed the ampere rating of the cord if you are using an extension cord. Also, the total current rating of all equipment plugged into a single wall outlet should not exceed the fuse rating. xvi Taking care of your battery pack Here are some ways to take care of your battery pack:
Use only batteries of the same kind as replacements. Turn the power off before removing or replacing batteries. Do not tamper with batteries. Keep them away from children. Dispose of used batteries according to local regulations. Recycle if possible. E n g l i s h Cleaning and servicing When cleaning the computer, follow these steps:
1 2 3 Turn off the computer and remove the battery pack. Disconnect the AC adapter. Use a soft, moist cloth. Do not use liquid or aerosol cleaners. The computer has been dropped or the body has been damaged;
If either of the following occurs:
Please refer to "Frequently asked questions" on page 49 . The computer does not operate normally s t n e t n o C Information for your safety and comfort Safety instructions Warnings Caution for Optical Drive Device Radio frequency interference Medical devices Vehicles Potentially explosive environments Emergency calls Disposal instructions Mercury advisory ENERGY STAR Tips and information for comfortable use First things first Your guides Basic care and tips for using your computer Turning your computer on and off Taking care of your computer Taking care of your AC adapter Taking care of your battery pack Cleaning and servicing Touchpad Lock keys and embedded numeric keypad\
Hotkeys Windows keys Using the system utilities Acer Bio-Protection Acer Backup Manager Acer eRecovery Management Creating a recovery backup (Optical drive) Creating a recovery backup (USB flash drive) Recovering your system (Optical drive) To recover your system Types of recovery Recovering pre-installed software and drivers Returning to a previous system condition Returning your system to its factory condition Recovering your system (USB flash drive) To recover your system Types of recovery Recovering pre-installed software and drivers Returning to a previous system condition iii iii iii vii viii viii ix ix x x x x xi xiv xiv xiv xiv xv xv xvi xvi 1 1 4 4 5 7 8 8 9 11 12 14 16 16 16 16 17 18 20 20 20 20 21 Touchpad basics (for models with separate buttons) Touchpad basics (for models with integrated buttons)2 Using the keyboard Returning your system to its factory condition Acer clear.fi Navigating media and photos Shared files Which devices are compatible?
Playing to another device Power management Acer PowerSmart key Battery pack Battery pack characteristics Charging the battery Optimizing battery life Checking the battery level Battery-low warning Installing and removing the battery pack Taking your notebook PC with you Disconnecting from the desktop Moving around Preparing the computer What to bring to meetings Taking the computer home Preparing the computer What to take with you Special considerations Setting up a home office Traveling with the computer Preparing the computer What to take with you Special considerations Traveling internationally with the computer Preparing the computer What to bring with you Special considerations Securing your computer Using a computer security lock Using passwords Entering passwords Setting passwords Expanding through options Connectivity options Fax/data modem Built-in network feature Consumer Infrared (CIR) Universal Serial Bus (USB) IEEE 1394 port High-Definition Multimedia Interface 22 24 24 24 25 25 26 26 27 27 28 28 29 29 29 31 31 31 31 32 32 32 32 32 33 33 33 33 33 34 34 34 34 35 35 35 36 36 37 37 37 38 38 39 40 40 ExpressCard Installing memory Enjoying TV with Windows Media Center Choose your input type Watching TV using the optional DVB-T (digital TV) antenna
(for selected models) To connect the digital antenna Watching TV with an external antenna or cable socket BIOS utility Boot sequence Enable disk-to-disk recovery Password Using software Playing DVD movies Frequently asked questions Requesting service International Travelers Warranty (ITW) Before you call Troubleshooting Troubleshooting tips Error messages Regulations and safety notices FCC statement Modem notices LCD pixel statement Radio device regulatory notice General Wireless operation channels for different domains France: Restricted wireless frequency bands List of National Codes The FCC RF safety requirement Canada Low-power license-exempt radio communication devices (RSS-210) Exposure of humans to RF fields (RSS-102) LCD panel ergonomic specifications 41 42 44 44 44 45 45 46 46 46 47 47 47 49 51 51 51 52 52 52 54 54 55 56 56 57 57 57 58 58 59 59 60 1 Touchpad The built-in touchpad is a pointing device that senses movement on its surface. This means the cursor responds as you move your finger across the surface of the touchpad. The central location on the palmrest provides optimum comfort and support. E n g l i s h Touchpad basics (for models with separate buttons) The following items show you how to use the touchpad with two buttons. Move your finger across the touchpad to move the cursor. Press the left and right buttons located beneath the touchpad to perform selection and execution functions. These two buttons are similar to the left and right buttons on a mouse. Tapping on the touchpad is the same as clicking the left button. Function Execute Select Drag Left button Quickly click twice. Right button Main touchpad Tap twice (at the same speed as double-clicking a mouse button). Click once. Tap once. Click and hold, then use finger on the touchpad to drag the cursor. Tap twice (at the same speed as double-clicking a mouse button); rest your finger on the touchpad on the second tap and drag the cursor. Access context menu Click once. Note: Illustrations for reference only. The exact configuration of your PC depends on the model purchased. 2 E n g l i s h Note: When using the touchpad, keep it and your fingers dry and clean. The touchpad is sensitive to finger movement; hence, the lighter the touch, the better the response. Tapping harder will not increase the touchpad's responsiveness. Note: By default, vertical and horizontal scrolling is enabled on your touchpad. It can be disabled under Mouse settings in Windows Control Panel. Touchpad basics (for models with integrated buttons) The following items show you how to use the touchpad. Move your finger across the touchpad to move the cursor. Press the touchpad down, or tap, to perform a click, which will select or start an item. Place your finger in the bottom right corner of the touchpad and press to perform a right click. The bottom left and bottom right corners of the touchpad are similar to the left and right buttons on a mouse. Function Open Bottom left corner Quickly press twice Select Press once Bottom right corner Main touchpad Press or tap twice (at the same speed as double-
clicking a mouse button) Press or tap once 3 Function Drag Bottom left corner Press and hold, then use finger on the touchpad to drag the cursor Bottom right corner Main touchpad Press or tap twice (at the same speed as double-
clicking a mouse button);
rest your finger on the touchpad on the second tap and drag the cursor Access context menu Press once E n g l i s h Note: When using the touchpad, keep it and your fingers dry and clean. The touchpad is sensitive to finger movement; hence, the lighter the touch, the better the response. Tapping harder will not increase the touchpad's responsiveness. Using the keyboard The keyboard has full-sized keys and an embedded numeric keypad*, separate cursor, lock, Windows, function and special keys. Lock keys and embedded numeric keypad\
4 E n g l i s h Note: Information in this section may not apply to your computer. The keyboard has three lock keys which you can toggle on and off. Lock key Description Caps Lock When Caps Lock is on, all alphabetic characters typed are in uppercase. Num Lock
<Fn> + <F11>*
When Num Lock is on, the embedded keypad is in numeric mode. The keys function as a calculator (complete with the arithmetic operators +, -, *, and /). Use this mode when you need to do a lot of numeric data entry. A better solution would be to connect an external keypad. Scroll Lock
<Fn> + <F12>
When Scroll Lock is on, the screen moves one line up or down when you press the up or down arrow keys respectively. Scroll Lock does not work with some applications. The embedded numeric keypad functions like a desktop numeric keypad. It is indicated by small characters located on the upper right corner of the keycaps. To simplify the keyboard legend, cursor-control key symbols are not printed on the keys. Desired access Num Lock on Num Lock off Number keys on embedded keypad Type numbers in a normal manner. Cursor-control keys on embedded keypad Hold <Shift> while using cursor-control keys. Hold <Fn> while using cursor-control keys. 5 Desired access Num Lock on Num Lock off Main keyboard keys Hold <Fn> while typing letters on embedded keypad. Type the letters in a normal manner. E n g l i s h Hotkeys The computer employs hotkeys or key combinations to access most of the computer's controls like screen brightness and volume output. To activate hotkeys, press and hold the <Fn> key before pressing the other key in the hotkey combination. Hotkey Icon Function Description
<Fn> + <F3>
Communication key
<Fn> + <F4>
Sleep
<Fn> + <F5>
Display toggle
<Fn> + <F6>
Display off Enables / disables the computer's communication devices. (Communication devices may vary by configuration.) Puts the computer in Sleep mode. Switches display output between the display screen, external monitor (if connected) and both. Turns the display screen backlight off to save power. Press any key to return.
<Fn> + <F7>
Touchpad toggle Turns the built-in touchpad on and off.
<Fn> + <F8>
Speaker toggle Turns the speakers on and off.
<Fn> + <F11>
NumLk Turns the embedded numeric keypad on or off (only for certain models).
<Fn> + < >
Brightness up Increases the screen brightness. 6 E n g l i s h Hotkey Icon Function Description
<Fn> + < >
Brightness down Decreases the screen brightness.
<Fn> + < >
Volume up Increases the sound volume.
<Fn> + < >
Volume down Decreases the sound volume.
<Fn> +
<Home>
<Fn> +
<Pg Up>
<Fn> +
<Pg Dn>
Play/Pause Play or pause a selected media file. Stop Stop playing the selected media file. Previous Return to the previous media file.
<Fn> + <End>
Next Jump to the next media file. Windows keys The keyboard has two keys that perform Windows-specific functions. Key Description Windows key Pressed alone it launches the Start menu. It can also be used with other keys for other functions:
7 E n g l i s h
<
<
<
<
<
>: Open or close the Start menu
> + <D>: Display the desktop
> + <E>: Open Windows Explorer
> + <F>: Search for a file or folder
> + <G>: Cycle through Sidebar gadgets
> + <L>: Lock your computer (if connected to a
<
domain), or switch users (if not connected to a domain)
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
> + <M>: Minimize all windows
> + <R>: Open the Run dialog box
> + <T>: Cycle through programs on the taskbar
> + <U>: Open Ease of Access Center
> + <X>: Open Windows Mobility Center
> + <Break>: Display System Properties
> + <Shift+M>: Restore minimized windows
> + <Tab>: Cycle through programs on the taskbar
<
by using Windows Flip 3-D
> + <Space>: Bring all gadgets to the front and
<
select Windows Sidebar
<CTRL> + <
> + <F>: Search for network computers
<CTRL> + <
through open programs using Windows Flip 3-D
> + <Tab>: Use the arrow keys to cycle Application key This key has the same effect as clicking the right mouse button; it opens the application's context menu. Note: Depending on your edition of Windows, some shortcuts may not function as described. Using the system utilities Acer Bio-Protection 8 E n g l i s h Note: Information in this section may not apply to your computer. Acer Bio-Protection Fingerprint Solution is a multi-purpose fingerprint software package integrated with the Microsoft Windows operating system. Utilizing the uniqueness of one's fingerprint, Acer Bio-Protection Fingerprint Solution incorporates protection against unauthorized access to your computer with centralized password management via Password Bank; and fast application/
website launching and login with Acer FingerLaunch. With Acer Bio-Protection Fingerprint Solution, you can now enjoy an extra layer of protection for your personal computer, as well as the convenience of accessing your daily tasks with a simple swipe of your finger!
For more information, refer to the Acer Bio-Protection help files. Acer Backup Manager Note: This feature is only available on certain models. Acer Backup Manager is a simple three-step process that allows you to create backup copies of your entire system or selected files and folders according to a schedule or as you need to. 9 E n g l i s h To start Acer Backup Manager, press the Acer Backup Manager key above the keyboard. Alternatively, you can go to Start > All Programs > Acer Backup Manager > Acer Backup Manager. This will open the Welcome screen; from this screen you can select the type of backup youd like to create. Back Up my Files: Select files to back up. Image My Drive: Create a backup file for the entire drive. You can burn this file to a DVD to restore your computer at a later time or create the file on a USB drive. Migrate My Files: Allows you to copy files to a USB device so that you can migrate your files to a new computer. Select the backup type youd like to make and select the files or drive you want to back up, then follow the onscreen instructions:
1 2 3 Select the content you want to back up. The less content you select, the quicker the process will be, but it will increase your risks of losing data. Select where you want the backup copies to be stored. You will need to select an external drive or your D: drive; Acer Backup Manager cannot store a backup on the source drive. Select how often you want Acer Backup Manager to create backups. Once you have finished these three steps, backups will be created according to the schedule. You can also create backups manually by pressing the Acer Backup Manager key. If you wish to change your settings at any time, run Acer Backup Manager from the Start menu and go through the steps outlined above. E n g l i s h 10 11 Acer eRecovery Management If your computer experiences problems that are not recoverable by other methods, you may need to reinstall the Windows operating system and factory-loaded software and drivers. To ensure you can recover your computer when needed, you should create a recovery backup as soon as possible. E n g l i s h Note: All of the following content is for general reference only. Actual product specifications may vary. Acer eRecovery Management consists of the following functions:
1 Backup:
Create Factory Default Backup Backup Drivers and Applications Note: Models that do not have an ODD will allow you to make backup copies to a USB drive. 2 Restore:
Restore Operating System to Factory Defaults Restore Operating System and Retain User Data Reinstall Drivers or Applications This chapter will guide you through each process. To use the password protection feature of Acer eRecovery Management, you must first set the password. The password is set by launching Acer eRecovery Management and clicking Settings. 12 Creating a recovery backup (Optical drive) To reinstall using a backup on optical discs, you must create the recovery disc beforehand. Throughout the process, you will be guided by onscreen instructions. Please read them carefully!
1 Click Start > All Programs > Acer, then click Acer eRecovery Management. E n g l i s h 2 To create recovery discs for the hard drives entire original contents, including Windows and all factory-loaded software and drivers, click Create Factory Default Disc.
- OR -
To create a recovery disc for only the factory-loaded software and drivers, click Create Drivers and Applications Backup Disc. Important: We recommend that you create each type of recovery backup as soon as possible. The Create Factory Default Backup dialog box tells you the number of blank, recordable discs you will need to complete the recovery discs. Make sure that you have the required number of identical, blank discs ready before continuing. E n g l i s h 13 3 Insert a blank disc into the drive indicated in the Backup to list, then click Next. You will be shown the backup progress on the screen. The drive ejects each disc as it completes burning it. 4 Remove the disc from the drive and mark it with a permanent marker. Important: Write a unique, descriptive label on each disc, such as Windows Recovery Disc 1 of 2 or Apps/Drivers Recovery disc. Make sure you keep the discs in a safe place that you will remember. 5 If multiple discs are required, insert a new disc when prompted, then click OK. Continue recording discs until the process is complete. Creating a recovery backup (USB flash drive) To reinstall using a backup on a USB flash drive, you must create the recovery backup beforehand. Throughout the process, you will be guided by onscreen instructions. Please read them carefully!
E n g l i s h 14 Important: If you are using a USB flash drive, ensure it is at least 12 GB and does not contain any previous data. Important: This section only applies to computers without an optical drive. 1 Click Start > All Programs > Acer, then click Acer eRecovery Management. 2 To create recovery backup for the hard drives entire original contents, including Windows and all factory-loaded software and drivers, click Create Factory Default Backup.
- OR -
To create a recovery backup for only the factory-loaded software and drivers, click Create Driver and Applications Backup. Important: We recommend that you create each type of recovery backup as soon as possible. The Create Factory Default Backup dialog box opens. This dialog box tells you the estimated size of the backup file on your USB flash drive. E n g l i s h 15 3 Plug in the USB disk, then click Next. You will be shown the backup progress on the screen. 4 Unplug the USB flash drive and mark it with a permanent marker. Important: Write a unique, descriptive label on each backup, such as Windows Recovery Backup or Apps/Drivers Recovery Backup. Make sure you keep the USB flash drive in a safe place that you will remember. 16 Recovering your system (Optical drive) E n g l i s h If calling Acer support did not help fix your problem, you can use the Acer eRecovery Management program. This will restore your computer to the same state as when you purchased it, while giving you an option to retain all settings and personal data for later retrieval. To recover your system 1 Perform minor fixes. If only one or two items of software or hardware have stopped working correctly, the problem may be solved by reinstalling the software or the device drivers. To recover software and drivers that were pre-installed at the factory, see "Recovering pre-installed software and drivers" on page 16. For instructions on reinstalling software and drivers that were not pre-installed, see that products documentation or technical support Web site. 2 Revert to a previous system condition. If reinstalling software or drivers does not help, then the problem may be solved by returning your system to a previous state when everything was working correctly. For instructions, see "Returning to a previous system condition" on page 17. 3 Reset your system to its factory condition. If nothing else has solved the problem and you want to reset your system to factory condition, see "Returning your system to its factory condition" on page 18. Types of recovery Recovering pre-installed software and drivers As a troubleshooting step, you may need to reinstall the software and device drivers that came pre-installed on your computer from the factory. You can recover using either your hard drive or the recovery discs you have created. New software: If you need to recover software that did not come pre-installed on your computer, you need to follow that softwares installation instructions. New device drivers: If you need to recover device drivers that did not come pre-installed on your computer, follow the instructions provided with the device. To recover your pre-installed software and drivers:
1 Click Start > All Programs > Acer, then click Acer eRecovery Management.
- OR -
If you are recovering from your driver and application recovery disc, insert it into the disc drive, then go to Step 3 after the Acer Application Recovery main menu opens. Click the Restore tab, then click Reinstall Drivers or Applications to display the Acer Application Recovery main menu. 2 E n g l i s h 17 3 4 Click Contents to show a list of software and device drivers. Click the install icon for the item you want to install, then follow the onscreen prompts to complete the installation. Repeat this step for each item you want to reinstall. Returning to a previous system condition Microsoft System Restore periodically takes snapshots of your system settings and saves them as restore points. In most cases of hard-to-resolve software problems, you can return to one of these restore points to get your system running again. Windows automatically creates an additional restore point each day, and also each time you install software or device drivers. Tip: For more information about using Microsoft System Restore, click Start, then click Help and Support. Type windows system restore in the Search Help box, then press Enter. To return to a restore point:
1 2 3 Click Start > Control Panel > System and Security > Action Center, then click Recovery. Click Open System Restore, then Next. Select the restore point you want, click Next, then Finish. A confirmation message box will appear. 18 4 Click Yes. Your system is restored using the restore point you specified. This process may take several minutes, and may restart your computer. Returning your system to its factory condition If your computer experiences problems that are not recoverable by other methods, you may need to reinstall everything to return your system to its factory condition. You can reinstall using either your hard drive or the recovery discs you have created. E n g l i s h Warning: This complete recovery deletes everything on your hard drive, then reinstalls Windows and all software and drivers that were pre-installed on your system. If you can access important files on your hard drive, back them up now. If you can still run Windows, see "Recovering from within Windows" on page 18. If you cannot run Windows and your original hard drive is still working, see
"Recovering from the hard drive during startup" on page 19. If you cannot run Windows and your original hard drive has been completely re-
formatted or you have installed a replacement hard drive, see "Recovering from your recovery discs" on page 19. Recovering from within Windows To reinstall Windows and all pre-installed software and drivers:
Click Start > All Programs > Acer, then click Acer eRecovery Management. Click the Restore tab, then Restore Operating System to Factory Defaults. Click Yes, then Start. A dialog box will display information about the hard drive that the operating system will be recovered to. Warning: Continuing the process will erase all files on your hard drive. Click OK. The recovery process begins by restarting your computer, then continues by copying files to your hard drive. This process may take a while, the Acer eRecovery Management screen displays the progress. When the recovery has finished, a dialog box will prompt you to restart your computer. Click OK to restart your computer. Follow the onscreen prompts for first-time system setup. E n g l i s h 19 Recovering from the hard drive during startup To reinstall Windows and all pre-installed software and drivers:
1 2 3 Turn on your computer, then press <Alt> + <F10> during startup to open Acer eRecovery Management. Click Restore Operating System to Factory Defaults. Warning: Continuing the process will erase all files on your hard drive. Click Next. Your hard drives original, factory-loaded contents will be recovered. This process will take several minutes. Recovering from your recovery discs To reinstall Windows and all pre-installed software and drivers:
1 Turn on your computer, insert the first system recovery disc into your optical disc drive, then restart your computer. Warning: Continuing the process will erase all files on your hard drive. If it is not already enabled, you must enable the F12 Boot Menu:
Press <F2> when starting your computer. Use the left or right arrow keys to select the Main menu. Press the down key until F12 Boot Menu is selected, press <F5> to change this setting to Enabled. Use the left or right arrow keys to select the Exit menu. Select Save Changes and Exit and press Enter. Select OK to confirm. Your computer will restart. 2 3 4 During startup, press <F12> to open the boot menu. The boot menu allows you to select which device to start from, such as the hard drive or an optical disc. Use your arrow keys to select the line CDROM/DVD (this line may start with IDE 1...), then press <Enter>. Windows will install from the recovery disc you inserted. Insert the second recovery disc when prompted, then follow the onscreen prompts to complete the recovery. 20 Recovering your system (USB flash drive) E n g l i s h If calling Acer support did not help fix your problem, you can use the Acer eRecovery Management program. This will restore your computer to the same state as when you purchased it, while giving you an option to retain all settings and personal data for later retrieval. To recover your system 1 Perform minor fixes. If only one or two items of software or hardware have stopped working correctly, the problem may be solved by reinstalling the software or the device drivers. To recover software and drivers that were pre-installed at the factory, see "Recovering pre-installed software and drivers" on page 20. For instructions on reinstalling software and drivers that were not pre-installed, see that products documentation or technical support Web site. 2 Revert to a previous system condition. If reinstalling software or drivers does not help, then the problem may be solved by returning your system to a previous state when everything was working correctly. For instructions, see "Returning to a previous system condition" on page 21. 3 Reset your system to its factory condition. If nothing else has solved the problem and you want to reset your system to factory condition, see "Returning your system to its factory condition" on page 22. Types of recovery Recovering pre-installed software and drivers As a troubleshooting step, you may need to reinstall the software and device drivers that came pre-installed on your computer from the factory. You can recover using either your hard drive or the backup you have created. New software: If you need to recover software that did not come pre-installed on your computer, you need to follow that softwares installation instructions. New device drivers: If you need to recover device drivers that did not come pre-installed on your computer, follow the instructions provided with the device. To recover your pre-installed software and drivers:
1 Click Start > All Programs > Acer, then click Acer eRecovery Management.
- OR -
If you are recovering from your driver and application recovery backup, insert the USB flash drive into a USB port. Open the USB flash drive in Windows Explorer and double-click Recovery. 2 Click Reinstall Drivers or Application from a USB device. E n g l i s h 21 3 4 Click Contents to show a list of software and device drivers. Click the install icon for the item you want to install, then follow the onscreen prompts to complete the installation. Repeat this step for each item you want to reinstall. Returning to a previous system condition Microsoft System Restore periodically takes snapshots of your system settings and saves them as restore points. In most cases of hard-to-resolve software problems, you can return to one of these restore points to get your system running again. Windows automatically creates an additional restore point each day, and also each time you install software or device drivers. Tip: For more information about using Microsoft System Restore, click Start, then click Help and Support. Type windows system restore in the Search Help box, then press Enter. To return to a restore point:
1 2 3 Click Start > Control Panel > System and Security > Action Center, then click Recovery. Click Open System Restore, then Next. Select the restore point you want, click Next, then Finish. A confirmation message box will appear. 22 4 Click Yes. Your system is restored using the restore point you specified. This process may take several minutes, and may restart your computer. Returning your system to its factory condition If your computer experiences problems that are not recoverable by other methods, you may need to reinstall everything to return your system to its factory condition. You can reinstall using either your hard drive or the recovery backup you have created. E n g l i s h Warning: This complete recovery deletes everything on your hard drive, then reinstalls Windows and all software and drivers that were pre-installed on your system. If you can access important files on your hard drive, back them up now. If you can still run Windows, see "Recovering from within Windows" on page 22. If you cannot run Windows and your original hard drive is still working, see
"Recovering from the hard drive during startup" on page 23. If you cannot run Windows and your original hard drive has been completely re-
formatted or you have installed a replacement hard drive, see "Recovering from your recovery backup" on page 23. Recovering from within Windows To reinstall Windows and all pre-installed software and drivers:
Click Start > All Programs > Acer, then click Acer eRecovery Management. Click the Restore tab, then Restore Operating System to Factory Defaults to open the Confirm Restoration dialog box. Click Yes, then Start. A dialog box will display information about the hard drive that the operating system will be recovered to. Warning: Continuing the process will erase all files on your hard drive. Click OK. The recovery process begins by restarting your computer, then continues by copying files to your hard drive. This process may take a while, the Acer eRecovery Management screen displays the progress. When the recovery has finished, a dialog box prompts you to restart your computer. Click OK to restart your computer. Follow the onscreen prompts for first-time system setup. 23 Recovering from the hard drive during startup To reinstall Windows and all pre-installed software and drivers:
1 2 3 Turn on your computer, then press <Alt> + <F10> during startup to open Acer eRecovery Management. Click Restore Operating System to Factory Defaults. Warning: Continuing the process will erase all files on your hard drive. Click Next. Your hard drives original, factory-loaded contents will be recovered. This process will take several minutes. E n g l i s h Recovering from your recovery backup To reinstall Windows and all pre-installed software and drivers:
1 Plug in the USB flash drive and turn on your computer. Warning: Continuing the process will erase all files on your hard drive. If it is not already enabled, you must enable the F12 Boot Menu:
Press <F2> when starting your computer. Use the left or right arrow keys to select the Main menu. Press the down key until F12 Boot Menu is selected, press <F5> to change this setting to Enabled. Use the left or right arrow keys to select the Exit menu. Select Save Changes and Exit and press Enter. Select OK to confirm. Your computer will restart. 2 3 4 During startup, press <F12> to open the boot menu. The boot menu allows you to select which device to start from, such as a flash drive. Use your arrow keys to select the line USB HDD, then press <Enter>. Windows will install from the recovery backup on the USB flash drive. Follow the onscreen prompts to complete the recovery. Acer clear.fi 24 E n g l i s h Note: Only for certain models. With Acer clear.fi, you can enjoy videos, photos and music. Stream media from, or to, other devices with Acer clear.fi installed. Note: All devices must be connected to the same network. To watch videos or listen to music open clear.fi Media, to browse photos open clear.fi Photo. Important: When you first open a clear.fi application, Windows Firewall will ask for permission to allow clear.fi to access the network. Select Allow Access in each window. Navigating media and photos The list in the left panel shows your computer (My Library), then other devices if any are connected to your network (Home Shared). To view files on your computer, select one of the categories under My Library, then browse the files and folder on the right. Shared files Devices connected to your network are shown in the Home Shared section. Select a device, then the select the category to explore. After a short delay, shared files and folders are shown on the right. Browse to the file you want to play, then double-click to start playback. Use the media controls in the bar across the bottom of the screen to control playback. For example, when music is selected, you can play, pause or stop playback, and adjust the volume. 25 E n g l i s h Note: You must activate sharing on the device that stores the files. Open clear.fi on the device that stores the files, select Edit then make sure Share my library on local network is active. Which devices are compatible?
Certified Acer devices with clear.fi or DLNA software can be used with the clear.fi software. These include DLNA-compliant PCs, smartphones, and NAS (Network Attached Storage) devices. Playing to another device If you want to play the media on another device, you need to do the following:
1 2 In the bottom right corner, select Play to. Select the remote device that will be used to play the file. Note: Only devices optimised for playback are available in this list, certain PCs and storage devices will not appear. To add a Windows PC to this list, open Windows Media Player, select Stream and Allow remote control of my Player... 3 Select a file in the main window, then use the media controls in the bar across the bottom of the screen to control the remote device. For more help, go to http://www.acer.com/clearfi/download/. 26 Power management This computer has a built-in power management unit that monitors system activity. System activity refers to any activity involving one or more of the following devices:
keyboard, mouse, hard disk, peripherals connected to the computer, and video memory. If no activity is detected for a period of time (called an inactivity timeout), the computer stops some or all of these devices in order to conserve energy. This computer employs a power management scheme that supports the advanced configuration and power interface (ACPI), which allows for maximum power conservation and maximum performance at the same time. Windows handles all power-saving chores for your computer. E n g l i s h Acer PowerSmart key Note: This feature is only available on certain models. Acer PowerSmart uses the power-saving features of your computer's graphics sub-
system to reduce overall power consumption. When you press the Acer PowerSmart key, the screen brightness is reduced and the graphics chip switched to a lower speed; PCI and WLAN switch to power-saving modes. Press the Acer PowerSmart key again to return to your previous settings. Battery pack The computer uses a battery pack that gives you long use between charges. 27 E n g l i s h Employs current battery technology standards. Battery pack characteristics The battery pack has the following characteristics:
The battery is recharged whenever you connect the computer to the AC adapter. Your computer supports charge-in-use, enabling you to recharge the battery while you continue to operate the computer. However, recharging with the computer turned off results in a significantly faster charge time. Delivers a battery-low warning. The battery will come in handy when you travel or during a power failure. It is advisable to have an extra fully charged battery pack available as backup. Contact your dealer for details on ordering a spare battery pack. Note: Some models have an embedded battery. If the battery needs to be replaced, please contact an authorized service center. Conditioning a new battery pack Before you use a battery pack for the first time, there is a conditioning process that you should follow:
1 2 3 4 5 6 Insert the new battery without turning the computer on. Connect the AC adapter and fully charge the battery. Disconnect the AC adapter. Turn on the computer and operate using battery power. Fully deplete the battery until the battery-low warning appears. Reconnect the AC adapter and fully charge the battery again. Follow these steps again until the battery has been charged and discharged three times. Use this conditioning process for all new batteries, or if a battery hasn't been used for a long time. If the computer is to be stored for more than two weeks, you are advised to remove the battery pack from the unit. Warning: Do not expose battery packs to temperatures below 0 C (32 F) or above 45 C (113 F). Extreme temperatures may adversely affect the battery pack. By following the battery conditioning process you condition your battery to accept the maximum possible charge. Failure to follow this procedure will prevent you from obtaining the maximum battery charge, and will also shorten the effective lifespan of the battery. E n g l i s h 28 In addition, the useful lifespan of the battery is adversely affected by the following usage patterns:
Using the computer on constant AC power with the battery inserted. If you want to use constant AC power, you are advised to remove the battery pack after it is fully charged. Not discharging and recharging the battery to its extremes, as described above. Frequent use; the more you use the battery, the faster it will reach the end of its effective life. A standard computer battery has a life span of about 300 charges. Charging the battery To charge the battery, first make sure that it is correctly installed in the battery bay. Plug the AC adapter into the computer, and connect to a mains power outlet. You can continue to operate your computer on AC power while your battery is charging. However, charging the battery with the computer turned off results in a significantly faster charge time. Note: You are advised to charge the battery before retiring for the day. Charging the battery overnight before traveling enables you to start the next day with a fully charged battery. Optimizing battery life Optimizing battery life helps you get the most out of battery operation, prolonging the charge/recharge cycle and improving recharging efficiency. You are advised to follow the suggestions set out below:
Purchase an extra battery pack. Use AC power whenever possible, reserving battery for on-the-go use. Eject a PC Card if it is not being used, as it will continue to draw power (for selected models). Store the battery pack in a cool, dry place. The recommended temperature is 10 C (50 F) to 30 C (86 F). Higher temperatures cause the battery to self-
discharge faster. Excessive recharging decreases the battery life. Look after your AC adapter and battery. Checking the battery level The Windows power meter indicates the current battery level. Rest the cursor over the battery/power icon on the taskbar to see the battery's present charge level. E n g l i s h 29 Battery-low warning When using battery power pay attention to the Windows power meter. Warning: Connect the AC adapter as soon as possible after the battery-low warning appears. Data will be lost if the battery to become fully depleted and the computer shuts down. When the battery-low warning appears, the recommended course of action depends on your situation:
Situation Recommended Action The AC adapter and a power outlet are available. 1. Plug the AC adapter into the computer, and then connect to the mains power supply. 2. Save all necessary files. 3. Resume work. Turn off the computer if you want to recharge the battery rapidly. An extra fully charged battery pack is available. 1. Save all necessary files. 2. Close all applications. 3. Turn off the computer. 4. Replace the battery pack. 5. Turn on the computer and resume work. The AC adapter or a power outlet is unavailable. You have no spare battery pack. 1. Save all necessary files. 2. Close all applications. 3. Turn off the computer. Installing and removing the battery pack Note: Some models have an embedded battery. If the battery needs to be replaced, please contact an authorized service center. 30 E n g l i s h Important! Before removing the battery from the unit, connect the AC adapter if you want to continue using your computer. Otherwise, turn off the computer first. To install a battery pack:
1 2 Align the battery with the open battery bay; make sure that the end with the contacts will enter first, and that the top surface of the battery is facing up. Slide the battery into the battery bay and gently push until the battery locks in place. To remove a battery pack:
1 2 Slide the battery release latch to release the battery. Pull the battery from the battery bay. Taking your notebook PC with you This section gives you tips and hints to consider when moving around or traveling with your computer. E n g l i s h 31 Disconnecting from the desktop Follow these steps to disconnect your computer from external accessories:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Save any open files. Remove any media, floppy disks or compact disks from the drive(s). Shut down the computer. Close the display cover. Disconnect the cord from the AC adapter. Disconnect the keyboard, pointing device, printer, external monitor and other external devices. Disconnect the Kensington lock if you are using one to secure the computer. Moving around When you are just moving within short distances, for example, from your office desk to a meeting room. Preparing the computer Before moving the computer, close and latch the display cover to place it in Sleep mode. You can now safely take the computer anywhere you go within the building. To bring the computer out of Sleep mode, open the display; then press and release the power button. If you are taking the computer to a client's office or a different building, you may choose to shut down the computer:
Click Start then click Shut Down. Or:
You can put the computer in Sleep mode by pressing <Fn> + <F4>. Then close and latch the display. When you are ready to use the computer again, unlatch and open the display; then press and release the power button. Note: If the Sleep indicator is off, the computer has entered Hibernation mode and is turned off. If the power indicator is off but the Sleep indicator is on, the computer has entered Sleep mode. In 32 both cases, press and release the power button to turn the computer back on. Note that the computer may enter Hibernation mode after being in Sleep mode for a period of time. E n g l i s h What to bring to meetings If your meeting is relatively short, you probably do not need to bring anything with you other than your computer. If your meeting will be longer, or if your battery is not fully charged, you may want to bring the AC adapter with you to plug in your computer in the meeting room. If the meeting room does not have an electrical outlet, reduce the drain on the battery by putting the computer in Sleep mode. Press <Fn> + <F4> or close the display cover whenever you are not actively using the computer. To resume, open the display (if closed), then press and release the power button. Taking the computer home When you are moving from your office to your home or vice versa. Preparing the computer After disconnecting the computer from your desktop, follow these steps to prepare the computer for the trip home:
Check that you have removed all media and compact discs from the drive(s). Failure to remove the media can damage the drive head. Pack the computer in a protective case that can prevent the computer from sliding around and cushion it if it should fall. Caution: Avoid packing items next to the top cover of the computer. Pressure against the top cover can damage the screen. What to take with you Unless you have some items at home, take the following items with you:
AC adapter and power cord. The printed setup poster. Special considerations Follow these guidelines to protect your computer while traveling to and from work:
Minimize the effects of temperature changes by keeping the computer with you. 33 If you need to stop for an extended period of time and cannot carry the computer with you, leave the computer in the trunk of the car to avoid exposing the computer to excessive heat. Changes in temperature and humidity can cause condensation. Allow the computer to return to room temperature, and inspect the screen for condensation before turning on the computer. If the temperature change is greater than 10 C (18 F), allow the computer to come to room temperature slowly. If possible, leave the computer for 30 minutes in an environment with a temperature between outside and room temperature. E n g l i s h Setting up a home office If you frequently work on your computer at home, you may want to purchase a second AC adapter for use at home. With a second AC adapter, you can avoid carrying the extra weight to and from home. If you use your computer at home for significant periods of time, you might also want to add an external keyboard, monitor or mouse. Traveling with the computer When you are moving within a larger distance, for instance, from your office building to a client's office building or traveling locally. Preparing the computer Prepare the computer as if you were taking it home. Make sure that the battery in the computer is charged. Airport security may require you to turn on your computer when carrying it into the gate area. What to take with you Take the following items with you:
AC adapter Spare, fully-charged battery pack(s) Additional printer driver files if you plan to use another printer Special considerations In addition to the guidelines for taking the computer home, follow these guidelines to protect your computer while traveling:
If possible, have the computer inspected by hand. Airport security X-ray machines are safe, but do not put the computer through a metal detector. Always take the computer as carry-on luggage. Avoid exposing floppy disks to hand-held metal detectors. Traveling internationally with the computer When you are moving from country to country. Preparing the computer Prepare the computer as you would normally prepare it for traveling. 34 E n g l i s h What to bring with you Bring the following items with you:
AC adapter Power cords that are appropriate for the country to which you are traveling Spare, fully-charged battery packs Additional printer driver files if you plan to use another printer Proof of purchase, in case you need to show it to customs officials International Travelers Warranty passport Special considerations Follow the same special considerations as when traveling with the computer. In addition, these tips are useful when traveling internationally:
When traveling in another country, check that the local AC voltage and the AC adapter power cord specifications are compatible. If not, purchase a power cord that is compatible with the local AC voltage. Do not use converter kits sold for appliances to power the computer. If you are using the modem, check if the modem and connector are compatible with the telecommunications system of the country you are traveling in. 35 Securing your computer Your computer is a valuable investment that you need to take care of. Learn how to protect and take care of your computer. Security features include hardware and software locks a security notch and passwords. E n g l i s h Using a computer security lock The notebook comes with a Kensington-compatible security slot for a security lock. Wrap a computer security lock cable around an immovable object such as a table or handle of a locked drawer. Insert the lock into the notch and turn the key to secure the lock. Some keyless models are also available. Using passwords Passwords protect your computer from unauthorized access. Setting these passwords creates several different levels of protection for your computer and data:
Supervisor Password prevents unauthorized entry into the BIOS utility. Once set, you must enter this password to gain access to the BIOS utility. See
"BIOS utility" on page 46. User Password secures your computer against unauthorized use. Combine the use of this password with password checkpoints on boot-up and resume from Hibernation for maximum security. Password on Boot secures your computer against unauthorized use. Combine the use of this password with password checkpoints on boot-up and resume from Hibernation for maximum security. Important! Do not forget your Supervisor Password! If you forget your password, please get in touch with your dealer or an authorized service center. 36 E n g l i s h Entering passwords When a password is set, a password prompt appears in the center of the display screen. When the Supervisor Password is set, a prompt appears when you press <F2>
to enter the BIOS utility at boot-up. Type the Supervisor Password and press <Enter> to access the BIOS utility. If you enter the password incorrectly, a warning message appears. Try again and press <Enter>. When the User Password is set and the password on boot parameter is enabled, a prompt appears at boot-up. Type the User Password and press <Enter> to use the computer. If you enter the password incorrectly, a warning message appears. Try again and press
<Enter>. Important! You have three chances to enter a password. If you fail to enter the password correctly after three tries, the system halts. Press and hold the power button for four seconds to shut down the computer. Then turn on the computer again, and try again. Setting passwords You can set passwords using the BIOS utility. Expanding through options Your notebook PC offers you a complete mobile computing experience. 37 E n g l i s h Connectivity options Ports allow you to connect peripheral devices to your computer as you would with a desktop PC. For instructions on how to connect different external devices to the computer, read the following section. Fax/data modem Note: Information in this section may not apply to your computer. Your computer has a built-in V.92 56 Kbps fax/data modem. Warning! This modem port is not compatible with digital phone lines. Plugging this modem into a digital phone line will damage the modem. To use the fax/data modem port, connect a phone cable from the modem port to a telephone jack. Warning! Please make sure that the cable you use is appropriate for the country in which you are working. 38 Built-in network feature The built-in network feature allows you to connect your computer to an Ethernet-
based network. To use the network feature, connect an Ethernet cable from the Ethernet
(RJ-45) port on the chassis of the computer to a network jack or hub on your network. E n g l i s h Consumer Infrared (CIR) Note: Information in this section may not apply to your computer. The computers Consumer Infrared (CIR) port is used to receive signals from your remote control, or other devices with CIR capability. Universal Serial Bus (USB) The USB 2.0 port is a high-speed serial bus which allows you to connect USB peripherals without taking up precious system resources. E n g l i s h 39 IEEE 1394 port Note: Information in this section may not apply to your computer. 40 E n g l i s h The computer's IEEE 1394 port allows you to connect to an IEEE 1394-compatible device like a video camera or digital camera. See your video or digital camera's documentation for details. High-Definition Multimedia Interface Note: Information in this section may not apply to your computer. HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is an industry-supported, uncompressed, all-digital audio/video interface. HDMI provides an interface between any compatible digital audio/video source, such as a set-top box, DVD player, and A/V receiver and a compatible digital audio and/or video monitor, such as a digital television (DTV), over a single cable. Use the HDMI port on your computer to connect with high-end audio and video equipment. Single cable implementation allows tidy setup and fast connection. 41 E n g l i s h ExpressCard Note: Information in this section may not apply to your computer. The ExpressCard is the newest version of the PC Card. It is a smaller and faster interface that further enhances the usability and expandability of your computer. ExpressCards support a vast number of expansion options, including flash memory card adapters, TV-tuners, Bluetooth connectivity and IEEE 1394b adapters. ExpressCards support USB 2.0 and PCI Express applications. Important! There are two types, ExpressCard/54 and ExpressCard/
34 (54 mm and 34 mm), each with different functions. Not all ExpressCard slots will support both types. Please refer to your cards manual for details on how to install and use the card, and its functions. Inserting an ExpressCard Insert the card into the slot and push gently until it clicks into position. EXPRESS CARD 42 E n g l i s h Ejecting an ExpressCard Before ejecting an ExpressCard:
1 2 3 Exit the application using the card. Left-click the remove hardware icon on the taskbar and stop the card operation. Push the card gently into the slot and release to pop out the card. Then pull the card free from the slot. Installing memory Note: Information in this section may not apply to your computer. Follow these steps to install memory:
1 2 Turn off the computer, unplug the AC adapter (if connected) and remove the battery pack. Then turn the computer over to access its base. Remove the screws from the memory cover; then lift and remove the memory cover. 3
(a) Insert the memory module diagonally into the slot, then (b) gently press it down until it clicks into place. E n g l i s h 43 4 5 6 Replace the memory cover and secure it with the screw. Reinstall the battery pack, and reconnect the AC adapter. Turn on the computer. The computer automatically detects and reconfigures the total memory size. Please consult a qualified technician or contact your local Acer dealer. Enjoying TV with Windows Media Center E n g l i s h 44 Note: This feature is only available on certain models. Computers that include Windows Media Center Edition or InstantOn Arcade may be used to watch TV and to access video content (via an audio/video connection to an external device, such as a video camera). Choose your input type The audio/video connection may be either a DVB-T digital antenna (for selected models) or a PAL/SECAM or NTSC connector. Please refer to the appropriate section:
Watching TV using the optional DVB-T (digital TV) antenna
(for selected models) DVB-T digital TV is an international standard that is used to transmit terrestrial television services in digital format. It is gradually replacing analog broadcasts in many countries. The DVB-T digital antenna can be used with Windows Media Center to watch local DVB-T digital TV broadcasts on your notebook PC. To connect the digital antenna 1 Plug the antenna cable into the RF jack of your computer. 45 E n g l i s h Notebook RF Note: Do not twist or loop the antenna cable. Extend the antenna cable up to 20 cm to improve signal quality. Watching TV with an external antenna or cable socket You may use conventional TV cables (connected to an external antenna or cable socket) to watch TV on your computer. Connecting antenna cables To connect your cables:
1 Plug the antenna connector into the RF jack of your computer. 2 Connect the other end to your TV cable, using the cable converter if necessary. 46 E n g l i s h Important! Please ensure you use the correct cable system for your region before attempting to connect the antenna cable. BIOS utility The BIOS utility is a hardware configuration program built into your computer's BIOS. Your computer is already properly configured and optimized, and you do not need to run this utility. However, if you encounter configuration problems, you may need to run it. To activate the BIOS utility, press <F2> during the POST while the notebook PC logo is being displayed. Boot sequence To set the boot sequence in the BIOS utility, activate the BIOS utility, then select Boot from the categories listed at the top of the screen. Enable disk-to-disk recovery To enable disk-to-disk recovery (hard disk recovery), activate the BIOS utility, then select Main from the categories listed at the top of the screen. Find D2D Recovery at the bottom of the screen and use the <F5> and <F6> keys to set this value to Enabled. Password To set a password on boot, activate the BIOS utility, then select Security from the categories listed at the top of the screen. Find Password on boot: and use the
<F5> and <F6> keys to enable this feature. E n g l i s h 47 Using software Playing DVD movies Note: This feature is only available on certain models. When the DVD drive module is installed in the optical drive bay, you can play DVD movies on your computer. 1 Eject the DVD. Important! When you launch the DVD player for the first time, the program asks you to enter the region code. DVD discs are divided into 6 regions. Once your DVD drive is set to a region code, it will play DVD disks of that region only. You can set the region code a maximum of five times (including the first time), after which the last region code set will remain permanent. Recovering your hard disk does not reset the number of times the region code has been set. Refer to the table below for DVD movie region code information. 2 The DVD movie will automatically play after a few seconds. Region code Country or region 1 2 3 4 5 6 USA, Canada Europe, Middle East, South Africa, Japan Southeast Asia, Taiwan, South Korea Latin America, Australia, New Zealand Former USSR, parts of Africa, India Peoples Republic of China Note: To change the region code, insert a DVD movie of a different region into the DVD drive. Please refer to the online help for more information. 48 E n g l i s h Frequently asked questions The following is a list of possible situations that may arise during the use of your computer. Easy solutions are provided for each one. E n g l i s h 49 I turned on the power, but the computer does not start or boot up. Look at the power indicator:
If it is not lit, no power is being supplied to the computer. Check the following:
If you are using on the battery, it may be low and unable to power the computer. Connect the AC adapter to recharge the battery pack. Make sure that the AC adapter is properly plugged into the computer and to the power outlet. If it is lit, check the following:
Is a non-bootable (non-system) disk in the external USB floppy drive?
Remove or replace it with a system disk and press <Ctrl> + <Alt> +
<Del> to restart the system. Nothing appears on the screen. The computers power management system automatically blanks the screen to save power. Press any key to turn the display back on. If pressing a key does not turn the display back on, three things might be the cause:
The brightness level might be too low. Press <Fn> + < > (increase) to adjust the brightness level. The display device might be set to an external monitor. Press the display toggle hotkey <Fn> + <F5> to toggle the display back to the computer. If the Sleep indicator is lit, the computer is in Sleep mode. Press and release the power button to resume. No audio is heard from the computer. Check the following:
The volume may be muted. In Windows, look at the volume control (speaker) icon on the taskbar. If it is crossed-out, click the icon and deselect the Mute all option. The volume level may be too low. In Windows, look at the volume control icon on the taskbar. You can also use the volume control buttons to adjust the volume. If headphones, earphones or external speakers are connected to the line-out port on the computer, the internal speakers automatically turn off. 50 I want to eject the optical drive tray without turning on the power. There is a mechanical eject hole on the optical drive. Simply insert the tip of a pen or paperclip into the hole and push to eject the tray. E n g l i s h The keyboard does not respond. Try attaching an external keyboard to a USB port on the computer. If it works, contact your dealer or an authorized service center as the internal keyboard cable may be loose. The printer does not work. Check the following:
Make sure that the printer is connected to a power outlet and that it is turned on. Make sure that the printer cable is connected securely to a USB port and the corresponding port on the printer. I want to restore my computer to its original settings without recovery CDs. Note: If your system is the multilingual version, the operating system and language you choose when you first turn on the system will be the only option for future recovery operations. This recovery process helps you restore the C: drive with the original software content that is installed when you purchased your notebook. Follow the steps below to rebuild your C: drive. (Your C: drive will be reformatted and all data will be erased.) It is important to back up all data files before using this option. Before performing a restore operation, please check the BIOS settings. Check to see if Acer disk-to-disk recovery is enabled or not. 1 2 Make sure the D2D Recovery setting in Main is Enabled. 3 Exit the BIOS utility and save changes. The system will reboot. Note: To activate the BIOS utility, press <F2> during POST. To start the recovery process:
Restart the system. 1 2 While the Acer logo is showing, press <Alt> + <F10> at the same time to enter the recovery process. 3 Refer to the onscreen instructions to perform system recovery. 51 Important! This feature occupies 15 GB in a hidden partition on your hard disk. E n g l i s h Requesting service International Travelers Warranty (ITW) Your computer is backed by an International Travelers Warranty (ITW) that gives you security and peace of mind when traveling. Our worldwide network of service centers are there to give you a helping hand. An ITW passport comes with your computer. This passport contains all you need to know about the ITW program. A list of available, authorized service centers is in this handy booklet. Read this passport thoroughly. Always have your ITW passport on hand, especially when you travel, to receive the benefits from our support centers. Place your proof-of-purchase in the flap located inside the front cover of the ITW passport. If the country you are traveling in does not have an Acer-authorized ITW service site, you can still get in contact with our offices worldwide. Please visit www.acer.com. Before you call Please have the following information available when you call Acer for online service, and please be at your computer when you call. With your support, we can reduce the amount of time a call takes and help solve your problems efficiently. If there are error messages or beeps reported by your computer, write them down as they appear on the screen (or the number and sequence in the case of beeps). You are required to provide the following information:
Name: ______________________________________________ Address: ____________________________________________ Telephone number: ___________________________________ Machine and model type: ______________________________ Serial number: _______________________________________ Date of purchase: ____________________________________ Troubleshooting This chapter shows you how to deal with common system problems. Read it before calling a technician if a problem occurs. Solutions to more serious problems require opening up the computer. Do not attempt to open the computer yourself; contact your dealer or authorized service center for assistance. 52 E n g l i s h Troubleshooting tips This notebook PC incorporates an advanced design that delivers onscreen error message reports to help you solve problems. If the system reports an error message or an error symptom occurs, see "Error messages" below. If the problem cannot be resolved, contact your dealer. See
"Requesting service" on page 51. Error messages If you receive an error message, note the message and take the corrective action. The following table lists the error messages in alphabetical order together with the recommended course of action. Error messages Corrective action CMOS battery bad Contact your dealer or an authorized service center. CMOS checksum error Disk boot failure Contact your dealer or an authorized service center. Insert a system (bootable) disk, then press <Enter> to reboot. Equipment configuration error Press <F2> (during POST) to enter the BIOS utility, then press Exit in the BIOS utility to reboot. Hard disk 0 error Contact your dealer or an authorized service center. Hard disk 0 extended type error Contact your dealer or an authorized service center. I/O parity error Contact your dealer or an authorized service center. Keyboard error or no keyboard connected Contact your dealer or an authorized service center. Error messages Corrective action Keyboard interface error Contact your dealer or an authorized service center. Memory size mismatch Press <F2> (during POST) to enter the BIOS utility, then press Exit in the BIOS utility to reboot. 53 E n g l i s h If you still encounter problems after going through the corrective measures, please contact your dealer or an authorized service center for assistance. REGULATORY INFORMATION PREVENTION OF HEARING LOSS
- Caution: Permanent hearing loss may occur if earphones or headphones are used at high volume for prolonged periods of time.
- A pleine puissance, lcoute prolonge du baladeur peut endommager loreille de lutilisateur. CAUTION when listening To protect your hearing, follow these instructions. Increase the volume gradually until you can hear clearly and comfortably.
-
- Do not increase the volume level after your ears have adjusted.
- Do not listen to music at high volumes for extended periods.
- Do not increase the volume to block out noisy surroundings.
- Decrease the volume if you cant hear people speaking near you. Compliance accessories The accessories associated with this equipment are: shielded video cable when an external monitor is connected. These accessories are required to be used in order to ensure compliance with FCC rules. MERCURY WARNING (ONLY APPLIES TO CCFL LCD PANEL) THE LAMP IN THIS DISPLAY CONTAINS MERCURY. DISPOSE ACCORDING TO LOCAL, STATE, AND FEDERAL LAW.
(JAPAN) VCCI WIRELESS ADAPTER REGULATORY INFORMATION Use On Aircraft Caution Caution: Regulations of the FCC and FAA prohibit airborne operation of radio-frequency wireless devices(wireless adapters) because their signals could interfere with critical interfere with critical aircraft instruments. The Wireless Adapter and Your Health The wireless adapter, like other radio devices, emits radio frequency electromagnetic energy. The level of energy emitted by the wireless adapter, however, is less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by other wireless devices such as mobile phones. The wireless adapter operates within the guidelines found in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations. These standards and recommendations reflect the consensus of the scientific community and result from deliberations of panels and committees of scientists who continually review and interpret the extensive research literature. In some situations or environments, the use of the wireless adapter may be restricted by the proprietor of the building or responsible representatives of the applicable organization. Examples of such situations may include:
- Using the wireless adapter on board airplanes, or
- Using the wireless adapter in any other environment where the risk of interference with other devices or services is perceived or identified as being harmful. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of wireless adapters in a specific organization or environment (an airport, for example), you are encouraged to ask for authorization to use the adapter before you turn it on. USAFCC and FAA The FCC with its action in ET Docket 96-8 has adopted a safety standard for human exposure to radio frequency(RF) electromagnetic energy emitted by FCC certified equipment. The wireless adapter meets the Human Exposurelimits found in OET Bulletin 65, supplement C, 2001, and ANSI/IEEE C95.1, 1992. Proper operation of this radioaccording to the instructions found in this manual will result in exposure substantially below the FCCsrecommended limits.
- The following safety precautions should be observed:
Do not touch or move antenna while the unit is transmitting or receiving.
- Do not hold any component containing the radio such that the antenna is very close or touching anyexposed parts of the body, especially the face or eyes, while transmitting.
- Do not operate the radio or attempt to transmit data unless the antenna is connected;
this behavior maycause damage to the radio. Use in specific environments:
- The use of wireless adapters in hazardous locations is limited by the constraints posed by the safetydirectors of such environments.
- The use of wireless adapters on airplanes is governed by the Federal Aviation Administration (FAA).
- The use of wireless adapters in hospitals is restricted to the limits set forth by each hospital. The product comply with the FCC portable RF exposure limit set forth for an uncontrolled environment and are safe for intended operation as described in this manual. The further RF exposure reduction can be achieved if the product can be kept as far as possible from the user body or set the device to lower output power if such function is available. Explosive Device Proximity Warning Warning: Do not operate a portable transmitter (including this wireless adapter) near unshielded blastingcaps or in an explosive environment unless the transmitter has been modified to be qualified for such use. FCC Radio Frequency Interference Requirements (applied to machine supports 802.11a) This device is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5.15 to 5.25 GHz and 5.470 to 5.725 GHz frequency ranges. FCC requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency ranges 5.15 to 5.25 GHz and5.470 to 5.725 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. High power radars are allocated as primary users of the 5.25 to 5.35 GHz and 5.65 to 5.85 GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and /or damage this device. No configuration controls are provided for this wireless adapter allowing any change in the frequency of operations outside the FCC grant of authorization for U.S operation according to Part 15.407 of the FCC rules. USAFederal Communications Commission (FCC) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation of the device is subject to the following two conditions:
- This device may not cause harmful interference.
- This device must accept any interference that may cause undesired operation.
- This product does not contain any user serviceable components. Any unauthorized product changes or modifications will invalidate warranty and all applicable regulatory certifications and approvals, including authority to operate this device.
-
(Notice for 5GHz) Operations in the 5.15-5.25GHz band are restricted to indoor usage only. (For 5GHz only) This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
-
Radiation Exposure Statement:
The product comply with the FCC portable RF exposure limit set forth for an uncontrolled environment and are safe for intended operation as described in this manual. The further RF exposure reduction can be achieved if the product can be kept as far as possible from the user body or set the device to lower output power if such function is available. Interference Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If the equipment is not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, the equipment may cause harmful interference to radio communications. There is no guarantee, however, that such interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception (which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on), the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by taking one or more of the following measures:
- Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna of the equipment experiencing the interference. Increase the distance between the wireless adapter and the equipment experiencing the interference.
-
- Connect the computer with the wireless adapter to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the equipment experiencing the interference is connected.
- Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Canada Industry Canada (IC) This device complies with RSS210 of Industry Canada. Cet appareil se conforme RSS210 de Canada d'Industrie. This device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Ce dispositif est conforme a la norme CNR-210 d'Industrie Canada applicable aux appareils radio exempts de licence. Son fonctionnement est sujet aux deux conditions suivantes: (1) le dispositif ne doit pas produire de brouillage prejudiciable, et (2) ce dispositif doit accepter tout brouillage recu, y compris un brouillage susceptible de provoquer un fonctionnement indesirable.
(Notice for 5GHz) Caution :
(i) the device for operation in the band 5150-5250 MHz is only for indoor use to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems;
(ii) the maximum antenna gain permitted for devices in the bands 5250-5350 MHz and 5470-5725 MHz shall comply with the e.i.r.p. limit; and
(iii) the maximum antenna gain permitted for devices in the band 5725-5825 MHz shall comply with the e.i.r.p. limits specified for point-to-point and non point-to-point operation as appropriate.
(iv) Users should also be advised that high-power radars are allocated as primary users
(i.e. priority users) of the bands 5250-5350 MHz and 5650-5850 MHz and that these radars could cause interference and/or damage to LE-LAN devices. Avertissement:
Le guide dutilisation des dispositifs pour rseaux locaux doit inclure des instructions prcises sur les restrictions susmentionnes, notamment :
(i) les dispositifs fonctionnant dans la bande 5 150-5 250 MHz sont rservs uniquement pour une utilisation lintrieur afin de rduire les risques de brouillage prjudiciable aux systmes de satellites mobiles utilisant les mmes canaux;
(ii) le gain maximal dantenne permis pour les dispositifs utilisant les bandes 5 250-5 350 MHz et 5 470-5 725 MHz doit se conformer la limite de p.i.r.e.;
(iii) le gain maximal dantenne permis (pour les dispositifs utilisant la bande 5 725-5 825 MHz) doit se conformer la limite de p.i.r.e. spcifie pour lexploitation point point et non point point, selon le cas.
(iv) De plus, les utilisateurs devraient aussi tre aviss que les utilisateurs de radars de haute puissance sont dsigns utilisateurs principaux (c.--d., quils ont la priorit) pour les bandes 5 250-5 350 MHz et 5 650-5 850 MHz et que ces radars pourraient causer du brouillage et/ou des dommages aux dispositifs LAN-EL. Radiation Exposure Statement:
The product comply with the Canada portable RF exposure limit set forth for an uncontrolled environment and are safe for intended operation as described in this manual. The further RF exposure reduction can be achieved if the product can be kept as far as possible from the user body or set the device to lower output power if such function is available. This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. Cet appareil numrique de la classe B est conforme a la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
"To prevent radio interference to the licensed service, this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from windows to provide maximum shielding. Equipment (or its transmit antenna) that is installed outdoors is subject to licensing."
Pour empcher que cet appareil cause du brouillage au service faisant l'objet d'une licence, il doit tre utilis a l'intrieur et devrait tre plac loin des fentres afin de fournir un cran de blindage maximal. Si le matriel (ou son antenne d'mission) est install l'extrieur, il doit faire l'objet d'une licence. European Union List of applicable countries This product must be used in strict accordance with the regulations and constraints in the country of use. For further information, contact the local office in the country of use. Please see http://ec.europa.eu/enterprise/rtte/implem.htm for the latest country list. List of National Codes THIS EQUIPMENT MAY BE OPERATED IN THE FOLLOWING COUNTRIES:
ISO 3166 2 letter code MT NT PL PT SK SL ISO 3166 2 letter code AT Austria BE Belgium Cyprus CY Czech Republic CZ DK Denmark Estonia EE United Kingdom GB IS Iceland LI Liechtenstein Norway NO CH Switzerland Bulgaria BG ISO 3166 2 letter code DE GR HU IE IT LV Malta Netherlands Poland Portugal Slovakia Slovenia Germany Greece Hungary Ireland Italy Latvia ISO 3166 2 letter code Country Country Country Country Country Country Country Country ISO 3166 2 letter code FI FR ISO 3166 2 letter code LT LU ISO 3166 2 letter code ES SE Lithuania Luxembourg Finland France Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) Information This device meets the EU requirements (1999/519/EC) on the limitation of exposure of the general public to electromagnetic fields by way of health protection. Romania Turkey Spain Sweden ISO 3166 2 letter code RO TR The limits are part of extensive recommendations for the protection of the general public. These recommendations have been developed and checked by independent scientific organizations through regular and thorough evaluations of scientific studies. The unit of measurement for the European Council's recommended limit for mobile devices is the
"Specific Absorption Rate" (SAR), and the SAR limit is 2.0 W/ kg averaged over 10 gram of body tissue. It meets the requirements of the International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP). The low band 5.15 -5.35 GHz is for indoor use only. This equipment complies with the essential requirements of the European Union directive 1999/5/EC. See Statements of European Union Compliance, and more details refer to the attached Declaration of Conformity. English esky [Czech]
Daansk [Danish]
Deutsch [German]
Eesti [Estonian]
Espaol [Spanish]
[Greek]
Franais [French]
slenska [Icelandic]
Itaaliano [Italian]
Latviski [Latvian]
Lietuvi [Lithuanian]
Malti [Maltese]
Magyar [Hungarian]
Nederlands [Dutch]
Norsk [Norwegiann]
Hereby, ACER INC., declares that this Radiolan is in compliance with the essential requirements and other rele vant provisionns of Directive 1999/5/EC. ACER INC. tmto prohlauje, e tento Radiolan je ve shod se zkladnmi poadavky a dalmi pslunmi ustanovenmi smrnice 1999/5/ES. Undertegnede ACER INC. erklrer herved, at flgende udstyr Radio lan overholder de vsentlige krav og vrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF. Hiermit erklrt ACER INC., dass sich das Gert Radiolan in bereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den brigen einschlgigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG befindet. Kesolevaga kinnitab ACER INC. seadme Radiolan vastavust direktiivi 1999/5/E phinuetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele teistele asjakohastele stetele. Por medio de la presente ACER INC. declara que el Radiolan cumplee con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE. ACER INC. Radiolan 1999/5/ . Par la prsente ACER INC. dclare que l'appareil Radiolan est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE. Hr me lsir ACER INC. yfir v a Radiolan er samrmi vi grunnkrfur og arar krfur, sem gera r eru tilskipun 1999/5/EC. Con la presente ACER INC. dichiara che questo Radiolan conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE. Ar o ACER INC. deklar, ka Radiolan atbilst Direktvas 1999/5/EK btiskajm prasbm un citiem ar to saisttajiem noteikumiem. iuo ACER INC. deklaruoja, kad is Radiolan atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999/5/EB Direktyvos nuostatas. Hawnhekk, ACER INC., jiddikjara li dan Radiolan jikkonforma mal- ti ijiet essenzjali u ma provvedimenti o rajn relevanti li he mm fid-Dirrettiva 1999/5/EC. Alulrott, ACER INC. nyilatkozom, hogy a Radiolan megfelel a vonatkoz alapvet kvetelmnyeknek s az 1999/5/EC irnyelv egyb elrsainak. Hierbij verklaart ACER INC. dat het toeste l Radiolan in overeenstem ming is met de essentile eisen en de andere relevante bepalin gen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG. ACER INC. erklrer herved at utstyret Ra diolan er i samsvar med de grunnlegggende krav og vrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF. Polski [Polish]
Portugus
[Portuguese]
Slovensko
[Slovenian]
Slovensky [Slovak]
Suomi [Finnish]
Svenska [Swedish]
Niniejszym ACER INC. owiadcza, e Radiolan jest zgodny z zasadniczymi wymogami oraz pozostaymi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC. ACER INC. declara que este Radiolan est conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposies da Directiva 1999/5/CE. ACER INC. izjavlja, da je ta je Radiolan skladen z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi doloili Direktive 1999/5/ES. ACER INC. tmto vyhlasuje, e Radiolan spa zkladn poiadavky a vetky prslun ustanovenia Smernice 1999/5/ES. ACER INC. vakuuttaa tten ett Radiolan tyyppinen laite on direktiivi n 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja sit koskevienn direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen. Hrmed intygar ACER INC. att denna Radiolan str I v erensstmme lse med de vsentliga egenskappskrav och vriga relevanta bestmmelser som framgr av direktiv 1999/5/EG. France Products with 2.4GHz Wireless LAN Devices France L'utilisation de cet equipement (2.4GHz wireless LAN) est soumise certaines restrictions: cet equipement peut tre utilis l'interieur d'un batiment en utilisant toutes les frequences de 2400 a 2483.5MHz (Chaine 113). Pour une utilisation en environement exterieur, les frequences comprises entre 2400-2454 MHz peuvent tre utilis. Pour les dernires restrictions, voir http://www.art-telecom.fr. For 2.4GHz wireless LAN operation of this product, certain restrictions apply. This equipment may use the entire2400MHz to 2483.5MHz frequency band (channels 1 through 13) for indoor applications. For outdoor use, only 2400-2454 MHz frequency band may be used. For the latest requirements, see http://www.art-telecom.fr. Italy The use of these equipments is regulated by:
1.D.L.gs 1.8.2003, n. 259, article 104 (activity subject to general authorization) for outdoor use and article 105 (free use) for indoor use, in both cases for private use. 2.D.M. 28.5.03, for supply to public of RLAN access to networks and telecom services. Luso degli apparati regolamentato da:
1.D.L.gs 1.8.2003, n. 259, articoli 104 (attivit soggette ad autorizzazione generale) se utilizzati al di fuori del proprio fondo e 105 (libero uso) se utilizzati entro il proprio fondo, in entrambi i casi per uso private. 2.D.M. 28.5.03, per la fornitura al pubblico dellaccesso R-LAN alle reti e ai servizi di telecomunicazioni. Belgium Dans le cas d'une utilisation prive, l'extrieur d'un btiment, au-dessus d'un espace public, aucun enregistrement n'est ncessaire pour une distance de moins de 300m. Pour une distance suprieure 300m un enregistrement auprs de l'IBPT est requise. Pour les enregistrements et licences, veuillez contacter l'IBPT. In geval van priv-gebruik, buiten een gebouw, op een openbare plaats, is geen registratie nodig, wanneer de afstand minder dan 300m is. Voor een afstand groter dan 300m is een registratie bij BIPT vereist. Voor registraties en licenties, gelieve BIPT te contacteren. Brazil Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio. Pakistan Pakistan Telecommunication Authority (PTA) Approved Morocco The operation of this product in the radio channel 2 (2417 MHz) is not authorized in the following cities: Agadir,Assa-Zag, Cabo Negro, Chaouen, Goulmima, Oujda, Tan Tan, Taourirt, Taroudant and Taza. The operation of this product in the radio channels 4, 5, 6 et 7 (2425 - 2442 MHz) is not authorized in thefollowing cities: Aroport Mohamed V, Agadir, Aguelmous, Anza, Benslimane, Bni Hafida, Cabo Negro, Casablanca,Fs, Lakbab, Marrakech, Merchich, Mohammdia, Rabat, Sal, Tanger, Tan Tan, Taounate, Tit Mellil, Zag. Japan 5 GHz Korea Taiwan
;
5.25-5.35GHz , MODIFICATIONS TO THE PRODUCT It cannot be held responsible for unauthorized modifications made by the user and the consequences thereof, which may alter the conformity of the product. CONNECTIONS AND REMOTE EARTHS PELV (Protected Extra Low Voltage) To ensure the extra-low voltage integrity of the equipment, only connect equipment with mains-protected electrically-compatible circuits to the external ports. SELV (Safety Extra Low Voltage) Every input and output of this product is classified as Safety Extra Low Voltage. Remote earths To prevent electrical shock, connect all local (individual office) computers and computer support equipment to the same electrical circuit of the building wiring. If you are unsure, check the building wiring to avoid remote earth conditions. Building supply Only connect the equipment to a building supply that is in accordance with current wiring regulations in your country. In the U.K., these are the IEE regulations. POWER SUPPLY AND CABLES Power supply The power supply socket-inlet and socket-outlet (if equipped) are classified as Hazardous Voltage. You must unplug the power supply cord and remove the battery to disconnect the equipment from the power supply. In that aim, the socket-outlet should be installed near to the equipment and should be easily accessible. Input rating: Refer to the rating label on the bottom of the computer and ensure that your power adapter complies with the specified rating. Under no circumstances should the user attempt to disassemble the power supply. The power supply has no user-replaceable parts. Inside the power supply are hazardous voltages that can cause serious personal injury. A defective power supply must be returned to your dealer. Power cables and plug This Product requires a three-wire grounded power cord and plug. The plug only fits in a grounded power outlet. Make sure the power outlet is properly grounded before inserting the plug. Do not insert the plug into a non-grounded power outlet. Contact your electrician for details. The cord length must not exceed 2.5 metres. To prevent electrical hazards, do not remove or disable the ground contact on the power cord. Replace the power cord if it gets damaged. Contact your dealer for an exact replacement. In Europe, the plug must be rated for 250 VAC, 10 amp minimum. The plug must display an international agency approval marking. The cord must be suitable for use in the end-user country. Consult your dealer or the local electrical authorities if you are unsure of the type of power cord to use in your country. Cables For cables which are not delivered with the Product in the computer's packaging:
The EMC performance of the system is guaranteed only if the cable and interface use efficient shielding. The use of shielded interface cable is required for USB, IEEE1394, serial, printer, game, analog or digital audio/ video, PS2, TV or FM antennas, and generally all high-speed cable interfaces. Use only UL Listed No. 26AWG or larger telecommunication cords. Only Ethernet LAN or RTC modem cable can have length exceeding 3 metres. Gateway recommends that you add a ferrite core round clip to each cable connecting your computer to a hardware device that was not included with your computer.
- Ferrite reference: 28A-2029 from Steward (two loops) During product certification, Gateway used the following cable quality:
- USB2.0 Certified Cables from Hama 46778
-
- RCA-RCA shielded Audio/Video Cables from Thomson KHC001M, KHC012M, IEEE1394 shielded FireWire from Hama 50011 KHC028M
- Stereo Jack shielded Audio cables from Hama 43330H, 42714H Heat Build-up and Portable Computers The AC adapter and the underside of the computer can become hot after prolonged use. Sustained physical contact with either should be avoided. CHASSIS COVER REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT Before removing the chassis cover to service or modify the equipment, you must disconnect all power and modem cords, and remove or disable the battery. Caution: Some components inside the computer can become hot after prolonged use. You then must close the chassis before you plug in and switch on the equipment. LASER COMPLIANCE STATEMENT The optical devices are tested and certified to be compliant with International Electrotechnical Commission IEC60825-1 and European EN60825-1 standards for Class 1 laser products. Class 1 laser products are not considered hazardous. The optical devices are designed such that there is never human access to laser radiation above a Class 1 level during normal operation or prescribed maintenance conditions. The optical devices installed in your computer are designed for use solely as components of such electronic product and therefore do not comply with the appropriate requirements of Code of Federal Regulation Sec. 1040.10 and Sec. 1040.11 for COMPLETE laser products. Because exposure to laser radiation is extremely hazardous, under no circumstances should the user attempt to disassemble the laser device. PACKAGING The packaging of this product is compliant with the European Environmental Directive 94/
62/EC from December 20 th 1994 and its equivalent in the French Legislation by the Decree 98-638 from july 20 th 1998. COMPLIANT WITH RUSSIAN REGULATORY CERTIFICATION
various | Manual | Users Manual | 2.16 MiB | November 08 2015 |
QCNFA222 Product namePCIE 802.11a/b/g/n 2.4GHz/5GHz + USB BT 4.0 card 20002009 by Qualcomm Atheros, Inc.. All rights reserved. Atheros, Atheros Driven, Atheros XR, Driving the Wireless Future, ROCm, Super AG, Super G, Total 802.11n, and Wake on Wireless are registered by Qualcomm Atheros, Inc. Atheros SST, Signal-
Sustain Technology, the Air is Cleaner at 5-GHz, XSPAN, Wireless Future. Unleashed Now., and 5-UP are trademarks of Qualcomm Atheros, Inc.The Atheros logo is a registered trademark of Qualcomm Atheros, Inc. All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders. Notice The information in this document has been carefully reviewed and is believed to be accurate. Nonetheless, this document is subject to change without notice, and Qualcomm Atheros, Inc. (Atheros) assumes no responsibility for any inaccuracies that may be contained in this document, and makes no commitment to update or to keep current the contained information, or to notify a person or organization of any updates. Atheros reserves the right to make changes, at any time, in order to improve reliability, function or design and to attempt to supply the best product possible. Atheros does not represent that products described herein are free from patent infringement or from any other third party right. No part of this document may be reproduced, adapted or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, for any purpose, except as expressly set forth in a written agreement signed by Atheros. Atheros or its affiliates may have patents or pending patent applications, trademarks, copyrights, maskwork rights or other intellectual property rights that apply to the ideas, material and information expressed herein. No license to such rights is provided except as expressly set forth in a written agreement signed by Atheros. ATHEROS MAKES NO WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THE CONTENT OF THIS DOCUMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL ATHEROS BE LIABLE FOR DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL SPECULATORY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING FROM THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THIS PRODUCT OR DOCUMENTATION, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBLITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. IN PARTICULAR, ATHEROS SHALL NOT HAVE LIABILITY FOR ANY HARDWARE, SOFTWARE, OR DATA TRANSMITTED OR OTHERWISE USED WITH THE PRODUCT, INCLUDING THE COSTS OF REPAIRING, REPLACING, INTEGRATING, INSTALLING OR RECOVERING SUCH HARDWARE, SOFTWARE OR DATA. ATHEROS SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AS THEY MIGHT OTHERWISE APPLY TO THIS DOCUMENT AND TO THE IDEAS, MATERIAL AND INFORMATION EXPRESSED HEREIN. Document Conventions Text Conventions bold Bold type within paragraph text indicates commands, file names, directory names, paths, output, or returned values. Example: The DK_Client package will not function unless you use the wdreg_install batch file. italic Within commands, italics indicate a variable that the user must specify. Example: mem_alloc size_in_bytes Titles of manuals or other published documents are also set in italics. Courier The Courier font indicates output or display. Example:
Menu Error:Unable to allocate memory for transfer!
The Menu character tag is used for menu items. Example: Choose Edit > Copy.
[ ]
{ }
|
>
Within commands, items enclosed in square brackets are optional parameters or values that the user can choose to specify or omit. Within commands, items enclosed in braces are options from which the user must choose. Within commands, the vertical bar separates options. An ellipsis indicates a repetition of the preceding parameter. The right angle bracket separates successive menu selections. Example: Start > Programs > DK > wdreg_install. Notices NOTE: This message denotes neutral or positive information that calls out important points to the text. A note provides information that may apply only in special cases. Qualcomm Atheros, Inc. COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL July 2013 iii Revision History Revision March 2009 Description of Changes Initial Release Qualcomm Atheros, Inc. 1700 Technology Drive, San Jose, CA 95110 t: 408/773-5200 f: 408/773-9940 Contents Introduction ............................................................................................................... 7 System Requirements ........................................................................................ 7 Profile Management ................................................................................................. 7 Create or Modify a Configuration Profile ....................................................... 7 Remove a Configuration Profile ....................................................................... 8 Auto Profile Selection Management ....................................................................... 8 Switching to a Different Configuration Profile ..................................................... 9 Import and Export Profiles ....................................................................................... 9 Importing a Profile ..................................................................................................... 9 Exporting a Profile ..................................................................................................... 9 TCP/IP Configuration .............................................................................................. 9 Configuring the TCP/IP Address for the network device: .................................... 9 General Tab .............................................................................................................. 10 Advanced Tab .......................................................................................................... 10 Security Tab ............................................................................................................. 11 Using EAP-TLS Security ................................................................................. 12 Using EAP-TTLS Security ............................................................................... 12 Using PEAP (EAP-GTC) Security .................................................................. 13 Using PEAP-MSCHAP V2 Security ............................................................... 14 Using LEAP Security ....................................................................................... 15 Configuring LEAP .................................................................................................... 15 Pre-Shared Encryption Keys .................................................................................. 16 Defining pre-shared encryption keys: ................................................................... 16 Overwriting an Existing Static WEP Key.............................................................. 16 Disabling Static WEP .............................................................................................. 16 Using WPA Passphrase Security .......................................................................... 17 Zero Configuration ................................................................................................. 17 Wireless Network Configuration ............................................................................ 17 Check the Status Information or Diagnostics ...................................................... 18 Current Status ................................................................................................... 18 Adapter Information Button .................................................................................. 19 Diagnostics Tab ....................................................................................................... 19 Transmitted Frames ................................................................................................ 20 Received Frames .................................................................................................... 20 Scan Available Networks ....................................................................................... 20 Connecting to a different network ......................................................................... 20 Qualcomm Atheros, Inc. COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL July 2013 v Display Settings ....................................................................................................... 22 ACU Tools ................................................................................................................ 22 Tray Icon .................................................................................................................. 23 Color .......................................................................................................................... 24 Quality ....................................................................................................................... 24 RSSI* ........................................................................................................................ 24 Ad Hoc Mode .......................................................................................................... 24 Ad Hoc Mode Profile Configuration ............................................................. 24 Infrastructure (Access Point) Mode ...................................................................... 25 Infrastructure (Access Point) Mode Profile Configuration ........................ 25 Uninstall an Old Driver ......................................................................................... 26 Additional Security Features ................................................................................. 26 Message Integrity Check (MIC) ............................................................................ 26 Bluetooth Adapter Installation and Operation ................................................... 27 Getting Started .................................................................................................. 27 Installing the Bluetooth Suite ................................................................................. 27 Downloading the Bluetooth Suite .................................................................. 27 Copying Bluetooth Suite from the CD .......................................................... 28 Launching the Bluetooth Suite .............................................................................. 31 Introduction to the Bluetooth Suite ...................................................................... 33 Menu Bar ........................................................................................................... 34 Search For Device ...................................................................................... 34 Bluetooth Configuration .......................................................................... 34 Bluetooth Help Topics .............................................................................. 35 Bluetooth Exchange Folder ...................................................................... 35 Bluetooth Places Panel..................................................................................... 35 Uninstalling the Bluetooth Suite ........................................................................... 36 Connecting to an HID Device ............................................................................... 38 Setup Requirements ................................................................................................ 38 Launching the Bluetooth Suite .............................................................................. 38 Connecting to a Sync Device ................................................................................. 41 Setup Requirements ................................................................................................ 41 Launching the Synchronization Process .............................................................. 42 Advanced Status Information ............................................................................... 46 Regulatory Compliance Notices ............................................................................... USA-Federal Communications Commission (FCC) ............................................... European Community CE Notice: ....................................................................... Taiwan NCC Radio Compliance: .............................................................................. 2.4GHz Operation ................................................................................................ Qualcomm Atheros, Inc. 1700 Technology Drive, San Jose, CA 95110 t: 408/773-5200 f: 408/773-9940 Introduction The Atheros 802.11n + Bluetooth Adapter supports 802.11n and Bluetooth EDR2.0 operation. The card uses the Atheros Client Utility (ACU) which is a user-mode utility designed to edit and add profiles for selected Atheros network interface adapters. System Requirements Laptop/ PC containing:
32-bit PCI Express Bus 32 MB memory or greater 300 MHz processor or higher Microsoft Windows 2000, Windows Millennium Edition, Windows 98 Second Edition, Windows XP, or Windows NT 4.0 (with Service Pack 6) Profile Management Configure the wireless network adapter (wireless card) from the Profile Management tab of the Atheros Client Utility. Add a profile Edit a profile Import a Profile Export a Profile Order profiles Switch to a different profile Remove a profile Connect to a Different Network The wireless network adapter works in either infrastructure mode (which uses an access point) or ad hoc mode (a group of stations participating in the wireless LAN). Create or Modify a Configuration Profile To add a new configuration profile, click New on the Profile Management tab. To modify a configuration profile, select the configuration from the Profile list and click the Modify button. The Profile Management dialog box displays the General tab. In profile management:
Edit the General tab. Edit the Security tab. Edit the Advanced tab. To configure a profile for ad hoc or access point (infrastructure) mode, edit the Network Type field on the Advanced tab. Note that the ACU only allows the creation of 16 configuration profiles. After the creation of 16 profiles, clicking the New button displays an error message. Remove an old profile or modify an existing profile for a new use. Qualcomm Atheros, Inc. COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL July 2013 vii Remove a Configuration Profile 1. Go to the Profile Management tab. 2. Select the profile to remove from the list of configuration profiles. 3. Click the Remove button. Auto Profile Selection Management Including a profile in the auto selection feature allows the wireless adapter to automatically select that profile from the list of profiles and use it to connect to the network. Including a profile in auto profile selection:
1. On the Profile Management tab, click the Order Profiles button. 2. The Auto Profile Selection Management window appears, with a list of all created profiles in the Available Profiles box. 3. Highlight the profiles to add to auto profile selection, then click Add. The profiles appear in the Auto Selected Profiles box. Ordering the auto selected profiles:
1. Highlight a profile in the Auto Selected Profiles box. 2. Click Move Up, Move Down, or Remove as appropriate. The first profile in the Auto Selected Profiles box has highest priority, and the last profile has lowest priority. 3. Click OK. 4. Check the Auto Select Profiles box. 5. Save the modified configuration file. When auto profile selection is enabled by checking Auto Select Profiles on the Profile Management tab, the adapter scans for an available network. The profile with the highest priority and the same SSID as one of the found networks is the one that is used to connect to the network. If the connection fails, the adapter tries the next highest priority profile that matches the SSID, and so on. With auto profile selection enabled, the wireless adapter scans for available networks. The highest priority profile with the same SSID as a found network is used to connect to the network. On a failed connection, the adapter tries with the next highest priority profile. Qualcomm Atheros, Inc. 1700 Technology Drive, San Jose, CA 95110 t: 408/773-5200 f: 408/773-9940 Switching to a Different Configuration Profile 1. To switch to a different profile, go to the Profile Management tab. 2. Click on the profile name in the Profile List. 3. Click the Activate button. The Profile List provides icons that specify the operational state for that profile. The list also provides icons that specify the signal strength for that profile. Import and Export Profiles Importing a Profile 1. From the Profile Management tab, click the Import button. The Import Profile window appears. 2. Browse to the directory where the profile is located. 3. Highlight the profile name. 4. Click Open. The imported profile appears in the profiles list. Exporting a Profile 1. From the Profile Management tab, highlight the profile to export. 2. Click the Export button. The Export Profile window appears. 3. Browse to the directory to export the profile to. 4. Click Save. The profile is exported to the specified location. TCP/IP Configuration Configuring the TCP/IP Address for the network device:
1. After configuring the wireless network adapter properties, open the Control Panel and open Network and Dial-up Connections. 2. Find the Local Area Connection associated with the wireless network adapter. Right-
click that connection, and click Properties. 3. Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) and click Properties. 4. Click the radio button Use the following IP address, then enter an IP address and Subnet mask. Assigning an IP address and Subnet mask allows stations to operate in access point mode (infrastructure mode) or in ad hoc mode and to have Internet access. Default gateway and DNS server information is also required. IP configuration information
(DHCP to assign the IP address, gateway and DNS server IP addresses) is usually obtained from the corporate IT staff. 5. Click OK to finish. Qualcomm Atheros, Inc. COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL July 2013 ix General Tab In the Atheros Client Utility, access the General tab by clicking New or Modify on the Profile Management tab. Edit the fields in the General tab to configure the configuration profile. Make sure to also edit the Security and Advanced tabs. Profile Name Identifies the configuration profile. This name must be unique. Profile names are not case sensitive. Client Name Identifies the client machine. Network Names (SSIDs) The IEEE 802.11 wireless network name. This field has a maximum limit of 32 characters. Configure up to three SSIDs (SSID1, SSID2, and SSID3). Advanced Tab In the Atheros Client Utility, access the Advanced tab by clicking New or Modify on the Profile Management tab, then clicking the Advanced tab in Profile Management. Edit the fields in the Advanced tab of Profile Management to configure the profile. Transmit Power Level Power Save Mode Selects the transmit power level in mW. Actual transmit power may be limited by hardware. Specify:
Maximum mode causes the access point to buffer incoming messages for the wireless adapter. The adapter periodically polls the access point to see if any messages are waiting. Normal uses maximum when retrieving a large number of packets, then switches back to power save mode after retrieving the packets. Off turns power saving off, thus powering up the wireless adapter continuously for a short message response time. Network Type Specifies the network as either infrastructure or ad hoc. 802.11b Preamble Authentication Mode Specifies the preamble setting in 802.11b. The default setting is Short &
Long (access point mode), which allows both short and long headers in the 802.11b frames. The adapter can only use short radio headers if the access point supports and uses them. Set to Long Only to override allowing short frames. Select the mode the wireless adapter uses to authenticate to an AP:
Auto causes the adapter to attempt authentication using shared, but switches it to open authentication if shared fails. Open enables an adapter to attempt authentication regardless of its WEP settings. It will only associate with the access point if the WEP keys on both the adapter and the access point match. Shared only allows the adapter to associate with access points that have the same WEP key. Qualcomm Atheros, Inc. 1700 Technology Drive, San Jose, CA 95110 t: 408/773-5200 f: 408/773-9940 For infrastructure (access point) networks, click the Preferred APs button to specify up to four access points to which the adapter should attempt to associate. Security Tab In the Atheros Client Utility, access the Security tab by clicking New or Modify on the Profile Management tab. Click the Security tab in the Profile Management window. Edit the fields in the Security tab of Profile Management to configure the profile. To define the security mode, select the radio button of the desired security mode. Make sure to also edit the General and Advanced tabs. WPA/WPA2 Enables the use of Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA). Choosing WPA/WPA2 opens the WPA/WPA2 EAP drop-down menu. The options include:
EAP-FAST EAP-TLS EAP-TTLS PEAP (EAP-GTC) PEAP (EAP-MSCHAP V2) LEAP WPA/WPA2 Passphrase Enables WPA/WPA2 Passphrase security. Click on the Configure button and fill in the WPA/WPA2 Passphrase. 802.1x Enables 802.1x security. This option requires IT administration. Choosing 802.1x opens the 802.1x EAP type drop-down menu. The options include:
EAP-FAST EAP-TLS EAP-TTLS PEAP (EAP-GTC) PEAP (EAP-MSCHAP V2) LEAP Pre-Shared Key
(Static WEP) If the access point that the wireless adapter is associating to has WEP set to Optional and the client has WEP enabled, make sure that Allow Association to Mixed Cells is checked on the Security Tab to allow association. Note: If the Lock checkbox is checked, you cannot change any values in this profile. See your system administrator. Enables the use of pre-shared keys that are defined on both the access point and the station. To define pre-shared encryption keys, choose the Pre-Shared Key radio button and click the Configure button to fill in the Define Pre-
Shared Keys window. If the access point that the wireless adapter is associating to has WEP set to Optional and the client has WEP enabled, make sure that Allow Association to Mixed Cells is checked on the Security Tab to Qualcomm Atheros, Inc. COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL July 2013 xi allow association. None No security (not recommended). Using EAP-TLS Security To use EAP-TLS security In the Atheros Client Utility, access the Security tab in the Profile Management window. 1. On the Security tab, choose the WPA radio button. OR: On the Security tab, choose the 802.1x radio button. 2. Choose EAP-TLS from the drop-down menu. Enabling EAP-TLS security:
To use EAP-TLS security, the machine must already have the EAP-TLS certificates downloaded onto it. Check with the IT manager. 1. If EAP-TLS is supported, choose EAP-TLS from the drop-down menu on the right, then click the Configure button. 2. Select the appropriate certificate authority from the list. The server/domain name and the login name are filled in automatically from the certificate information. Click OK. 3. Click OK. 4. Activate the profile. Using EAP-TTLS Security To use EAP security In the Atheros Client Utility, access the Security tab in the Profile Management window. 1. On the Security tab, choose the WPA/WPA2 radio button. OR: On the Security tab, choose the 802.1x radio button. 2. Choose EAP-TTLS from the drop-down menu. Enabling EAP-TTLS security:
To use EAP-TTLS security, the machine must already have the EAP-TTLS certificates downloaded onto it. Check with the IT manager. 1. If EAP-TTLS is supported, choose EAP-TTLS from the drop-down menu on the right, then click the Configure button. 2. Select the appropriate certificate from the drop-down list and click OK. 3. Specify a user name for EAP authentication:
Check Use Windows User Name to use the Windows user name as the EAP user name. 4. Click Advanced and:
OR: Enter an EAP user name in the User Name field to use a separate user name and password and start the EAP authentication process. Qualcomm Atheros, Inc. 1700 Technology Drive, San Jose, CA 95110 t: 408/773-5200 f: 408/773-9940 Leave the server name field blank for the client to accept a certificate from any server with a certificate signed by the authority listed in the Network Certificate Authority drop-down list. (recommended) Enter the domain name of the server from which the client will accept a certificate. Change the login name if needed. 5. Click OK. 6. Enable the profile. Using PEAP (EAP-GTC) Security To use PEAP (EAP-GTC) security In the Atheros Client Utility, access the Security tab in the Profile Management window. 1. On the Security tab, choose the WPA radio button. OR: On the Security tab, choose the 802.1x radio button. 2. Choose PEAP (EAP-GTC) from the drop-down menu. To use PEAP (EAP-GTC) security, the server must have WPA-PEAP certificates, and the server properties must already be set. Check with the IT manager. 1. Click the Configure button. 2. To avoid the need to log on again after resuming operation (for example, after your computer goes into standby or hibernate mode), check Always Resume the Secure Session. 3. Select the appropriate network certificate authority from the drop-down list. 4. Specify a user name for inner PEAP tunnel authentication:
Check Use Windows User Name to use the Windows user name as the PEAP user name. OR: Enter a PEAP user name in the User Name field to use a separate user name and start the PEAP authentication process. 5. Choose Token or Static Password, depending on the user database. Note that Token uses a hardware token device or the Secure Computing SofToken program (version 1.3 or later) to obtain and enter a one-time password during authentication. 6. Click Settings... and:
Leave the server name field blank for the client to accept a certificate from any server with a certificate signed by the authority listed in the Network Certificate Authority drop-down list. (recommended) Enter the domain name of the server from which the client will accept a certificate. The login name used for PEAP tunnel authentication fills in automatically as PEAP-xxxxxxxxxxxx, where xxxxxxxxxxxx is the computer's MAC address. Change the login name if needed. 7. Click OK. 8. Enable the profile. Qualcomm Atheros, Inc. COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL July 2013 xiii Using PEAP-MSCHAP V2 Security To use PEAP-MSCHAP V2 security In the Atheros Client Utility, access the Security tab in the Profile Management window. 1. On the Security tab, choose the WPA radio button. OR: On the Security tab, choose the 802.1x radio button. 2. Choose PEAP (EAP-MSCHAP V2) from the drop-down menu. To use PEAP (EAP-MSCHAP V2) security, the server must have WPA-PEAP certificates, and the server properties must already be set. Check with the IT manager. 1. Click the Configure button. 2. Select the appropriate certificate from the drop-down list. 3. Specify a user name for inner PEAP tunnel authentication:
Check Use Windows User Name to use the Windows user name as the PEAP user name. OR: Enter a PEAP user name in the User Name field to use a separate user name and start the PEAP authentication process. 4. Click Advanced and:
Leave the server name field blank for the client to accept a certificate from any server with a certificate signed by the authority listed in the Network Certificate Authority drop-down list. (recommended) Enter the domain name of the server from which the client will accept a certificate. The login name used for PEAP tunnel authentication fills in automatically as PEAP-xxxxxxxxxxxx, where xxxxxxxxxxxx is the computer's MAC address. Change the login name if needed. 5. Click OK. 6. Enable the profile. Qualcomm Atheros, Inc. 1700 Technology Drive, San Jose, CA 95110 t: 408/773-5200 f: 408/773-9940 Using LEAP Security To use security In the Atheros Client Utility, access the Security tab in the Profile Management window. LEAP security requires that all infrastructure devices (e.g. access points and servers) are configured for LEAP authentication. Check with the IT manager. Configuring LEAP On the Security tab, choose the WPA radio button. Choose WPA-LEAP from the OR: On the Security tab, choose the 802.1x radio button. Choose LEAP from the drop-down menu. drop-down menu. 1. Click the Configure button. 2. Specify a user name and password. Select to Use Temporary User Name and Password by choosing the radio button:
Check Use Windows User Name to use the Windows user name as the LEAP user name. OR: Check Manually Prompt for LEAP User Name and Password to manually login and start the LEAP authentication process. Select to Use Saved User Name and Password by choosing the radio button:
Specify the LEAP user name, password, and domain to save and use. 3. Enter the user name and password. 4. Confirm the password. 5. Specify a domain name:
Check the Include Windows Logon Domain with User Name setting to pass the Windows login domain and user name to the RADIUS server. (default) OR: Enter a specific domain name. 6. If desired, check No Network Connection Unless User Is Logged In to force the wireless adapter to disassociate after logging off. 7. Enter the LEAP authentication timeout time (between 30 and 500 seconds) to specify how long LEAP should wait before declaring authentication failed, and sending an error message. The default is 90 seconds. 8. Click OK. 9. Enable the profile. Qualcomm Atheros, Inc. COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL July 2013 xv Pre-Shared Encryption Keys Defining pre-shared encryption keys:
1. Click the Pre-Shared Key (Static WEP) radio button on the Security tab. 2. Click the Configure button. 3. Fill in the fields in the Define Pre-Shared Keys dialog box:
Key Entry Determines the entry method for an encryption key: hexadecimal (0-9, A-F), or ASCII text (all keyboard characters except spaces). Encryption Keys WEP Keys
(1-4) Selects the default encryption keys used. Only allows the selection for a shared First, Second, Third, or Fourth key whose corresponding field has been completed. Defines a set of shared encryption keys for network configuration security. At least one Shared Key field must be populated to enable security using a shared key. Click on the radio button to set the key as the default encryption key. WEP Key Size Defines the size for each encryption key. The options include:
64-bit (enter 10 digits for hexadecimal, 5 ASCII characters) 128-bit (enter 26 digits for hexadecimal, 13 digits for ASCII) 152-bit (enter 32 digits hexadecimal, 16 digits for ASCII) 4. Click OK for the changes to take effect. Overwriting an Existing Static WEP Key 1. Click the Pre-Shared Key radio button on the Security tab. 2. Click on Configure. 3. In the window, all existing static WEP keys are displayed as asterisks for security reasons. Click in the field of the existing static WEP key to overwrite. 4. Delete the asterisks in that field. 5. Enter a new key. 6. Make sure to select the Transmit Key button to the left of this key is selected for the key to transmit packets. 7. Click OK. Disabling Static WEP To disable static WEP for a particular profile, Select any other security option on the Profile Management tab to automatically disable static WEP Qualcomm Atheros, Inc. 1700 Technology Drive, San Jose, CA 95110 t: 408/773-5200 f: 408/773-9940 OR: choose None on the Security tab to disable security, and click OK (not recommended). Using WPA Passphrase Security To use WPA Passphrase security In the Atheros Client Utility, access the Security tab in the Profile Management window. 1. On the Security tab, choose the WPA Passphrase radio button. 2. Click on the Configure button. 3. Fill in the WPA Passphrase. 4. Click OK. Zero Configuration This section describes the operation of the Atheros Client Utility (ACU) and Windows XP Wireless Configuration Service (WZCS). Wireless Network Configuration The Windows WZCS is a service that manages the wireless connection in a largely dynamic way. Only minimal connection information must be identified and configured. To set Zero Configuration on Windows XP, take the following steps:
1. 2. Select the check box Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings to set In Windows XP, open the Wireless Network Configuration Properties dialog box. Zero Configuration. When this check box is selected, Windows XP takes control of these settings for all configuration profiles:
SSID Security keys Ad hoc settings Note that Windows XP takes control of these settings for all configuration profiles, thus users can not ( create new profiles with different settings while using Windows Zero Configuration. The Zero Configuration settings override all configuration profiles, even when you select other options. However, the ACU does still control the following settings when Zero Configuration is set:
Power settings Active/Passive scanning (where applicable) Transmit power Wireless band Short/Long preamble (802.11b) Qualcomm Atheros, Inc. COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL xvii July 2013 When Zero Configuration is in use, a pop-up message is displayed on the ACU when you attempt to create or edit a configuration profile from the Profile Management tab of the ACU. In Windows XP, open the Wireless Network Configuration Properties dialog box. To turn Zero Configuration off on Windows XP, take the following steps:
1. 2. Clear the check box Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings to set Zero Configuration. When this check box is cleared, all profile settings are controlled by the configuration profile, which is set up from the ACU Profile Management tab. Check the Status Information or Diagnostics The Atheros client utility includes a number of tools to display current diagnostics and status information. Check current status Check driver information Check receive and transmit diagnostics Current Status The Current Status tab contains general information about the program and its operations. The Current Status tab does not require any configuration. The following table describes the items found on the Current Status screen. Profile Name The name of the current selected configuration profile. Set up the configuration name on the General tab. Link Status Shows whether the station is associated to the wireless network. Wireless Mode Displays the wireless mode. Configure the wireless mode on the Advanced tab. IP Address Displays the computer's IP address. Network Type The type of network the station is connected to. Options include:
Infrastructure (access point) Ad Hoc Configure the network type on the Advanced tab. Current Channel Shows the currently connected channel. Server Based Authentication Shows whether server based authentication is used. Qualcomm Atheros, Inc. 1700 Technology Drive, San Jose, CA 95110 t: 408/773-5200 f: 408/773-9940 Data Encryption Displays the encryption type the driver is using. Configure the encryption type on the Security tab. Signal Strength Shows the strength of the signal. Click the Advanced button to see the advanced status diagnostics. Adapter Information Button The Adapter Information button contains general information about the network interface card (the wireless network adapter) and the network driver interface specification (NDIS) driver. Access the adapter information from the Diagnostics tab. Card Name Name of the wireless network adapter. MAC Address MAC address of the wireless network adapter. Driver Driver name and path of the wireless network adapter driver. Driver Version Version of the wireless network adapter driver. Driver Date Creation date of the wireless network adapter driver. Client Name Name of the client computer. Diagnostics Tab The ACU Diagnostics tab provides allows retrieval of receive and transmit statistics. The Diagnostics tab does not require any configuration. It lists these receive and transmit diagnostics for frames received by or transmitted by the wireless network adapter:
Multicast packets transmitted and received Broadcast packets transmitted and received Unicast packets transmitted and received Total bytes transmitted and received The Adapter Information button has general information about the wireless network adapter and NDIS driver. The Advanced Statistics button to shows statistics for diagnostics for frames received by or transmitted to the wireless network adapter:
Qualcomm Atheros, Inc. COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL July 2013 xix Transmitted Frames Frames transmitted OK Frames retried Frames dropped No ACK frames ACK frames RTS frames Clear-to-send (CTS) frames No CTS frames Retried RTS frames Retried data frames Received Frames Frames received OK Beacons Frames with errors CRC errors Encryption errors Duplicate frames AP mismatches Data rate mismatches Authentication time-out Authentication rejects: the number of AP authentication failures received by the wireless network adapter Association time-out Association rejects: the number of AP authentication rejects received by the wireless network adapter Standard MIC OK Standard MIC errors CKIP MIC OK CKIP MIC errors Scan Available Networks Click the Scan button on the Profile Management tab to scan for available infrastructure and ad hoc networks. On this list, click Refresh to refresh the list at any time. Connecting to a different network Highlight a network name and click the Activate button to connect an available network. If no configuration profile exists for that network, the Profile Management window opens to the General tab. Fill in the profile name and click OK to create the configuration profile for that network. Infrastructure
(AP) Network Connected Infrastructure
(AP) Network Qualcomm Atheros, Inc. 1700 Technology Drive, San Jose, CA 95110 t: 408/773-5200 f: 408/773-9940 Ad Hoc Network Connected Ad Hoc Network Encryption Active Qualcomm Atheros, Inc. COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL July 2013 xxi Display Settings To change the display settings, choose Options > Display Settings from the menu. The display settings dialog box contains tools to set the:
Signal Strength Display Units Sets the units used when displaying signal strength: percentage (%) or dBm. Refresh Interval Use the up/down arrows to set the display refresh interval in seconds. Data Display Sets the display to cumulative or relative:
Relative displays the change in statistical data since the last update. Cumulative displays statistical data collected since opening the profile. ACU Tools Use the Action menu to access the Atheros Client Utility tools:
Enable/Disable Radio Enable or disable the RF Signal on all Atheros station reference designs. Enable/Disable Tray Icon Enable or disable the tray icon. Troubleshooting Run the optional Troubleshooting Utility. Manual LEAP Login Log in to LEAP manually, if LEAP is set to manually prompt for user name and password on each login. Reauthenticate Reauthenticate to a LEAP-configured access point. Exit Exit the Atheros Client Utility application. Qualcomm Atheros, Inc. 1700 Technology Drive, San Jose, CA 95110 t: 408/773-5200 f: 408/773-9940 Tray Icon The tray icon appears at the bottom of the screen, and shows the signal strength using colors and the received signal strength indication (RSSI). Hold the mouse cursor over the tray icon to display the current configuration profile name and association, as well as transmit and receive speed and the wireless adapter name and IP address. Right-click on the tray icon to:
Help Open the online help. Open Atheros Client Utility Launch the Atheros Client Utility (ACU). Use the ACU to configure a profile or view status and statistics information. Troubleshooting Run the Troubleshooting Utility. Preferences Set the ACU startup and menu options. Check to start the program automatically when Windows starts, and check menu items that should appear on the popup menu. Enable/Disable Radio Enable or disable the RF signal. Manual LEAP Login Log in to LEAP manually, if LEAP is set to manually prompt for user name and password on each login. Reauthenticate Reauthenticate to the access point. Select Profile Click a configuration profile name to switch to. If no Show Connection Status Shows whether auto profile selection is enabled. configuration profile exists for a connection, add a profile. This window displays connection information:
Active Profile Displays the active configuration profile name. Auto Profile Selection Connection Status Link Quality SSID Access Point Name Access Point IP Address Link Speed Adapter IP Address Displays whether the adapter is connected to a wireless network. Lists the quality of the link connection. Displays the SSID of the associated network. Shows the name of the AP the wireless adapter is connected to. Shows the IP address of the access point the wireless adapter is connected to. Lists the speed of the link connection. Displays the IP address of the wireless adapter. Qualcomm Atheros, Inc. COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL xxiii July 2013 Exit Exit the Atheros Client Utility application. The colors are defined as follows:
Color Green Green Yellow Red Gray Quality Excellent Good Poor Poor RSSI*
20 dB +
10-20 dB +
5-10 dB
< 5 dB No Connection No Connection
*Received signal strength indication RSSI. Displayed in dB or percentage. Enable or disable the tray icon in the Action menu. Ad Hoc Mode In ad hoc mode, a wireless network adapter works within an independent basic service set (IBSS), as illustrated here. All stations communicate directly with other stations without using an access point (AP). To connect to an ad hoc network, configure the profile for ad hoc mode. Ad Hoc operation may be limited by Hardware to meet regulatory requirements. Ad Hoc Mode Profile Configuration To configure a profile in ad hoc mode, change the Network Type in the Profile Management's Advanced tab. For ad hoc mode, modify the settings:
Network Name (on General Tab) Qualcomm Atheros, Inc. 1700 Technology Drive, San Jose, CA 95110 t: 408/773-5200 f: 408/773-9940 Transmit Power Level 802.11b Preamble (if using 802.11b) Wireless Mode When Starting an Ad Hoc Network Make sure to also edit the General and Security tabs. Infrastructure (Access Point) Mode In infrastructure (access point (AP)) mode, the wireless network adapter participates in a basic service set (BSS) as a station, and communicates with the other stations through an AP, as illustrated here. To connect to an access point network, configure the profile for access point mode. Infrastructure (Access Point) Mode Profile Configuration To configure a profile in infrastructure (access point) mode, change the Network Type in the Advanced tab. For access point mode, modify the settings:
Power Save Mode 802.11b Preamble (if using 802.11b) Wireless Mode 802.11 Authentication Mode Make sure to also edit the General and Security tabs. Qualcomm Atheros, Inc. COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL xxv July 2013 Uninstall an Old Driver Uninstall an old driver before upgrading to a new NDIS driver release. To remove the newly installed driver from the system if the system does not have previously installed versions of the NDIS driver, proceed to Step 4. 1. To remove the NDIS driver from the OS, go to Device Manager, right-click Atheros AR500x Wireless Network Adapter, and choose Uninstall. 2. Click OK to uninstall the device. 3. When the device is uninstalled from Device Manager, search for and delete the driver files that reside in the system. a. Go to the Start menu and choose Search > For Files or Folders. b. Enter oem*.inf in the Search for files or folders named: field, and enter Atheros in the Containing text: field. c. Click Search Now. A few files matching these criteria are possible, if previous drivers have not been removed properly. d. Choose the files that have been found and delete them from the system. 4. To complete the uninstallation, remove the file ar5211.sys from the folder
\WINNT\system32\drivers. Additional Security Features These security features prevent attacks on a wireless network's WEP keys. The wireless adapter automatically supports each of these features, but these features must be enabled on the access point. Message Integrity Check (MIC) MIC prevents bit-flip attacks on encrypted packets. In a bit-flip attack, someone intercepts an encrypted message retransmits it after some alterations. Thus the receiver accepts the message as legitimate. The MIC adds some bytes to each packet to protect it against tampering. Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP) This feature prevents attacks on WEP in which someone catches encrypted packets and uses their initialization vector (IV) to decipher the WEP key. TKIP removes the predictability to protect both unicast and broadcast WEP keys. Qualcomm Atheros, Inc. 1700 Technology Drive, San Jose, CA 95110 t: 408/773-5200 f: 408/773-9940 Broadcast Key Rotation EAP authentication provides dynamic unicast WEP keys for wireless adapters, but uses static broadcast keys. In broadcast WEP key rotation, the access point supplies a dynamic broadcast WEP key and changes it at intervals. Bluetooth Adapter Installation and Operation Getting Started This chapter describes how to install, uninstall, launch, and use the Bluetooth Suite. The following major topics are covered in this chapter:
Installing the Bluetooth Suite Launching the Bluetooth Suite Introduction to the Bluetooth Suite Uninstalling the Bluetooth Suite Installing the Bluetooth Suite You either received a password from Atheros to download the Bluetooth Suite software from the Atheros web site or received the Bluetooth Suite on a CD. NOTE: If you are installing Bluetooth Suite on a machine that already has an existing Bluetooth Suite, you need not uninstall it because Bluetooth Suite supports the upgrade feature. If you need to uninstall Bluetooth Suite, refer to Uninstalling the Bluetooth Suite on page 2-10 on how to uninstall Bluetooth Suite. Software installation is a three-step process and it is important to perform these steps before you can use the Bluetooth Suite:
Installing the Bluetooth Suite Installing the radio (profile) drivers 1. 2. 3. Updating the drivers All these steps are explained in the installation process. Downloading the Bluetooth Suite 1. Go to the Atheros Support web site: https://support.atheros.com/
2. Login to the web site using your user name and password provided 3. Go to the AR3011 Software Package & Documentation tab of the Atheros web by Atheros Support. site. Qualcomm Atheros, Inc. COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL xxvii July 2013 7. 4. Download the appropriate Bluetooth Suite release, extract the 6. Install the Bluetooth Suite by double-clicking on the Bluetooth files, and save them on your system. Suite setup.exe file. Follow the rest of the installation procedure described in Copying Bluetooth Suite from the CD on page 2-2. Copying Bluetooth Suite from the CD 1. Insert the CD containing the Bluetooth Suite into the CD drive. 2. Double Click on the Bluetooth Suite setup.exe file. The InstallShield Wizard starts to prepare the package for installation. The Welcome to InstallShield Wizard for Bluetooth Suite screen (see Figure 2-1) is displayed. Figure 2-1. Bluetooth Suite - Welcome Screen 3. Click Next. You will see the Customer Information screen. See Figure 2-2. Qualcomm Atheros, Inc. 1700 Technology Drive, San Jose, CA 95110 t: 408/773-5200 f: 408/773-9940 Figure 2-2. Bluetooth Suite Customer Information Screen 4. Enter the user name and company name and choose the intended user of this application
- Anyone who uses this computer (all users) or Only for me and click Next. You will see Choose Destination Location screen. See Figure 2-3. Figure 2-3. Bluetooth Suite Choose Destination Location 5. The default destination location is already selected. Click 6. Click Next. Change to browse to a different destination. You will see Start Copying Files screen that displays the current settings including user Qualcomm Atheros, Inc. COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL xxix July 2013 information, setup type, and destination directory. This allows you to review and modify the setup information. See Figure 2-4. Figure 2-4. Bluetooth Suite - Start Copying Screen 7. Click Next. The Bluetooth Suite begins to configure and copy the new software. It also removes any backup files. When the Bluetooth Suite installation is complete, you will see the Finish screen. See Figure 2-5. Figure 2-5. Bluetooth Suite - Installation Setup Status 8. When prompted to restart your computer, select Yes, I want to restart my computer now option and click Finish. Qualcomm Atheros, Inc. 1700 Technology Drive, San Jose, CA 95110 t: 408/773-5200 f: 408/773-9940 Figure 2-6. Bluetooth Suite - Finishing the Installation The installation is complete. This process creates a Launch Bluetooth Suite shortcut on your desktop. Now you are ready to run Bluetooth Suite. Launching the Bluetooth Suite 1. Insert the Bluetooth Suite USB device into the USB port of your system. NOTE: You can insert the Bluetooth Suite USB device in any USB port. You might see Found New Hardware message. 2. Double click on the Bluetooth Suite icon on your desktop or choose start > All Programs > Bluetooth Suite > Launch Bluetooth Suite. It displays the blank Atheros Bluetooth Suite screen. NOTE: If no Bluetooth devices are found within range, it is normal for new installation. Bluetooth Suite screen does not display such devices when launched for the first time. You need to click on the Discovery button the top left panel of the window to see all the Bluetooth devices in range. See Figure 2-7. Qualcomm Atheros, Inc. COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL xxxi July 2013 Figure 2-7. Bluetooth Suite Startup Screen During Discovery When the Bluetooth Suite finds devices in range, it displays them. See Figure 2-8. Qualcomm Atheros, Inc. 1700 Technology Drive, San Jose, CA 95110 t: 408/773-5200 f: 408/773-9940 Figure 2-8. Discovered Bluetooth Devices NOTE: Trusted remote devices will show Paired status in Device list, and Connected remote devices will show Connected status in Device list. Other devices will display Inrange status. Introduction to the Bluetooth Suite Now that you have successfully launched the Bluetooth Suite, spend few minutes in getting to know your Bluetooth Suite. The following few pages explain various features and components associated with the Bluetooth Suite GUI. The My Bluetooth Suite is the main screen that consists of three major parts:
Menu bar Bluetooth Tasks area Bluetooth devices along with their IP addresses and types are displayed on the right panel. In addition, there is a Bluetooth Suite Tray which allows you to launch the Bluetooth Suite. Qualcomm Atheros, Inc. COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL xxxiii July 2013 Menu Bar Bluetooth menu is the primary menu on the Bluetooth Suite screen. The options associated with this menu are:
Search for Device Bluetooth Configuration Bluetooth Help Topics Bluetooth Exchange Folder About Bluetooth NOTE: Some of these functions are available from the Bluetooth Suite Tray. These options are described below in detail. Search For Device Clicking this button begins to search for remote Bluetooth devices in range. Found devices will display in right panel. Bluetooth Configuration Clicking on the Configuration menu option displays the Bluetooth Suite Configuration screen which allows you to specify Bluetooth Suite tasks and settings associated with Bluetooth device recovery and device filters. This function is also available through the toolbar. Nine configuration screens are associated with Bluetooth Suite. Those screens are:
Bluetooth Suite Settings Local Device Bluetooth Security Profile Manager Shared Folders Object Push Audio Basic Imaging Personal Area Networking Fax Server Configuration Sync These options are described in detail in Chapter 3. Qualcomm Atheros, Inc. 1700 Technology Drive, San Jose, CA 95110 t: 408/773-5200 f: 408/773-9940 Bluetooth Help Topics Click this button to display any help topics. Bluetooth Exchange Folder Clicking this button to display the content of Bluetooth exchange folder. From Bluetooth Suite window, choose Bluetooth->Bluetooth Exchange Folder to access Exchange share folder for Object Push feature. Bluetooth Places Panel When you launch the Bluetooth Suite, various Bluetooth devices in the Bluetooth neighborhood are listed on the right panel. These typically consist of audio devices, computers (both laptop and desktop), phones, peripheral devices such as Fax, printer, mouse, headset, and imaging devices. If any of these devices are discovered, they are listed on the right window panel. For example, if a Bluetooth mouse is discovered in the Bluetooth neighborhood, it is shown as peripheral pointing device, its brand name, address, and service status (in range, paired, connected or disconnected). You can select a device and right mouse click button to select the following:
Name discovery Delete Pair Service Discovery Properties See Figure 2-9 for details. Figure 2-9. Bluetooth Places Device Options Qualcomm Atheros, Inc. COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL xxxv July 2013 Uninstalling the Bluetooth Suite Anytime you install a new version of Bluetooth Suite, you need to uninstall any existing version of the Bluetooth Suite. Follow this procedure to uninstall the Bluetooth Suite. 1. Make sure the Bluetooth dongle is removed from any system USB 2. Choose start > All Programs > Bluetooth Suite > Uninstall Bluetooth Suite. The system prepares for uninstallation. A screen is briefly displayed that shows that it is ready to uninstall the program. You will see another screen that prompts you to completely remove the application and all of its features. See Figure 2-10. port. Figure 2-10. Bluetooth Suite Uninstallation Prompt 3. Click Yes. You will see a Setup Status screen showing that application is being removed followed by another screen showing Uninstall Complete. See Figure 2-11. Figure 2-11. Finishing Bluetooth Suite Uninstallation 4. Click Yes, I want to restart my computer now. Qualcomm Atheros, Inc. 1700 Technology Drive, San Jose, CA 95110 t: 408/773-5200 f: 408/773-9940 5. Click Finish. The uninstall is complete. You are ready to reinstall the Bluetooth Suite. Qualcomm Atheros, Inc. COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL xxxvii July 2013 Connecting to an HID Device This chapter describes how to connect the Bluetooth laptop to a Bluetooth HID (Human Interface Device) such as a mouse. Setup Requirements You need the following devices and equipment in order to accomplish this task:
A PC system running Windows with Bluetooth Suite Atheros Bluetooth USB Adapter (dongle) Bluetooth mouse with batteries or keyboard Launching the Bluetooth Suite 1. Double click on the Launch Bluetooth Suite icon on your desktop or 2. Put your mouse in searchable (pairing mode) by doing the launch it from start > All Programs > Bluetooth Suite > Launch Bluetooth Suite. It displays theBluetooth Suite start-up screen. See Figure 4-1. following:
a. Turn On the mouse by pressing down its power On/Off button. Refer to the mouse documentation on how to do it. b. Press the connect button on the mouse to put it in pairing
(discoverable) mode. Refer to the mouse documentation for additional information. 3. Right mouse click on the Bluetooth Suite Tray, and choose My Bluetooth Place option. It displays all the peripheral devices in the right panel of the screen indicating that these devices are in range and available to be connected. It also shows the device name, address, type and status (in range, paired, or connected). Qualcomm Atheros, Inc. 1700 Technology Drive, San Jose, CA 95110 t: 408/773-5200 f: 408/773-9940 Figure 4-1. Bluetooth Places Screen 4. Make sure the device that you wish to pair or connect is powered up and in discoverable mode. If it is in range and has previously been paired, turning on the device will automatically pair it. Bluetooth Pairing Passcode screen. See Figure 4-2. 5. Right click on the mouse and choose Pair. It displays the Figure 4-2. Entering Bluetooth Pairing Passcode 6. Enter a passcode to pair with the remote device and click OK. NOTE: The default code shown is 0000. Refer to the documentation of your mouse to find out the passcode of your device and how to change it. 7. Highlight the mouse device under Peripheral Devices in the left panel and choose Service Discovery. Highlight the device. Using your laptop pointing device, right click on the Human Interface Device service and choose the Connect option to connect to the mouse. Qualcomm Atheros, Inc. COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL xxxix July 2013 Figure 4-3. Connecting the Mouse 8. Right click the Connect button. Qualcomm Atheros, Inc. 1700 Technology Drive, San Jose, CA 95110 t: 408/773-5200 f: 408/773-9940 9. You will be prompted to make sure the device is in discoverable mode. Make sure the device in ON and in connectable mode. See Figure 4-4. Figure 4-4. Putting Device in Connectable Mode 10. Click OK. You will notice that the Wizard begins to install software for the HID device. As soon as the installation is complete, the screen disappears. Its service status of the HID changes from Disconnected to Connected. Your mouse is now connected and ready to use. You can perform normal mouse functions using this mouse. Connecting to a Sync Device This chapter describes how to connect a Bluetooth laptop to a Bluetooth device that supports Synchronization profile. The following topics are covered in this chapter:
Setup Requirements Launching the Synchronization Process Setup Requirements You need the following devices and equipment in order to accomplish this task:
A laptop system running Windows XP with Bluetooth Suite Bluetooth USB Adapter A Bluetooth device such as an e-mail tool and calendar that supports sync profile Qualcomm Atheros, Inc. COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL July 2013 xli Launching the Synchronization Process 1. Launch the Bluetooth Suite. 2. Choose My Bluetooth Place from the Bluetooth tray on your desktop. It displays the My Bluetooth Place start-up screen. 3. Right mouse click the blank panel and choose Device Discovery option. See Figure 10-1. Figure 10-1. Bluetooth Suite Discovery Screen 4. Highlight the device that you wish to sync with and pair it. See Figure 10-2. Figure 10-2. Pairing the Device for Syncing Qualcomm Atheros, Inc. 1700 Technology Drive, San Jose, CA 95110 t: 408/773-5200 f: 408/773-9940 5. Right mouse click on the desired bluetooth device and select 6. Enter the pairing code (0000) to pair it and click OK. See the Pair option. Figure 10-3. Figure 10-3. Bluetooth Devices Pairing 7. You will see the passcode prompt. Enter the passcode (default is 0000) for the selected device and click OK. NOTE: The default code shown is 0000. Refer to the documentation of your device to find out the passcode of your device and how to change it. 8. Right click the SYNC icon on My Bluetooth Place under the specified device screen and choose Synchronization option. See Figure 10-4. Qualcomm Atheros, Inc. COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL xliii July 2013 Figure 10-4. Bluetooth Synchronization It displays the Sync screen which allows you to specify sync parameters for both client and server. See Figure 10-5. Qualcomm Atheros, Inc. 1700 Technology Drive, San Jose, CA 95110 t: 408/773-5200 f: 408/773-9940 Figure 10-5. Selecting Items to Synchronize 9. Select the Sync items under the server and client that you wish to synchronize and click OK. The selected items will be synchronized. Qualcomm Atheros, Inc. COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL July 2013 xlv Advanced Status Information Click the Advanced button on the Current Status tab of the Atheros Client Utility to see advanced information about the program and its operations. The Current Status tab does not require any configuration. The following table describes the items found on the Advanced Status screen. Network Name (SSID) Displays the wireless network name. Configure the network name on the General tab. Shows whether server based authentication is used. Server Based Authentication Data Encryption Displays the encryption type the driver is using. Configure the encryption type on the Security tab. Authentication Type Displays the authentication mode. Message Integrity Check Configure the authentication mode on the General tab. Shows whether MIC is enabled. MIC prevents bit-flip attacks on encrypted packets. Associated AP Name Displays the name of the access point the wireless adapter is Associated AP IP Address Associated AP MAC Address associated to. Shows the IP address of the access point the wireless adapter is associated to. Displays the MAC address of the access point the wireless adapter is associated to. Power Save Mode Shows the power save mode. Power management is disabled in ad hoc mode. Configure the power save mode on the Advanced tab. Current Power Level Displays the transmit power level rate in mW. Current Signal Strength Shows the current signal strength in dBm. Current Noise Level Displays the current noise level in dBm. Up Time Shows how long the client adapter has been receiving power (in hours:minutes:seconds). If the adapter runs for more than 24 hours, the display shows in days:hours:minutes:seconds. 802.11b Preamble Displays the 802.11b preamble format. Configure the preamble format on the Advanced tab. Current Receive Rate Shows the current receive rate in Mbps. Current Transmit Rate Displays the current transmit rate in Mbps. Channel Shows the currently connected channel. Qualcomm Atheros, Inc. 1700 Technology Drive, San Jose, CA 95110 t: 408/773-5200 f: 408/773-9940 Frequency Displays frequency the station is using. Channel Set Shows the current channel set. Qualcomm Atheros, Inc. COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL xlvii July 2013 Note: The country code selection is for non-US model only and is not available to all US model. Per FCC regulation, all WiFi product marketed in US must fixed to US operation channels only. Federal Communication Commission Interference Statement This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
-
-
-
-
FCC Caution:
Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate this equipment. This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Qualcomm Atheros, Inc. 1700 Technology Drive, San Jose, CA 95110 t: 408/773-5200 f: 408/773-9940 Radiation Exposure Statement:
The product comply with the FCC portable RF exposure limit set forth for an uncontrolled environment and are safe for intended operation as described in this manual. The further RF exposure reduction can be achieved if the product can be kept as far as possible from the user body or set the device to lower output power if such function is available. This device is intended only for OEM integrators under the following conditions:
The transmitter module may not be co-located with any other transmitter or antenna. Module approval valid only when the module is installed in the tested host or 1) 2) compatible series of host As long as 2 conditions above are met, further transmitter test will not be required. However, the OEM integrator is still responsible for testing their end-product for any additional compliance requirements required with this module installed. IMPORTANT NOTE: In the event that these conditions can not be met (for example certain laptop configurations or co-location with another transmitter), then the FCC authorization is no longer considered valid and the FCC ID can not be used on the final product. In these circumstances, the OEM integrator will be responsible for re-evaluating the end product
(including the transmitter) and obtaining a separate FCC authorization. End Product Labeling The final end product must be labeled in a visible area with the following: Contains FCC ID:
PPD-QCNFA222. The grantee's FCC ID can be used only when all FCC compliance requirements are met. Manual Information To the End User The OEM integrator has to be aware not to provide information to the end user regarding how to install or remove this RF module in the users manual of the end product which integrates this module. The end user manual shall include all required regulatory information/warning as show in this manual. Qualcomm Atheros, Inc. COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL xlix July 2013 Industry Canada statement:
This device complies with RSS-210 of the Industry Canada Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Ce dispositif est conforme la norme CNR-210 d'Industrie Canada applicable aux appareils radio exempts de licence. Son fonctionnement est sujet aux deux conditions suivantes: (1) le dispositif ne doit pas produire de brouillage prjudiciable, et (2) ce dispositif doit accepter tout brouillage reu, y compris un brouillage susceptible de provoquer un fonctionnement indsirable. Caution :
(i) the device for operation in the band 5150-5250 MHz is only for indoor use to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems;
(ii) the maximum antenna gain permitted for devices in the bands 5250-5350 MHz and 5470-5725 MHz shall comply with the e.i.r.p. limit; and
(iii) the maximum antenna gain permitted for devices in the band 5725-5825 MHz shall comply with the e.i.r.p. limits specified for point-to-point and non point-to-point operation as appropriate.
(iv) Users should also be advised that high-power radars are allocated as primary users (i.e. priority users) of the bands 5250-5350 MHz and 5650-5850 MHz and that these radars could cause interference and/or damage to LE-LAN devices. Avertissement:
Le guide dutilisation des dispositifs pour rseaux locaux doit inclure des instructions prcises sur les restrictions susmentionnes, notamment :
(i) les dispositifs fonctionnant dans la bande 5 150-5 250 MHz sont rservs uniquement pour une utilisation lintrieur afin de rduire les risques de brouillage prjudiciable aux systmes de satellites mobiles utilisant les mmes canaux;
(ii) le gain maximal dantenne permis pour les dispositifs utilisant les bandes 5 250-5 350 MHz et 5 470-5 725 MHz doit se conformer la limite de p.i.r.e.;
(iii) le gain maximal dantenne permis (pour les dispositifs utilisant la bande 5 725-5 825 MHz) doit se conformer la limite de p.i.r.e. spcifie pour lexploitation point point et non point point, selon le cas. Qualcomm Atheros, Inc. 1700 Technology Drive, San Jose, CA 95110 t: 408/773-5200 f: 408/773-9940
(iv) De plus, les utilisateurs devraient aussi tre aviss que les utilisateurs de radars de haute puissance sont dsigns utilisateurs principaux (c.--d., quils ont la priorit) pour les bandes 5 250-5 350 MHz et 5 650-5 850 MHz et que ces radars pourraient causer du brouillage et/ou des dommages aux dispositifs LAN-EL. This device is intended only for OEM integrators under the following conditions: (For module device use) The transmitter module may not be co-located with any other transmitter or antenna. As long as 2 conditions above are met, further transmitter test will not be required. However, the OEM integrator is still responsible for testing their end-product for any additional compliance requirements required with this module installed. Cet appareil est conu uniquement pour les intgrateurs OEM dans les conditions suivantes:
(Pour utilisation de dispositif module) Le module metteur peut ne pas tre complant avec un autre metteur ou antenne. Tant que les 2 conditions ci-dessus sont remplies, des essais supplmentaires sur l'metteur ne seront pas ncessaires. Toutefois, l'intgrateur OEM est toujours responsable des essais sur son produit final pour toutes exigences de conformit supplmentaires requis pour ce module install. IMPORTANT NOTE:
In the event that these conditions can not be met (for example certain laptop configurations or co-location with another transmitter), then the Canada authorization is no longer considered valid and the IC ID can not be used on the final product. In these circumstances, the OEM integrator will be responsible for re-evaluating the end product (including the transmitter) and obtaining a separate Canada authorization. NOTE IMPORTANTE:
Dans le cas o ces conditions ne peuvent tre satisfaites (par exemple pour certaines configurations d'ordinateur portable ou de certaines co-localisation avec un autre metteur), l'autorisation du Canada n'est plus considr comme valide et l'ID IC ne peut pas tre utilis sur le produit final. Dans ces circonstances, l'intgrateur OEM sera charg de rvaluer le produit final (y compris l'metteur) et l'obtention d'une autorisation distincte au Canada. End Product Labeling This transmitter module is authorized only for use in device. The final end product must be labeled in a visible area with the following: Contains IC: 4104A-QCNFA222. Plaque signaltique du produit final Qualcomm Atheros, Inc. COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL July 2013 li Ce module metteur est autoris uniquement pour une utilisation dans un dispositif o. Le produit final doit tre tiquet dans un endroit visible avec l'inscription suivante: "Contient des IC: 4104A-QCNFA222". Manual Information To the End User The OEM integrator has to be aware not to provide information to the end user regarding how to install or remove this RF module in the users manual of the end product which integrates this module. The end user manual shall include all required regulatory information/warning as show in this manual. Manuel d'information l'utilisateur final L'intgrateur OEM doit tre conscient de ne pas fournir des informations l'utilisateur final quant la faon d'installer ou de supprimer ce module RF dans le manuel de l'utilisateur du produit final qui intgre ce module. Le manuel de l'utilisateur final doit inclure toutes les informations rglementaires requises et avertissements comme indiqu dans ce manuel. This device has been designed to operate with a PIFA antenna have a maximum gain of 4.76 dBi. Antenna having a higher gain is strictly prohibited per regulations of Industry Canada. The required antenna impedance is 50 ohms. Under Industry Canada regulations, this radio transmitter may only operate using an antenna of a type and maximum (or lesser) gain approved for the transmitter by Industry Canada. To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power (e.i.r.p.) is not more than that necessary for successful communication. This radio transmitter (IC: 4104A-QCNFA222 / Modle: QCNFA222) has been approved by Industry Canada to operate with the antenna type, maximum permissible gain and required antenna impedance for each antenna type indicated. Antenna types not included in this users manual, having a gain greater than the maximum gain indicated for that type, are strictly prohibited for use with this device. Ce dispositif a t conu pour fonctionner avec une antenne ayant un gain maximal de PIFA antenne avec dBi [4.76]. Une antenne gain plus lev est strictement interdite par les rglements d'Industrie Canada. L'impdance d'antenne requise est de 50 ohms. Qualcomm Atheros, Inc. 1700 Technology Drive, San Jose, CA 95110 t: 408/773-5200 f: 408/773-9940 Conformment la rglementation d'Industrie Canada, le prsent metteur radio peutfonctionner avec une antenne d'un type et d'un gain maximal (ou infrieur) approuv pourl'metteur par Industrie Canada. Dans le but de rduire les risques de brouillage radiolectrique l'intention des autres utilisateurs, il faut choisir le type d'antenne et son gain de sorte que lapuissance isotrope rayonne quivalente (p.i.r.e.) ne dpasse pas l'intensit ncessaire l'tablissement d'une communication satisfaisante. Le prsent metteur radio (IC: 4104A-QCNFA222 / Modle: QCNFA222) a t approuv par Industrie Canada pour fonctionner avec les types d'antenne numrs ci-dessous et ayant un gain admissible maximal et l'impdance requise pour chaque type d'antenne. Les types d'antenne non inclus dans cette liste, ou dont le gain est suprieur au gain maximal indiqu, sont strictement interdits pour l'exploitation de l'metteur. Qualcomm Atheros, Inc. COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL July 2013 liii PROPOSED FCC ID LABEL AND LOCATION QUALCOMM ATHEROS, INC. FCC ID: PPD-QCNFA222 IC: 4104A-QCNFA222 Model:QCNFA222 Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Printed Color Black White FCC / IC Label Location Bottom of EUT
various | Uer Manual regulatory | Users Manual | 2.05 MiB |
- 1 Regulatory Information and Safety Guide 2 -
2013. All Rights Reserved. Regulatory Information and Safety Guide This revision: December 2013 TABLE OF CONTENTS Table of contents - 3 Tips and information for comfortable use 4 Finding your comfort zone .......................... 4 Taking care of your vision........................... 5 Developing good work habits...................... 6 Protecting your hearing............................... 6 Basic care and tips for using your computer 7 Turning your computer on and off............... 7 Taking care of your computer ..................... 7 General ....................................................... 8 Safety instructions ................................... 9 Product servicing ........................................ 9 Cleaning and servicing................................ 9 Battery and adapter information ............ 10 Accessing the power................................. 10 Disconnecting the power source............... 10 Using electrical power............................... 10 Guidelines for safe battery usage ............. 12 Warnings and regulatory information 14 Optical drives......................................... 14 Telephone line safety............................. 14 Emergency calls........................................ 15 Medical devices ..................................... 15 Vehicles ................................................. 16 Potentially explosive environments........ 16 Disposal instructions.............................. 17 ENERGY STAR ..................................... 17 Wireless equipment regulatory information................................................18 Radio frequency interference.................... 18 Use on aircraft........................................... 19 The wireless equipment and your health....19 USA FCC and FAA............................... 19 FCC radio frequency interference requirements............................................. 20 Canada Industry Canada (IC) .............. 22 European Union ........................................ 22 Compliant with Russian regulatory certification................................................ 28 4 - Tips and information for comfortable use TIPS AND INFORMATION FOR COMFORTABLE USE Important Some of the information in this guide may not apply to your computer. Computer users may complain of eyestrain and headaches after prolonged use. Users are also at risk of physical injury after long hours of working in front of a computer. Long work periods, bad posture, poor work habits, stress, inadequate working conditions, personal health and other factors greatly increase the risk of physical injury. Incorrect computer usage may lead to carpal tunnel syndrome, tendonitis, tenosynovitis or other musculoskeletal disorders. The following symptoms may appear in the hands, wrists, arms, shoulders, neck or back:
Numbness, or a burning or tingling sensation. Aching, soreness or tenderness. Pain, swelling or throbbing. Stiffness or tightness. Coldness or weakness. If you have these symptoms, or any other recurring or persistent discomfort and/or pain related to computer use, consult a physician immediately and inform your company's health and safety department. The following section provides tips for more comfortable computer use. Finding your comfort zone Find your comfort zone by adjusting the viewing angle of the monitor, using a footrest, or raising your sitting height to achieve maximum comfort. Observe the following tips:
Refrain from staying too long in one fixed posture. Tips and information for comfortable use - 5 Avoid slouching forward and/or leaning backward. Stand up and walk around regularly to remove the strain on your leg muscles. Take short rests to relax your neck and shoulders. Avoid tensing your muscles or shrugging your shoulders. Install the external display, keyboard and mouse properly and within comfortable reach. If you view your monitor more than your documents, place the display at the center of your desk to minimize neck strain. Taking care of your vision Long viewing hours, wearing incorrect glasses or contact lenses, glare, excessive room lighting, poorly focused screens, very small typefaces and low-contrast displays could stress your eyes. The following sections provide suggestions on how to reduce eyestrain. Eyes Rest your eyes frequently. Give your eyes regular breaks by looking away from the monitor and focusing on a distant point. Blink frequently to keep your eyes from drying out. Display Keep your display clean. Keep your head at a higher level than the top edge of the display so your eyes point downward when looking at the middle of the display. Adjust the display brightness and/or contrast to a comfortable level for enhanced text readability and graphics clarity. Eliminate glare and reflections by:
placing your display in such a way that the side faces the window or any light source, minimizing room light by using drapes, shades or blinds, using a task light, changing the display's viewing angle, using a glare-reduction filter, 6 - Tips and information for comfortable use using a display visor, such as a piece of cardboard extended from the display's top front edge. Avoid adjusting your display to an awkward viewing angle. Avoid looking at bright light sources for extended periods of time. Developing good work habits The following work habits make computer use more relaxing and productive:
Take short breaks regularly and often. Perform some stretching exercises. Breathe fresh air as often as possible. Exercise regularly and maintain a healthy body. Warning We do not recommend using the computer on a couch or bed. If this is unavoidable, work for only short periods, take breaks regularly, and do some stretching exercises. Protecting your hearing Warning Permanent hearing if earphones or headphones are used at high volume for prolonged periods of time. loss may occur To protect your hearing, follow these instructions. Increase the volume gradually until you can hear clearly and comfortably. Do not increase the volume level after your ears have adjusted. Do not listen to music at high volumes for extended periods. Do not increase the volume to block out noisy surroundings. Decrease the volume if you can't hear people speaking near you. BASIC CARE AND TIPS FOR USING YOUR COMPUTER Basic care and tips for using your computer - 7 Read these instructions carefully. Keep this document for future reference. Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the product. Turning your computer on and off To turn on the computer, simply press and release the power button. Please refer to the setup poster for the location of the power button. To turn the power off, do any of the following:
Use the Windows shutdown command: Press the Windows key +
<C>, click Settings > Power then click Shut Down. If you need to power down the computer for a short while, but dont want to completely shut it down, you can put it into Hibernate by:
Pressing the power button. You can also put the computer in sleep mode by pressing the sleep hotkey <Fn> + <F4>. Note If you cannot power off the computer normally, press and hold the power button for more than four seconds to shut down the computer. If you turn off the computer and want to turn it on again, wait at least two seconds before powering up. Taking care of your computer Your computer will serve you well if you take care of it. Do not expose the computer to direct sunlight. Do not place it near sources of heat, such as a radiator. Do not expose the computer to temperatures below 0 C (32 F) or above 50 C (122 F). Do not subject the computer to magnetic fields. Do not expose the computer to rain or moisture. Do not spill water or any liquid on the computer. 8 - Basic care and tips for using your computer Do not subject the computer to heavy shock or vibration. Do not expose the computer to dust or dirt. Never place objects on top of the computer. Do not slam the computer display when you close it. Never place the computer on uneven surfaces. General Do not use this product near water. Do not place this product on an unstable cart, stand or table. If the product falls, it could be seriously damaged. Slots and openings are provided for ventilation to ensure reliable operation of the product and to protect it from overheating. These openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed, sofa, rug or other similar surface. This product should never be placed near or over a radiator or heat register, or in a built-in installation unless proper ventilation is provided. Never push objects of any kind into this product through cabinet slots as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short-out parts that could result in a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind onto or into the product. To avoid damage of internal components and to prevent battery leakage, do not place the product on a vibrating surface. Never use it under sporting, exercising, or any vibrating environment which will probably cause a short-circuit or damage rotor devices, HDD, optical drive, and even exposure risk from the lithium battery pack. The bottom surface, areas around ventilation openings and AC adapter may get hot. To avoid injury, ensure they do not come in contact with your skin or body. Your device and its enhancements may contain small parts. Keep them out of the reach of small children. The surface temperature of the base will rise during normal operation, particularly when plugged in to AC power. Allowing sustained contact with exposed skin can cause discomfort or burns. Basic care and tips for using your computer - 9 Safety instructions Product servicing Do not attempt to service this product yourself, as opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltage points or other risks. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Unplug this product from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel when:
The power cord or plug is damaged, cut or frayed. Liquid was spilled into the product. The product was exposed to rain or water. The product has been dropped or the case has been damaged. The product exhibits a distinct change in performance, indicating a need for service. The product does not operate normally after following the operating instructions. The product exhibits a distinct change in performance, indicating a need for service. The product does not operate normally after following the operating instructions. Note Adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating instructions, since improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage and will often require extensive work by a qualified technician to restore the product to normal condition. Cleaning and servicing When cleaning the computer, follow these steps:
1.Turn off the computer and remove the battery pack. 2.Disconnect the AC adapter. 3.Use a soft, moist cloth. Do not use liquid or aerosol cleaners. 10 - Basic care and tips for using your computer Battery and adapter information Accessing the power Be sure that the power outlet you plug into is easily accessible and located as close to the equipment operator as possible. When you need to disconnect power to the equipment, be sure to unplug from the electrical outlet. Disconnecting the power source Observe the following guidelines when connecting and disconnecting power to the power supply unit:
Install the power supply unit before connecting to the AC power outlet. Unplug before removing the power supply unit from the computer. If the system has multiple sources of power, disconnect power from the system by unplugging all power cords from the power supplies. Using electrical power Do not connect the adapter to any other device. When unplugging the power cord, do not pull on the cord itself but pull on the plug. This product should be operated from the type of power indicated on the marking label. If you are not sure of the type of power available, consult your dealer or local power company. Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord. Do not locate this product where people will walk on the cord. If an extension cord is used with this product, make sure that the total ampere rating of the equipment plugged into the extension cord does not exceed the extension cord ampere rating. Also, make sure that the total rating of all products plugged into the wall outlet does not exceed the fuse rating. Do not overload a power outlet, strip or receptacle by plugging in too many devices. The overall system load must not exceed 80% of the branch circuit rating. If power strips are used, the load should not exceed 80% of the power strip's input rating. Basic care and tips for using your computer - 11 If this product's AC adapter is equipped with a three-wire grounded plug. The plug only fits in a grounded power outlet. Make sure the power outlet is properly grounded before inserting the AC adapter plug. Do not insert the plug into a non-grounded power outlet. Contact your electrician for details. Warning The grounding pin is a safety feature. Using a power outlet that is not properly grounded may result in electric shock and/or injury. Note The grounding pin also provides good protection from unexpected noise produced by other nearby electrical devices that may interfere with the performance of this product. The system can be powered using a wide range of voltages; 100 to 120 or 220 to 240 V or 100-240 V AC. The power cord included with the system meets the requirements for use in the country/region where the system was purchased. Power cords for use in other countries/regions must meet the requirements for that country/
region. For more information on power cord requirements, contact an authorized reseller or service provider. 12 - Basic care and tips for using your computer Guidelines for safe battery usage Warning Batteries may explode if not handled properly. Do not disassemble or dispose of them in fire. Do not tamper with batteries. Keep them away from children. Follow local regulations when disposing of used batteries. Important Replace the battery with the same type as that which came bundled with your product. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. This notebook uses a Lithium battery. Do not use it in a humid, wet or corrosive environment. Do not put, store or leave your product in or near a heat source, in a high temperature location, in strong direct sunlight, in a microwave oven or in a pressurized container, and do not expose it to temperatures over 60 C (140 F). Failure to follow these guidelines may cause the battery to leak acid, become hot, explode or ignite and cause injury and/or damage. Do not pierce, open or disassemble the battery. If the battery leaks and you come into contact with the leaked fluids, rinse thoroughly with water and seek medical attention immediately. For safety reasons, and to prolong the lifetime of the battery, charging will not occur at temperatures below 0 C (32 F) or above 40 C (104 F). The full performance of a new battery is achieved only after two or three complete charge and discharge cycles. The battery can be charged and discharged hundreds of times, but it will eventually wear out. When the operation time becomes noticeably shorter than normal, buy a new battery. Use only the approved batteries, and recharge your battery only with the approved chargers designated for this device. Use the battery only for its intended purpose. Never use any charger or battery that is damaged. Do not short-circuit the battery. Accidental short-circuiting can occur when a metallic object such as a coin, clip or pen causes direct connection of the positive (+) and negative (-) terminals of the battery. (These look like metal strips on the battery.) This might happen, for example, when you carry a spare battery in Basic care and tips for using your computer - 13 your pocket or purse. Short-circuiting the terminals may damage the battery or the connecting object. The capacity and lifetime of the battery will be reduced if the battery is left in hot or cold places, such as in a closed car in summer or winter. Always try to keep the battery between 15 C and 25 C (59 F and 77 F). A device with a hot or cold battery may not work temporarily, even when the battery is fully charged. Battery performance is especially limited in temperatures well below freezing. Do not dispose of batteries in a fire as they may explode. Batteries may also explode if damaged. Dispose of batteries according to local regulations. Please recycle when possible. Do not dispose as household waste. Wireless devices may be susceptible to interference from the battery, which could affect performance. Note Please refer to www.acer.com for battery shipping documents. 14 - Warnings and regulatory information WARNINGS AND REGULATORY INFORMATION Optical drives CAUTION: This appliance contains a laser system and is classified as a "CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT." In case of any trouble with this device, please contact your nearest AUTHORIZED service station. To prevent direct exposure to the laser beam, do not try to open the enclosure. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT CAUTION: INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN. AVOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM. APPAREIL A LASER DE CLASSE 1 PRODUIT LASERATTENTION: RADIATION DU FAISCEAU LASER INVISIBLE EN CAS DOUVERTURE. EVITTER TOUTE EXPOSITION AUX RAYONS. LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE LASER KLASSE 1 VORSICHT:
ABDECKUNG GEFFNET NICHT DEM STRAHLL AUSSETZEN PRODUCTO LSER DE LA CLASE I ADVERTENCIA: RADIACIN LSER INVISIBLE AL SER ABIERTO. EVITE EXPONERSE A LOS RAYOS. ADVARSEL: LASERSTRLING VEDBNING SE STRLEN. VARO! LAVATTAESSA OLET ALTTINA LASERSTEILYLLE. VARNING: LASERSTRLNING NR DENNA DEL R PPNAD L TUIJOTA STEESEENSTIRRA EJ IN I STRLEN VARNING:
PPNADSTIRRA EJ IN I STRLEN ADVARSEL: LASERSTRLING NAR DEKSEL PNESSTIRR IKKE INN I STRLEN LASERSTRLNING NAR DENNA DEL LASERSTRAHLUNG, WENN UNSICHTBARE IKKE IND R I Telephone line safety Warnings and regulatory information - 15 Disconnect all telephone lines from the equipment when not in use and/or before servicing. To avoid the remote risk of electric shock from lightning, do not connect the telephone line to this equipment during lightning or thunderstorms. Emergency calls Warning You cannot make emergency calls through this device. To make an emergency call you shall dial out through your mobile phone or other telephone call system. Medical devices Operation of any radio transmitting equipment, including wireless phones, may interfere with the functionality of inadequately protected medical devices. Consult a physician or the manufacturer of the medical device to determine if they are adequately shielded from external RF energy or if you have any questions. Switch off your device in health care facilities when any regulations posted in these areas instruct you to do so. Hospitals or health care facilities may be using equipment that could be sensitive to external RF transmissions. Pacemakers. Pacemaker manufacturers recommend that a minimum separation of 15.3 centimeters (6 inches) be maintained between wireless devices and a pacemaker to avoid potential interference with the pacemaker. These recommendations are consistent with the independent recommendations of Wireless Technology Research. Persons with pacemakers should do the following:
Always keep the device more than 15.3 centimeters (6 inches) from research by and the pacemaker Not carry the device near your pacemaker when the device is switched on. If you suspect interference, switch off your device, and move it. Hearing aids. Some digital wireless devices may interfere with some hearing aids. If interference occurs, consult your service provider. 16 - Warnings and regulatory information Vehicles RF signals may affect improperly installed or inadequately shielded electronic systems in motor vehicles such as electronic fuel injection systems, electronic antiskid (anti-lock) braking systems, electronic speed control systems, and air bag systems. For more information, check with the manufacturer, or its representative, of your vehicle or any equipment that has been added. Only qualified personnel should service the device, or install the device in a vehicle. Faulty installation or service may be dangerous and may invalidate any warranty that may apply to the device. Check regularly that all wireless equipment in your vehicle is mounted and operating properly. Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gases, or explosive materials in the same compartment as the device, its parts, or enhancements. For vehicles equipped with an air bag, remember that air bags inflate with great force. Do not place objects, including installed or portable wireless equipment in the area over the air bag or in the air bag deployment area. If in-vehicle wireless equipment is improperly installed, and the air bag inflates, serious injury could result. Using your device while flying in aircraft is prohibited. Switch off your device before boarding an aircraft. The use of wireless teledevices in an aircraft may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, disrupt the wireless telephone network, and may be illegal. Potentially explosive environments Warning Do not operate a portable transmitter (including this wireless equipment) near unshielded blasting caps or in an explosive environment unless the transmitter has been modified to be qualified for such use. Switch off your device when in any area with a potentially explosive atmosphere and obey all signs and instructions. Potentially explosive atmospheres include areas where you would normally be advised to turn off your vehicle engine. Sparks in such areas could cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death. Switch off the device at refueling points such as near gas pumps at service stations. Warnings and regulatory information - 17 Observe restrictions on the use of radio equipment in fuel depots, storage, and distribution areas; chemical plants; or where blasting operations are in progress. Areas with a potentially explosive atmosphere are often, but not always, clearly marked. They include below deck on boats, chemical transfer or storage facilities, vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas
(such as propane or butane), and areas where the air contains chemicals or particles such as grain, dust or metal powders. Do not switch the notebook on when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. Disposal instructions Do not throw this electronic device into the trash when discarding. To minimize pollution and ensure utmost protection of the global environment, please recycle. For more from Electrical and Electronics Equipment (WEEE) regulations, visit www.acer-group.com/public/Sustainability information on the Waste ENERGY STAR Acer's ENERGY STAR qualified products save your money by reducing energy cost and protecting the environment without sacrificing features or performance. Acer is proud to offer our customers products with the ENERGY STAR mark. What is ENERGY STAR?
Products that are ENERGY STAR qualified use less energy and prevent greenhouse gas emissions by meeting strict energy efficiency guidelines set by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Acer is committed to offering products and services worldwide that help customers save money, conserve energy and improve the quality of our environment. The more energy we can save through higher energy efficiency, the more we reduce greenhouse gases and the risks to www.energystar.gov or www.energystar.gov/powermanagement. change. More information climate refers of 18 - Warnings and regulatory information Note Information in this section may not apply to your computer. Acer ENERGY STAR qualified products:
Produce less heat and reduce cooling loads, and warmer climates. Automatically go into "display sleep" and "computer sleep" mode after 10 and 30 minutes of inactivity respectively. Wake the computer from sleep mode by pushing keyboard or moving mouse. Computers will save more than 80% energy at "sleep" mode. ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are registered U.S. marks Wireless equipment regulatory information Radio frequency interference Warning For safety reasons, turn off all wireless or radio transmitting devices when using your laptop under the following conditions. These devices may include, but are not limited to: wireless LAN (WLAN), Bluetooth and/or 3G. Remember to follow any special regulations in force in any area, and always switch off your device when its use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. Use the device only in its normal operating positions. This device meets RF exposure guidelines when used normally. To successfully transmit data files or messages, this device requires a good quality connection to the network. In some cases, transmission of data files or messages may be delayed until such a connection is available. Parts of the device are magnetic. Metallic materials may be attracted to the device, and persons with hearing aids should not hold the device to the ear with the hearing aid. Do not place credit cards or other magnetic storage media near the device, because information stored on them may be erased. Warnings and regulatory information - 19 Use on aircraft Warning FCC and FAA regulations may prohibit airborne operation of radio-frequency wireless devices (wireless equipment) because their signals could interfere with critical aircraft instruments. Ask the cabin crew before turning on your devices wireless equipment whilst on board. The wireless equipment and your health The wireless equipment, like other radio devices, emits radio frequency electromagnetic energy. The level of energy emitted by the wireless equipment, however, is less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by other wireless devices such as mobile phones. The wireless equipment operates within the guidelines found in radio frequency safety standards These standards recommendations reflect the consensus of the scientific community and result from deliberations of panels and committees of scientists who continually review and interpret the extensive research literature. In some situations or environments, the use of the wireless equipment may be restricted by the proprietor of the building or responsible representatives of the applicable organization. Examples of such situations may include:
recommendations. and and Using the wireless equipment on board airplanes, or Using the wireless equipment in any other environment where the risk of interference with other devices or services is perceived or identified as being harmful. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of wireless equipment in a specific organization or environment (an airport, for authorization to use the adapter before you turn it on. you are encouraged for example), to ask USA FCC and FAA for human exposure The FCC with its action in ET Docket 96-8 has adopted a safety standard
(RF) electromagnetic energy emitted by FCC certified equipment. The wireless equipment meets found in OET Bulletin 65, the Human Exposure frequency limits radio to 20 - Warnings and regulatory information supplement C, 2001, and ANSI/IEEE C95.1, 1992. Proper operation of this radio according to the instructions found in this manual will result in exposure substantially below the FCCs recommended limits. The following safety precautions should be observed:
Do not touch or move antenna while the unit is transmitting or receiving. Do not hold any component containing the radio such that the antenna is very close or touching any exposed parts of the body, especially the face or eyes, while transmitting. Do not operate the radio or attempt to transmit data unless the antenna is connected; this behavior may cause damage to the radio. The use of wireless equipment in hazardous locations is limited by the constraints posed by the safety directors of such environments. The use of wireless equipment on airplanes is governed by the Federal Aviation Administration (FAA). The use of wireless equipment in hospitals is restricted to the limits set forth by each hospital. The product comply with the FCC portable RF exposure limit set forth for an uncontrolled environment and are safe for intended operation as described in this manual. The further RF exposure reduction can be achieved if the product can be kept as far as possible from the user body or set the device to lower output power if such function is available. Explosive Device Proximity Warning Warning: Do not operate a portable this wireless equipment) near unshielded blastingcaps or in an explosive environment unless the transmitter has been modified to be qualified for such use. transmitter (including FCC radio frequency interference requirements Note Applies to device supporting IEEE 802.11a wireless equipments. Warnings and regulatory information - 21 This device is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5.15 to 5.25 GHz and 5.470 to 5.725 GHz frequency ranges. FCC requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency ranges 5.15 to 5.25 GHz and 5.470 to 5.725 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-
channel mobile satellite systems. High power radars are allocated as primary users of the 5.25 to 5.35 GHz and 5.65 to 5.85 GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and this device. No configuration controls are provided this wireless equipment allowing any change frequency of operations outside the FCC grant of authorization for U.S operation according to Part 15.407 of the FCC rules.
/or damage for the in USA Federal Communications Commission (FCC) This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Radiation Exposure Statement:
The product comply with the FCC portable RF exposure limit set forth for an uncontrolled environment and are safe for intended operation as described in this manual. The further RF exposure reduction can be achieved if the product can be kept as far as possible from the user body or set the device to lower output power if such function is available. Interference statement This wireless equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This wireless equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If the wireless equipment is not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, the wireless equipment may cause harmful interference to radio communications. There is no guarantee, however, that such interference will not occur in a particular this wireless equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception (which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on), the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by taking one or more of the following measures:
installation. If 22 - Warnings and regulatory information Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna of the equipment experiencing the interference. Increase the distance between the wireless equipment and the equipment experiencing the interference. Connect the computer with the wireless equipment to an outlet the equipment on a circuit different experiencing the interference is connected. to which from that Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. European Union List of applicable countries This product must be used in strict accordance with the regulations and constraints in the country of use. For further information, contact the local office in the country of use. Please see http://ec.europa.eu/
enterprise/rtte/implem.htm for the latest country list. List of national codes This equipment may be operated in the following countries:
Country Austria Belgium Cyprus Czech Republic Denmark Estonia Finland France Germany Greece Hungary Ireland Italy Latvia ISO 3166 2 letter code Country AT BE CY CZ DK EE FI FR DE GR HU IE IT LV Malta Netherlands Poland Portugal Slovakia Slovenia Spain Sweden United Kingdom Iceland Liechtenstein Norway Switzerland Bulgaria ISO 3166 2 letter code MT NL PL PT SK SI ES SE GB IS LI NO CH BG Country Lithuania Luxembourg ISO 3166 2 letter code Country LT Romania Turkey LU ISO 3166 2 letter code RO TR Specific absorption rate information This device meets the EU requirements on the limitation of exposure of the general public to electromagnetic fields by way of health protection. The limits are part of extensive recommendations for the protection of the general public. These recommendations have been developed and checked by independent scientific organizations through regular and thorough evaluations of scientific studies. The unit of measurement for the European Council's recommended limit for mobile devices is the "Specific Absorption Rate" (SAR), and the SAR limit is 2.0 W/kg averaged over 10 grams of body tissue. It meets the requirements of International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP). For body worn operation, this device has been tested and meets the ICNIRP exposure guidelines and the European Standard, for use with dedicated accessories. Use of other accessories which contain metals may not ensure compliance with ICNIRP exposure guidelines. The low band 5.15 to 5.35 GHz is for indoor use only. This equipment complies with the essential requirements of the European Union directive 1999/5/EC. See Statements of European Union Compliance, and more details refer to the attached Declaration of Conformity. the English esky
[Czech]
Daansk
[Danish]
Hereby, ACER INC., declares that this devise is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisionns of Directive 1999/5/EC. ACER INC. tmto prohlauje, e toto zazen je ve shod se zkladnmi poadavky a dalmi pslunmi ustanovenmi smrnice 1999/5/ES. Undertegnede ACER INC. erklrer herved, at flgende udstyr overholder de vsentlige krav og vrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF. 24 - Warnings and regulatory information Deutsch
[German]
Eesti
[Estonian]
Espaol
[Spanish]
[Greek]
Franais
[French]
slenska
[Icelandic]
Italiano
[Italian]
Latviski
[Latvian]
Lietuvi
[Lithuanian]
Hiermit erklrt ACER INC., dass sich das Gert Radiolan in bereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den brigen einschlgigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG befindet. Kesolevaga kinnitab ACER INC. seadme vastavust direktiivi 1999/5/E phinuetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele teistele asjakohastele stetele. Por medio de la presente ACER INC. declara que el dispositivo cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE. ACER INC. 1999/5/ . Par la prsente ACER INC. dclare que cet appareil est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/
CE. Hr me lsir ACER INC. yfir v a er samrmi vi grunnkrfur og arar krfur, sem gera r eru tilskipun 1999/5/EC. Con la presente ACER INC. dichiara che questo dispositivo conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE. Ar o ACER INC. deklar, ka ierce atbilst Direktvas 1999/5/EK btiskajm prasbm un citiem ar to saisttajiem noteikumiem. iuo ACER INC. deklaruoja, kad is renginys atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999/5/EB Direktyvos nuostatas. Warnings and regulatory information - 25 Malti
[Maltese]
Magyar
[Hungarian]
Nederlands
[Dutch]
Norsk
[Norwegiann]
Polski
[Polish]
Portugus
[Portuguese]
Slovensko
[Slovenian]
Slovensky
[Slovak]
Suomi
[Finnish]
Svenska
[Swedish]
Hawnhekk, ACER INC., jiddikjara li dan jikkonforma mal- ti ijiet essenzjali u ma provvedimenti o rajn relevanti li he mm fid-Dirrettiva 1999/5/EC. Alulrott, ACER INC. nyilatkozom, hogy a kszlk megfelel a vonatkoz alapveto kvetelmnyeknek s az 1999/5/EC irnyelv egyb elorsainak. Hierbij verklaart ACER INC. dat het toestel voldoet aan de essentile eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG. ACER INC. erklrer herved at utstyret er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og vrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF. Niniejszym ACER INC. owiadcza, e urzdzenie jest zgodne z zasadniczymi wymogami oraz pozostaymi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC. ACER INC. declara que este dispostivo est conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposies da Directiva 1999/5/CE. ACER INC. izjavlja, da je ta naprava skladna z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi doloili Direktive 1999/5/ES. ACER INC. tmto vyhlasuje, e zariadenie spa zkladn poiadavky a vetky prslun ustanovenia Smernice 1999/5/ES. ACER INC. vakuuttaa tten ett tm laite on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja sit koskevienn direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen. Hrmed intygar ACER INC. att denna enhet str i verensstmmelse med vsentliga egenskapskrav och vriga relevanta bestmmelser som framgr av direktiv 1999/5/EG. 26 - Warnings and regulatory information France Pour la France mtropolitaine :
2,400 - 2,4835 GHz (Canaux 1 13) autoris en usage intrieur 2,400 - 2,454 GHz (canaux 1 7) autoris en usage extrieur Pour la Guyane et la Runion :
2,400 - 2,4835 GHz (Canaux 1 13) autoris en usage intrieur 2,420 - 2,4835 GHz (canaux 5 13) autoris en usage extrieur Pour tout le territoire Franais :
Seulement 5,15 -5,35 GHz autoris pour le 802.11a L'utilisation de cet equipement (2,4 GHz WLAN) est soumise certaines restrictions :
La puissance maximale autorise en intrieur est de 100 mW pour 2400 - 2483,5 MHz. La puissance maximale autorise est de 100 mW en extrieur pour 2400 - 2454 MHz. La puissance maximale autorise est de 10 mW en extrieur, 2454 -
2483,5 MHz. Pour les dernires restrictions, voir www.art-telecom.fr. Italy The use of this equipment is regulated by:
1.D.L.gs 1.8.2003, n. 259, article 104 (activity subject to general authorization) for outdoor use and article 105 (free use) for indoor use, in both cases for private use. 2.D.M. 28.5.03, for supply to public of RLAN access to networks and telecom services. Luso degli apparati regolamentato da:
1.D.L.gs 1.8.2003, n. 259, articoli 104 (attivit soggette ad autorizzazione generale) se utilizzati al di fuori del proprio fondo e 105 (libero uso) se utilizzati entro il proprio fondo, in entrambi i casi per uso private. 2.D.M. 28.5.03, per la fornitura al pubblico dellaccesso R-LAN alle reti e ai servizi di telecomunicazioni. Warnings and regulatory information - 27 Belgium Dans le cas d'une utilisation prive, l'extrieur d'un btiment, au-
dessus d'un espace public, aucun enregistrement n'est ncessaire pour une distance de moins de 300 m. Pour une distance suprieure 300 m un enregistrement auprs de l'IBPT est requise. Pour les enregistrements et licences, veuillez contacter l'IBPT. In geval van priv-gebruik, buiten een gebouw, op een openbare plaats, is geen registratie nodig, wanneer de afstand minder dan 300 m is. Voor een afstand groter dan 300 m is een registratie bij BIPT vereist. Voor registraties en te contacteren. licenties, gelieve BIPT Brazil Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio. Pakistan Pakistan Telecommunication Authority (PTA) Approved. Morocco The operation of this product in the radio channel 2 (2417 MHz) is not authorized in the following cities: Agadir, Assa-Zag, Cabo Negro, Chaouen, Goulmima, Oujda, Tan Tan, Taourirt, Taroudant and Taza. The operation of this product in the radio channels 4, 5, 6 and 7 (2425
- 2442 MHz) is not authorized in the following cities: Aroport Mohamed V, Agadir, Aguelmous, Anza, Benslimane, Bni Hafida, Cabo Negro, Casablanca, Fs, Lakbab, Marrakech, Merchich, Mohammdia, Rabat, Sal, Tanger, Tan Tan, Taounate, Tit Mellil, Zag. Japan 5 GHz Korea 28 - Warnings and regulatory information Taiwan
;
Modifications to the product Acer cannot be held responsible for unauthorized modifications made by the user and the consequences thereof, which may alter the conformity of the product. Compliant with Russian regulatory certification Warnings and regulatory information --29 Canada Industry Canada (IC) This device complies with RSS210 of Industry Canada. Cet appareil se conforme RSS210 de Canada d'Industrie. This device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Ce dispositif est conforme a la norme CNR-210 d'Industrie Canada applicable aux appareils radio exempts de licence. Son fonctionnement est sujet aux deux conditions suivantes: (1) le dispositif ne doit pas produire de brouillage prejudiciable, et (2) ce dispositif doit accepter tout brouillage recu, y compris un brouillage susceptible de provoquer un fonctionnement indesirable.
(Notice for 5GHz) Caution :
(i) the device for operation in the band 5150-5250 MHz is only for indoor use to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems;
(ii) the maximum antenna gain permitted for devices in the bands 5250-5350 MHz and 5470-5725 MHz shall comply with the e.i.r.p. limit; and
(iii) the maximum antenna gain permitted for devices in the band 5725-5825 MHz shall comply with the e.i.r.p. limits specified for point-to-point and non point-to-point operation as appropriate.
(iv) Users should also be advised that high-power radars are allocated as primary users
(i.e. priority users) of the bands 5250-5350 MHz and 5650-5850 MHz and that these radars could cause interference and/or damage to LE-LAN devices. Avertissement:
Le guide dutilisation des dispositifs pour rseaux locaux doit inclure des instructions prcises sur les restrictions susmentionnes, notamment :
(i) les dispositifs fonctionnant dans la bande 5 150-5 250 MHz sont rservs uniquement pour une utilisation lintrieur afin de rduire les risques de brouillage prjudiciable aux systmes de satellites mobiles utilisant les mmes canaux;
(ii) le gain maximal dantenne permis pour les dispositifs utilisant les bandes 5 250-5 350 MHz et 5 470-5 725 MHz doit se conformer la limite de p.i.r.e.;
(iii) le gain maximal dantenne permis (pour les dispositifs utilisant la bande 5 725-5 825 MHz) doit se conformer la limite de p.i.r.e. spcifie pour lexploitation point point et non point point, selon le cas.
(iv) De plus, les utilisateurs devraient aussi tre aviss que les utilisateurs de radars de haute puissance sont dsigns utilisateurs principaux (c.--d., quils ont la priorit) pour les bandes 5 250-5 350 MHz et 5 650-5 850 MHz et que ces radars pourraient causer du brouillage et/ou des dommages aux dispositifs LAN-EL. Radiation Exposure Statement:
The product comply with the Canada portable RF exposure limit set forth for an uncontrolled environment and are safe for intended operation as described in this manual. The further RF exposure reduction can be achieved if the product can be kept as far as possible from the user body or set the device to lower output power if such function is available. 30 - Warnings and regulatory information This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. Cet appareil numrique de la classe B est conforme a la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
"To prevent radio interference to the licensed service, this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from windows to provide maximum shielding. Equipment (or its transmit antenna) that is installed outdoors is subject to licensing."
Pour empcher que cet appareil cause du brouillage au service faisant l'objet d'une licence, il doit tre utilis a l'intrieur et devrait tre plac loin des fentres afin de fournir un cran de blindage maximal. Si le matriel (ou son antenne d'mission) est install l'extrieur, il doit faire l'objet d'une licence. Exposure of humans to RF fields (RSS-102):
The computers employ low gain integral antennas that do not emit RF field in excess of Health Canada limits for the general population; consult Safety Code 6, obtainable from Health Canada's Web site at http://www.hc-sc.gc.ca/
The radiated energy from the antennas connected to the wireless adapters conforms to the IC limit of the RF exposure requirement regarding IC RSS-102, Issue 4 clause 4.1. SAR tests are conducted using recommended operating positions accepted by the FCC/RSS with the device transmitting at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency band without distance attaching away from the body. Non-compliance with the above restrictions may result in violation of FCC RF exposure guidelines. Conformit des appareils de radiocommunication aux limites d'exposition humaine aux radiofrquences (CNR-102):
L'ordinateur utilise des antennes intgrales faible gain qui n'mettent pas un champ lectromagntique suprieur aux normes imposes par Sant Canada pour la population. Consultez le Code de scurit 6 sur le site Internet de Sant Canada l'adresse suivante : http://www.hc-sc.gc.ca/
L'nergie mise par les antennes relies aux cartes sans fil respecte la limite d'exposition aux radiofrquences telle que dfinie par Industrie Canada dans la clause 4.1 du document CNR-102, version 4. Tests DAS sont effectus en utilisant les positions recommandes par la FCC/CNR avec le tlphone met la puissance certifie maximale dans toutes les bandes de frquences testes sans distance attacher loin du corps. Non-respect des restrictions ci-dessus peut entraner une violation des directives de la FCC/CNR.
various | User Manual | Users Manual | 3.84 MiB |
- 1 Users Manual 2 -
2014. All Rights Reserved. Aspire Switch 12 Covers: SW5-271 This revision: September 2014 Sign up for an Acer ID and enjoy great benefits Open the Acer Portal app from the Start screen to sign up for an Acer ID or sign in if you already have an Acer ID. There are three great reasons for you to get an Acer ID:
Build Your Own Cloud with Acer BYOC. Get the latest offers and product information. Register your device for warranty service. For more information, please visit the Acer BYOC website:
www.acer.com/byoc-start Important This manual contains proprietary information that is protected by copyright laws. The information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice. Images provided herein are for reference only and may contain information or features that do not apply to your computer. Acer Group shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained in this manual. Model number: _________________________________ Serial number: _________________________________ Date of purchase: ______________________________ Place of purchase: ______________________________ TABLE OF CONTENTS Table of contents - 3 6 First things first Your guides ............................................. 6 Basic care and tips for using your computer.................................................. 6 Turning your computer off........................... 6 Taking care of your computer ..................... 7 Taking care of your AC adapter.................. 7 Cleaning and servicing................................ 7 Your Acer notebook tour 9 Screen view............................................. 9 Keyboard view....................................... 10 Left view ................................................ 10 Information on USB 3.0............................. 11 Right view.............................................. 11 Cover / rear view ................................... 12 Using the keyboard 13 Hotkeys..................................................... 14 Windows keys........................................ 15 Recovering your system 16 Recover from a supplied DVD............... 16 Creating recovery discs......................... 17 Creating a recovery backup................... 17 Creating a drivers and applications backup................................................... 19 Recovering your system ........................ 21 Reinstalling drivers and applications......... 22 Returning to an earlier system snapshot .. 24 Returning your system to its factory condition.................................................... 25 Recovering from Windows ........................ 25 Recovering from a recovery backup ......... 28 Connecting to the Internet 31 Connecting with a cable ........................ 31 Built-in network feature ............................. 31 Connecting wirelessly............................ 31 Connecting to a wireless LAN................... 32 Connecting to a 3G network ..................... 32 Using a Bluetooth connection 33 Enabling and disabling Bluetooth .......... 33 Enable Bluetooth and add a device .......... 33 Acer Touch Tools 35 Touch tool controls ................................ 35 Pointing ..................................................... 36 Using AccuFinger...................................... 36 RepliView.................................................. 37 Settings..................................................... 37 39 Acer Screen Grasp Overview .............................................. 39 Adjusting the Settings ............................... 40 The editing tool ......................................... 40 42 Acer Scrapboard BIOS utility 44 Boot sequence....................................... 44 Setting passwords ................................. 44 Securing your computer 45 Using passwords ................................... 45 Entering passwords .................................. 45 47 Power management Saving power ......................................... 47 Battery pack 49 Battery characteristics ........................... 49 Charging the battery ................................. 49 Optimizing battery life ............................... 50 Checking the battery level......................... 51 Battery-low warning .................................. 51 Traveling with your computer 52 Disconnecting from the desktop ............ 52 Moving around....................................... 52 Preparing the computer ............................ 52 What to bring to meetings......................... 53 Taking the computer home .................... 53 Preparing the computer ............................ 53 What to take with you................................ 54 Special considerations.............................. 54 Setting up a home office ........................... 54 Traveling with the computer................... 54 Preparing the computer ............................ 55 What to take with you................................ 55 Special considerations.............................. 55 Traveling internationally with the computer 55 Preparing the computer ............................ 55 What to bring with you .............................. 56 Special considerations.............................. 56 Memory card reader 58 Connectivity options............................... 58 60 Video and audio connectors 61 HDMI Micro Universal Serial Bus (USB) 62 Frequently asked questions 64 Requesting service ................................ 66 Tips and hints for using Windows 8.1.... 68 How do I get to Start? ............................... 68 What are "Charms?" ................................. 68 Can I boot directly to the desktop? ........... 69 How do I jump between apps?.................. 69 4 - Table of contents How do I turn off my computer?................ 69 How do I unlock my computer?................. 69 How do I set the alarm?............................ 71 Where are my apps?................................. 72 What is a Microsoft ID (account)?............. 74 How do I add a favorite to Internet Explorer?................................................... 74 How do I check for Windows updates?..... 74 Where can I get more information?........... 74 Troubleshooting..................................... 75 Troubleshooting tips.................................. 75 Error messages......................................... 75 Internet and online security 77 First steps on the net ............................. 77 Protecting your computer.......................... 77 Choose an Internet Service Provider........ 77 Network connections................................. 79 Surf the Net!.............................................. 81 Security..................................................... 81
- 5 Getting started... In this section you will find:
Useful information on caring for your computer and your health Where to find the power button, ports and connectors Tips and tricks for using the touchpad and keyboard How to create recovery backups Guidelines for connecting to a network and using Bluetooth Information on using Acers bundled software 6 - First things first FIRST THINGS FIRST We would like to thank you for making this Acer tablet your choice for meeting your mobile computing needs. Your guides To help you use your Acer tablet, we have designed a set of guides:
First off, the Setup Guide helps you get started with setting up your computer. The Quick Guide introduces you to the basic features and functions of your new computer. For more on how your computer can help you to be more productive, please refer to the Users Manual. This guide contains detailed information on such subjects as system utilities, data recovery, expansion options and troubleshooting. In addition it contains general regulations and safety notices for your tablet. It is available from the desktop; double-click the Help icon and click Users Manual in the menu that opens. Basic care and tips for using your computer Turning your computer off To turn the power off, do any of the following:
Use the Windows shutdown command: Open the Charms, click Settings > Power then click Shut Down. If you need to power down the computer for a short while, but dont want to completely shut it down, you can put it into Hibernate by pressing the power button. You can also put the computer in sleep mode by opening the Charms, click Settings > Power then click Sleep Note If you cannot power off the computer normally, press and hold the power button for more than four seconds to shut down the computer. If you turn off the computer and want to turn it on again, wait at least two seconds before powering up. First things first - 7 Taking care of your computer Your computer will serve you well if you take care of it. Do not expose the computer to direct sunlight. Do not place it near sources of heat, such as a radiator. Do not expose the computer to temperatures below 0 C (32 F) or above 50 C (122 F). Do not subject the computer to magnetic fields. Do not expose the computer to rain or moisture. Do not spill water or any liquid on the computer. Do not subject the computer to heavy shock or vibration. Do not expose the computer to dust or dirt. Never place objects on top of the computer. Do not slam the computer display when you close it. Never place the computer on uneven surfaces. Taking care of your AC adapter Here are some ways to take care of your AC adapter:
Do not connect the adapter to any other device. Do not step on the power cord or place heavy objects on top of it. Carefully route the power cord and any cables away from foot traffic. When unplugging the power cord, do not pull on the cord itself but pull on the plug. The total ampere ratings of the equipment plugged in should not exceed the ampere rating of the cord if you are using an extension cord. Also, the total current rating of all equipment plugged into a single wall outlet should not exceed the fuse rating. Cleaning and servicing When cleaning the computer, follow these steps:
1.Turn off the computer. 2.Disconnect the AC adapter. 3.Use a soft, moist cloth. Do not use liquid or aerosol cleaners. 8 - First things first If either of the following occurs:
The computer has been dropped or the body has been damaged;
The computer does not operate normally Please refer to Frequently asked questions on page 64. YOUR ACER NOTEBOOK TOUR Your Acer notebook tour - 9 After setting up your computer as illustrated in the setup poster, let us show you around your new Acer notebook. Screen view 1 2 3
#
1 2 3 Icon Item Webcam Touchscreen Speakers Description Web camera for video communication. A light next to the webcam indicates that the webcam is active. Displays computer output, supports multi-touch input. Deliver stereo audio output. 10 - Your Acer notebook tour Keyboard view 4 1 2 3 Icon
#
1 2 3 4 Item Keyboard Pointing stick Selection buttons Power switch Description For entering data into your computer. Used to control the cursor. Perform left- and right-click functions. Turns the keyboard on or off. Left view 1 2 3 4
# Icon 1 Item HDMI Micro port Description Supports high-definition digital video connections.
# Icon 2 Item Micro USB 3.0 port Connects to USB devices. Description Your Acer notebook tour - 11 3 4 Battery reset pinhole DC-in jack Information on USB 3.0 Simulates removing and reinstalling the battery. Insert a paperclip into the hole and press for four seconds. Connects to an AC adapter. Compatible with USB 3.0 and earlier devices. For optimal performance, use USB 3.0-certified devices. Defined by the USB 3.0 specification (SuperSpeed USB). Right view 1 2 3 4 5 Icon
#
1 2 3 Item Headset/speaker jack Windows button Volume button Description Connects to audio devices (e.g., speakers, headphones) or a headset with microphone. Press to go to the Windows Start screen. Adjusts the system volume. 12 - Your Acer notebook tour Icon
#
4 5 Item Microphone USB port Description Internal microphone for sound recording. Connects to USB devices. Cover / rear view 1 2 3
# Icon Item 1 2 3 microSD card reader Power button Keyboard connector Description Accepts one microSD Card. Push to remove/install the card. Only one card can operate at any given time. Turns the computer on and off. Opening the lid will also turn the computer on. Connects to the keyboard to charge the keyboard battery. USING THE KEYBOARD Using the keyboard - 13 Your new computer has a keyboard that can be used connected to the screen or wirelessly. The keyboard is held in place by magnetic clips. If the keyboard has not been used for a while, it may have gone to sleep to save power. If your computer does not respond to the keyboard, try turning the keyboard off and on again. Open and pull the keyboard away from the base. Swap the keyboard to the front of the device. 14 - Using the keyboard Snap the keyboard into place using the front locating holes. The keyboard has full-sized keys, separate cursor, and Windows keys. Hotkeys The computer employs hotkeys or key combinations to access most of the computer's controls like screen brightness and volume output. To activate hotkeys, press and hold the <Fn> key before pressing the other key in the hotkey combination. Hotkey Icon
<Fn> +
<Q>
<Fn> +
<W>
Airplane mode Function Sleep Description Enables/disables the computers communication devices. Puts the computer in Sleep mode. Switches display output between the display screen, external monitor (if connected) and both. Turns the display screen backlight off to save power. Press any key to return. Display toggle Screen blank Speaker toggle Turns the speakers on and off. Brightness up Increases the screen brightness.
<Fn> +
<E>
<Fn> +
<R>
<Fn> +
<Y>
<Fn> +
< >
Using the keyboard - 15 Hotkey Icon
<Fn> +
< >
<Fn> +
< >
<Fn> +
< >
Function Brightness down Decreases the screen Description Volume up brightness. Increases the sound volume. Volume down Decreases the sound volume. Note To use Function keys (such as F1, F2 ...) press <Fn> and the corresponding number key. Thus, <Fn> + <1> for <F1> etc. During boot up, press <Fn> + <2> to access BIOS. To type a Euro symbol (), press <Alt Gr> + <5>. Windows keys The keyboard has two keys that perform Windows-specific functions. Key Windows key Application key Description Pressed alone it returns to the Start screen. It can also be used with other keys for special functions, please check Windows Help. This key has the same effect as clicking the right mouse button; it opens the application's context menu. 16 - Recovering your system RECOVERING YOUR SYSTEM Depending on the storage space available in your computer, your computer either uses the Acer Recovery Management program, or is supplied with one or more system recovery DVDs. To use a system recovery DVD, please see the instructions below, otherwise see Creating recovery discs on page 17. Recover from a supplied DVD If your computer comes with system recovery DVDs, obtain an external optical disc drive (ODD) and complete the following steps to reinstall Windows 8.1 and all the required drivers:
Note Some Acer apps may not be recovered when you reinstall Windows 8.1. To install any apps that you require, please download them from the Windows Store. 1.Shutdown the computer by tapping the Settings charm > Power >
Shutdown. 2.Connect the ODD to your computer. 3.Enter the computers BIOS - press and hold the volume up key before pressing the power button. 4.Select the Boot option in the left pane. 5.Under Boot priority order, use the arrows to move USB CDROM to the number one position. 6.Select Exit in the left pane and then select Exit Saving Changes. 7.Insert the recovery DVD, restart your computer, and follow the onscreen instructions. If you are having trouble with your computer, and the frequently asked questions (see Frequently asked questions on page 64) do not help, you can 'recover' your computer - i.e. return it to an earlier state. Creating recovery discs Recovering your system - 17 This section describes the recovery tools available on your computer. Acer provides Acer Recovery Management, which allows you to create a recovery backup, a drivers and applications backup, and to start recovery options, either using Windows tools, or the recovery backup. Note Acer Recovery Management is only available with a pre-installed Windows operating system. Important We recommend that you create a Recovery Backup and Drivers and Applications Backup and as soon as possible. In certain situations a full recovery will require a USB recovery backup. Creating a recovery backup To reinstall from a USB storage drive, you must first create a recovery backup. The recovery backup includes the entire original contents of your computers hard drive, including Windows and all factory-loaded software and drivers. Using this backup will restore your computer to the same state as when you purchased it, while giving you an option to retain all settings and personal data. Note Since the recovery backup requires at least 16 GB of storage after formatting, it is recommended to use a USB drive with a capacity of 32 GB or larger. 18 - Recovering your system 1.From Start, type 'Recovery' and then click Acer Recovery Management in the list of apps. 2.Click Create Factory Default Backup. The Recovery Drive window opens. Make sure Copy contents from the recovery partition to the recovery drive is selected. This provides the most complete and safest recovery backup. 3.Plug in the USB drive then click Next. Since the recovery backup requires at least 16 GB of storage after formatting, it is recommended to use a USB drive with a capacity of 32 GB or larger. Recovering your system - 19 4.You will be shown the backup progress on the screen. 5.Follow the process until it completes. 6.After creating the recovery backup, you can choose to delete the recovery this information, you can only use the USB recovery backup to restore your computer, if you lose or erase the USB drive, you cannot restore your computer. information on your computer. If you delete 7.Unplug the USB drive and label it clearly. Important Write a unique, descriptive label on the backup, such as 'Windows Recovery Backup'. Make sure you keep the backup in a safe place that you will remember. Creating a drivers and applications backup To create a Drivers and Applications Backup, that contains the factory-loaded software and drivers needed by your computer, you 20 - Recovering your system may use either a USB storage drive or, if your computer features a DVD recorder, one or more blank recordable DVDs. 1.From Start, type 'Recovery' and then click Acer Recovery Management in the list of apps. 2.Click Create Drivers and Applications Backup. Plug in the USB drive or insert a blank DVD into the optical drive, then click Next. If you are using a USB drive, make sure your USB drive has enough capacity before continuing. If using DVDs, it will also show the number of blank, recordable discs you will need to complete the recovery discs. Make sure that you have the required number of identical, blank discs. 3.Click Start to copy files.You will be shown the backup progress on the screen. 4.Follow the process until it completes:
If you are using optical discs, the drive ejects each disc as it completes burning it. Remove the disc from the drive and mark it Recovering your system - 21 with a permanent marker. If multiple discs are required, insert a new disc when prompted, then click OK. Continue until the process is complete. If you are using a USB drive, unplug the drive and label it clearly. Important Write a unique, descriptive label on each backup, such as 'Drivers and Applications Backup'. Make sure you keep the backup in a safe place that you will remember. Recovering your system To recover your system:
1.Perform minor fixes. If only one or two items of software or hardware have stopped working correctly, the problem may be solved by reinstalling the software or the device drivers. To reinstall software and drivers that were pre-installed at the factory, see Reinstalling drivers and applications on page 22. For instructions on reinstalling software and drivers that were not pre-installed, see that products documentation or support Web site. 2.Revert to a previous system condition. If reinstalling software or drivers does not help, then the problem may be solved by returning your system to a previous state when everything was working correctly. For instructions, see Returning to an earlier system snapshot on page 24. 3.Reset your operating system. If nothing else has solved the problem and you want to reset your system, but keep your user information, see Returning your system to its factory condition on page 25. 4.Reset your system to its factory condition. If nothing else has solved the problem and you want to reset your system to factory condition, see Returning your system to its factory condition on page 25. 22 - Recovering your system Reinstalling drivers and applications As a troubleshooting step, you may need to reinstall the applications and device drivers that came pre-installed on your computer from the factory. You can reinstall using either your hard drive or the backup you have created. Other applications - If you need to reinstall software that did not come pre-installed on your computer, you need to follow that softwares installation instructions. New device drivers - If you need to reinstall device drivers that did not come pre-installed on your computer, follow the instructions provided with the device. If you are reinstalling using Windows and the recovery information stored on your computer:
1.From Start, type 'Recovery' and then click Acer Recovery Management in the list of apps. 2.Click Reinstall Drivers or Applications. 3.You should see the Contents section of the Acer Resource Center. Recovering your system - 23 Images for reference only. 4.Click the install icon for the item you want to install, then follow the onscreen instructions to complete the installation. Repeat this step for each item you want to reinstall. If you are reinstalling from a Drivers and Applications Backup on a DVD or USB drive:
1.Insert the Drivers and Applications Backup into the disc drive or connect it to a free USB port. If you inserted a DVD wait for Acer Resource Center to start. If Acer Resource Center does not start automatically, press the Windows key + <E>, then double-click on the optical drive icon. If you are using a USB drive, press the Windows key + <E>, then double-click on the drive that contains the backup. Double-click on ResourceCenter. 24 - Recovering your system 2.You should see the Contents section of the Acer Resource Center. Images for reference only. 3.Click the install icon for the item you want to install, then follow the onscreen prompts to complete the installation. Repeat this step for each item you want to reinstall. Returning to an earlier system snapshot Microsoft System Restore periodically takes a 'snapshot' of your system settings and saves them as restore points. In most cases of hard-to-resolve software problems, you can return to one of these restore points to get your system running again. Windows automatically creates an additional restore point each day, and also each time you install software or device drivers. Note For more information about using Microsoft System Restore, from Start, type Help and then click Help and Support in the list of apps. Type Windows system restore in the Search Help box, then press Enter. Returning to a restore point 1.From Start, type Control Panel and then click Control Panel in the list of apps. 2.Click System and Security > Action Center, then click Recovery at the bottom of the window. 3.Click Open System Restore, then Next. Recovering your system - 25 4.Click the latest restore point (at a time when your system worked correctly), click Next, then Finish. 5.A confirmation window appears; click Yes. Your system is restored using the restore point you specified. This process may take several minutes, and may restart your computer. Returning your system to its factory condition If your computer experiences problems that are not recoverable by other methods, you may need to reinstall everything to return your system to its factory condition. You can recover from either your hard drive or the recovery backup you have created. If you can still run Windows and have not deleted the recovery partition, see Recovering from Windows on page 25. If you cannot run Windows, your original hard drive has been completely re-formatted or you have installed a replacement hard drive, see Recovering from a recovery backup on page 28. Recovering from Windows Start Acer Recovery Management:
From Start, type Recovery and then click Acer Recovery Management in the list of apps. Two options are available, Restore Factory Settings (Reset my PC) or Customized Restore (Refresh my PC). Restore Factory Settings deletes everything on your hard drive, then reinstalls Windows and all software and drivers that were pre-installed on your system. If you can access important files on your hard drive, back them up now. See Restore Factory Settings with Acer Recovery Management on page 26. Customized Restore will attempt to retain your files (user data) but will reinstall all software and drivers. Software installed since you purchased your PC will be removed (except software installed from 26 - Recovering your system the Windows Store). See Customized Restore with Acer Recovery Management on page 27. Restore Factory Settings with Acer Recovery Management 1.Click Restore Factory Settings. Important Restore Factory Settings will erase all files on your hard drive. 2.The Reset your PC window opens. Images for reference only. 3.Click Next, then choose how to erase your files:
a.Just remove my files quickly erases all files before restoring your computer and takes about 30 minutes. b.Fully clean the drive completely cleans the drive after each file is erased, so no files can be viewed after the recovery. Cleaning the drive takes much longer, up to 5 hours, but is much more secure as old files are completely removed. 4.Click Reset. 5.The recovery process begins by restarting your computer, then continues by copying files to your hard drive. 6.After the recovery has finished, you can start using your computer by repeating the first-start process. Recovering your system - 27 Recovering from the hard drive during startup 1.Turn on your computer and press <Alt> + <0> during startup. A screen appears asking you to choose the keyboard layout. 2.Several options are now presented. Click Troubleshoot. 3.Click either Refresh your PC or Reset your PC. Note
"Refresh your PC" enables you to restore your computer to the default factory condition with files intact. "Reset your PC" completely removes all your files and resets your computer to factory settings. 4.Click Next. The process will take several minutes. Customized Restore with Acer Recovery Management 1.Click Customized Restore (Retain User Data). 28 - Recovering your system 2.The Refresh your PC window opens. Images for reference only. 3.Click Next, then Refresh. 4.The recovery process begins by restarting your computer, then continues by copying files to your hard drive. This process takes about 30 minutes. Recovering from a recovery backup To recover from a recovery backup on a USB drive:
1.Find your recovery backup. 2.If your computer does not have a built-in keyboard, make sure a keyboard is attached to your computer. 3.Plug in the USB drive and turn on your computer. 4.If it is not already enabled, you must enable the F12 Boot Menu:
a. Press <Fn> + <2> when starting your computer. b. Use the left or right arrow keys to select the Main menu. c. Press the down key until F12 Boot Menu is selected, press <Fn>
+<5> to change this setting to Enabled. d. Use the left or right arrow keys to select the Exit menu. e. Depending on the type of BIOS your computer uses, select Save Changes and Exit or Exit Saving Changes and press Enter. Select OK or Yes to confirm. f. Your computer will restart. 5.During startup, press <Fn> + <=> to open the boot menu. The boot menu allows you to select which device to start from, select the USB drive. a. Use your arrow keys to select USB Device, then press Enter. Recovering your system - 29 b. Windows starts from the recovery backup instead of the normal startup process. 6.Select your keyboard type. 7.Select Troubleshoot and then choose the type of recovery to use:
a. Click Advanced then System Restore to start Microsoft System Restore:
Microsoft System Restore periodically takes a snapshot of your system settings and saves them as restore points. In most cases of hard-to-resolve software problems, you can return to one of these restore points to get your system running again. b. Click Reset your PC to start the reset process:
Reset your PC deletes everything on your hard drive, then reinstalls Windows and all software and drivers that were pre-
installed on your system. If you can access important files on your hard drive, back them up now. See Reset your PC from the recovery backup on page 29. c. Click Refresh your PC to start the refresh process:
Refresh your PC will attempt to retain your files (user data) but will reinstall all software and drivers. Software installed since you purchased your PC will be removed (except software installed from the Windows Store). See Refresh your PC from the recovery backup on page 30. Reset your PC from the recovery backup Important Reset your PC will erase all files on your hard drive. 1.The Reset your PC window opens. Images for reference only. 30 - Recovering your system 2.Click Next. 3.Select the operating system to recover (normally only one option is available). 4.Choose to keep any changes to the hard drive:
a. If you have deleted the recovery partition or otherwise changed the partitions on the hard drive and want to keep these changes, select No. b. To restore your computer to Factory Settings, select Yes. 5.Choose how to erase your files:
a.Just remove my files quickly erases all files before restoring your computer and takes about 30 minutes. b.Fully clean the drive completely cleans the drive after each file is erased, so no files can be viewed after the recovery. Cleaning the drive takes much longer, up to 5 hours, but is much more secure as old files are completely removed. 6.Click Reset. 7.After the recovery has finished, you can start using your computer by repeating the first-start process. Refresh your PC from the recovery backup 1.The Refresh your PC window opens. 2.Click Next. 3.Select the operating system to recover (normally only one option is available). 4.Click Refresh. 5.The recovery process begins by restarting your computer, then continues by copying files to your hard drive. This process takes about 30 minutes. CONNECTING TO THE INTERNET Connecting to the Internet - 31 Note Information in this section may not apply to your computer. This chapter includes basic information on types of connections, and getting connected to the Internet. For detailed information, please refer to Network connections on page 79. Connecting with a cable Built-in network feature The built-in network feature makes it easy for you to connect your computer to the Internet using a cable. But first, an Internet Service Provider (ISP) -- usually a phone or cable company -- will have to go to your home or office to set up Internet service. The ISP will install a small box, called a router, that will allow you to connect to the Internet. Once your router is set up, all you have to do is plug one end of a network cable into the network port on your computer, and the other end into a port on your router. (Refer to the image below.) Then, you'll be ready to get online. Connecting wirelessly 32 - Connecting to the Internet Connecting to a wireless LAN A wireless LAN (or WLAN) is a wireless local area network, which can link two or more computers without using wires. Once connected to WLAN, you can access the Internet. You can also share files, other devices, and even your Internet connection itself. Warning Using wireless devices while flying in aircraft may be prohibited. All wireless devices must be switched off before boarding an aircraft and during take-off, as they may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, disrupt communications, and even be illegal. You may turn on your computers wireless devices only when informed that it is safe to do so by the cabin crew. Your computer's wireless connection is turned on by default and Windows will detect and display a list of available networks during setup. Select your network and enter the password if required. Acer notebook computers feature an Airplane mode hotkey that turns the network connection on or off. You can use the network management options to turn your wireless network on/off or control what is shared over the network. From the Start screen, start typing wireless then select Connect to a network or Change Wi-Fi settings. Otherwise, open the instructions. Internet Explorer and follow Note Please refer to your Internet Service Provider (ISP) or router documentation for details on connecting to the Internet. Connecting to a 3G network If your computer has a SIM slot, you can connect to the Internet using a 3G (cellular phone) network. To do this, you must have a compatible SIM card and a data contract with your cellular provider. Note Please contact your cellular provider for details on connecting to the Internet via 3G. USING A BLUETOOTH CONNECTION Using a Bluetooth connection - 33 Bluetooth is a technology enabling you to transfer data wirelessly over short distances between many different types of devices. Bluetooth-
enabled devices include computers, cell phones, tablets, wireless headsets, and keyboards. To use Bluetooth, you must ensure the following:
1.Bluetooth is enabled on both devices. 2.Your devices are "paired" (or connected). Enabling and disabling Bluetooth The Bluetooth adapter must be enabled on both devices. For your computer, this may be an external switch, a software setting, or a separate Bluetooth dongle plugged into the computers USB port (if no internal Bluetooth adapter is available). Note Please check your devices owners manual to determine how to turn on its Bluetooth adapter. Enable Bluetooth and add a device Every new device must first be "paired" with your computers Bluetooth adapter. This means it must first be authenticated for security purposes. You only need to pair once. After that, simply turning on the Bluetooth adapter of both devices will connect them. Bluetooth on your computer is disabled by default. To enable your computers Bluetooth adapter, do the following:
1.Open the Charms and select Settings > Change PC Settings > PC and devices > Bluetooth, or press the Windows key + <W> and then type Wireless; in the results, click on Bluetooth settings. 2.Click the toggle next to Bluetooth to enable/disable it. 3.Your computer will automatically start searching for devices, as well as make itself visible to other devices. 34 - Using a Bluetooth connection 4.Tap the device you wish to add from the list of discovered devices, and tap Pair. A code displays on your computer, which should match the code displayed on your device. Select Yes. Then, accept the pairing from your device. Note Some devices using older versions of the Bluetooth technology require both devices to enter a PIN. In the case of one of the devices not having any inputs
(as in a headset), the passcode is hardcoded into the device (usually "0000"
or "1234"). Consult your devices user manual for more information. ACER TOUCH TOOLS Acer Touch Tools - 35 Acer Touch Tools makes using your Windows device easier and more convenient. You can select, drag or tap on small items in the user interface. You can run Acer Touch Tools, from Start or from the Desktop taskbar. Touch tool controls The Touch Tools control panel has several icons:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 No. Item 1 Move 2 AccuFinger Description Tap the Move tab and drag the Touch Tools panel to reposition it. Displays or hides the AccuFinger pointer. Tap the icon to display the pointer, and again to hide it. The AccuFinger pointer will also hide automatically after a specified number of seconds, which you can set in the configuration window. 36 - Acer Touch Tools No. Item 3 Multi-select 4 5 6 7 8 ESC simulation Touch Tools configuration Gateway Screen Grasp Close AccuFinger pointer Pointing Description Turns the multi-select feature on and off. Tap the multi-select icon to turn it on. Tap it again to turn multi-select off. Tap on the ESC icon to send an Escape command to the system. Tap to open the Touch Tools configuration window. See Settings on page 37. Tap this icon to run the Acer Screen Grasp utility. See Acer Screen Grasp on page 39. Tap the X to close Acer Touch Tools. Both AccuFinger and the Touch Tools panel will close. The AccuFinger pointer's fine tip allows you to work with even very small screen elements. This can be particularly helpful when using operating system setting and configuration windows with small buttons, boxes or other small items. Using AccuFinger With AccuFinger you can:
Point: Place your fingertip on the pointer pad and drag it around. The pointer direction changes automatically as you move around the screen. Select: Perform all standard touch screen cursor commands including tap, double-tap, drag, and drag-select, etc. Drag: To drag something, position the AccuFinger pointer on it, press briefly on the pointer pad to activate drag mode, then drag the selected item to a new position. Display: Display a context-sensitive menu by holding your fingertip on the pointer pad for a moment until the menu appears, then stop touching the pad and select a menu command. Text edit: You can select text in supported programs by tapping on a word or text block to select it or insert the cursor. You can then type or perform other operations on the selected text. Acer Touch Tools - 37 RepliView Your touch devices onscreen virtual keyboard can sometimes block your view of where you are typing. RepliView displays a small pop-up window above the onscreen keyboard that displays a view of where you are typing so that you can see what you are doing. This feature operates automatically when Touch Tools is running. Settings You can adjust the settings to suit your needs, including setting the AccuFinger pointer size and timeout. You can also select either right 38 - Acer Touch Tools or left-hand operation, which optimizes pointer orientation for the selected mode. ACER SCREEN GRASP Acer Screen Grasp - 39 Acer Screen Grasp is a handy screen capture tool that allows you to capture all or part of anything thats displayed on your computers screen. It works for both the desktop and Start screen applications. To launch Acer Screen Grasp, press <Ctrl> + <Shift> + <PrtSc>. Once you have opened the application you can activate the launch gesture: Tapping the screen with three fingers. Note The three-finger gesture is disabled by default. You can enable it from Settings. Overview 1 2 3 4 5 6 The toolbar at the top of the screen allows you to change screen capture options and settings. No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Description Capture: Capture a rectangular or circular area of the screen. Freeform capture: Capture a freeform part of the screen. Window capture: Capture all or part of an open window. Webpage capture: Capture a whole webpage, including parts of the page that are not currently visible. Full screen capture: Capture the full screen. Settings: Change the defaults. 40 - Acer Screen Grasp Adjusting the Settings Tap the Settings icon to adjust the defaults for Acer Screen Grasp. You can enable or disable the launch gesture (tap the screen with three fingers), set the app to launch the editing tool after capturing, pin the program to the taskbar, view a short introduction tutorial, or view the Help content. The editing tool After youve captured the screen, you can edit the image. 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 Description Undo. Redo. Pencil tool. No. 1 2 3 Acer Screen Grasp - 41 No. 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Description Marker tool. Text tool. Eraser. Mosaic effect. Lasso tool. Share capture to... Windows clipboard Facebook Acer Scrapboard Word PowerPoint Outlook Save. Pin/unpin the toolbars. 42 - Acer Scrapboard ACER SCRAPBOARD Acer Scrapboard is a useful tool to manage your screen captures. Screen captures are automatically sorted by date. Tap the Explorer. icon on the screen capture to open the website in Internet You can also create tags to assist in sorting your images. 1.Tap and drag an image down to open the menu at the bottom of the screen. 2.Tap Create tag to create a tag. 3.Tap Tags to open the list of available tags, and check each tag that you would like to assign to the image.
- 43 Keeping your computer and data safe... In this section you will find:
How to secure your computer Setting passwords What you need to prepare when youre traveling How to get the most out of your battery 44 - BIOS utility BIOS UTILITY The BIOS utility is a hardware configuration program built into your computer's BIOS. Your computer is already properly configured and optimized, and you do not normally need to run this utility. However, if you encounter configuration problems, you may need to run it. To activate the BIOS utility, press <Fn> + <2> during the POST while the computer logo is being displayed. Boot sequence To set the boot sequence in the BIOS utility, activate the BIOS utility, then select Boot from the categories listed at the top of the screen. Setting passwords To set a password on boot, activate the BIOS utility, then select Security from the categories listed at the top of the screen. Find Password on boot: and use the <Fn> + <5> and <Fn> + <6> keys to enable this feature. SECURING YOUR COMPUTER Securing your computer - 45 Your computer is a valuable investment that you need to take care of. Learn how to protect and take care of your computer. Using passwords Passwords protect your computer from unauthorized access. Setting these passwords creates several different levels of protection for your computer and data:
Supervisor Password prevents unauthorized entry into the BIOS utility. Once set, you must enter this password to gain access to the BIOS utility. See Setting passwords on page 38. User Password secures your computer against unauthorized use. Combine the use of this password with password checkpoints on boot-up and resume from Hibernation (if available) for maximum security. Password on Boot secures your computer against unauthorized use. Combine the use of this password with password checkpoints on boot-up and resume from Hibernation (if available) for maximum security. Important Do not forget your Supervisor Password! If you forget your password, please get in touch with your dealer or an authorized service center. Entering passwords When a password is set, a password prompt appears in the center of the display screen. When the Supervisor Password is set, a prompt appears when you enter the BIOS utility. Type the Supervisor Password and press <Enter> to access the BIOS utility. If you enter the password incorrectly, a warning message appears. Try again and press <Enter>. When the User Password is set and the password on boot parameter is enabled, a prompt appears at boot-up. 46 - Securing your computer Type the User Password and press <Enter> to use the computer. If you enter the password incorrectly, a warning message appears. Try again and press <Enter>. Important You have three chances to enter a password. If you fail to enter the password correctly after three tries, the system halts. Press and hold the power button for four seconds to shut down the computer. Then turn on the computer again, and try again. POWER MANAGEMENT Power management - 47 This computer has a built-in power management unit that monitors system activity. System activity refers to any activity involving one or more of following devices: keyboard, mouse, hard disk, peripherals connected to the computer, and video memory. If no activity is detected for a period of time, the computer stops some or all of these devices in order to conserve energy. the Saving power Disable Fast startup Your computer uses Fast startup to start quickly, but also uses a small amount of power to check for signals to start. These checks will slowly drain your computers battery. If you prefer to reduce your computers power requirements and environmental impact, turn off Fast startup:
Note If Fast startup is off, your computer will take longer to start from Sleep. Your computer will also not start if it receives an instruction to start over a network (Wake on LAN). 1.Open the desktop. 2.Click Power Options in the Notification area. 3.Select More Power Options. 4.Select Choose what the power buttons do. 48 - Power management 5.Select Change settings that are currently unavailable. 6.Scroll down and disable Turn on fast startup. 7.Select Save changes. BATTERY PACK Battery pack - 49 The computer uses an embedded Lithium battery that gives you long use between charges. Battery characteristics The battery is recharged whenever you connect the computer to the AC adapter. Your computer supports charge-in-use, enabling you to recharge the battery while you continue to operate the computer. However, recharging with the computer turned off significantly reduces charge time. The battery will come in handy when you travel or during a power failure. Charging the battery Plug the AC adapter into the computer, and connect to a mains power outlet. You can continue to operate your computer on AC power while your battery is charging. However, charging the battery with the computer turned off significantly reduces charge time. Note You are advised to charge the battery before retiring for the day. Charging the battery overnight before traveling enables you to start the next day with a fully charged battery. Conditioning a new battery pack Before you use a battery pack for the first time, there is a conditioning process that you should follow:
1.Connect the AC adapter and fully charge the battery. 2.Turn on the computer and complete setting up the operating system. 3.Disconnect the AC adapter. 4.Operate the computer using battery power. 5.Reconnect the AC adapter and fully charge the battery again. Follow these steps again until the battery has been charged and discharged three times. 50 - Battery pack Use this conditioning process for all new batteries, or if a battery hasn't been used for a long time. Warning Do not expose battery packs to temperatures below 0 C (32 F) or above 45 C (113 F). Extreme temperatures may adversely affect the battery pack. The battery conditioning process ensures your battery accepts the maximum possible charge. Failure to follow this procedure will prevent you from obtaining the maximum battery charge, and will also shorten the effective lifespan of the battery. In addition, the useful lifespan of the battery is adversely affected by the following usage patterns:
Using the computer on constant AC power. Not discharging and recharging the battery to its extremes, as described above. Frequent use; the more you use the battery, the faster it will reach the end of its effective life. An embedded battery has a life span of more than 1,000 charge/discharge cycles. Optimizing battery life Optimizing battery life helps you get the most out of battery operation, prolonging the charge/recharge cycle and improving recharging efficiency. You are advised to follow the suggestions set out below:
Use AC power whenever possible, reserving battery for mobile use. Remove accessories that are not being used (e.g. a USB disk drive), as they can continue to draw power. Store your PC in a cool, dry place. The recommended temperature is 10 C (50 F) to 30 C (86 F). Higher temperatures cause the battery to self-discharge faster. Excessive recharging decreases the battery life. Look after your AC adapter and battery. Checking the battery level The power meter indicates the current battery level. Rest the cursor over the battery/power icon on the taskbar to see the battery's present charge level. Battery pack - 51 Battery-low warning When using battery power pay attention to the power meter. Important Connect the AC adapter as soon as possible after the battery-low warning appears. Data may be lost if the battery is allowed to become fully depleted and the computer shuts down. When the battery-low warning appears, the recommended course of action depends on your situation:
Situation The AC adapter and a power outlet are available. The AC adapter or a power outlet is unavailable. Recommended Action 1. Plug the AC adapter into the computer, and then connect to the main power supply. 2. Save all necessary files. 3. Resume work. Turn off the computer if you want to recharge the battery rapidly. 1. Save all necessary files. 2. Close all applications. 3. Turn off the computer. 52 - Traveling with your computer TRAVELING WITH YOUR COMPUTER This section gives you tips and hints to consider when moving around or traveling with your computer. Disconnecting from the desktop Follow these steps to disconnect your computer from external accessories:
1.Save any open files. 2.Remove discs from optical drive. 3.Shut down the computer or put it into Sleep or Hibernate mode. 4.Close the display cover. 5.Disconnect the cord from the AC adapter. 6.Disconnect the keyboard, pointing device, printer, external monitor and other external devices. 7.Disconnect the Kensington lock if you are using one to secure the computer. Moving around When you are just moving within short distances, for example, from your office desk to a meeting room. Preparing the computer Before moving the computer, close and latch the display cover to place it in Sleep mode. You can now safely take the computer anywhere you go within the building. To wake the computer from Sleep mode, open the display and, if necessary, press and release the power button. If you are taking the computer to a client's office or a different building, you may choose to shut down the computer:
Press the Windows key + <C>, click Settings > Power then click Shut Down Or:
Traveling with your computer - 53 You can put the computer in Sleep mode by pressing <Fn> + <W> or by closing the display. When you are ready to use the computer again, open the display and, if necessary, press and release the power button. Note The computer may enter Hibernation or Deep Sleep mode after being in Sleep mode for a period of time. What to bring to meetings If your meeting is relatively short, you probably do not need to bring anything with you other than your computer. If your meeting will be longer, or if your battery is not fully charged, you may want to bring the AC adapter with you to plug in your computer in the meeting room. If the meeting room does not have an electrical outlet, reduce the drain on the battery by putting the computer in Sleep mode. Press
<Fn> + <W> or close the display cover whenever you are not actively using the computer. Taking the computer home When you are moving from your office to your home or vice versa. Preparing the computer After disconnecting the computer from your desktop, follow these steps to prepare the computer for the trip home:
Check that you have removed all media and compact discs from the drive(s). Failure to remove the media can damage the drive head. Pack the computer in a protective case that can prevent the computer from sliding around and cushion it if it should fall. Warning Avoid packing items next to the top cover of the computer. Pressure against the top cover can damage the screen. 54 - Traveling with your computer What to take with you Unless you have some items at home, take the following items with you:
AC adapter and power cord. The printed Setup Guide. Special considerations Follow these guidelines to protect your computer while traveling to and from work:
Minimize the effects of temperature changes by keeping the computer with you. If you need to stop for an extended period of time and cannot carry the computer with you, leave the computer in the trunk of the car to avoid exposing the computer to excessive heat. Changes in temperature and humidity can cause condensation. Allow the computer to return to room temperature, and inspect the screen for condensation before turning on the computer. If the temperature change is greater than 10 C (18 F), allow the computer to come to room temperature slowly. If possible, leave the computer for 30 minutes in an environment with a temperature between outside and room temperature. Setting up a home office If you frequently work on your computer at home, you may want to purchase a second AC adapter for use at home. With a second AC adapter, you can avoid carrying the extra weight to and from home. If you use your computer at home for significant periods of time, you might also want to add an external keyboard, monitor or mouse. Traveling with the computer Important Check with your airline for any special requirements for travelling with Lithium batteries. When you are moving within a larger distance, for instance, from your office building to a client's office building or traveling locally. Traveling with your computer - 55 Preparing the computer Prepare the computer as if you were taking it home. Make sure that the battery in the computer is charged. Airport security may require you to turn on your computer when carrying it into the gate area. What to take with you Take the following items with you:
AC adapter Additional printer driver files if you plan to use another printer Special considerations In addition to the guidelines for taking the computer home, follow these guidelines to protect your computer while traveling:
Always take the computer as carry-on luggage. If possible, have the computer inspected by hand. Airport security X-
ray machines are safe, but do not put the computer through a metal detector. Traveling internationally with the computer Important Check with your airline for any special requirements for travelling with Lithium batteries. When you are moving from country to country. Preparing the computer Prepare the computer as you would normally prepare it for traveling. 56 - Traveling with your computer What to bring with you Bring the following items with you:
AC adapter. Power cords that are appropriate for your destination(s). Additional printer driver files if you plan to use another printer. Proof of purchase, in case you need to show it to customs officials. International Travelers Warranty passport. Special considerations Follow the same special considerations as when traveling with the computer. In addition, these tips are useful when traveling internationally:
When traveling in another country, check that the local AC voltage and the AC adapter power cord specifications are compatible. If not, purchase a power cord that is compatible with the local AC voltage. Do not use converter kits sold for appliances to power the computer. If you are using the modem, check if the modem and connector are compatible with the telecommunications system of the country you are traveling in.
- 57 Ports and connectors... In this section you will find:
Information on the ports and connectors fitted to your computer 58 - Memory card reader MEMORY CARD READER Connectivity options Your computer has a card reader and other ports/jacks that allow you to connect peripheral devices to your computer. For instructions on how to connect different external devices to the computer, read the following section. Memory card reader Memory cards are used in a wide selection of digital cameras, PDAs, MP3 players and mobile phones. Inserting a memory card 1.Align the card so that the connector points towards the port, with the connectors facing down. 2.Carefully slide the card into the port. If you find you need to use any force to insert the card, try reorientating the card slightly. 3.Push the card until it clicks into place. A few millimetres of the card will extend from beyond the slot. If the card contains some files, the Windows Auto Play window may appear (this depends on the contents of the card) and ask you if you wish to use a program to access the contents of the card. Select an option here if it is appropriate, otherwise select Cancel. If the card contains no files, or unknown files, a window will open showing the contents of the card. SD, SDHC and SDXC cards Different types of SD cards cover different capacities, while using the same overall design. SD cards contain up to 4 GB, SDHC cards contain up to 32 GB, and SDXC cards can contain up to 2048 GB Memory card reader - 59
(2 TB). Your computer provides an SDHC or SDXC compatible card reader. Note SDXC memory cards can only be used in an SDXC-compatible reader; SD and SDHC cards can be used in either type. Removing a card from a memory card reader 1.Click on Show hidden icons arrow in the Notification Area (next to the clock). 2 2.Click on the Safely Remove Hardware icon. 3.Click on Eject SD Card (or the name of the device). 4.Wait until a Safe to Remove Hardware message is displayed. 5.Remove the card. 1 3 60 - Video and audio connectors VIDEO AND AUDIO CONNECTORS Connect to a monitor with a VGA or DVI port (the type of connection supported depends on your computers configuration). The appropriate cable is usually included with the monitor. Follow these steps to connect an monitor to your computer:
1.Check that the computer is powered off and the monitor power switch is turned off. 2.Attach the video cable to the monitor port on the computer. Secure the cable connection with the screws provided. 3.Connect the monitor power cable and plug it into a properly grounded wall outlet. 4.Follow any setup instructions in the monitor's user's guide. 5.Turn on power to the monitor, then the computer. 6.Make sure that the current resolution and refresh rate do not exceed the specifications of the monitor. If necessary change the display settings used by the computer. Note To access the display controls, press the Windows key (
"Display" and then click on Display.
) + W, type Headphones and microphone These ports allow you to connect audio devices. Use the headphone port to plug in stereo headphones or powered speakers. Plugging an audio device to the headphone port disables the built-in speakers. Use the microphone port to connect an external microphone for mono recording; plugging in an external microphone disables the built-in microphone. Note Some computers have a single "combo" port that allows you to use single-pin headsets with a built-in microphone. These headsets are most commonly used with smartphones. HDMI MICRO HDMI Micro - 61 HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is a high-quality, digital audio/video interface. HDMI allows you to connect any compatible digital audio/video source, such as your computer, a set-top box, DVD player, and audio/video receiver to any compatible digital audio and/or video monitor, such as a digital television (DTV) with a single cable. The single cable keeps everything neat and tidy while ensuring easy connection and the best audio and visual quality. HDMI Micro delivers the same high-quality playback as standard HDMI, with a slimmer connector, ideal for use in slim-and-light notebooks and tablet computers. Note An HDMI Micro-to-HDMI adapter is included with certain models. 62 - Universal Serial Bus (USB) UNIVERSAL SERIAL BUS (USB) The USB port is a high-speed port which allows you to connect USB peripherals, such as a mouse, an external keyboard, additional storage (external hard disks), or any other compatible device. Note Two USB standards are currently available on Acer computers: USB 2.0
(High-speed USB) and USB 3.0 (SuperSpeed USB). USB 2.0 ports on Acer computers have a black tongue in the port, while USB 3.0 ports have a blue tongue. For best performance, USB 3.0 devices should always be plugged into USB 3.0 ports. Consult your devices documentation to see which standard it supports. You can also charge devices such as tablets, smartphones, or other devices through a USB port. Some USB 3.0 ports support charging devices when the computer is in Hibernate or turned off. Additionally, you can use a USB hub to connect multiple devices to a single USB port. Important When removing a USB storage device, you should right-click on the USB icon in the Windows task bar and select "Eject <device>" to tell the operating system to stop using the device before removing it. Failure to do this may result in data loss or damage to your peripheral.
- 63 Got a question?
In this section you will find:
Frequently asked questions Tips for using Windows 8.1 Troubleshooting information How to protect yourself while online Where to find Acer service center contact information 64 - Frequently asked questions FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS The following is a list of possible situations that may arise during the use of your computer. Easy solutions are provided for each one. I turned on the power, but the computer does not start or boot up. Look at the power indicator:
If it is not lit, no power is being supplied to the computer. Check the following:
If you are using on the battery, it may be low and unable to power the computer. Connect the AC adapter to recharge the battery pack. Make sure that the AC adapter is properly plugged into the computer and to the power outlet. If it is lit, check the following:
Is a disc in the optical drive? Remove it and press <Ctrl> + <Alt>
+ <Del> to restart the system. Do you have a USB storage device (USB disk or smartphone) plugged into your computer? Unplug it and press <Ctrl> + <Alt> +
<Del> to restart the system. Nothing appears on the screen. The computers power management system automatically blanks the screen to save power. Press any key to turn the display back on. If pressing a key does not turn the display back on, three things might be the cause:
The brightness level might be too low. Press <Fn> + < > (increase) to adjust the brightness level. The display device might be set to an external monitor. Press the display toggle hotkey <Fn> + <E> to toggle the display back to the computer. If the power LED is flashing, the computer may be in Sleep or Hibernate mode. Press and release the power button to resume. No audio is heard from the computer. Check the following:
Frequently asked questions - 65 The volume may be muted. Look at the volume control (speaker) icon in the taskbar. If it is crossed-out, click the icon and deselect the Mute all option. The volume level may be too low. Check the volume from the volume control (speaker) icon in the taskbar. You can also use the volume control buttons to adjust the volume. If headphones, earphones or external speakers are connected to the headphone jack on the computer, the internal speakers automatically turn off. I want to eject the optical drive tray without turning on the power. There is a mechanical eject hole on the optical drive. Simply insert the tip of a pen or straightened-out paperclip into the hole and push to eject the tray. The keyboard does not respond. Try attaching an external keyboard to a USB port on the computer. If it works, contact your dealer or an authorized service center as the internal keyboard cable may be loose. The printer does not work. Check the following:
Make sure that the printer is connected to a power outlet and that it is turned on. Make sure that the printer cable is connected securely to a USB port and the corresponding port on the printer. 66 - Frequently asked questions I want to restore my computer to its original settings. Note If your system is the multilingual version, the operating system and language you choose when you first turn on the system will be the only option for future recovery operations. This recovery process helps you restore the C: drive with the original software content that is installed when you purchased your computer. Warning Your C: drive will be reformatted and all data will be erased. It is important to back up all data files before using this option. Before performing a restore operation, please check the BIOS settings. 1.Check to see if Acer disk-to-disk recovery is enabled or not. 2.Make sure the D2D Recovery setting in Main is Enabled. 3.Exit the BIOS utility and save changes. The system will reboot. Note To activate the BIOS utility, press <Fn> + <2> when you see the Acer logo during boot up. For detailed information on the recovery process, <cross-reference to Recovery chapter>. Requesting service International Travelers Warranty (ITW) Your computer is backed by an International Travelers Warranty
(ITW) that gives you security and peace of mind when traveling. An ITW passport came with your computer. This passport contains all you need to know about the ITW program. A list of available, authorized service centers is in this handy booklet. Read this passport thoroughly. Always have your ITW passport on hand, especially when you travel, to receive the benefits from our support centers. Attach your proof-of-
purchase to the ITW passport. If the country you are traveling in does not have an Acer-authorized ITW service site, you can still get in contact with our offices worldwide. Please visit www.acer.com. Frequently asked questions - 67 Before you call Please have the following information available when you call Acer for online service, and please be at your computer when you call. With your support, we can reduce the amount of time a call takes and help solve your problems efficiently. If there are error messages or beeps reported by your computer, write them down as they appear on the screen (or the number and sequence in the case of beeps). You are required to provide the following information:
Name: _______________________________________ Address: ______________________________________ Telephone number: _____________________________ Machine and model type: _________________________ Serial number: _________________________________ Date of purchase: ______________________________ Frequently ask 68 - Frequently asked questions Tips and hints for using Windows 8.1 We know this is a new operating system that will take some getting used to, so we've created a few pointers to help you get started. How do I get to Start?
Press the Windows key; tap the Start button on the desktop taskbar;
or swipe the right-hand edge of the screen inwards and tap the Start charm. Wheres the Start button?
The Start button will appear in the desktop taskbar. Tapping it will open Start where you can launch apps. How do I see all of my apps?
Swipe upwards from the bottom of Start. Can I make the "All apps" view the default for Start?
Yes, you can, just follow these steps:
1.Go to the desktop. 2.Tap and hold the taskbar until you see the square outline. Select Properties from the menu that opens when you remove your finger. 3.From the Navigation tab, check Show the Apps view automatically when I go to Start. What are "Charms?"
Charms allow you to perform useful functions, such as sharing content, turning off your PC or changing settings. How do I access the charms?
Swipe the right-hand edge of the screen inwards. Frequently asked questions - 69 Can I boot directly to the desktop?
Yes, you can, just follow these steps:
1.Go to the desktop. 2.Tap and hold the taskbar until you see the square outline. Select Properties from the menu that opens when you remove your finger. 3.From the Navigation tab, check Go to the desktop instead of Start when I sign in. How do I jump between apps?
Swipe the left-hand edge of the screen inwards to cycle through apps that are currently running. How do I turn off my computer?
Swipe the right-hand edge of the screen inwards, tap Settings >
Power and select the action you'd like to take. Can I just turn off notifications?
You can turn off notifications during certain hours so that you can leave your computer running, but not be disturbed by notifications. 1.Swipe the right-hand edge of the screen inwards and tap Settings >
Change PC settings > Search & apps > Notifications. 2.Move the Quiet hours slider to On and select times to start and stop disabling notifications. How do I unlock my computer?
Swipe the lock screen upwards and tap a user account icon to unlock the computer. If your account has a password set, you will need to enter the password to continue. Tap and hold the preview icon to see the characters you've entered to ensure the password is correct. 70 - Frequently asked questions Can I personalize the Lock screen?
You can personalize the lock screen with a different image, to run a slideshow of images, or to show you quick status and notifications to suit your personal needs. To change the background, swipe the right-hand edge of the screen inwards and tap Settings > Change PC settings > PC and devices
> Lock screen. From here you can:
Select a background image for the lock screen Turn the Slide show on or off Select lock screen apps. How do I set up the lock screen slideshow?
1.Swipe the right-hand edge of the screen inwards and tap Settings >
Change PC settings > PC and devices > Lock screen. 2.Move the slider to On and select if the slideshow should be played while the computer is running on battery power. 3.Tap Add a folder and open the folder you wish to use (your Pictures folder will open by default). Tap Use this folder > OK. 4.You can see the list of folders under Add a folder. Select a folder name and tap Remove to remove the folder from the lock screen slideshow. 5.Change the other settings to suit your needs. How do I move tiles?
Tap and hold a tile to select it, then drag it to the place on Start that you want it to appear. Other tiles will be moved to accommodate the tile in its new location. Can I arrange tiles in groups?
Yes, you can. Tap and hold a tile until you see the screen dim. When you release the tile, the Customize menu appear at the bottom of the screen. You will see Name group appear above unnamed groups. You can give the group(s) a name and arrange the tiles within the groups to suit your needs. Frequently asked questions - 71 Can I make tiles bigger or smaller?
Swipe upwards from bottom of the screen and tap Customize, tap the tile(s) you wish to resize and tap Resize. Select a size from the menu that appears. How do I close an app?
Swipe the window downwards from the top to the bottom of the screen. You need to swipe the window past the half-way point of the screen. Can I change the screen resolution?
Swipe the right-hand edge of the screen inwards and tap Search, tap the text box to open the onscreen keyboard and start typing 'Control Panel' to display the results; tap Control Panel > Adjust screen resolution. How do I set the alarm?
Your computer can act as an alarm clock. Start typing Alarms to search for the Alarms app. 1.Set the time using the sliders on the left-hand side of the screen. 2.Select AM or PM. 3.Choose which days the alarm should go off. 4.Select the notification. 72 - Frequently asked questions 5.Save the alarm by tapping the Save icon in the upper right-hand corner. Delete Save Hour Minutes Note The alarm will only sound if your computer is awake at the set time. Where are my apps?
Swipe the right-hand edge of the screen inwards and tap Search, type the name of the app you would like to open using the pop-up keyboard. Results will be displayed on the left-hand side of the screen. To view the complete list of apps, swipe upwards from the bottom of the screen and tap All apps. How do I make an app appear on Start?
If you're in All apps and you want to make an app appear on Start, Tap and hold a tile until you see the screen dim. When you release the tile, the Customize menu appear at the bottom of the screen. Tap Pin to Start from the menu that appears at the bottom of the screen. How do I remove a tile from Start?
Tap and hold a tile until you see the screen dim. When you release the tile, the Customize menu appear at the bottom of the screen. Tap Frequently asked questions - 73 the tile(s) you wish to remove and tap Unpin from Start from the menu that appears at the bottom of the screen. How do I make an app appear on my taskbar?
If you're in All apps and you want to make an app appear on the taskbar, tap and hold a tile until you see the screen dim. When you release the tile, the Customize menu appear at the bottom of the screen. Select Pin to taskbar from the menu that appears at the bottom of the screen. How do I install apps?
You can download Windows Store apps from Store. You will need to have a Microsoft ID to purchase and download apps from Store. I can't find apps like Notepad and Paint! Where are they?
Swipe the right-hand edge of the screen inwards and tap Search, type the name of the app you would like to open using the pop-up keyboard. Alternatively, open All apps and scroll to Windows Accessories to see the list of legacy programs. Can I use more than one app at a time?
1.Tap on a tile to open an app from the Start screen. 2.Return to the Start screen and repeat the process. 3.Swipe right from the left edge of the screen to display the last app that was opened. 4.Swipe right from the left edge of the screen until you see a column divider to display both apps simultaneously. Up to three apps may be displayed via three columns at the same time. Can I show my desktop apps first?
Yes, you can, just follow these steps:
1.Go to the desktop. 2.Tap and hold the taskbar until you see the square outline. Select Properties from the menu that opens when you remove your finger. 3.From the Navigation tab, check List desktop apps first in the Apps view when it's sorted by category. 74 - Frequently asked questions What is a Microsoft ID (account)?
A Microsoft account is an email address and password that you use to sign in to Windows. You can use any email address, but it is best if you choose the one you already use to communicate with friends and sign in to your favorite websites. When you sign in to your PC with a Microsoft account, you'll connect your PC to the people, files, and devices you care about. Do I need one?
You do not need a Microsoft ID to use Windows 8.1, but it makes life easier because you can sync data across different machines you sign in to using a Microsoft ID. How do I get one?
If you've already installed Windows 8.1 and didn't sign in with a Microsoft account or you don't have a Microsoft account and want to get one, swipe the right-hand edge of the screen inwards and tap Settings > Change PC settings > Accounts > Connect to a Microsoft account, and follow the onscreen instructions. How do I add a favorite to Internet Explorer?
Internet Explorer 10 doesn't have traditional favorites, instead you can pin shortcuts to Start. Once you have the page open, swipe upwards from the bottom edge of the screen to open the menu at the bottom of the screen. Tap Pin to Start. How do I check for Windows updates?
Swipe the right-hand edge of the screen inwards and tap Settings >
Change PC settings > Update & recovery > Windows Update. Tap Check now. Where can I get more information?
For more information please visit the following pages:
Windows 8 and 8.1 tutorials: www.acer.com/windows8-tutorial Support FAQs: support.acer.com Frequently asked Frequently asked questions - 75 Troubleshooting This chapter shows you how to deal with common system problems. Read it before calling a technician if a problem occurs. Solutions to more serious problems require opening up the computer. Do not attempt to open the computer yourself; contact your dealer or authorized service center for assistance. Troubleshooting tips incorporates an advanced design This computer onscreen error message reports to help you solve problems. If the system reports an error message or an error symptom occurs, see "Error messages" below. If the problem cannot be resolved, contact your dealer. See Error messages on page 75. that delivers Error messages Corrective action If you receive an error message, note the message and take the corrective action. The following table lists the error messages in alphabetical order together with the recommended course of action. Error messages CMOS battery bad Contact your dealer or an authorized service center. Contact your dealer or an authorized service CMOS checksum error center. Insert a system (bootable) disk, then press Disk boot failure
<Enter> to reboot. Press <Fn> + <2> (during POST) to enter the BIOS utility, then press Exit in the BIOS utility to reboot. Contact your dealer or an authorized service center. Contact your dealer or an authorized service center. Contact your dealer or an authorized service center. Hard disk 0 error Hard disk 0 extended type error I/O parity error Equipment configuration error 76 - Frequently asked questions Error messages Keyboard error or no keyboard connected Keyboard interface error Memory size mismatch Corrective action Contact your dealer or an authorized service center. Contact your dealer or an authorized service center. Press <Fn> + <2> (during POST) to enter the BIOS utility, then press Exit in the BIOS utility to reboot. If you still encounter problems after going through the corrective measures, please contact your dealer or an authorized service center for assistance. INTERNET AND ONLINE SECURITY Internet and online security - 77 First steps on the net Protecting your computer It is vital to protect your computer from viruses and attacks over the Internet (see Security on page 81). A comprehensive Internet security program is offered when you first start your computer. You should activate this protection as soon as possible, certainly before you connect to the Internet. Choose an Internet Service Provider Using the Internet has become a natural part of daily computing. Just a few simple steps can connect you to a vast collection of knowledge and communication tools. To accomplish these steps you should first select an Internet Service Provider (ISP), which supplies the connection between your computer and the Internet. You should research the ISPs available in your region, not forgetting to talk to friends and family about their experiences or to check reviews and consumer reports. The ISP you select will provide instructions on how to connect to the Internet (you may need additional software or a special box that connects to your phone line). Connection types Depending on your computer model, your location and your communication needs, you have several ways to connect to the Internet. Dial-up Some computers include a telephone dial-up (modem) connector. This allows you to connect to the Internet using your telephone line. With a dial-up connection, you cannot use the modem and the telephone simultaneously on a single phone line. This type of connection is recommended only if you have limited use of the 78 - Internet and online security Internet as the connection speed is low and connection time is typically charged per hour. DSL (e.g. ADSL) DSL (Digital Subscriber Line) is an always-on connection that runs over the phone line. As DSL and phone do not use the same frequencies, you can use your telephone at the same time you are connected to the Internet (this requires a micro-filter on each telephone socket to avoid interference). To be eligible for DSL, you must be located near an DSL-equipped phone exchange (service is sometimes unavailable in rural areas). Connection speeds vary depending on your location, but DSL generally provides very fast and reliable Internet connection. As the connection is always-on, it is generally charged at fixed monthly rates. Note A DSL connection requires an appropriate modem. A modem is usually provided by the ISP when you register. Many of these modems include an router that provides network and Wi-Fi access. Cable A cable connection provides fast and always-on Internet service via a cable television line. This service is generally available in large cities. You can use your telephone and watch cable TV at the same time you are connected to the Internet. 3G (WWAN or 'Wireless Wide-Area Network') A 3G connection allows you to use cellular networks (such as those used by a mobile phone) to connect to the Internet while away from home. The socket for a SIM card may be built in to your computer, or may require an external device, such as a USB modem or even an appropriately equipped mobile phone. Note If your computer includes a SIM card slot, you require a compatible SIM card and a contract with a cellular provider. Before using the 3G features, check with your service provider to see if any additional charges will be incurred, especially roaming charges. Internet and online security - 79 Network connections A LAN (Local Area Network) is a group of computers (for example, within an office building or home) that share a common communications line and resources. When you set up a network, you can share files, peripheral devices (such as a printer) and an Internet connection. You can set up a LAN using wired technologies (such as Ethernet) or wireless technologies (such as Wi-Fi or Bluetooth). Wireless networks A wireless LAN or WLAN is a wireless local area network, which may link two or more computers without using wires. Setting up a wireless network is easy and allows you to share files, peripheral devices and an Internet connection. What are benefits of a wireless network?
Mobility Wireless LAN systems allow you and other users of your home network to share access to files and devices connected to the network, for example a printer or scanner. Also you can share an internet connection with other computers in your home. Installation speed and simplicity Installing a wireless LAN system can be fast and easy and eliminates the need to pull cables through walls and ceilings. Components of a wireless LAN To set up your Wireless network at home you need to have the following:
Access point (router) Access points (routers) are two-way transceivers that broadcast data into the surrounding environment. Access points act as a mediator between wired and wireless network. Most routers have a built-in DSL modem that will allow you access to a high speed DSL internet connection. The ISP (Internet Service Provider) you have chosen normally supplies a modem/router with the subscription to their 80 - Internet and online security services. Read carefully the documentation supplied with your Access point/router for detailed setup instructions. Network cable (RJ45) A network cable (also called RJ45 cable) is used to connect the host computer to the access point (see illustration below); this type of cable may also be used to connect peripheral devices to the access point. Wireless adapter An internal wireless adapter is normally already installed in your computer. A button or controls in Windows allow you to activate or deactivate the adapter. Diagram of a working network 1.Access point/router 2.Desktop computer 3.Modem 4.Printer 5.Portable computer 6.PDA/Smartphone 7.Network cables (RJ45) Turning on/off a wireless network connection Most computers feature a Wi-Fi button that turns the network connection on or off. If your computer has wireless access, but does not feature a Communication button, you may turn your wireless network on or off, or control what is shared over the network with the network management options. Press the Windows key (
) + W, type
"HomeGroup" and then click on HomeGroup. Warning Using wireless devices while flying in aircraft is prohibited. Switch off all devices before boarding an aircraft; they may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, disrupt communications, and even be illegal. Internet and online security - 81 Surf the Net!
To surf the Internet, you need a program called an Internet browser. Internet Explorer provides an easy and secure web browsing experience. As soon as you have your Internet access installed and you are connected, from Start, click the Internet Explorer tile or the icon located on the desktop and take your Internet experience to a new level!
Acer website To get you started why not visit our website, www.acer.com. Acer is dedicated to provide you with on-going personalied support. Check out our Support section to get help tailored to your needs. www.acer.com is your portal to a world of online activities and services: visit us regularly for the latest information and downloads!
Security You are probably eager to explore everything the Internet has to offer. In order for you to be safe online, Acer has pre-installed McAfee Internet Security Suite on your computer. McAfee Internet Security Suite runs quietly in the background to block todays complex threats and protect your identity when you shop, bank, or browse online. McAfee Internet Security Suite blocks online identity theft, detects and eliminates spyware, removes viruses and Internet worms, protects against hackers. Definitions What is a virus?
Malicious software, typically called viruses, are programs designed to infect and damage computers. Most viruses are transmitted over the Internet, emails or malicious Web sites. A typical virus will replicate and pass itself undetected to multiple computers. Other forms of nuisance, such as Trojan horses, worms or spam can infect your 82 - Internet and online security computer in various ways, using up resources or clogging up a network. Note Acer guarantees that your computer was 100% virus free at the time of purchase and does not cover damages due to viruses. What is spyware?
Spyware refers to generally unwanted programs that are downloaded onto your computer while connected to the Internet, often without you knowing it. Once it has infected your computer, it can snoop on your browsing activity, collect personal information, cause pop-up ads to appear, or even change the configuration of your computer. Spyware consumes resources on your computer; it can slow down your Internet connection or entire computer system, and even cause crashes. Spyware is sometimes used by unscrupulous companies to monitor and track the sites you visit on the Internet so as to determine your web-surfing habits and display targeted pop-up ads on your screen. However, some kinds of spyware go beyond simple tracking and actually monitor keystrokes and capture passwords, posing a serious security risk. What is malware?
Malicious software, also known as malware, is software designed to deliberately harm your computer. For example, viruses, worms, and Trojan horses are malicious software. To help protect your computer against malware, make sure it is using up-to-date antivirus and anti-
malware software. What is a personal firewall?
A personal firewall is a software program designed to prevent unauthorized access to or from a private network. It acts as a shield to protect your Internet connection from unwanted connections, some of which may attempt to take control of your computer to install or re-
distribute viruses or malicious programs. Each connection to your computer is monitored - programs that attempt to receive information without your permission are detected and the firewall will display an alert. You can then decide if you will allow the connection, if the connection is to a program you are currently using then normally you Internet and online security - 83 would allow it (i.e. a game connecting to a multi-player server or an encyclopaedia making a content update). How to protect your computer Cybercrime prevention can be straight-forward - when armed with a little technical advice and common sense, many attacks can be avoided. In general, online criminals are trying to make their money as quickly and easily as possible. The more difficult you make their job, the more likely they are to leave you alone and move on to an easier target. The tips below provide basic information on how you can prevent online fraud. Keep your computer current with the latest patches and updates One of the best ways to keep attackers away from your computer is to apply patches and other software fixes when they become available. By regularly updating your computer, you block attackers from being able to take advantage of software flaws (vulnerabilities) that they could otherwise use to break into your system. While keeping your computer up-to-date will not protect you from all attacks, it makes it much more difficult for hackers to gain access to your system, blocks many basic and automated attacks completely, and might be enough to discourage less-determined attackers, so they will give up and look for a more vulnerable computer elsewhere. More recent versions of Microsoft Windows and other popular software can be configured to download and apply updates automatically so that you do not have to remember to check for the latest software. Taking advantage of auto-update features in your software is a great start toward keeping yourself safe online. Protect your computer with security software Several types of security software are necessary for basic online security. Security software essentials include firewall and antivirus programs. A firewall is usually your computer's first line of defense-it controls who and what can communicate with your computer online. You could think of a firewall as a sort of "policeman" that watches all the data attempting to flow in and out of your computer on the Internet, allowing communications that it knows are safe and blocking
"bad" traffic such as attacks from ever reaching your computer. 84 - Internet and online security The next line of defense many times is your antivirus software, which monitors all online activities such as email messages and Web browsing and protects an individual from viruses, worms, Trojan horse and other types of malicious programs. Your antivirus and antispyware software should be configured to update itself, and it should do so every time you connect to the Internet. Integrated security suites such as McAfee Internet Security Suite, which combine firewall, antivirus, antispyware with other features such as antispam and parental controls, have become popular as they offer all the security software needed for online protection in a single package. Many people find using a comprehensive security suite an attractive alternative to installing, configuring and updating several different types of security software. A complete version of McAfee Internet Security Suite is pre-installed on your Acer system. It includes a free trial subscription to protection updates. Make sure you Activate it!
Choose strong passwords and keep them safe following Passwords are a fact of life on the Internet today; we use them for everything from ordering flowers and online banking to logging into our favorite airline Web site to see how many miles we have accumulated. The tips can help make your online experiences secure:
Selecting a password that cannot be easily guessed is the first step toward keeping passwords secure and out of the wrong hands. Strong passwords have eight characters or more and use a combination of letters, numbers and symbols (e.g., # $ % ! ?). Avoid using any of the following as your password: your login name, anything based on your personal information such as your last name, and words that can be found in the dictionary, especially
"password." Try to select especially strong, unique passwords for protecting activities like online banking. Keep your passwords in a safe place and try not to use the same password for every service you use online. Change passwords on a regular basis, at least every 90 days. This can limit the damage caused by someone who has already gained access to your account. If you notice something suspicious with one of your online accounts, one of the first steps you can take is to change your password. Protect your personal information Internet and online security - 85 Exercise caution when sharing personal information such as your name, home address, phone number, and email address online. To take advantage of many online services, you will inevitably have to provide personal information in order to handle billing and shipping of purchased goods. Since not divulging any personal information is rarely possible, the following list contains some advice for how to share personal information safely online:
Keep an eye out for phony email messages. Things that indicate a message may be fraudulent are misspellings, poor grammar, odd phrasing, Web site addresses with strange extensions, Web site addresses that are entirely numbers where there are normally words, and anything else out of the ordinary. Additionally, phishing messages will often tell you that you have to act quickly to keep your account open, update your security, or urge you to provide information immediately or else something bad will happen. Don't take the bait. Don't respond to email messages that ask for personal information. Legitimate companies will not use email messages to ask for your personal information. When in doubt, contact the company by phone or by typing in the company Web address into your Web browser. Don't click on the links in these messages as they make take you to fraudulent, malicious Web sites. Steer clear of fraudulent Web sites used to steal personal information. When visiting a Web site, type the address (URL) directly into the Web browser rather than following a link within an email or instant message. Fraudsters often forge these links to make them look convincing. A shopping, banking or any other Web site where sensitive information should have an "S" after the letters "http" (i.e. https://
www.yourbank.com not http://www.yourbank.com). The "s" stands for secure and should appear when you are in an area requesting you to login or provide other sensitive data. Another sign that you have a secure connection is the small lock icon in the bottom of your web browser (usually the right-hand corner). 86 - Internet and online security Pay attention to privacy policies on Web sites and in software. It is important to understand how an organization might collect and use your personal information before you share it with them. Guard your email address. Spammers and "phishers" sometimes send millions of messages to email addresses that may or may not exist in hopes of finding a potential victim. Responding to these messages or even downloading images ensures you will be added to their lists for more of the same messages in the future. Also be careful when posting your email address online in newsgroups, blogs or online communities. Online offers that look too good to be true usually are The old saying "there's no such thing as a free lunch" still rings true today. Supposedly "free" software such as screen savers or smileys, secret investment tricks sure to make you untold fortunes, and contests that you've surprisingly won without entering are the enticing hooks used by companies to grab your attention. While you may not directly pay for the software or service with money, the free software or service you asked for may have been bundled with advertising software ("adware") that tracks your behavior and displays unwanted advertisements. You may have to divulge personal information or purchase something else in order to claim your supposed content winnings. If an offer looks so good it's hard to believe, ask for someone else's opinion, read the fine print, or even better, simply ignore it. Review bank and credit card statements regularly The impact of identity theft and online crimes can be greatly reduced if you can catch it shortly after your data is stolen or when the first use of your information is attempted. One of the easiest ways to get the tip-off that something has gone wrong is by reviewing the monthly statements provided by your bank and credit card companies for anything out of the ordinary. Additionally, many banks and services use fraud prevention systems that call out unusual purchasing behavior (i.e. if you live in Texas and all of the sudden start buying refrigerators in Budapest). In order to confirm these out of the ordinary purchases, they might call you and ask you to confirm them. Don't take these calls lightly; this is your hint Internet and online security - 87 that something bad may have happened and you should take necessary action. Protect your computer with Windows security tools Windows provides a variety of protection applications. Windows Updates If you have an active Internet connection, Windows can check for important updates for your computer and install them automatically. These updates include security patches and program updates that can improve your computing experience and help protect your computer against new viruses and attacks. How do I know when my computer is at risk?
If the Action Center reports an alert, or if your computer behaves erratically, crashes unexpectedly or if some of your programs do not work correctly, your computer may be infected by malicious software. However, do not blame every computer problem on a virus! If you suspect your computer is infected, the first thing to do is update, if you have not already done so, and run your antivirus and anti-spyware software.
various | User Manual Regulatory | Users Manual | 1.58 MiB | June 10 2014 / April 04 2015 |
- 1 Regulatory Information and Safety Guide 2 -
2013. All Rights Reserved. Regulatory Information and Safety Guide This revision: December 2013 TABLE OF CONTENTS Table of contents - 3 Tips and information for comfortable use 4 Finding your comfort zone .......................... 4 Taking care of your vision........................... 5 Developing good work habits...................... 6 Protecting your hearing............................... 6 Basic care and tips for using your computer 7 Turning your computer on and off............... 7 Taking care of your computer ..................... 7 General ....................................................... 8 Safety instructions ................................... 9 Product servicing ........................................ 9 Cleaning and servicing................................ 9 Battery and adapter information ............ 10 Accessing the power................................. 10 Disconnecting the power source............... 10 Using electrical power............................... 10 Guidelines for safe battery usage ............. 12 Warnings and regulatory information 14 Optical drives......................................... 14 Telephone line safety............................. 14 Emergency calls........................................ 15 Medical devices ..................................... 15 Vehicles ................................................. 16 Potentially explosive environments........ 16 Disposal instructions.............................. 17 ENERGY STAR ..................................... 17 Wireless adapter regulatory information 18 Radio frequency interference.................... 18 Use on aircraft........................................... 19 The wireless adapter and your health....... 19 USA FCC and FAA............................... 19 FCC radio frequency interference requirements............................................. 20 Canada Industry Canada (IC) .............. 22 European Union ........................................ 22 Compliant with Russian regulatory certification................................................ 28 4 - Tips and information for comfortable use TIPS AND INFORMATION FOR COMFORTABLE USE Important Some of the information in this guide may not apply to your computer. Computer users may complain of eyestrain and headaches after prolonged use. Users are also at risk of physical injury after long hours of working in front of a computer. Long work periods, bad posture, poor work habits, stress, inadequate working conditions, personal health and other factors greatly increase the risk of physical injury. Incorrect computer usage may lead to carpal tunnel syndrome, tendonitis, tenosynovitis or other musculoskeletal disorders. The following symptoms may appear in the hands, wrists, arms, shoulders, neck or back:
Numbness, or a burning or tingling sensation. Aching, soreness or tenderness. Pain, swelling or throbbing. Stiffness or tightness. Coldness or weakness. If you have these symptoms, or any other recurring or persistent discomfort and/or pain related to computer use, consult a physician immediately and inform your company's health and safety department. The following section provides tips for more comfortable computer use. Finding your comfort zone Find your comfort zone by adjusting the viewing angle of the monitor, using a footrest, or raising your sitting height to achieve maximum comfort. Observe the following tips:
Refrain from staying too long in one fixed posture. Tips and information for comfortable use - 5 Avoid slouching forward and/or leaning backward. Stand up and walk around regularly to remove the strain on your leg muscles. Take short rests to relax your neck and shoulders. Avoid tensing your muscles or shrugging your shoulders. Install the external display, keyboard and mouse properly and within comfortable reach. If you view your monitor more than your documents, place the display at the center of your desk to minimize neck strain. Taking care of your vision Long viewing hours, wearing incorrect glasses or contact lenses, glare, excessive room lighting, poorly focused screens, very small typefaces and low-contrast displays could stress your eyes. The following sections provide suggestions on how to reduce eyestrain. Eyes Rest your eyes frequently. Give your eyes regular breaks by looking away from the monitor and focusing on a distant point. Blink frequently to keep your eyes from drying out. Display Keep your display clean. Keep your head at a higher level than the top edge of the display so your eyes point downward when looking at the middle of the display. Adjust the display brightness and/or contrast to a comfortable level for enhanced text readability and graphics clarity. Eliminate glare and reflections by:
placing your display in such a way that the side faces the window or any light source, minimizing room light by using drapes, shades or blinds, using a task light, changing the display's viewing angle, using a glare-reduction filter, 6 - Tips and information for comfortable use using a display visor, such as a piece of cardboard extended from the display's top front edge. Avoid adjusting your display to an awkward viewing angle. Avoid looking at bright light sources for extended periods of time. Developing good work habits The following work habits make computer use more relaxing and productive:
Take short breaks regularly and often. Perform some stretching exercises. Breathe fresh air as often as possible. Exercise regularly and maintain a healthy body. Warning We do not recommend using the computer on a couch or bed. If this is unavoidable, work for only short periods, take breaks regularly, and do some stretching exercises. Protecting your hearing Warning Permanent hearing if earphones or headphones are used at high volume for prolonged periods of time. loss may occur To protect your hearing, follow these instructions. Increase the volume gradually until you can hear clearly and comfortably. Do not increase the volume level after your ears have adjusted. Do not listen to music at high volumes for extended periods. Do not increase the volume to block out noisy surroundings. Decrease the volume if you can't hear people speaking near you. BASIC CARE AND TIPS FOR USING YOUR COMPUTER Basic care and tips for using your computer - 7 Read these instructions carefully. Keep this document for future reference. Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the product. Turning your computer on and off To turn on the computer, simply press and release the power button. Please refer to the setup poster for the location of the power button. To turn the power off, do any of the following:
Use the Windows shutdown command: Press the Windows key +
<C>, click Settings > Power then click Shut Down. If you need to power down the computer for a short while, but dont want to completely shut it down, you can put it into Hibernate by:
Pressing the power button. You can also put the computer in sleep mode by pressing the sleep hotkey <Fn> + <F4>. Note If you cannot power off the computer normally, press and hold the power button for more than four seconds to shut down the computer. If you turn off the computer and want to turn it on again, wait at least two seconds before powering up. Taking care of your computer Your computer will serve you well if you take care of it. Do not expose the computer to direct sunlight. Do not place it near sources of heat, such as a radiator. Do not expose the computer to temperatures below 0 C (32 F) or above 50 C (122 F). Do not subject the computer to magnetic fields. Do not expose the computer to rain or moisture. Do not spill water or any liquid on the computer. 8 - Basic care and tips for using your computer Do not subject the computer to heavy shock or vibration. Do not expose the computer to dust or dirt. Never place objects on top of the computer. Do not slam the computer display when you close it. Never place the computer on uneven surfaces. General Do not use this product near water. Do not place this product on an unstable cart, stand or table. If the product falls, it could be seriously damaged. Slots and openings are provided for ventilation to ensure reliable operation of the product and to protect it from overheating. These openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed, sofa, rug or other similar surface. This product should never be placed near or over a radiator or heat register, or in a built-in installation unless proper ventilation is provided. Never push objects of any kind into this product through cabinet slots as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short-out parts that could result in a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind onto or into the product. To avoid damage of internal components and to prevent battery leakage, do not place the product on a vibrating surface. Never use it under sporting, exercising, or any vibrating environment which will probably cause a short-circuit or damage rotor devices, HDD, optical drive, and even exposure risk from the lithium battery pack. The bottom surface, areas around ventilation openings and AC adapter may get hot. To avoid injury, ensure they do not come in contact with your skin or body. Your device and its enhancements may contain small parts. Keep them out of the reach of small children. The surface temperature of the base will rise during normal operation, particularly when plugged in to AC power. Allowing sustained contact with exposed skin can cause discomfort or burns. Basic care and tips for using your computer - 9 Safety instructions Product servicing Do not attempt to service this product yourself, as opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltage points or other risks. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Unplug this product from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel when:
The power cord or plug is damaged, cut or frayed. Liquid was spilled into the product. The product was exposed to rain or water. The product has been dropped or the case has been damaged. The product exhibits a distinct change in performance, indicating a need for service. The product does not operate normally after following the operating instructions. The product exhibits a distinct change in performance, indicating a need for service. The product does not operate normally after following the operating instructions. Note Adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating instructions, since improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage and will often require extensive work by a qualified technician to restore the product to normal condition. Cleaning and servicing When cleaning the computer, follow these steps:
1.Turn off the computer and remove the battery pack. 2.Disconnect the AC adapter. 3.Use a soft, moist cloth. Do not use liquid or aerosol cleaners. 10 - Basic care and tips for using your computer Battery and adapter information Accessing the power Be sure that the power outlet you plug into is easily accessible and located as close to the equipment operator as possible. When you need to disconnect power to the equipment, be sure to unplug from the electrical outlet. Disconnecting the power source Observe the following guidelines when connecting and disconnecting power to the power supply unit:
Install the power supply unit before connecting to the AC power outlet. Unplug before removing the power supply unit from the computer. If the system has multiple sources of power, disconnect power from the system by unplugging all power cords from the power supplies. Using electrical power Do not connect the adapter to any other device. When unplugging the power cord, do not pull on the cord itself but pull on the plug. This product should be operated from the type of power indicated on the marking label. If you are not sure of the type of power available, consult your dealer or local power company. Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord. Do not locate this product where people will walk on the cord. If an extension cord is used with this product, make sure that the total ampere rating of the equipment plugged into the extension cord does not exceed the extension cord ampere rating. Also, make sure that the total rating of all products plugged into the wall outlet does not exceed the fuse rating. Do not overload a power outlet, strip or receptacle by plugging in too many devices. The overall system load must not exceed 80% of the branch circuit rating. If power strips are used, the load should not exceed 80% of the power strip's input rating. Basic care and tips for using your computer - 11 If this product's AC adapter is equipped with a three-wire grounded plug. The plug only fits in a grounded power outlet. Make sure the power outlet is properly grounded before inserting the AC adapter plug. Do not insert the plug into a non-grounded power outlet. Contact your electrician for details. Warning The grounding pin is a safety feature. Using a power outlet that is not properly grounded may result in electric shock and/or injury. Note The grounding pin also provides good protection from unexpected noise produced by other nearby electrical devices that may interfere with the performance of this product. The system can be powered using a wide range of voltages; 100 to 120 or 220 to 240 V or 100-240 V AC. The power cord included with the system meets the requirements for use in the country/region where the system was purchased. Power cords for use in other countries/regions must meet the requirements for that country/
region. For more information on power cord requirements, contact an authorized reseller or service provider. 12 - Basic care and tips for using your computer Guidelines for safe battery usage Warning Batteries may explode if not handled properly. Do not disassemble or dispose of them in fire. Do not tamper with batteries. Keep them away from children. Follow local regulations when disposing of used batteries. Important Replace the battery with the same type as that which came bundled with your product. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. This notebook uses a Lithium battery. Do not use it in a humid, wet or corrosive environment. Do not put, store or leave your product in or near a heat source, in a high temperature location, in strong direct sunlight, in a microwave oven or in a pressurized container, and do not expose it to temperatures over 60 C (140 F). Failure to follow these guidelines may cause the battery to leak acid, become hot, explode or ignite and cause injury and/or damage. Do not pierce, open or disassemble the battery. If the battery leaks and you come into contact with the leaked fluids, rinse thoroughly with water and seek medical attention immediately. For safety reasons, and to prolong the lifetime of the battery, charging will not occur at temperatures below 0 C (32 F) or above 40 C (104 F). The full performance of a new battery is achieved only after two or three complete charge and discharge cycles. The battery can be charged and discharged hundreds of times, but it will eventually wear out. When the operation time becomes noticeably shorter than normal, buy a new battery. Use only the approved batteries, and recharge your battery only with the approved chargers designated for this device. Use the battery only for its intended purpose. Never use any charger or battery that is damaged. Do not short-circuit the battery. Accidental short-circuiting can occur when a metallic object such as a coin, clip or pen causes direct connection of the positive (+) and negative (-) terminals of the battery. (These look like metal strips on the battery.) This might happen, for example, when you carry a spare battery in Basic care and tips for using your computer - 13 your pocket or purse. Short-circuiting the terminals may damage the battery or the connecting object. The capacity and lifetime of the battery will be reduced if the battery is left in hot or cold places, such as in a closed car in summer or winter. Always try to keep the battery between 15 C and 25 C (59 F and 77 F). A device with a hot or cold battery may not work temporarily, even when the battery is fully charged. Battery performance is especially limited in temperatures well below freezing. Do not dispose of batteries in a fire as they may explode. Batteries may also explode if damaged. Dispose of batteries according to local regulations. Please recycle when possible. Do not dispose as household waste. Wireless devices may be susceptible to interference from the battery, which could affect performance. Note Please refer to www.acer.com for battery shipping documents. 14 - Warnings and regulatory information WARNINGS AND REGULATORY INFORMATION Optical drives CAUTION: This appliance contains a laser system and is classified as a "CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT." In case of any trouble with this device, please contact your nearest AUTHORIZED service station. To prevent direct exposure to the laser beam, do not try to open the enclosure. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT CAUTION: INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN. AVOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM. APPAREIL A LASER DE CLASSE 1 PRODUIT LASERATTENTION: RADIATION DU FAISCEAU LASER INVISIBLE EN CAS DOUVERTURE. EVITTER TOUTE EXPOSITION AUX RAYONS. LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE LASER KLASSE 1 VORSICHT:
ABDECKUNG GEFFNET NICHT DEM STRAHLL AUSSETZEN PRODUCTO LSER DE LA CLASE I ADVERTENCIA: RADIACIN LSER INVISIBLE AL SER ABIERTO. EVITE EXPONERSE A LOS RAYOS. ADVARSEL: LASERSTRLING VEDBNING SE STRLEN. VARO! LAVATTAESSA OLET ALTTINA LASERSTEILYLLE. VARNING: LASERSTRLNING NR DENNA DEL R PPNAD L TUIJOTA STEESEENSTIRRA EJ IN I STRLEN VARNING:
PPNADSTIRRA EJ IN I STRLEN ADVARSEL: LASERSTRLING NAR DEKSEL PNESSTIRR IKKE INN I STRLEN LASERSTRLNING NAR DENNA DEL LASERSTRAHLUNG, WENN UNSICHTBARE IKKE IND R I Telephone line safety Warnings and regulatory information - 15 Disconnect all telephone lines from the equipment when not in use and/or before servicing. To avoid the remote risk of electric shock from lightning, do not connect the telephone line to this equipment during lightning or thunderstorms. Emergency calls Warning You cannot make emergency calls through this device. To make an emergency call you shall dial out through your mobile phone or other telephone call system. Medical devices Operation of any radio transmitting equipment, including wireless phones, may interfere with the functionality of inadequately protected medical devices. Consult a physician or the manufacturer of the medical device to determine if they are adequately shielded from external RF energy or if you have any questions. Switch off your device in health care facilities when any regulations posted in these areas instruct you to do so. Hospitals or health care facilities may be using equipment that could be sensitive to external RF transmissions. Pacemakers. Pacemaker manufacturers recommend that a minimum separation of 15.3 centimeters (6 inches) be maintained between wireless devices and a pacemaker to avoid potential interference with the pacemaker. These recommendations are consistent with the independent recommendations of Wireless Technology Research. Persons with pacemakers should do the following:
Always keep the device more than 15.3 centimeters (6 inches) from research by and the pacemaker Not carry the device near your pacemaker when the device is switched on. If you suspect interference, switch off your device, and move it. Hearing aids. Some digital wireless devices may interfere with some hearing aids. If interference occurs, consult your service provider. 16 - Warnings and regulatory information Vehicles RF signals may affect improperly installed or inadequately shielded electronic systems in motor vehicles such as electronic fuel injection systems, electronic antiskid (anti-lock) braking systems, electronic speed control systems, and air bag systems. For more information, check with the manufacturer, or its representative, of your vehicle or any equipment that has been added. Only qualified personnel should service the device, or install the device in a vehicle. Faulty installation or service may be dangerous and may invalidate any warranty that may apply to the device. Check regularly that all wireless equipment in your vehicle is mounted and operating properly. Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gases, or explosive materials in the same compartment as the device, its parts, or enhancements. For vehicles equipped with an air bag, remember that air bags inflate with great force. Do not place objects, including installed or portable wireless equipment in the area over the air bag or in the air bag deployment area. If in-vehicle wireless equipment is improperly installed, and the air bag inflates, serious injury could result. Using your device while flying in aircraft is prohibited. Switch off your device before boarding an aircraft. The use of wireless teledevices in an aircraft may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, disrupt the wireless telephone network, and may be illegal. Potentially explosive environments Warning Do not operate a portable transmitter (including this wireless adapter) near unshielded blasting caps or in an explosive environment unless the transmitter has been modified to be qualified for such use. Switch off your device when in any area with a potentially explosive atmosphere and obey all signs and instructions. Potentially explosive atmospheres include areas where you would normally be advised to turn off your vehicle engine. Sparks in such areas could cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death. Switch off the device at refueling points such as near gas pumps at service stations. Warnings and regulatory information - 17 Observe restrictions on the use of radio equipment in fuel depots, storage, and distribution areas; chemical plants; or where blasting operations are in progress. Areas with a potentially explosive atmosphere are often, but not always, clearly marked. They include below deck on boats, chemical transfer or storage facilities, vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas
(such as propane or butane), and areas where the air contains chemicals or particles such as grain, dust or metal powders. Do not switch the notebook on when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. Disposal instructions Do not throw this electronic device into the trash when discarding. To minimize pollution and ensure utmost protection of the global environment, please recycle. For more from Electrical and Electronics Equipment (WEEE) regulations, visit www.acer-group.com/public/Sustainability information on the Waste ENERGY STAR Acer's ENERGY STAR qualified products save your money by reducing energy cost and protecting the environment without sacrificing features or performance. Acer is proud to offer our customers products with the ENERGY STAR mark. What is ENERGY STAR?
Products that are ENERGY STAR qualified use less energy and prevent greenhouse gas emissions by meeting strict energy efficiency guidelines set by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Acer is committed to offering products and services worldwide that help customers save money, conserve energy and improve the quality of our environment. The more energy we can save through higher energy efficiency, the more we reduce greenhouse gases and the risks to www.energystar.gov or www.energystar.gov/powermanagement. change. More information climate refers of 18 - Warnings and regulatory information Note Information in this section may not apply to your computer. Acer ENERGY STAR qualified products:
Produce less heat and reduce cooling loads, and warmer climates. Automatically go into "display sleep" and "computer sleep" mode after 10 and 30 minutes of inactivity respectively. Wake the computer from sleep mode by pushing keyboard or moving mouse. Computers will save more than 80% energy at "sleep" mode. ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are registered U.S. marks Wireless adapter regulatory information Radio frequency interference Warning For safety reasons, turn off all wireless or radio transmitting devices when using your laptop under the following conditions. These devices may include, but are not limited to: wireless LAN (WLAN), Bluetooth and/or 3G. Remember to follow any special regulations in force in any area, and always switch off your device when its use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. Use the device only in its normal operating positions. This device meets RF exposure guidelines when used normally. To successfully transmit data files or messages, this device requires a good quality connection to the network. In some cases, transmission of data files or messages may be delayed until such a connection is available. Parts of the device are magnetic. Metallic materials may be attracted to the device, and persons with hearing aids should not hold the device to the ear with the hearing aid. Do not place credit cards or other magnetic storage media near the device, because information stored on them may be erased. Use on aircraft Warnings and regulatory information - 19 Warning FCC and FAA regulations may prohibit airborne operation of radio-
frequency wireless devices (wireless adapters) because their signals could interfere with critical aircraft instruments. Ask the cabin crew before turning on your devices wireless adapter whilst on board. The wireless adapter and your health and These recommendations. The wireless adapter, like other radio devices, emits radio frequency electromagnetic energy. The level of energy emitted by the wireless adapter, however, is less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by other wireless devices such as mobile phones. The wireless adapter operates within the guidelines found in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations reflect the consensus of the scientific community and result from deliberations of panels and committees of scientists who continually review and interpret the extensive research literature. In some situations or environments, the use of the wireless adapter may be restricted by the proprietor of the building or responsible representatives of the applicable organization. Examples of such situations may include:
Using the wireless adapter on board airplanes, or Using the wireless adapter in any other environment where the risk of interference with other devices or services is perceived or identified as being harmful. standards If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of wireless adapters in a specific organization or environment (an airport, for example), you are encouraged to ask for authorization to use the adapter before you turn it on. USA FCC and FAA The FCC with its action in ET Docket 96-8 has adopted a safety standard for human exposure to radio frequency (RF) electromagnetic energy emitted by FCC certified equipment. The wireless adapter meets the Human Exposure limits found in OET Bulletin 65, 20 - Warnings and regulatory information supplement C, 2001, and ANSI/IEEE C95.1, 1992. Proper operation of this radio according to the instructions found in this manual will result in exposure substantially below the FCCs recommended limits. The following safety precautions should be observed:
Do not touch or move antenna while the unit is transmitting or receiving. Do not hold any component containing the radio such that the antenna is very close or touching any exposed parts of the body, especially the face or eyes, while transmitting. Do not operate the radio or attempt to transmit data unless the antenna is connected; this behavior may cause damage to the radio. The use of wireless adapters in hazardous locations is limited by the constraints posed by the safety directors of such environments. The use of wireless adapters on airplanes is governed by the Federal Aviation Administration (FAA). The use of wireless adapters in hospitals is restricted to the limits set forth by each hospital. The product comply with the FCC portable RF exposure limit set forth for an uncontrolled environment and are safe for intended operation as described in this manual. The further RF exposure reduction can be achieved if the product can be kept as far as possible from the user body or set the device to lower output power if such function is available. Explosive Device Proximity Warning Warning: Do not operate a portable this wireless adapter) near unshielded blastingcaps or in an explosive environment unless the transmitter has been modified to be qualified for such use. transmitter (including FCC radio frequency interference requirements Note Applies to device supporting IEEE 802.11a wireless adapters. Warnings and regulatory information - 21 This device is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5.15 to 5.25 GHz and 5.470 to 5.725 GHz frequency ranges. FCC requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency ranges 5.15 to 5.25 GHz and 5.470 to 5.725 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-
channel mobile satellite systems. High power radars are allocated as primary users of the 5.25 to 5.35 GHz and 5.65 to 5.85 GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and this device. No configuration controls are provided this wireless adapter allowing any change in the frequency of operations outside the FCC grant of authorization for U.S operation according to Part 15.407 of the FCC rules.
/or damage for USA Federal Communications Commission (FCC) This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Radiation Exposure Statement:
The product comply with the FCC portable RF exposure limit set forth for an uncontrolled environment and are safe for intended operation as described in this manual. The further RF exposure reduction can be achieved if the product can be kept as far as possible from the user body or set the device to lower output power if such function is available. Interference statement This wireless adapter has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This wireless adapter generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If the wireless adapter is not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, the wireless adapter may cause harmful interference to radio communications. There is no guarantee, however, that such interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this wireless adapter does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception (which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on), the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by taking one or more of the following measures:
22 - Warnings and regulatory information Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna of the equipment experiencing the interference. Increase the distance between the wireless adapter and the equipment experiencing the interference. Connect the computer with the wireless adapter to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the equipment experiencing the interference is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. European Union List of applicable countries This product must be used in strict accordance with the regulations and constraints in the country of use. For further information, contact the local office in the country of use. Please see http://ec.europa.eu/
enterprise/rtte/implem.htm for the latest country list. List of national codes This equipment may be operated in the following countries:
Country Austria Belgium Cyprus Czech Republic Denmark Estonia Finland France Germany Greece Hungary Ireland Italy Latvia ISO 3166 2 letter code Country AT BE CY CZ DK EE FI FR DE GR HU IE IT LV Malta Netherlands Poland Portugal Slovakia Slovenia Spain Sweden United Kingdom Iceland Liechtenstein Norway Switzerland Bulgaria ISO 3166 2 letter code MT NL PL PT SK SI ES SE GB IS LI NO CH BG Country Lithuania Luxembourg ISO 3166 2 letter code Country LT Romania Turkey LU ISO 3166 2 letter code RO TR Specific absorption rate information This device meets the EU requirements on the limitation of exposure of the general public to electromagnetic fields by way of health protection. The limits are part of extensive recommendations for the protection of the general public. These recommendations have been developed and checked by independent scientific organizations through regular and thorough evaluations of scientific studies. The unit of measurement for the European Council's recommended limit for mobile devices is the "Specific Absorption Rate" (SAR), and the SAR limit is 2.0 W/kg averaged over 10 grams of body tissue. It meets the requirements of International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP). For body worn operation, this device has been tested and meets the ICNIRP exposure guidelines and the European Standard, for use with dedicated accessories. Use of other accessories which contain metals may not ensure compliance with ICNIRP exposure guidelines. The low band 5.15 to 5.35 GHz is for indoor use only. This equipment complies with the essential requirements of the European Union directive 1999/5/EC. See Statements of European Union Compliance, and more details refer to the attached Declaration of Conformity. the English esky
[Czech]
Daansk
[Danish]
Hereby, ACER INC., declares that this devise is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisionns of Directive 1999/5/EC. ACER INC. tmto prohlauje, e toto zazen je ve shod se zkladnmi poadavky a dalmi pslunmi ustanovenmi smrnice 1999/5/ES. Undertegnede ACER INC. erklrer herved, at flgende udstyr overholder de vsentlige krav og vrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF. 24 - Warnings and regulatory information Deutsch
[German]
Eesti
[Estonian]
Espaol
[Spanish]
[Greek]
Franais
[French]
slenska
[Icelandic]
Italiano
[Italian]
Latviski
[Latvian]
Lietuvi
[Lithuanian]
Hiermit erklrt ACER INC., dass sich das Gert Radiolan in bereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den brigen einschlgigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG befindet. Kesolevaga kinnitab ACER INC. seadme vastavust direktiivi 1999/5/E phinuetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele teistele asjakohastele stetele. Por medio de la presente ACER INC. declara que el dispositivo cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE. ACER INC. 1999/5/ . Par la prsente ACER INC. dclare que cet appareil est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/
CE. Hr me lsir ACER INC. yfir v a er samrmi vi grunnkrfur og arar krfur, sem gera r eru tilskipun 1999/5/EC. Con la presente ACER INC. dichiara che questo dispositivo conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE. Ar o ACER INC. deklar, ka ierce atbilst Direktvas 1999/5/EK btiskajm prasbm un citiem ar to saisttajiem noteikumiem. iuo ACER INC. deklaruoja, kad is renginys atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999/5/EB Direktyvos nuostatas. Warnings and regulatory information - 25 Malti
[Maltese]
Magyar
[Hungarian]
Nederlands
[Dutch]
Norsk
[Norwegiann]
Polski
[Polish]
Portugus
[Portuguese]
Slovensko
[Slovenian]
Slovensky
[Slovak]
Suomi
[Finnish]
Svenska
[Swedish]
Hawnhekk, ACER INC., jiddikjara li dan jikkonforma mal- ti ijiet essenzjali u ma provvedimenti o rajn relevanti li he mm fid-Dirrettiva 1999/5/EC. Alulrott, ACER INC. nyilatkozom, hogy a kszlk megfelel a vonatkoz alapveto kvetelmnyeknek s az 1999/5/EC irnyelv egyb elorsainak. Hierbij verklaart ACER INC. dat het toestel voldoet aan de essentile eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG. ACER INC. erklrer herved at utstyret er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og vrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF. Niniejszym ACER INC. owiadcza, e urzdzenie jest zgodne z zasadniczymi wymogami oraz pozostaymi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC. ACER INC. declara que este dispostivo est conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposies da Directiva 1999/5/CE. ACER INC. izjavlja, da je ta naprava skladna z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi doloili Direktive 1999/5/ES. ACER INC. tmto vyhlasuje, e zariadenie spa zkladn poiadavky a vetky prslun ustanovenia Smernice 1999/5/ES. ACER INC. vakuuttaa tten ett tm laite on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja sit koskevienn direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen. Hrmed intygar ACER INC. att denna enhet str i verensstmmelse med vsentliga egenskapskrav och vriga relevanta bestmmelser som framgr av direktiv 1999/5/EG. 26 - Warnings and regulatory information France Pour la France mtropolitaine :
2,400 - 2,4835 GHz (Canaux 1 13) autoris en usage intrieur 2,400 - 2,454 GHz (canaux 1 7) autoris en usage extrieur Pour la Guyane et la Runion :
2,400 - 2,4835 GHz (Canaux 1 13) autoris en usage intrieur 2,420 - 2,4835 GHz (canaux 5 13) autoris en usage extrieur Pour tout le territoire Franais :
Seulement 5,15 -5,35 GHz autoris pour le 802.11a L'utilisation de cet equipement (2,4 GHz WLAN) est soumise certaines restrictions :
La puissance maximale autorise en intrieur est de 100 mW pour 2400 - 2483,5 MHz. La puissance maximale autorise est de 100 mW en extrieur pour 2400 - 2454 MHz. La puissance maximale autorise est de 10 mW en extrieur, 2454 -
2483,5 MHz. Pour les dernires restrictions, voir www.art-telecom.fr. Italy The use of this equipment is regulated by:
1.D.L.gs 1.8.2003, n. 259, article 104 (activity subject to general authorization) for outdoor use and article 105 (free use) for indoor use, in both cases for private use. 2.D.M. 28.5.03, for supply to public of RLAN access to networks and telecom services. Luso degli apparati regolamentato da:
1.D.L.gs 1.8.2003, n. 259, articoli 104 (attivit soggette ad autorizzazione generale) se utilizzati al di fuori del proprio fondo e 105 (libero uso) se utilizzati entro il proprio fondo, in entrambi i casi per uso private. 2.D.M. 28.5.03, per la fornitura al pubblico dellaccesso R-LAN alle reti e ai servizi di telecomunicazioni. Warnings and regulatory information - 27 Belgium Dans le cas d'une utilisation prive, l'extrieur d'un btiment, au-
dessus d'un espace public, aucun enregistrement n'est ncessaire pour une distance de moins de 300 m. Pour une distance suprieure 300 m un enregistrement auprs de l'IBPT est requise. Pour les enregistrements et licences, veuillez contacter l'IBPT. In geval van priv-gebruik, buiten een gebouw, op een openbare plaats, is geen registratie nodig, wanneer de afstand minder dan 300 m is. Voor een afstand groter dan 300 m is een registratie bij BIPT vereist. Voor registraties en te contacteren. licenties, gelieve BIPT Brazil Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio. Pakistan Pakistan Telecommunication Authority (PTA) Approved. Morocco The operation of this product in the radio channel 2 (2417 MHz) is not authorized in the following cities: Agadir, Assa-Zag, Cabo Negro, Chaouen, Goulmima, Oujda, Tan Tan, Taourirt, Taroudant and Taza. The operation of this product in the radio channels 4, 5, 6 and 7 (2425
- 2442 MHz) is not authorized in the following cities: Aroport Mohamed V, Agadir, Aguelmous, Anza, Benslimane, Bni Hafida, Cabo Negro, Casablanca, Fs, Lakbab, Marrakech, Merchich, Mohammdia, Rabat, Sal, Tanger, Tan Tan, Taounate, Tit Mellil, Zag. Japan 5 GHz Korea 28 - Warnings and regulatory information Taiwan
;
Modifications to the product Acer cannot be held responsible for unauthorized modifications made by the user and the consequences thereof, which may alter the conformity of the product. Compliant with Russian regulatory certification Warnings and regulatory information --29 Canada Industry Canada (IC) This device complies with RSS210 of Industry Canada. Cet appareil se conforme RSS210 de Canada d'Industrie. This device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Ce dispositif est conforme a la norme CNR-210 d'Industrie Canada applicable aux appareils radio exempts de licence. Son fonctionnement est sujet aux deux conditions suivantes: (1) le dispositif ne doit pas produire de brouillage prejudiciable, et (2) ce dispositif doit accepter tout brouillage recu, y compris un brouillage susceptible de provoquer un fonctionnement indesirable.
(Notice for 5GHz) Caution :
(i) the device for operation in the band 5150-5250 MHz is only for indoor use to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems;
(ii) the maximum antenna gain permitted for devices in the bands 5250-5350 MHz and 5470-5725 MHz shall comply with the e.i.r.p. limit; and
(iii) the maximum antenna gain permitted for devices in the band 5725-5825 MHz shall comply with the e.i.r.p. limits specified for point-to-point and non point-to-point operation as appropriate.
(iv) Users should also be advised that high-power radars are allocated as primary users
(i.e. priority users) of the bands 5250-5350 MHz and 5650-5850 MHz and that these radars could cause interference and/or damage to LE-LAN devices. Avertissement:
Le guide dutilisation des dispositifs pour rseaux locaux doit inclure des instructions prcises sur les restrictions susmentionnes, notamment :
(i) les dispositifs fonctionnant dans la bande 5 150-5 250 MHz sont rservs uniquement pour une utilisation lintrieur afin de rduire les risques de brouillage prjudiciable aux systmes de satellites mobiles utilisant les mmes canaux;
(ii) le gain maximal dantenne permis pour les dispositifs utilisant les bandes 5 250-5 350 MHz et 5 470-5 725 MHz doit se conformer la limite de p.i.r.e.;
(iii) le gain maximal dantenne permis (pour les dispositifs utilisant la bande 5 725-5 825 MHz) doit se conformer la limite de p.i.r.e. spcifie pour lexploitation point point et non point point, selon le cas.
(iv) De plus, les utilisateurs devraient aussi tre aviss que les utilisateurs de radars de haute puissance sont dsigns utilisateurs principaux (c.--d., quils ont la priorit) pour les bandes 5 250-5 350 MHz et 5 650-5 850 MHz et que ces radars pourraient causer du brouillage et/ou des dommages aux dispositifs LAN-EL. Radiation Exposure Statement:
The product comply with the Canada portable RF exposure limit set forth for an uncontrolled environment and are safe for intended operation as described in this manual. The further RF exposure reduction can be achieved if the product can be kept as far as possible from the user body or set the device to lower output power if such function is available. 30 - Warnings and regulatory information This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. Cet appareil numrique de la classe B est conforme a la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
"To prevent radio interference to the licensed service, this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from windows to provide maximum shielding. Equipment (or its transmit antenna) that is installed outdoors is subject to licensing."
Pour empcher que cet appareil cause du brouillage au service faisant l'objet d'une licence, il doit tre utilis a l'intrieur et devrait tre plac loin des fentres afin de fournir un cran de blindage maximal. Si le matriel (ou son antenne d'mission) est install l'extrieur, il doit faire l'objet d'une licence.
various | User Manual | Users Manual | 4.34 MiB |
- 1 Users Manual 2 -
2014. All Rights Reserved. Aspire Switch 11 Covers: SW5-171P / SW5-171 / SW5-111P / SW5-111 This revision: July 2014 Regulatory model number:
SW5-171P / SW5-171: P1HBC SW5-111P / SW5-111: P1JBC Sign up for an Acer ID and enjoy great benefits Open the Acer Portal app from the Start screen to sign up for an Acer ID or sign in if you already have an Acer ID. There are three great reasons for you to get an Acer ID:
Build Your Own Cloud with Acer BYOC. Get the latest offers and product information. Register your device for warranty service. For more information, please visit the AcerCloud website:
www.acer.com/byoc-start Important This manual contains proprietary information that is protected by copyright laws. The information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice. Images provided herein are for reference only and may contain information or features that do not apply to your computer. Acer Group shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained in this manual. Model number: _________________________________ Serial number: _________________________________ Date of purchase: ______________________________ Place of purchase: ______________________________ TABLE OF CONTENTS Table of contents - 3 5 First things first Your guides ............................................. 5 Basic care and tips for using your computer.................................................. 5 Turning your computer off........................... 5 Taking care of your computer ..................... 6 Taking care of your AC adapter.................. 6 Cleaning and servicing................................ 7 Your Acer computer tour 8 Computer................................................. 8 Front view ................................................... 8 Bottom view ................................................ 9 Left/right views............................................ 9 Information on USB 3.0............................. 10 LED Indicators .......................................... 11 Keyboard ............................................... 11 Keyboard front view .................................. 11 Keyboard right view ................................. 12 Attaching and detaching the keyboard...... 13 15 Using the keyboard Lock keys and embedded numeric keypad................................................... 15 Hotkeys..................................................... 16 Touchpad 18 Touchpad basics ................................... 18 Touchpad gestures................................ 18 Recovery 20 Creating a recovery backup................... 20 Creating a drivers and applications backup................................................... 22 Recovering your system ........................ 24 Reinstalling drivers and applications......... 25 Returning to an earlier system snapshot .. 27 Returning your system to its factory condition.................................................... 28 Recovering from Windows ........................ 28 Recovering from a recovery backup ......... 31 Connecting to the Internet 34 Connecting wirelessly............................ 34 Connecting to a wireless LAN................... 34 Using a Bluetooth connection 35 Enabling and disabling Bluetooth .......... 35 Enable Bluetooth and add a device .......... 35 BIOS utility 38 Boot sequence....................................... 38 Setting passwords ................................. 38 Securing your computer 39 Using passwords ................................... 39 Entering passwords .................................. 39 Power management 41 Saving power ......................................... 41 Battery pack 43 Battery characteristics ........................... 43 Charging the battery ................................. 43 Optimizing battery life ............................... 44 Checking the battery level......................... 45 Battery-low warning .................................. 45 Memory card reader 47 Connectivity options............................... 47 Video and audio connectors 49 50 HDMI Micro 51 Universal Serial Bus (USB) Micro USB 52 Frequently asked questions 54 Requesting service ................................ 56 Tips and hints for using Windows 8.1.... 57 How do I get to Start? ............................... 57 What are "Charms?" ................................. 57 Can I boot directly to the desktop? ........... 58 How do I jump between apps?.................. 58 How do I turn off my computer?................ 58 How do I unlock my computer?................. 58 How do I set the alarm?............................ 60 Where are my apps?................................. 61 What is a Microsoft ID (account)?............. 63 How do I add a favorite to Internet Explorer?................................................... 63 How do I check for Windows updates?..... 63 Where can I get more information?........... 63 Troubleshooting..................................... 64 Troubleshooting tips.................................. 64 Error messages......................................... 64 Internet and online security 66 First steps on the net ............................. 66 Protecting your computer.......................... 66 Choose an Internet Service Provider........ 66 Network connections................................. 68 Surf the Net!.............................................. 70 Security..................................................... 70 4 -
Getting started... In this section you will find:
Useful information on caring for your computer and your health Where to find the power button, ports and connectors Tips and tricks for using the touchpad and keyboard How to create recovery backups Guidelines for connecting to a network and using Bluetooth Information on using Acers bundled software FIRST THINGS FIRST First things first - 5 We would like to thank you for making this Acer computer your choice for meeting your mobile computing needs. Your guides To help you use your Acer computer, we have designed a set of guides:
First off, the Setup Guide helps you get started with setting up your computer. The Quick Guide introduces you to the basic features and functions of your new computer. For more on how your computer can help you to be more productive, please refer to the Users Manual. This guide contains detailed information on such subjects as system utilities, data recovery, expansion options and troubleshooting. In addition it contains general regulations and safety notices for your computer. It is available from the desktop; double-click the Help icon and click Users Manual in the menu that opens. Basic care and tips for using your computer Turning your computer off To turn the power off, do any of the following:
Use the Windows shutdown command: Press the Windows key +
<C>, click Settings > Power then click Shut Down. If you need to power down the computer for a short while, but dont want to completely shut it down, you can put it into Hibernate by pressing the power button. 6 - First things first You can also put the computer in sleep mode by pressing the sleep hotkey <Fn> + <F4>. Note If you cannot power off the computer normally, press and hold the power button for more than four seconds to shut down the computer. If you turn off the computer and want to turn it on again, wait at least two seconds before powering up. Taking care of your computer Your computer will serve you well if you take care of it. Do not expose the computer to direct sunlight. Do not place it near sources of heat, such as a radiator. Do not expose the computer to temperatures below 0 C (32 F) or above 35 C (95 F). Do not subject the computer to magnetic fields. Do not expose the computer to rain or moisture. Do not spill water or any liquid on the computer. Do not subject the computer to heavy shock or vibration. Do not expose the computer to dust or dirt. Never place objects on top of the computer. Do not slam the computer display when you close it. Never place the computer on uneven surfaces. Taking care of your AC adapter Here are some ways to take care of your AC adapter:
Do not connect the adapter to any other device. Do not step on the power cord or place heavy objects on top of it. Carefully route the power cord and any cables away from foot traffic. When unplugging the power cord, do not pull on the cord itself but pull on the plug. The total ampere ratings of the equipment plugged in should not exceed the ampere rating of the cord if you are using an extension cord. Also, the total current rating of all equipment plugged into a First things first - 7 single wall outlet should not exceed the fuse rating. Cleaning and servicing When cleaning the computer, follow these steps:
1.Turn off the computer. 2.Disconnect the AC adapter. 3.Use a soft, moist cloth. Do not use liquid or aerosol cleaners. If either of the following occurs:
The computer has been dropped or the body has been damaged;
The computer does not operate normally Frequently asked questions on page 54. 8 - Your Acer computer tour YOUR ACER COMPUTER TOUR After setting up your device as illustrated in the Setup Guide, let us show you around your new Acer computer. You can enter information into your new computer via the touchscreen. Computer Your device has two components: the computer and the keyboard. The following set of images will describe all of these. The views are labeled as if you are holding the computer with the screen towards you and the camera at the top. Front view 1 2
#
1 2 Icon Item Webcam Speakers Description Web camera for video communication. Deliver stereo audio output. Bottom view Your Acer computer tour - 9 1 2
#
1 2 Icon Item Keyboard connector Keyboard hook slots Description Connects to the keyboard. Fasten to the keyboard. Left/right views 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
#
1 Icon Item Headset/
speaker jack Description Connects to audio devices (e.g., speakers, headphones) or a headset with microphone. 10 - Your Acer computer tour
#
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Icon Item Home button
+ / -
Power button Volume control key Microphone Reset pinhole MicroSD card slot Micro USB connector HDMI micro connector USB port DC-in jack Description Press to go directly to the Windows Home screen. Press to turn the computer on; press again to place the computer in Sleep mode. Press and hold to turn the computer off. Adjusts the system volume. Internal microphone for sound recording. Insert a paperclip into the hole to reboot the computer. Insert a microSD card into this slot. Connects to USB devices. A micro USB to USB adapter is needed to connect to USB devices. When using a USB port, it is recommended to plug in the power adapter. Note: For SW5-111P / SW5-111 models only. Supports high-definition digital video connections. Connects to USB devices. Note: For SW5-171P / SW5-171 models only. Connects to an AC adapter. Information on USB 3.0 USB 3.0 compatible ports are blue. Compatible with USB 3.0 and earlier devices. For optimal performance, use USB 3.0-certified devices. Defined by the USB 3.0 specification (SuperSpeed USB). LED Indicators LED color Blue Amber Amber Off State Steady Steady Blinking Keyboard Keyboard front view Your Acer computer tour - 11 Description The computer is fully charged and plugged in. The computer is charging and plugged in. The battery is critically low or abnormal battery situation. The computer is off. 4 Icon Item Description Keyboard hooks Fasten to the computer. Keyboard For entering data into your computer. 1 2 3
#
1 2 12 - Your Acer computer tour
#
3 Icon Item Touchpad 4 Keyboard connector Keyboard right view Description Touch-sensitive pointing device. The touchpad and selection buttons form a single surface. Press down firmly on the touchpad surface to perform a left click. Press down firmly on the lower right corner to perform a right click. Swipe the right-hand edge of the touchpad inward to access the charms. Connects to the computer. 1 Icon
#
1 Item USB port Description Connects to USB devices. Attaching and detaching the keyboard The Acer Smart Hinge makes attaching and detaching the keyboard fast and easy. Your Acer computer tour - 13 Attach the computer with the keyboard by aligning the keyboard hooks and the keyboard hook slots to function as a laptop. Ensure the computer clicks into place. 14 - Your Acer computer tour Detach the computer from the keyboard by lifting one corner to release it from the keyboard to function as a tablet. You can also attach the computer to the keyboard facing outwards as a display. Ensure the computer clicks into place. USING THE KEYBOARD Using the keyboard - 15 The keyboard has full-sized keys and an embedded numeric keypad, separate cursor, lock, Windows, function and special keys. Lock keys and embedded numeric keypad The keyboard has three lock keys which you can toggle on and off. Lock key Caps Lock Description When Caps Lock is on, all alphabetic characters typed are in uppercase. When Num Lock is on, the embedded keypad is in numeric mode. The keys function as a calculator
(complete with the arithmetic operators +, -, *, and /). Use this mode when you need to do a lot of numeric data entry. A better solution would be to connect an external keypad. When Scroll Lock is on, the screen moves one line up or down when you press the up or down arrow keys respectively. Scroll Lock does not work with some applications. Num Lock
<Fn> + <F11>
Scroll Lock
<Fn> + <F12>
The embedded numeric keypad functions like a desktop numeric keypad. It is indicated by small characters located on the upper right corner of the keycaps. To simplify the keyboard legend, cursor-control key symbols are not printed on the keys. Desired access Number keys on embedded keypad Cursor-control keys on embedded keypad Main keyboard keys Num Lock on Type numbers in a normal manner. Hold <Shift> while using cursor-control keys. Hold <Fn> while typing letters on embedded keypad. Hold <Fn> while using cursor-control keys. Type the letters in a normal manner. Num Lock off 16 - Using the keyboard Hotkeys The computer employs hotkeys or key combinations to access most of the computer's controls like screen brightness and volume output. To activate hotkeys, press and hold the <Fn> key before pressing the other key in the hotkey combination. Hotkey Icon Function
<Fn> + <F3>
Airplane mode
<Fn> + <F4>
Sleep
<Fn> + <F5>
Display toggle
<Fn> + <F6>
Display off
<Fn> + <F6>
Connected standby
<Fn> + <F7>
<Fn> + <F8>
<Fn> + <F11> NumL
<Fn> + <F12> Scr Lk k Number Lock Scroll Lock
<Fn> + < >
Brightness up Description Turns on / off the computer's network devices.
(Network devices vary by configuration.) Puts the computer in Sleep mode. Switches display output between the display screen, external monitor (if connected) and both. Turns the display screen backlight off to save power. Press any key to return. Note: For SW5-171P / SW5-
171 models only. Puts the computer in Connected standby mode. Press any key to return. Note: For SW5-111P / SW5-
111 models only. Turns the built-in touchpad on and off. off. Turns the embedded numeric keypad on or off. Turns Scroll Lock on or off. Increases the screen brightness. Touchpad toggle Speaker toggle Turns the speakers on and Using the keyboard - 17 Hotkey
<Fn> + < >
<Fn> + < >
<Fn> + < >
Icon Function Description Decreases the screen Brightness brightness. down Volume up Increases the sound volume. Volume down Decreases the sound volume. 18 - Touchpad TOUCHPAD Touchpad basics The touchpad controls the arrow (or 'cursor') on the screen. As you slide your finger across the touchpad, the cursor will follow this movement. Note The touchpad is sensitive to finger movement; the lighter the touch, the better the response. Please keep the touchpad and your fingers dry and clean. The cursor is controlled by some basic gestures:
Single-finger slide: Slide a finger across the touchpad to move the cursor. Single-finger press or tap: Press the touchpad down, or lightly tap the touchpad with your finger, to perform a 'click', which will select or start an item. Quickly repeat the tap to perform a double tap or 'double click'. Single-finger press in the bottom-right corner: Press the bottom right corner of the touchpad to perform a 'right click'. In the Start screen, the app commands, in most apps this will open a context menu related to the selected item. this will toggle Drag: Press and hold the bottom left corner of the touchpad, or tap twice anywhere on the touchtap, then slide a second finger across the touchpad to select all items in an area. Touchpad gestures Windows 8.1 and many applications support touchpad gestures that use one or more fingers. Note Support for touchpad gestures depends on the active application. Touchpad - 19 This allows you to control applications with a few simple gestures, such as:
Swipe in from edge: Access Windows tools by swiping into the center of the touchpad from the right or left edge. Swipe in from right: Toggle the charms. Swipe in from left: Switch to the previous app. Two-finger slide: Swiftly scroll through web pages, documents and playlists by placing two fingers on the touchpad and moving both in any direction. Two-finger pinch: Zoom in and out of photos, maps and documents with a simple finger-and-thumb gesture. 20 - Recovery RECOVERY If you are having trouble with your computer, and the frequently asked questions (see Frequently asked questions on page 68) do not help, you can 'recover' your computer - i.e. return it to an earlier state. This section describes the recovery tools available on your computer. Acer provides Acer Recovery Management, which allows you to create a recovery backup, a drivers and applications backup, and to start recovery options, either using Windows tools, or the recovery backup. Note Acer Recovery Management is only available with a pre-installed Windows operating system. Important We recommend that you create a Recovery Backup and Drivers and Applications Backup and as soon as possible. In certain situations a full recovery will require a USB recovery backup. Creating a recovery backup To reinstall from a USB storage drive, you must first create a recovery backup. The recovery backup includes the entire original contents of your computers hard drive, including Windows and all factory-loaded software and drivers. Using this backup will restore your computer to the same state as when you purchased it, while giving you an option to retain all settings and personal data. Note Since the recovery backup requires at least 16 GB of storage after formatting, it is recommended to use a USB drive with a capacity of 32 GB or larger. 1.From Start, type 'Recovery' and then click Acer Recovery Management in the list of apps. Recovery - 21 2.Click Create Factory Default Backup. The Recovery Drive window opens. Make sure Copy contents from the recovery partition to the recovery drive is selected. This provides the most complete and safest recovery backup. 3.Plug in the USB drive then click Next. 22 - Recovery Since the recovery backup requires at least 16 GB of storage after formatting, it is recommended to use a USB drive with a capacity of 32 GB or larger. 4.You will be shown the backup progress on the screen. 5.Follow the process until it completes. 6.After creating the recovery backup, you can choose to delete the recovery this information, you can only use the USB recovery backup to restore your computer, if you lose or erase the USB drive, you cannot restore your computer. information on your computer. If you delete 7.Unplug the USB drive and label it clearly. Important Write a unique, descriptive label on the backup, such as 'Windows Recovery Backup'. Make sure you keep the backup in a safe place that you will remember. Creating a drivers and applications backup To create a Drivers and Applications Backup, that contains the factory-loaded software and drivers needed by your computer, you may use either a USB storage drive or, if your computer features a DVD recorder, one or more blank recordable DVDs. 1.From Start, type 'Recovery' and then click Acer Recovery Management in the list of apps. Recovery - 23 2.Click Create Drivers and Applications Backup. Plug in the USB drive or insert a blank DVD into the optical drive, then click Next. If you are using a USB drive, make sure your USB drive has enough capacity before continuing. If using DVDs, it will also show the number of blank, recordable discs you will need to complete the recovery discs. Make sure that you have the required number of identical, blank discs. 3.Click Start to copy files.You will be shown the backup progress on the screen. 4.Follow the process until it completes:
If you are using optical discs, the drive ejects each disc as it completes burning it. Remove the disc from the drive and mark it 24 - Recovery with a permanent marker. If multiple discs are required, insert a new disc when prompted, then click OK. Continue until the process is complete. If you are using a USB drive, unplug the drive and label it clearly. Important Write a unique, descriptive label on each backup, such as 'Drivers and Applications Backup'. Make sure you keep the backup in a safe place that you will remember. Recovering your system To recover your system:
1.Perform minor fixes. If only one or two items of software or hardware have stopped working correctly, the problem may be solved by reinstalling the software or the device drivers. To reinstall software and drivers that were pre-installed at the factory, see Reinstalling drivers and applications on page 25. For instructions on reinstalling software and drivers that were not pre-installed, see that products documentation or support Web site. 2.Revert to a previous system condition. If reinstalling software or drivers does not help, then the problem may be solved by returning your system to a previous state when everything was working correctly. For instructions, see Returning to an earlier system snapshot on page 27. 3.Reset your operating system. If nothing else has solved the problem and you want to reset your system, but keep your user information, see Returning your system to its factory condition on page 28. 4.Reset your system to its factory condition. If nothing else has solved the problem and you want to reset your system to factory condition, see Returning your system to its factory condition on page 28. Reinstalling drivers and applications Recovery - 25 As a troubleshooting step, you may need to reinstall the applications and device drivers that came pre-installed on your computer from the factory. You can reinstall using either your hard drive or the backup you have created. Other applications - If you need to reinstall software that did not come pre-installed on your computer, you need to follow that softwares installation instructions. New device drivers - If you need to reinstall device drivers that did not come pre-installed on your computer, follow the instructions provided with the device. If you are reinstalling using Windows and the recovery information stored on your computer:
1.From Start, type 'Recovery' and then click Acer Recovery Management in the list of apps. 2.Click Reinstall Drivers or Applications. 26 - Recovery 3.You should see the Contents section of the Acer Resource Center. Images for reference only. 4.Click the install icon for the item you want to install, then follow the onscreen instructions to complete the installation. Repeat this step for each item you want to reinstall. If you are reinstalling from a Drivers and Applications Backup on a DVD or USB drive:
1.Insert the Drivers and Applications Backup into the disc drive or connect it to a free USB port. If you inserted a DVD wait for Acer Resource Center to start. If Acer Resource Center does not start automatically, press the Windows key + <E>, then double-click on the optical drive icon. If you are using a USB drive, press the Windows key + <E>, then double-click on the drive that contains the backup. Double-click on ResourceCenter. 2.You should see the Contents section of the Acer Resource Center. Recovery - 27 Images for reference only. 3.Click the install icon for the item you want to install, then follow the onscreen prompts to complete the installation. Repeat this step for each item you want to reinstall. Returning to an earlier system snapshot Microsoft System Restore periodically takes a 'snapshot' of your system settings and saves them as restore points. In most cases of hard-to-resolve software problems, you can return to one of these restore points to get your system running again. Windows automatically creates an additional restore point each day, and also each time you install software or device drivers. Note For more information about using Microsoft System Restore, from Start, type Help and then click Help and Support in the list of apps. Type Windows system restore in the Search Help box, then press Enter. Returning to a restore point 1.From Start, type Control Panel and then click Control Panel in the list of apps. 2.Click System and Security > Action Center, then click Recovery at the bottom of the window. 3.Click Open System Restore, then Next. 28 - Recovery 4.Click the latest restore point (at a time when your system worked correctly), click Next, then Finish. 5.A confirmation window appears; click Yes. Your system is restored using the restore point you specified. This process may take several minutes, and may restart your computer. Returning your system to its factory condition If your computer experiences problems that are not recoverable by other methods, you may need to reinstall everything to return your system to its factory condition. You can recover from either your hard drive or the recovery backup you have created. If you can still run Windows and have not deleted the recovery partition, see Recovering from Windows below. If you cannot run Windows, your original hard drive has been completely re-formatted or you have installed a replacement hard drive, see Recovering from a recovery backup on page 31. Recovering from Windows Start Acer Recovery Management:
From Start, type Recovery and then click Acer Recovery Management in the list of apps. Two options are available, Restore Factory Settings (Reset my PC) or Customized Restore (Refresh my PC). Restore Factory Settings deletes everything on your hard drive, then reinstalls Windows and all software and drivers that were pre-installed on your system. If you can access important files on your hard drive, back them up now. See Restore Factory Settings with Acer Recovery Management on page 29. Customized Restore will attempt to retain your files (user data) but will reinstall all software and drivers. Software installed since you purchased your PC will be removed (except software installed from the Windows Store). See Customized Restore with Acer Recovery Management on page 30. Restore Factory Settings with Acer Recovery Management 1.Click Restore Factory Settings. Recovery - 29 Important Restore Factory Settings will erase all files on your hard drive. 2.The Reset your PC window opens. Images for reference only. 3.Click Next, then choose how to erase your files:
a.Just remove my files quickly erases all files before restoring your computer and takes about 30 minutes. b.Fully clean the drive completely cleans the drive after each file is erased, so no files can be viewed after the recovery. Cleaning the drive takes much longer, up to 5 hours, but is much more secure as old files are completely removed. 4.Click Reset. 30 - Recovery 5.The recovery process begins by restarting your computer, then continues by copying files to your hard drive. 6.After the recovery has finished, you can start using your computer by repeating the first-start process. Recovering from the hard drive during startup 1.Turn on your computer and press <Alt> + <F10> during startup. A screen appears asking you to choose the keyboard layout. 2.Several options are now presented. Click Troubleshoot. 3.Click either Refresh your PC or Reset your PC. Note
"Refresh your PC" enables you to restore your computer to the default factory condition with files intact. "Reset your PC" completely removes all your files and resets your computer to factory settings. 4.Click Next. The process will take several minutes. Customized Restore with Acer Recovery Management 1.Click Customized Restore (Retain User Data). 2.The Refresh your PC window opens. Recovery - 31 Images for reference only. 3.Click Next, then Refresh. 4.The recovery process begins by restarting your computer, then continues by copying files to your hard drive. This process takes about 30 minutes. Recovering from a recovery backup To recover from a recovery backup on a USB drive:
1.Find your recovery backup. 2.If your computer does not have a built-in keyboard, make sure a keyboard is attached to your computer. 3.Plug in the USB drive and turn on your computer. 4.If it is not already enabled, you must enable the F12 Boot Menu:
a. Press <F2> when starting your computer. b. Use the left or right arrow keys to select the Main menu. c. Press the down key until F12 Boot Menu is selected, press <F5>
to change this setting to Enabled. d. Use the left or right arrow keys to select the Exit menu. e. Depending on the type of BIOS your computer uses, select Save Changes and Exit or Exit Saving Changes and press Enter. Select OK or Yes to confirm. f. Your computer will restart. 5.During startup, press <F12> to open the boot menu. The boot menu allows you to select which device to start from, select the USB drive. a. Use your arrow keys to select USB Device, then press Enter. 32 - Recovery b. Windows starts from the recovery backup instead of the normal startup process. 6.Select your keyboard type. 7.Select Troubleshoot and then choose the type of recovery to use:
a. Click Advanced then System Restore to start Microsoft System Restore:
Microsoft System Restore periodically takes a snapshot of your system settings and saves them as restore points. In most cases of hard-to-resolve software problems, you can return to one of these restore points to get your system running again. b. Click Reset your PC to start the reset process:
Reset your PC deletes everything on your hard drive, then reinstalls Windows and all software and drivers that were pre-
installed on your system. If you can access important files on your hard drive, back them up now. See Reset your PC from the recovery backup below. c. Click Refresh your PC to start the refresh process:
Refresh your PC will attempt to retain your files (user data) but will reinstall all software and drivers. Software installed since you purchased your PC will be removed (except software installed from the Windows Store). See Refresh your PC from the recovery backup on page 33. Reset your PC from the recovery backup Important Reset your PC will erase all files on your hard drive. 1.The Reset your PC window opens. Images for reference only. Recovery - 33 2.Click Next. 3.Select the operating system to recover (normally only one option is available). 4.Choose to keep any changes to the hard drive:
a. If you have deleted the recovery partition or otherwise changed the partitions on the hard drive and want to keep these changes, select No. b. To restore your computer to Factory Settings, select Yes. 5.Choose how to erase your files:
a.Just remove my files quickly erases all files before restoring your computer and takes about 30 minutes. b.Fully clean the drive completely cleans the drive after each file is erased, so no files can be viewed after the recovery. Cleaning the drive takes much longer, up to 5 hours, but is much more secure as old files are completely removed. 6.Click Reset. 7.After the recovery has finished, you can start using your computer by repeating the first-start process. Refresh your PC from the recovery backup 1.The Refresh your PC window opens. 2.Click Next. 3.Select the operating system to recover (normally only one option is available). 4.Click Refresh. 5.The recovery process begins by restarting your computer, then continues by copying files to your hard drive. This process takes about 30 minutes. 34 - Connecting to the Internet CONNECTING TO THE INTERNET This chapter includes basic information on types of connections, and getting connected to the Internet. For detailed information, please refer to Network connections on page 68. Connecting wirelessly Connecting to a wireless LAN A wireless LAN (or WLAN) is a wireless local area network, which can link two or more computers without using wires. Once connected to WLAN, you can access the Internet. You can also share files, other devices, and even your Internet connection itself. Warning Using wireless devices while flying in aircraft may be prohibited. All wireless devices must be switched off before boarding an aircraft and during take-off, as they may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, disrupt communications, and even be illegal. You may turn on your computers wireless devices only when informed that it is safe to do so by the cabin crew. Your computer's wireless connection is turned on by default and Windows will detect and display a list of available networks during setup. Select your network and enter the password if required. Acer notebook computers feature an Airplane mode hotkey that turns the network connection on or off. You can use the network management options to turn your wireless network on/off or control what is shared over the network. From the Start screen, start typing wireless then select Connect to a network or Change Wi-Fi settings. Otherwise, open the instructions. Internet Explorer and follow Note Please refer to your Internet Service Provider (ISP) or router documentation for details on connecting to the Internet. USING A BLUETOOTH CONNECTION Using a Bluetooth connection - 35 Bluetooth is a technology enabling you to transfer data wirelessly over short distances between many different types of devices. Bluetooth-
enabled devices include computers, cell phones, tablets, wireless headsets, and keyboards. To use Bluetooth, you must ensure the following:
1.Bluetooth is enabled on both devices. 2.Your devices are "paired" (or connected). Enabling and disabling Bluetooth The Bluetooth adapter must be enabled on both devices. For your computer, this may be an external switch, a software setting, or a separate Bluetooth dongle plugged into the computers USB port (if no internal Bluetooth adapter is available). Note Please check your devices owners manual to determine how to turn on its Bluetooth adapter. Enable Bluetooth and add a device Every new device must first be "paired" with your computers Bluetooth adapter. This means it must first be authenticated for security purposes. You only need to pair once. After that, simply turning on the Bluetooth adapter of both devices will connect them. Bluetooth on your computer is disabled by default. To enable your computers Bluetooth adapter, do the following:
1.Open the Charms and select Settings > Change PC Settings > PC and devices > Bluetooth, or press the Windows key + <W> and then type Wireless; in the results, click on Bluetooth settings. 2.Click the toggle next to Bluetooth to enable/disable it. 3.Your computer will automatically start searching for devices, as well as make itself visible to other devices. 36 - Using a Bluetooth connection 4.Tap the device you wish to add from the list of discovered devices, and tap Pair. A code displays on your computer, which should match the code displayed on your device. Select Yes. Then, accept the pairing from your device. Note Some devices using older versions of the Bluetooth technology require both devices to enter a PIN. In the case of one of the devices not having any inputs
(as in a headset), the passcode is hardcoded into the device (usually "0000"
or "1234"). Consult your devices user manual for more information.
- 37 Keeping your computer and data safe... In this section you will find:
How to secure your computer Setting passwords What you need to prepare when youre traveling How to get the most out of your battery 38 - BIOS utility BIOS UTILITY The BIOS utility is a hardware configuration program built into your computer's BIOS. Your computer is already properly configured and optimized, and you do not normally need to run this utility. However, if you encounter configuration problems, you may need to run it. To activate the BIOS utility, press <F2> during the POST while the computer logo is being displayed. To activate the BIOS utility in tablet mode, press and hold the power button and the volume up button for five seconds. Boot sequence To set the boot sequence in the BIOS utility, activate the BIOS utility, then select Boot from the categories listed at the top of the screen. Setting passwords To set a password on boot, activate the BIOS utility, then select Security from the categories listed at the top of the screen. Find Password on boot: and use the <F5> and <F6> keys to enable this feature. SECURING YOUR COMPUTER Securing your computer - 39 Your computer is a valuable investment that you need to take care of. Learn how to protect and take care of your computer. Using passwords Passwords protect your computer from unauthorized access. Setting these passwords creates several different levels of protection for your computer and data:
Supervisor Password prevents unauthorized entry into the BIOS utility. Once set, you must enter this password to gain access to the BIOS utility. See Setting passwords on page 48. User Password secures your computer against unauthorized use. Combine the use of this password with password checkpoints on boot-up and resume from Hibernation (if available) for maximum security. Password on Boot secures your computer against unauthorized use. Combine the use of this password with password checkpoints on boot-up and resume from Hibernation (if available) for maximum security. Important Do not forget your Supervisor Password! If you forget your password, please get in touch with your dealer or an authorized service center. Entering passwords When a password is set, a password prompt appears in the center of the display screen. When the Supervisor Password is set, a prompt appears when you enter the BIOS utility. Type the Supervisor Password and press <Enter> to access the BIOS utility. If you enter the password incorrectly, a warning message appears. Try again and press <Enter>. When the User Password is set and the password on boot parameter is enabled, a prompt appears at boot-up. 40 - Securing your computer Type the User Password and press <Enter> to use the computer. If you enter the password incorrectly, a warning message appears. Try again and press <Enter>. Important You have three chances to enter a password. If you fail to enter the password correctly after three tries, the system halts. Press and hold the power button for four seconds to shut down the computer. Then turn on the computer again, and try again. POWER MANAGEMENT Power management - 41 This computer has a built-in power management unit that monitors system activity. System activity refers to any activity involving one or more of following devices: keyboard, mouse, hard disk, peripherals connected to the computer, and video memory. If no activity is detected for a period of time, the computer stops some or all of these devices in order to conserve energy. the Saving power Disable Fast startup Your computer uses Fast startup to start quickly, but also uses a small amount of power to check for signals to start. These checks will slowly drain your computers battery. If you prefer to reduce your computers power requirements and environmental impact, turn off Fast startup:
Note If Fast startup is off, your computer will take longer to start from Sleep. Your computer will also not start if it receives an instruction to start over a network (Wake on LAN). 1.Open the desktop. 2.Click Power Options in the Notification area. 3.Select More Power Options. 4.Select Choose what the power buttons do. 42 - Power management 5.Select Change settings that are currently unavailable. 6.Scroll down and disable Turn on fast startup. 7.Select Save changes. BATTERY PACK Battery pack - 43 The computer uses an embedded Lithium battery that gives you long use between charges. Battery characteristics The battery is recharged whenever you connect the computer to the AC adapter. Your computer supports charge-in-use, enabling you to recharge the battery while you continue to operate the computer. However, recharging with the computer turned off significantly reduces charge time. The battery will come in handy when you travel or during a power failure. Charging the battery Plug the AC adapter into the computer, and connect to a mains power outlet. You can continue to operate your computer on AC power while your battery is charging. However, charging the battery with the computer turned off significantly reduces charge time. Note You are advised to charge the battery before retiring for the day. Charging the battery overnight before traveling enables you to start the next day with a fully charged battery. Conditioning a new battery pack Before you use a battery pack for the first time, there is a conditioning process that you should follow:
1.Connect the AC adapter and fully charge the battery. 2.Turn on the computer and complete setting up the operating system. 3.Disconnect the AC adapter. 4.Operate the computer using battery power. 5.Reconnect the AC adapter and fully charge the battery again. 44 - Battery pack Follow these steps again until the battery has been charged and discharged three times. Use this conditioning process for all new batteries, or if a battery hasn't been used for a long time. Warning Do not expose battery packs to temperatures below 0 C (32 F) or above 45 C (113 F). Extreme temperatures may adversely affect the battery pack. The battery conditioning process ensures your battery accepts the maximum possible charge. Failure to follow this procedure will prevent you from obtaining the maximum battery charge, and will also shorten the effective lifespan of the battery. In addition, the useful lifespan of the battery is adversely affected by the following usage patterns:
Using the computer on constant AC power. Not discharging and recharging the battery to its extremes, as described above. Frequent use; the more you use the battery, the faster it will reach the end of its effective life. An embedded battery has a life span of more than 1,000 charge/discharge cycles. Optimizing battery life Optimizing battery life helps you get the most out of battery operation, prolonging the charge/recharge cycle and improving recharging efficiency. You are advised to follow the suggestions set out below:
Use AC power whenever possible, reserving battery for mobile use. Remove accessories that are not being used (e.g. a USB disk drive), as they can continue to draw power. Store your PC in a cool, dry place. The recommended temperature is 10 C (50 F) to 30 C (86 F). Higher temperatures cause the battery to self-discharge faster. Excessive recharging decreases the battery life. Look after your AC adapter and battery. Checking the battery level The power meter indicates the current battery level. Rest the cursor over the battery/power icon on the taskbar to see the battery's present charge level. Battery pack - 45 Battery-low warning When using battery power pay attention to the power meter. Important Connect the AC adapter as soon as possible after the battery-low warning appears. Data may be lost if the battery is allowed to become fully depleted and the computer shuts down. When the battery-low warning appears, the recommended course of action depends on your situation:
Situation The AC adapter and a power outlet are available. The AC adapter or a power outlet is unavailable. Recommended Action 1. Plug the AC adapter into the computer, and then connect to the main power supply. 2. Save all necessary files. 3. Resume work. Turn off the computer if you want to recharge the battery rapidly. 1. Save all necessary files. 2. Close all applications. 3. Turn off the computer. 46 -
Ports and connectors... In this section you will find:
Information on the ports and connectors fitted to your computer MEMORY CARD READER Memory card reader - 47 Connectivity options Your computer has a card reader and other ports/jacks that allow you to connect peripheral devices to your computer. For instructions on how to connect different external devices to the computer, read the following section. Memory card reader Memory cards are used in a wide selection of digital cameras, PDAs, MP3 players and mobile phones. Inserting a memory card 1.Align the card so that the connector points towards the port, with the connectors facing down. 2.Carefully slide the card into the port. If you find you need to use any force to insert the card, try reorientating the card slightly. 3.Push the card until it clicks into place. A few millimetres of the card will extend from beyond the slot. If the card contains some files, the Windows Auto Play window may appear (this depends on the contents of the card) and ask you if you wish to use a program to access the contents of the card. Select an option here if it is appropriate, otherwise select Cancel. If the card contains no files, or unknown files, a window will open showing the contents of the card. SD, SDHC and SDXC cards Different types of SD cards cover different capacities, while using the same overall design. SD cards contain up to 4 GB, SDHC cards contain up to 32 GB, and SDXC cards can contain up to 2048 GB 48 - Memory card reader
(2 TB). Your computer provides an SDHC or SDXC compatible card reader. Note SDXC memory cards can only be used in an SDXC-compatible reader; SD and SDHC cards can be used in either type. Removing a card from a memory card reader 1.Click on Show hidden icons arrow in the Notification Area (next to the clock). 2 2.Click on the Safely Remove Hardware icon. 3.Click on Eject SD Card (or the name of the device). 4.Wait until a Safe to Remove Hardware message is displayed. 5.Remove the card. 1 3 VIDEO AND AUDIO CONNECTORS Video and audio connectors - 49 Connect to a monitor with a VGA or DVI port (the type of connection supported depends on your computers configuration). The appropriate cable is usually included with the monitor. Follow these steps to connect an monitor to your computer:
1.Check that the computer is powered off and the monitor power switch is turned off. 2.Attach the video cable to the monitor port on the computer. Secure the cable connection with the screws provided. 3.Connect the monitor power cable and plug it into a properly grounded wall outlet. 4.Follow any setup instructions in the monitor's user's guide. 5.Turn on power to the monitor, then the computer. 6.Make sure that the current resolution and refresh rate do not exceed the specifications of the monitor. If necessary change the display settings used by the computer. Note To access the display controls, press the Windows key (
"Display" and then click on Display.
) + W, type Headphones and microphone These ports allow you to connect audio devices. Use the headphone port to plug in stereo headphones or powered speakers. Plugging an audio device to the headphone port disables the built-in speakers. Use the microphone port to connect an external microphone for mono recording; plugging in an external microphone disables the built-in microphone. Note Some computers have a single "combo" port that allows you to use single-pin headsets with a built-in microphone. These headsets are most commonly used with smartphones. 50 - HDMI Micro HDMI MICRO HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is a high-quality, digital audio/video interface. HDMI allows you to connect any compatible digital audio/video source, such as your computer, a set-top box, DVD player, and audio/video receiver to any compatible digital audio and/or video monitor, such as a digital television (DTV) with a single cable. The single cable keeps everything neat and tidy while ensuring easy connection and the best audio and visual quality. HDMI Micro delivers the same high-quality playback as standard HDMI, with a slimmer connector, ideal for use in slim-and-light notebooks and tablet computers. Note An HDMI Micro-to-HDMI adapter is included with certain models. UNIVERSAL SERIAL BUS (USB) Universal Serial Bus (USB) - 51 The USB port is a high-speed port which allows you to connect USB peripherals, such as a mouse, an external keyboard, additional storage (external hard disks), or any other compatible device. Note Two USB standards are currently available on Acer computers: USB 2.0
(High-speed USB) and USB 3.0 (SuperSpeed USB). USB 2.0 ports on Acer computers have a black tongue in the port, while USB 3.0 ports have a blue tongue. For best performance, USB 3.0 devices should always be plugged into USB 3.0 ports. Consult your devices documentation to see which standard it supports. You can also charge devices such as tablets, smartphones, or other devices through a USB port. Some USB 3.0 ports support charging devices when the computer is in Hibernate or turned off. Additionally, you can use a USB hub to connect multiple devices to a single USB port. Important When removing a USB storage device, you should right-click on the USB icon in the Windows task bar and select "Eject <device>" to tell the operating system to stop using the device before removing it. Failure to do this may result in data loss or damage to your peripheral. 52 - Micro USB MICRO USB The USB (Universal Serial Bus) port is a high-speed serial bus which allows you to connect USB peripherals without taking up system resources. The Micro USB port provides a compact port that is compatible with USB 2.0 devices. Note A Micro USB-to-USB adapter is needed to connect to USB devices that use a full-sized connector. The adapter is only included with some models. If your computer is not supplied with one, you will need to purchase one separately.
- 53 Got a question?
In this section you will find:
Frequently asked questions Tips for using Windows 8.1 Troubleshooting information How to protect yourself while online Where to find Acer service center contact information 54 - Frequently asked questions FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS The following is a list of possible situations that may arise during the use of your computer. Easy solutions are provided for each one. I turned on the power, but the computer does not start or boot up. Look at the power indicator:
If it is not lit, no power is being supplied to the computer. Check the following:
If you are using on the battery, it may be low and unable to power the computer. Connect the AC adapter to recharge the battery pack. Make sure that the AC adapter is properly plugged into the computer and to the power outlet. If it is lit, check the following:
Is a disc in the optical drive? Remove it and press <Ctrl> + <Alt>
+ <Del> to restart the system. Do you have a USB storage device (USB disk or smartphone) plugged into your computer? Unplug it and press <Ctrl> + <Alt> +
<Del> to restart the system. Nothing appears on the screen. The computers power management system automatically blanks the screen to save power. Press any key to turn the display back on. If pressing a key does not turn the display back on, three things might be the cause:
The brightness level might be too low. Press <Fn> + < > (increase) to adjust the brightness level. The display device might be set to an external monitor. Press the display toggle hotkey <Fn> + <F5> to toggle the display back to the computer. If the power LED is flashing, the computer may be in Sleep or Hibernate mode. Press and release the power button to resume. No audio is heard from the computer. Check the following:
Frequently asked questions - 55 The volume may be muted. Look at the volume control (speaker) icon in the taskbar. If it is crossed-out, click the icon and deselect the Mute all option. The volume level may be too low. Check the volume from the volume control (speaker) icon in the taskbar. You can also use the volume control buttons to adjust the volume. If headphones, earphones or external speakers are connected to the headphone jack on the computer, the internal speakers automatically turn off. The keyboard does not respond. Try attaching an external keyboard to a USB port on the computer. If it works, contact your dealer or an authorized service center as the internal keyboard cable may be loose. The printer does not work. Check the following:
Make sure that the printer is connected to a power outlet and that it is turned on. Make sure that the printer cable is connected securely to a USB port and the corresponding port on the printer. I want to restore my computer to its original settings. Note If your system is the multilingual version, the operating system and language you choose when you first turn on the system will be the only option for future recovery operations. This recovery process helps you restore the C: drive with the original software content that is installed when you purchased your computer. Warning Your C: drive will be reformatted and all data will be erased. It is important to back up all data files before using this option. Before performing a restore operation, please check the BIOS settings. 1.Check to see if Acer disk-to-disk recovery is enabled or not. 56 - Frequently asked questions 2.Make sure the D2D Recovery setting in Main is Enabled. 3.Exit the BIOS utility and save changes. The system will reboot. Note To activate the BIOS utility, press <F2> when you see the Acer logo during boot up. For more information, see Recovering your system on page 24. Requesting service International Travelers Warranty (ITW) Your computer is backed by an International Travelers Warranty
(ITW) that gives you security and peace of mind when traveling. An ITW passport came with your computer and contains all you need to know about the ITW program. A list of available, authorized service centers is in this handy booklet. Read this passport thoroughly. Always have your ITW passport on hand, especially when you travel, to receive the benefits from our support centers. Attach your proof-of-
purchase to the ITW passport. If the country you are traveling in does not have an Acer-authorized ITW service site, you can still get in contact with our offices worldwide. Please visit www.acer.com. Before you call Please have the following information available when you call Acer for online service, and please be at your computer when you call. With your support, we can reduce the amount of time a call takes and help solve your problems efficiently. If there are error messages or beeps reported by your computer, write them down as they appear on the screen (or the number and sequence in the case of beeps). You are required to provide the following information:
Name: _______________________________________ Address: ______________________________________ Telephone number: _____________________________ Machine and model type: _________________________ Serial number: _________________________________ Date of purchase: ______________________________ Frequently ask Frequently asked questions - 57 Tips and hints for using Windows 8.1 We know this is a new operating system that will take some getting used to, so we've created a few pointers to help you get started. How do I get to Start?
Press the Windows key; tap the Start button on the desktop taskbar;
or swipe the right-hand edge of the screen inwards and tap the Start charm. Wheres the Start button?
The Start button will appear in the desktop taskbar. Tapping it will open Start where you can launch apps. How do I see all of my apps?
Swipe upwards from the bottom of Start. Can I make the "All apps" view the default for Start?
Yes, you can, just follow these steps:
1.Go to the desktop. 2.Tap and hold the taskbar until you see the square outline. Select Properties from the menu that opens when you remove your finger. 3.From the Navigation tab, check Show the Apps view automatically when I go to Start. What are "Charms?"
Charms allow you to perform useful functions, such as sharing content, turning off your PC or changing settings. How do I access the charms?
Swipe the right-hand edge of the screen inwards. 58 - Frequently asked questions Can I boot directly to the desktop?
Yes, you can, just follow these steps:
1.Go to the desktop. 2.Tap and hold the taskbar until you see the square outline. Select Properties from the menu that opens when you remove your finger. 3.From the Navigation tab, check Go to the desktop instead of Start when I sign in. How do I jump between apps?
Swipe the left-hand edge of the screen inwards to cycle through apps that are currently running. How do I turn off my computer?
Swipe the right-hand edge of the screen inwards, tap Settings >
Power and select the action you'd like to take. Can I just turn off notifications?
You can turn off notifications during certain hours so that you can leave your computer running, but not be disturbed by notifications. 1.Swipe the right-hand edge of the screen inwards and tap Settings >
Change PC settings > Search & apps > Notifications. 2.Move the Quiet hours slider to On and select times to start and stop disabling notifications. How do I unlock my computer?
Swipe the lock screen upwards and tap a user account icon to unlock the computer. If your account has a password set, you will need to enter the password to continue. Tap and hold the preview icon to see the characters you've entered to ensure the password is correct. Frequently asked questions - 59 Can I personalize the Lock screen?
You can personalize the lock screen with a different image, to run a slideshow of images, or to show you quick status and notifications to suit your personal needs. To change the background, swipe the right-hand edge of the screen inwards and tap Settings > Change PC settings > PC and devices
> Lock screen. From here you can:
Select a background image for the lock screen Turn the Slide show on or off Select lock screen apps. How do I set up the lock screen slideshow?
1.Swipe the right-hand edge of the screen inwards and tap Settings >
Change PC settings > PC and devices > Lock screen. 2.Move the slider to On and select if the slideshow should be played while the computer is running on battery power. 3.Tap Add a folder and open the folder you wish to use (your Pictures folder will open by default). Tap Use this folder > OK. 4.You can see the list of folders under Add a folder. Select a folder name and tap Remove to remove the folder from the lock screen slideshow. 5.Change the other settings to suit your needs. How do I move tiles?
Tap and hold a tile to select it, then drag it to the place on Start that you want it to appear. Other tiles will be moved to accommodate the tile in its new location. Can I arrange tiles in groups?
Yes, you can. Tap and hold a tile until you see the screen dim. When you release the tile, the Customize menu appear at the bottom of the screen. You will see Name group appear above unnamed groups. You can give the group(s) a name and arrange the tiles within the groups to suit your needs. 60 - Frequently asked questions Can I make tiles bigger or smaller?
Swipe upwards from bottom of the screen and tap Customize, tap the tile(s) you wish to resize and tap Resize. Select a size from the menu that appears. How do I close an app?
Swipe the window downwards from the top to the bottom of the screen. You need to swipe the window past the half-way point of the screen. Can I change the screen resolution?
Swipe the right-hand edge of the screen inwards and tap Search, tap the text box to open the onscreen keyboard and start typing 'Control Panel' to display the results; tap Control Panel > Adjust screen resolution. How do I set the alarm?
Your computer can act as an alarm clock. Start typing Alarms to search for the Alarms app. 1.Set the time using the sliders on the left-hand side of the screen. 2.Select AM or PM. 3.Choose which days the alarm should go off. 4.Select the notification. 5.Save the alarm by tapping the Save icon in the upper right-hand corner. Delete Save Frequently asked questions - 61 Hour Minutes Note The alarm will only sound if your computer is awake at the set time. Where are my apps?
Swipe the right-hand edge of the screen inwards and tap Search, type the name of the app you would like to open using the pop-up keyboard. Results will be displayed on the left-hand side of the screen. To view the complete list of apps, swipe upwards from the bottom of the screen and tap All apps. How do I make an app appear on Start?
If you're in All apps and you want to make an app appear on Start, Tap and hold a tile until you see the screen dim. When you release the tile, the Customize menu appear at the bottom of the screen. Tap Pin to Start from the menu that appears at the bottom of the screen. How do I remove a tile from Start?
Tap and hold a tile until you see the screen dim. When you release the tile, the Customize menu appear at the bottom of the screen. Tap the tile(s) you wish to remove and tap Unpin from Start from the 62 - Frequently asked questions menu that appears at the bottom of the screen. How do I make an app appear on my taskbar?
If you're in All apps and you want to make an app appear on the taskbar, tap and hold a tile until you see the screen dim. When you release the tile, the Customize menu appear at the bottom of the screen. Select Pin to taskbar from the menu that appears at the bottom of the screen. How do I install apps?
You can download Windows Store apps from Store. You will need to have a Microsoft ID to purchase and download apps from Store. I can't find apps like Notepad and Paint! Where are they?
Swipe the right-hand edge of the screen inwards and tap Search, type the name of the app you would like to open using the pop-up keyboard. Alternatively, open All apps and scroll to Windows Accessories to see the list of legacy programs. Can I use more than one app at a time?
1.Tap on a tile to open an app from the Start screen. 2.Return to the Start screen and repeat the process. 3.Swipe right from the left edge of the screen to display the last app that was opened. 4.Swipe right from the left edge of the screen until you see a column divider to display both apps simultaneously. Up to three apps may be displayed via three columns at the same time. Can I show my desktop apps first?
Yes, you can, just follow these steps:
1.Go to the desktop. 2.Tap and hold the taskbar until you see the square outline. Select Properties from the menu that opens when you remove your finger. 3.From the Navigation tab, check List desktop apps first in the Apps view when it's sorted by category. Frequently asked questions - 63 What is a Microsoft ID (account)?
A Microsoft account is an email address and password that you use to sign in to Windows. You can use any email address, but it is best if you choose the one you already use to communicate with friends and sign in to your favorite websites. When you sign in to your PC with a Microsoft account, you'll connect your PC to the people, files, and devices you care about. Do I need one?
You do not need a Microsoft ID to use Windows 8.1, but it makes life easier because you can sync data across different machines you sign in to using a Microsoft ID. How do I get one?
If you've already installed Windows 8.1 and didn't sign in with a Microsoft account or you don't have a Microsoft account and want to get one, swipe the right-hand edge of the screen inwards and tap Settings > Change PC settings > Accounts > Connect to a Microsoft account, and follow the onscreen instructions. How do I add a favorite to Internet Explorer?
Internet Explorer 10 doesn't have traditional favorites, instead you can pin shortcuts to Start. Once you have the page open, swipe upwards from the bottom edge of the screen to open the menu at the bottom of the screen. Tap Pin to Start. How do I check for Windows updates?
Swipe the right-hand edge of the screen inwards and tap Settings >
Change PC settings > Update & recovery > Windows Update. Tap Check now. Where can I get more information?
For more information please visit the following pages:
Windows 8 and 8.1 tutorials: www.acer.com/windows8-tutorial Support FAQs: support.acer.com FREQUENTLY 64 - Frequently asked questions Troubleshooting This chapter shows you how to deal with common system problems. Read it before calling a technician if a problem occurs. Solutions to more serious problems require opening up the computer. Do not attempt to open the computer yourself; contact your dealer or authorized service center for assistance. Troubleshooting tips incorporates an advanced design This computer onscreen error message reports to help you solve problems. If the system reports an error message or an error symptom occurs, see "Error messages" below. If the problem cannot be resolved, contact your dealer. that delivers Error messages Corrective action If you receive an error message, note the message and take the corrective action. The following table lists the error messages in alphabetical order together with the recommended course of action. Error messages CMOS battery bad Contact your dealer or an authorized service center. Contact your dealer or an authorized service CMOS checksum error center. Insert a system (bootable) disk, then press Disk boot failure
<Enter> to reboot. Press <F2> (during POST) to enter the BIOS utility, then press Exit in the BIOS utility to reboot. Contact your dealer or an authorized service center. Contact your dealer or an authorized service center. Contact your dealer or an authorized service center. Hard disk 0 error Hard disk 0 extended type error I/O parity error Equipment configuration error Frequently asked questions - 65 Error messages Keyboard error or no keyboard connected Keyboard interface error Memory size mismatch Corrective action Contact your dealer or an authorized service center. Contact your dealer or an authorized service center. Press <F2> (during POST) to enter the BIOS utility, then press Exit in the BIOS utility to reboot. If you still encounter problems after going through the corrective measures, please contact your dealer or an authorized service center for assistance. 66 - Internet and online security INTERNET AND ONLINE SECURITY First steps on the net Protecting your computer It is vital to protect your computer from viruses and attacks over the Internet (see Security on page 70). A comprehensive Internet security program is offered when you first start your computer. You should activate this protection as soon as possible, certainly before you connect to the Internet. Choose an Internet Service Provider Using the Internet has become a natural part of daily computing. Just a few simple steps can connect you to a vast collection of knowledge and communication tools. To accomplish these steps you should first select an Internet Service Provider (ISP), which supplies the connection between your computer and the Internet. You should research the ISPs available in your region, not forgetting to talk to friends and family about their experiences or to check reviews and consumer reports. The ISP you select will provide instructions on how to connect to the Internet (you may need additional software or a special box that connects to your phone line). Connection types Depending on your computer model, your location and your communication needs, you have several ways to connect to the Internet. Dial-up Some computers include a telephone dial-up (modem) connector. This allows you to connect to the Internet using your telephone line. With a dial-up connection, you cannot use the modem and the telephone simultaneously on a single phone line. This type of connection is recommended only if you have limited use of the Internet as the connection speed is low and connection time is typically charged per hour. Internet and online security - 67 DSL (e.g. ADSL) DSL (Digital Subscriber Line) is an always-on connection that runs over the phone line. As DSL and phone do not use the same frequencies, you can use your telephone at the same time you are connected to the Internet (this requires a micro-filter on each telephone socket to avoid interference). To be eligible for DSL, you must be located near an DSL-equipped phone exchange (service is sometimes unavailable in rural areas). Connection speeds vary depending on your location, but DSL generally provides very fast and reliable Internet connection. As the connection is always-on, it is generally charged at fixed monthly rates. Note A DSL connection requires an appropriate modem. A modem is usually provided by the ISP when you register. Many of these modems include an router that provides network and Wi-Fi access. Cable A cable connection provides fast and always-on Internet service via a cable television line. This service is generally available in large cities. You can use your telephone and watch cable TV at the same time you are connected to the Internet. 3G (WWAN or 'Wireless Wide-Area Network') A 3G connection allows you to use cellular networks (such as those used by a mobile phone) to connect to the Internet while away from home. The socket for a SIM card may be built in to your computer, or may require an external device, such as a USB modem or even an appropriately equipped mobile phone. Note If your computer includes a SIM card slot, you require a compatible SIM card and a contract with a cellular provider. Before using the 3G features, check with your service provider to see if any additional charges will be incurred, especially roaming charges. 68 - Internet and online security Network connections A LAN (Local Area Network) is a group of computers (for example, within an office building or home) that share a common communications line and resources. When you set up a network, you can share files, peripheral devices (such as a printer) and an Internet connection. You can set up a LAN using wired technologies (such as Ethernet) or wireless technologies (such as Wi-Fi or Bluetooth). Wireless networks A wireless LAN or WLAN is a wireless local area network, which may link two or more computers without using wires. Setting up a wireless network is easy and allows you to share files, peripheral devices and an Internet connection. What are benefits of a wireless network?
Mobility Wireless LAN systems allow you and other users of your home network to share access to files and devices connected to the network, for example a printer or scanner. Also you can share an internet connection with other computers in your home. Installation speed and simplicity Installing a wireless LAN system can be fast and easy and eliminates the need to pull cables through walls and ceilings. Components of a wireless LAN To set up your Wireless network at home you need to have the following:
Access point (router) Access points (routers) are two-way transceivers that broadcast data into the surrounding environment. Access points act as a mediator between wired and wireless network. Most routers have a built-in DSL modem that will allow you access to a high speed DSL internet connection. The ISP (Internet Service Provider) you have chosen normally supplies a modem/router with the subscription to their services. Read carefully the documentation supplied with your Access Internet and online security - 69 point/router for detailed setup instructions. Network cable (RJ45) A network cable (also called RJ45 cable) is used to connect the host computer to the access point (see illustration below); this type of cable may also be used to connect peripheral devices to the access point. Wireless adapter An internal wireless adapter is normally already installed in your computer. A button or controls in Windows allow you to activate or deactivate the adapter. Diagram of a working network 1.Access point/router 2.Desktop computer 3.Modem 4.Printer 5.Portable computer 6.PDA/Smartphone 7.Network cables (RJ45) Turning on/off a wireless network connection Most computers feature a Wi-Fi button that turns the network connection on or off. If your computer has wireless access, but does not feature a Communication button, you may turn your wireless network on or off, or control what is shared over the network with the network management options. Press the Windows key (
) + W, type
"HomeGroup" and then click on HomeGroup. Warning Using wireless devices while flying in aircraft is prohibited. Switch off all devices before boarding an aircraft; they may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, disrupt communications, and even be illegal. 70 - Internet and online security Surf the Net!
To surf the Internet, you need a program called an Internet browser. Internet Explorer provides an easy and secure web browsing experience. As soon as you have your Internet access installed and you are connected, from Start, click the Internet Explorer tile or the icon located on the desktop and take your Internet experience to a new level!
Acer website To get you started why not visit our website, www.acer.com. Acer is dedicated to provide you with on-going personalied support. Check out our Support section to get help tailored to your needs. www.acer.com is your portal to a world of online activities and services: visit us regularly for the latest information and downloads!
Security You are probably eager to explore everything the Internet has to offer. In order for you to be safe online, Acer has pre-installed McAfee Internet Security Suite on your computer. McAfee Internet Security Suite runs quietly in the background to block todays complex threats and protect your identity when you shop, bank, or browse online. McAfee Internet Security Suite blocks online identity theft, detects and eliminates spyware, removes viruses and Internet worms, protects against hackers. Definitions What is a virus?
Malicious software, typically called viruses, are programs designed to infect and damage computers. Most viruses are transmitted over the Internet, emails or malicious Web sites. A typical virus will replicate and pass itself undetected to multiple computers. Other forms of nuisance, such as Trojan horses, worms or spam can infect your Internet and online security - 71 computer in various ways, using up resources or clogging up a network. Note Acer guarantees that your computer was 100% virus free at the time of purchase and does not cover damages due to viruses. What is spyware?
Spyware refers to generally unwanted programs that are downloaded onto your computer while connected to the Internet, often without you knowing it. Once it has infected your computer, it can snoop on your browsing activity, collect personal information, cause pop-up ads to appear, or even change the configuration of your computer. Spyware consumes resources on your computer; it can slow down your Internet connection or entire computer system, and even cause crashes. Spyware is sometimes used by unscrupulous companies to monitor and track the sites you visit on the Internet so as to determine your web-surfing habits and display targeted pop-up ads on your screen. However, some kinds of spyware go beyond simple tracking and actually monitor keystrokes and capture passwords, posing a serious security risk. What is malware?
Malicious software, also known as malware, is software designed to deliberately harm your computer. For example, viruses, worms, and Trojan horses are malicious software. To help protect your computer against malware, make sure it is using up-to-date antivirus and anti-
malware software. What is a personal firewall?
A personal firewall is a software program designed to prevent unauthorized access to or from a private network. It acts as a shield to protect your Internet connection from unwanted connections, some of which may attempt to take control of your computer to install or re-
distribute viruses or malicious programs. Each connection to your computer is monitored - programs that attempt to receive information without your permission are detected and the firewall will display an alert. You can then decide if you will allow the connection, if the connection is to a program you are currently using then normally you 72 - Internet and online security would allow it (i.e. a game connecting to a multi-player server or an encyclopaedia making a content update). How to protect your computer Cybercrime prevention can be straight-forward - when armed with a little technical advice and common sense, many attacks can be avoided. In general, online criminals are trying to make their money as quickly and easily as possible. The more difficult you make their job, the more likely they are to leave you alone and move on to an easier target. The tips below provide basic information on how you can prevent online fraud. Keep your computer current with the latest patches and updates One of the best ways to keep attackers away from your computer is to apply patches and other software fixes when they become available. By regularly updating your computer, you block attackers from being able to take advantage of software flaws (vulnerabilities) that they could otherwise use to break into your system. While keeping your computer up-to-date will not protect you from all attacks, it makes it much more difficult for hackers to gain access to your system, blocks many basic and automated attacks completely, and might be enough to discourage less-determined attackers, so they will give up and look for a more vulnerable computer elsewhere. More recent versions of Microsoft Windows and other popular software can be configured to download and apply updates automatically so that you do not have to remember to check for the latest software. Taking advantage of auto-update features in your software is a great start toward keeping yourself safe online. Protect your computer with security software Several types of security software are necessary for basic online security. Security software essentials include firewall and antivirus programs. A firewall is usually your computer's first line of defense-it controls who and what can communicate with your computer online. You could think of a firewall as a sort of "policeman" that watches all the data attempting to flow in and out of your computer on the Internet, allowing communications that it knows are safe and blocking
"bad" traffic such as attacks from ever reaching your computer. Internet and online security - 73 The next line of defense many times is your antivirus software, which monitors all online activities such as email messages and Web browsing and protects an individual from viruses, worms, Trojan horse and other types of malicious programs. Your antivirus and antispyware software should be configured to update itself, and it should do so every time you connect to the Internet. Integrated security suites such as McAfee Internet Security Suite, which combine firewall, antivirus, antispyware with other features such as antispam and parental controls, have become popular as they offer all the security software needed for online protection in a single package. Many people find using a comprehensive security suite an attractive alternative to installing, configuring and updating several different types of security software. A complete version of McAfee Internet Security Suite is pre-installed on your Acer system. It includes a free trial subscription to protection updates. Make sure you Activate it!
Choose strong passwords and keep them safe following Passwords are a fact of life on the Internet today; we use them for everything from ordering flowers and online banking to logging into our favorite airline Web site to see how many miles we have accumulated. The tips can help make your online experiences secure:
Selecting a password that cannot be easily guessed is the first step toward keeping passwords secure and out of the wrong hands. Strong passwords have eight characters or more and use a combination of letters, numbers and symbols (e.g., # $ % ! ?). Avoid using any of the following as your password: your login name, anything based on your personal information such as your last name, and words that can be found in the dictionary, especially
"password." Try to select especially strong, unique passwords for protecting activities like online banking. Keep your passwords in a safe place and try not to use the same password for every service you use online. Change passwords on a regular basis, at least every 90 days. This can limit the damage caused by someone who has already gained access to your account. If you notice something suspicious with one 74 - Internet and online security of your online accounts, one of the first steps you can take is to change your password. Protect your personal information Exercise caution when sharing personal information such as your name, home address, phone number, and email address online. To take advantage of many online services, you will inevitably have to provide personal information in order to handle billing and shipping of purchased goods. Since not divulging any personal information is rarely possible, the following list contains some advice for how to share personal information safely online:
Keep an eye out for phony email messages. Things that indicate a message may be fraudulent are misspellings, poor grammar, odd phrasing, Web site addresses with strange extensions, Web site addresses that are entirely numbers where there are normally words, and anything else out of the ordinary. Additionally, phishing messages will often tell you that you have to act quickly to keep your account open, update your security, or urge you to provide information immediately or else something bad will happen. Don't take the bait. Don't respond to email messages that ask for personal information. Legitimate companies will not use email messages to ask for your personal information. When in doubt, contact the company by phone or by typing in the company Web address into your Web browser. Don't click on the links in these messages as they make take you to fraudulent, malicious Web sites. Steer clear of fraudulent Web sites used to steal personal information. When visiting a Web site, type the address (URL) directly into the Web browser rather than following a link within an email or instant message. Fraudsters often forge these links to make them look convincing. A shopping, banking or any other Web site where sensitive information should have an "S" after the letters "http" (i.e. https://
www.yourbank.com not http://www.yourbank.com). The "s" stands for secure and should appear when you are in an area requesting you to login or provide other sensitive data. Another sign that you have a secure connection is the small lock icon in the bottom of your web browser (usually the right-hand corner). Internet and online security - 75 Pay attention to privacy policies on Web sites and in software. It is important to understand how an organization might collect and use your personal information before you share it with them. Guard your email address. Spammers and "phishers" sometimes send millions of messages to email addresses that may or may not exist in hopes of finding a potential victim. Responding to these messages or even downloading images ensures you will be added to their lists for more of the same messages in the future. Also be careful when posting your email address online in newsgroups, blogs or online communities. Online offers that look too good to be true usually are The old saying "there's no such thing as a free lunch" still rings true today. Supposedly "free" software such as screen savers or smileys, secret investment tricks sure to make you untold fortunes, and contests that you've surprisingly won without entering are the enticing hooks used by companies to grab your attention. While you may not directly pay for the software or service with money, the free software or service you asked for may have been bundled with advertising software ("adware") that tracks your behavior and displays unwanted advertisements. You may have to divulge personal information or purchase something else in order to claim your supposed content winnings. If an offer looks so good it's hard to believe, ask for someone else's opinion, read the fine print, or even better, simply ignore it. Review bank and credit card statements regularly The impact of identity theft and online crimes can be greatly reduced if you can catch it shortly after your data is stolen or when the first use of your information is attempted. One of the easiest ways to get the tip-off that something has gone wrong is by reviewing the monthly statements provided by your bank and credit card companies for anything out of the ordinary. Additionally, many banks and services use fraud prevention systems that call out unusual purchasing behavior (i.e. if you live in Texas and all of the sudden start buying refrigerators in Budapest). In order to confirm these out of the ordinary purchases, they might call you and ask you to confirm them. Don't take these calls lightly; this is your hint 76 - Internet and online security that something bad may have happened and you should take necessary action. Protect your computer with Windows security tools Windows provides a variety of protection applications. Windows Updates If you have an active Internet connection, Windows can check for important updates for your computer and install them automatically. These updates include security patches and program updates that can improve your computing experience and help protect your computer against new viruses and attacks. How do I know when my computer is at risk?
If the Action Center reports an alert, or if your computer behaves erratically, crashes unexpectedly or if some of your programs do not work correctly, your computer may be infected by malicious software. However, do not blame every computer problem on a virus! If you suspect your computer is infected, the first thing to do is update, if you have not already done so, and run your antivirus and anti-spyware software.
various | User Manual 20151229 v1 - (QCNFA222) UserMan | Users Manual | 5.10 MiB |
E11243 Revised Edition V2 December 2015 E-Manual COPYRIGHT INFORMATION No part of this manual, including the products and software described in it, may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language in any form or by any means, except documentation kept by the purchaser for backup purposes, without the express written permission of ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC. (ASUS). ASUS PROVIDES THIS MANUAL AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT SHALL ASUS, ITS DIRECTORS, OFFICERS, EMPLOYEES OR AGENTS BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF USE OR DATA, INTERRUPTION OF BUSINESS AND THE LIKE), EVEN IF ASUS HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES ARISING FROM ANY DEFECT OR ERROR IN THIS MANUAL OR PRODUCT. Products and corporate names appearing in this manual may or may not be registered trademarks or copyrights of their respective companies, and are used only for identification or explanation and to the owners benefit, without intent to infringe. SPECIFICATIONS AND INFORMATION CONTAINED IN THIS MANUAL ARE FURNISHED FOR INFORMATIONAL USE ONLY, AND ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE AT ANY TIME WITHOUT NOTICE, AND SHOULD NOT BE CONSTRUED AS A COMMITMENT BY ASUS. ASUS ASSUMES NO RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY FOR ANY ERRORS OR INACCURACIES THAT MAY APPEAR IN THIS MANUAL, INCLUDING THE PRODUCTS AND SOFTWARE DESCRIBED IN IT. Copyright 2015 ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC. All Rights Reserved. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY Circumstances may arise where because of a default on ASUS part or other liability, you are entitled to recover damages from ASUS. In each such instance, regardless of the basis on which you are entitled to claim damages from ASUS, ASUS is liable for no more than damages for bodily injury (including death) and damage to real property and tangible personal property; or any other actual and direct damages resulted from omission or failure of performing legal duties under this Warranty Statement, up to the listed contract price of each product. ASUS will only be responsible for or indemnify you for loss, damages or claims based in contract, tort or infringement under this Warranty Statement. This limit also applies to ASUS suppliers and its reseller. It is the maximum for which ASUS, its suppliers, and your reseller are collectively responsible. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES IS ASUS LIABLE FOR ANY OF THE FOLLOWING: (1) THIRD-PARTY CLAIMS AGAINST YOU FOR DAMAGES; (2) LOSS OF, OR DAMAGE TO, YOUR RECORDS OR DATA; OR (3) SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR INDIRECT DAMAGES OR FOR ANY ECONOMIC CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING LOST PROFITS OR SAVINGS), EVEN IF ASUS, ITS SUPPLIERS OR YOUR RESELLER IS INFORMED OF THEIR POSSIBILITY. SERVICE AND SUPPORT Visit our multi-language website at https://www.asus.com/support/
2 Notebook PC E-Manual Table of Contents About this manual .....................................................................................................7 Conventions used in this manual .............................................................................8 Icons ....................................................................................................................................8 Typography .......................................................................................................................8 Safety precautions .....................................................................................................9 Using your Notebook PC ..............................................................................................9 Caring for your Notebook PC .....................................................................................10 Proper disposal ................................................................................................................11 Chapter 1: Hardware Setup Getting to know your Notebook PC ...................................................................14 Top View .............................................................................................................................14 Bottom ................................................................................................................................17 Right Side ..........................................................................................................................19 Left Side .............................................................................................................................21 Chapter 2: Using your Notebook PC Getting started ...........................................................................................................24 Charge your Notebook PC ...........................................................................................24 Lift to open the display panel ....................................................................................26 Press the power button ................................................................................................26 Gestures for the touch screen panel and touchpad .....................................27 Using touch screen panel gestures ..........................................................................27 Using the touchpad .......................................................................................................30 Using the keyboard ...................................................................................................34 Function keys ...................................................................................................................34 Windows 10 keys ..........................................................................................................35 Rotating the display panel .....................................................................................36 3 Notebook PC E-Manual Chapter 3: Working with Windows 10 Starting for the first time .........................................................................................38 Start menu ...................................................................................................................39 Windows apps ..........................................................................................................41 Working with Windows apps....................................................................................42 Customizing Windows apps .....................................................................................42 Task view .......................................................................................................................45 Snap feature ................................................................................................................46 Snap hotspots ..................................................................................................................46 Action Center ..............................................................................................................48 Other keyboard shortcuts ......................................................................................49 Connecting to wireless networks ........................................................................51 Wi-Fi .....................................................................................................................................51 Bluetooth ...........................................................................................................................52 Airplane mode .................................................................................................................53 Turning your Notebook PC off ..............................................................................54 Putting your Notebook PC to sleep ....................................................................55 Chapter 4: Power-On Self-Test (POST) The Power-On Self-Test (POST) .............................................................................58 Using POST to access BIOS and Troubleshoot......................................................58 BIOS ................................................................................................................................58 Accessing BIOS ................................................................................................................58 BIOS Settings ....................................................................................................................59 Recovering your system ..........................................................................................69 Performing a recovery option ....................................................................................70 4 Notebook PC E-Manual Tips and FAQs Useful tips for your Notebook PC ........................................................................74 Hardware FAQs ...........................................................................................................75 Software FAQs .............................................................................................................78 Appendices DVD-ROM Drive Information ......................................................................................82 Blu-ray ROM Drive Information .................................................................................84 Internal Modem Compliancy .....................................................................................84 Overview ............................................................................................................................85 Network Compatibility Declaration .........................................................................85 Non-Voice Equipment ...................................................................................................85 Declaration of Conformity (R&TTE directive 1999/5/EC) ..................................87 Federal Communications Commission Interference Statement ...................88 FCC Radio Frequency (RF) Exposure Caution Statement .................................89 RF Exposure Information (SAR) ..................................................................................89 CE Marking ........................................................................................................................90 RF Exposure information (SAR) - CE .........................................................................90 IC Radiation Exposure Statement for Canada ......................................................91 Dclaration dIndustrie Canada relative lexposition aux ondes radio ....92 Radio Frequency (RF) Exposure Information ........................................................93 Informations concernant lexposition aux frquences radio (RF) .................93 Wireless Operation Channel for Different Domains ...........................................94 France Restricted Wireless Frequency Bands .......................................................94 UL Safety Notices ............................................................................................................96 Power Safety Requirement ..........................................................................................97 TV Notices .........................................................................................................................97 5 Notebook PC E-Manual REACH .................................................................................................................................97 Macrovision Corporation Product Notice ..............................................................97 Prevention of Hearing Loss .........................................................................................97 Nordic Lithium Cautions (for lithium-ion batteries) ...........................................98 Optical Drive Safety Information ..............................................................................99 CTR 21 Approval (for Notebook PC with built-in Modem) ..............................100 ENERGY STAR complied product ..............................................................................102 Global Environmental Regulation Compliance and Declaration ..................102 ASUS Recycling/Takeback Services ..........................................................................103 Rechargeable Battery Recycling Service in North America.............................103 Regional notice for California .....................................................................................103 Regional notice for Singapore ...................................................................................103 Regional notice for India ..............................................................................................104 Notices for removable batteries ................................................................................104 Avis concernant les batteries remplaables..........................................................104 6 Notebook PC E-Manual About this manual This manual provides information about the hardware and software features of your Notebook PC, organized through the following chapters:
Chapter 1: Hardware Setup This chapter details the hardware components of your Notebook PC. Chapter 2: Using your Notebook PC This chapter shows you how to use the different parts of your Notebook PC. Chapter 3: Working with Windows 10 This chapter provides an overview of using Windows 10 in your Notebook PC. Chapter 4: Power-On Self-Test (POST) This chapter shows you how to use POST to change the settings of your Notebook PC. Tips and FAQs This section presents some recommended tips, hardware FAQs, and software FAQs you can refer to for maintaining and fixing common issues with your Notebook PC. Appendices This section includes notices and safety statements for your Notebook PC. 7 Notebook PC E-Manual Conventions used in this manual To highlight key information in this manual, some text are presented as follows:
IMPORTANT! This message contains vital information that must be followed to complete a task. NOTE: This message contains additional information and tips that can help complete tasks. WARNING! This message contains important information that must be followed to keep you safe while performing tasks and prevent damage to your Notebook PC's data and components. Icons The icons below indicate the devices you can use for completing a series of tasks or procedures on your Notebook PC.
= Use the touch screen panel.
= Use the touchpad.
= Use the keyboard. Typography Bold
= This indicates a menu or an item that must be selected. Italic
= This indicates sections that you can refer to in this manual. 8 Notebook PC E-Manual Safety precautions Using your Notebook PC This Notebook PC should only be used in environments with ambient temperatures between 5C (41F) and 35C (95F). Refer to the rating label on the bottom of your Notebook PC and ensure that your power adapter complies with this rating. Do not leave your Notebook PC on your lap or near any part of your body to prevent discomfort or injury from heat exposure. Do not use damaged power cords, accessories, and other peripherals with your Notebook PC. While powered on, ensure that you do not carry or cover your Notebook PC with any materials that can reduce air circulation. Do not place your Notebook PC on uneven or unstable work surfaces. You can send your Notebook PC through x-ray machines (used on items placed on conveyor belts), but do not expose them to magnetic detectors and wands. Contact your airline provider to learn about related in-flight services that can be used and restrictions that must be followed when using your Notebook PC in-flight. 9 Notebook PC E-Manual Caring for your Notebook PC Disconnect the AC power and remove the battery pack (if applicable) before cleaning your Notebook PC. Use a clean cellulose sponge or chamois cloth dampened with a solution of nonabrasive detergent and a few drops of warm water. Remove any extra moisture from your Notebook PC using a dry cloth. Do not use strong solvents such as thinners, benzene, or other chemicals on or near your Notebook PC. Do not place objects on top of your Notebook PC. Do not expose your Notebook PC to strong magnetic or electrical fields. Do not use or expose your Notebook PC near liquids, rain, or moisture. Do not expose your Notebook PC to dusty environments. Do not use your Notebook PC near gas leaks. 10 Notebook PC E-Manual Proper disposal Do not throw your Notebook PC in municipal waste. This product has been designed to enable proper reuse of parts and recycling. The symbol of the crossed out wheeled bin indicates that the product
(electrical, electronic equipment and mercury-
containing button cell battery) should not be placed in municipal waste. Check local regulations for disposal of electronic products. Do not throw the battery in municipal waste. The symbol of the crossed out wheeled bin indicates that the battery should not be placed in municipal waste. 11 Notebook PC E-Manual 12 Notebook PC E-Manual Chapter 1:
Hardware Setup 13 Notebook PC E-Manual Getting to know your Notebook PC Top View NOTE: The keyboard's layout may vary per region or country. The Notebook view may also vary in appearance depending on the Notebook PC model. 14 Notebook PC E-Manual Camera The built-in camera allows you to take pictures or record videos using your Notebook PC. Camera indicator The camera indicator lights up when the built-in camera is in use. 360-adjustable touch screen panel Your Notebook PCs touch screen panel can be adjusted all the way into a 360 angle. This feature allows you to quickly turn your device from a Notebook PC into a touch-enabled tablet PC. This high-definition touch screen panel provides excellent viewing features for photos, videos, and other multimedia files on your Notebook PC. It also allows you to operate it using touch screen gestures. NOTE: For more details on how to turn your Notebook PC into a tablet device, refer to the Rotating the display panel section in this manual. Keyboard The keyboard provides full-sized QWERTY keys with a comfortable travel depth for typing. It also enables you to use the function keys, allows quick access to Windows, and controls other multimedia functions. NOTE: The keyboard layout differs by model or territory. 15 Notebook PC E-Manual Touchpad The touchpad allows the use of multi-gestures to navigate onscreen, providing an intuitive user experience. It also simulates the functions of a regular mouse. NOTE: For more details, refer to the Using the touchpad section in this manual. 16 Notebook PC E-Manual Bottom NOTE: The bottom side may vary in appearance depending on model. WARNING! The bottom of the Notebook PC can get warm to hot while in use or while charging the battery pack. When working on your Notebook PC, do not place it on surfaces that can block the vents. IMPORTANT! Battery time varies by usage and by the specifications for this Notebook PC. The battery pack cannot be disassembled. 17 Notebook PC E-Manual Air vents The air vents allow cool air to enter and warm air to exit the Notebook PC. WARNING! Ensure that paper, books, clothing, cables, or other objects do not block any of the air vents or else overheating may occur. Audio speakers The built-in audio speakers allow you to hear audio straight from your Notebook PC. Audio features are software-controlled. 18 Notebook PC E-Manual Right Side NOTE: Use the USB port on this side to connect external devices with your Notebook PC to maintain the quality of your wireless connection. Headphone/Headset/Microphone jack This port allows you to connect amplified speakers or headphones. You can also use this port to connect your headset or an external microphone. USB Type-C port The USB (Universal Serial Bus) Type-C port provides a transfer rate of up to 5 Gbit/s and is backward compatible to USB 2.0. NOTE: Transfer rate of this port may vary per model. USB 3.0 port The USB 3.0 (Universal Serial Bus 3.0) port provides a transfer rate of up to 5 Gbit/s and is backward compatible to USB 2.0. 19 Notebook PC E-Manual HDMI port This port is for the HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) connector and is HDCP compliant for HD DVD, Blu-ray, and other protected content playback. Power (DC) input port Insert the bundled power adapter into this port to charge the battery pack and supply power to your Notebook PC. WARNING! The adapter may become warm to hot while in use. Do not cover the adapter and keep it away from your body while it is connected to a power source. IMPORTANT! Use only the bundled power adapter to charge the battery pack and supply power to your Notebook PC. 20 Notebook PC E-Manual Left Side USB 2.0 port The USB (Universal Serial Bus) port is compatible with USB 2.0 or USB 1.1 devices such as keyboards, pointing devices, flash disk drives, external HDDs, speakers, cameras and printers. Memory card reader This built-in memory card reader supports SD and SDHC card formats. Status indicators The status indicators help identify the current hardware status of your Notebook PC. Drive activity indicator This indicator lights up when your Notebook PC is accessing the internal storage drives. 21 Notebook PC E-Manual Two-color battery charge indicator The two-color LED provides a visual indication of the batterys charge status. Refer to the following table for details:
Color Solid Green Solid Orange Blinking Orange Lights off Status The Notebook PC is plugged to a power source and the battery power is between 95% and 100%. The Notebook PC is plugged to a power source, charging its battery, and the battery power is less than 95%. The Notebook PC is running on battery mode and the battery power is less than 10%. The Notebook PC is running on battery mode and the battery power is between 10% to 100%. Volume button This button turns the volume up or down on your Notebook PC. Power button Press the power button to turn your Notebook PC on or off. You can also use the power button to put your Notebook PC to sleep or hibernate mode and wake it up from sleep or hibernate mode. In the event that your Notebook PC becomes unresponsive, press and hold the power button for at least four (4) seconds until your Notebook PC shuts down. 22 Notebook PC E-Manual Chapter 2:
Using your Notebook PC 23 Notebook PC E-Manual Getting started Charge your Notebook PC A. B. Plug the AC power cord into a 100V~240V power source. Connect the DC power connector into your Notebook PCs power
(DC) input port. Charge the Notebook PC for 3 hours before using it in battery mode for the first time. NOTE: The power adapter may vary in appearance, depending on models and your region. IMPORTANT!
Power adapter information:
Input voltage: 100-240Vac Input frequency: 50-60Hz Rating output current: 2.37A (45W) / 3.42A (65W)
(on selected models) Rating output voltage: 19V 24 Notebook PC E-Manual IMPORTANT!
Locate the input/output rating label on your Notebook PC and ensure that it matches the input/output rating information on your power adapter. Some Notebook PC models may have multiple rating output currents based on the available SKU. Ensure that your Notebook PC is connected to the power adapter before turning it on for the first time. We strongly recommend that you use a grounded wall socket while using your Notebook PC on power adapter mode. The socket outlet must be easily accessible and near your Notebook PC. To disconnect your Notebook PC from its main power supply, unplug your Notebook PC from the power socket. WARNING!
Read the following precautions for your Notebook PCs battery:
Only ASUS-authorized technicians should remove the battery inside the device (for non-removable battery only). The battery used in this device may present a risk of fire or chemical burn if removed or disassembled. Follow the warning labels for your personal safety. Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Do not dispose of in fire. Never attempt to short-circuit your Notebook PCs battery. Never attempt to disassemble and reassemble the battery
(for non-removable battery only). Discontinue usage if leakage is found. The battery and its components must be recycled or disposed of properly. Keep the battery and other small components away from children. 25 Notebook PC E-Manual Lift to open the display panel Press the power button 26 Notebook PC E-Manual Gestures for the touch screen panel and touchpad Gestures allow you to launch programs and access the settings of your Notebook PC. Refer to the following illustrations when using hand gestures on your touch screen panel and touchpad. NOTE:
The following screenshots are for reference only. The touch screen panels appearance may vary depending on model. The touch screen panel is available on selected models. Using touch screen panel gestures The gestures allow you to launch programs and access the settings of your Notebook PC. The functions can be activated by using the hand gestures on your Notebook PCs touch screen panel. Left edge swipe Right edge swipe Swipe from the left edge of the screen to launch Task view. Swipe from the right edge of the screen to launch Action Center. 27 Notebook PC E-Manual Tap/Double-tap Press and hold Tap an app to select it. Double-tap an app to launch it. Press and hold to open the right-
click menu. Zoom in Zoom out Spread apart your two fingers on the touch screen panel. Bring together your two fingers on the touch screen panel. 28 Notebook PC E-Manual Finger slide Drag Slide your finger to scroll up and down and slide your finger to pan the screen left or right. Drag to create a selection box around multiple items. Drag and drop an item to move it to a new location. 29 Notebook PC E-Manual Using the touchpad Moving the pointer You can tap anywhere on the touchpad to activate its pointer, then slide your finger on the touchpad to move the pointer onscreen. Slide horizontally Slide vertically Slide diagonally 30 Notebook PC E-Manual One-finger gestures Tap/Double-tap Tap an app to select it. Double-tap an app to launch it. Drag and drop Double-tap an item, then slide the same finger without lifting it off the touchpad. To drop the item to its new location, lift your finger from the touchpad. 31 Notebook PC E-Manual Left-click Right-click Click an app to select it. Double-click an app to launch it. Click this button to open the right-
click menu. NOTE: The areas inside the dotted line represent the locations of the left mouse button and the right mouse button on the touchpad. Two-finger gestures Two-finger scroll (up/down) Two-finger scroll (left/right) Slide two fingers to scroll up or down. Slide two fingers to scroll left or right. 32 Notebook PC E-Manual Zoom out Zoom in Bring together your two fingers on the touchpad. Spread apart your two fingers on the touchpad. Drag and drop Select an item then press and hold the left button. Using your other finger, slide on the touchpad to drag the item, lift your finger off the button to drop the item. 33 Notebook PC E-Manual Using the keyboard Function keys The function keys on your Notebook PCs keyboard can trigger the following commands:
Puts the Notebook PC into Sleep mode Turns Airplane mode on or off NOTE: When enabled, the Airplane mode disables all wireless connectivity. Decreases display brightness Increases display brightness Turns the display panel on or off Toggles the display mode NOTE: Ensure that the second display is connected to your Notebook PC. 34 Notebook PC E-Manual Enables or disables the touchpad Turns the speaker on or off Turns the speaker volume down Turns the speaker volume up Windows 10 keys There are two special Windows keys on your Notebook PCs keyboard used as below:
Launches the Start menu Displays the drop-down menu 35 Notebook PC E-Manual Rotating the display panel Your Notebook PCs display panel is adjustable up to 360 degrees. You may adjust the display panel as shown below. 360 degrees adjustable Notebook PC mode Stand mode Tent mode Tablet mode NOTE: Rotating the screen to Stand, Tent and Tablet mode will disable the keyboard and touchpad. 36 Notebook PC E-Manual Chapter 3:
Working with Windows 10 37 Notebook PC E-Manual Starting for the first time When you start your Notebook PC for the first time, a series of screens appear to guide you in configuring your Windows 10 operating system. To start your Notebook PC for the first time:
1. 2. 3. 4. Press the power button on your Notebook PC. Wait for a few minutes until the setup screen appears. From the setup screen, pick your region and a language to use on your Notebook PC. Carefully read the License Terms. Select I accept. Follow the onscreen instructions to configure the following basic items:
Personalize Get online Settings Your account 5. After configuring the basic items, Windows 10 proceeds to install your apps and preferred settings. Ensure that your Notebook PC is kept powered on during the setup process. 6. Once the setup process is complete, the Desktop appears. NOTE: The screenshots in this chapter are for reference only. 38 Notebook PC E-Manual Start menu The Start menu is the main gateway to your Notebook PCs programs, Windows apps, folders, and settings. Change account settings, lock, or sign out from your account Launch an app from the Start screen Launch Taskview Launch an app from the taskbar Launch Search Launch the Start menu Launch All apps Shut down, restart, or put your Notebook PC to sleep Launch Settings Launch File Explorer You can use the Start menu to do these common activities:
Start programs or Windows apps Open commonly used programs or Windows apps Adjust Notebook PC settings Get help with the Windows operating system Turn off your Notebook PC Log off from Windows or switch to a different user account 39 Notebook PC E-Manual Launching the Start menu Tap the Start button your desktop. in the lower-left corner of Position your mouse pointer over the Start button in the lower-left corner of your desktop then click it. Press the Windows logo key on your keyboard. Opening programs from the Start menu One of the most common uses of the Start menu is opening programs installed on your Notebook PC. Tap the program to launch it. Position your mouse pointer over the program then click to launch it. Use the arrow keys to browse through the programs. Press to launch it. NOTE: Select All apps at the bottom of the left pane to display a full list of programs and folders on your Notebook PC in alphabetical order. 40 Notebook PC E-Manual Windows apps These are apps pinned on the right pane of the Start menu and displayed in tiled-format for easy access. NOTE: Some Windows apps require signing in to your Microsoft account before they are fully launched. 41 Notebook PC E-Manual Working with Windows apps Use your Notebook PCs touch screen, touchpad, or keyboard to launch, customize, and close apps. Launching Windows apps from the Start menu Tap the app to launch it. Position your mouse pointer over the app then click to launch it. Use the arrow keys to browse through the apps. Press to launch an app. Customizing Windows apps You can move, resize, unpin, or pin apps to the taskbar from the Start menu using the following steps:
Moving apps Press and hold the app, then drag and drop it to a new location. Position your mouse pointer over the app, then drag and drop the app to a new location. 42 Notebook PC E-Manual Resizing apps Press and hold the app, then tap tile size. and select an app Position your mouse pointer over the app and right-click it, then click Resize and select an app tile size. Use the arrow keys to navigate to the app. Press then select Resize and select an app tile size.
, Unpinning apps Press and hold the app, then tap the icon. Position your mouse pointer over the app and right-click it, then click Unpin from Start. Use the arrow keys to navigate to the app. Press then select Unpin from Start.
, 43 Notebook PC E-Manual Pinning apps to the taskbar Press and hold the app, then tap Pin to taskbar. Position your mouse pointer over the app and right-click it, then click Pin to taskbar. Use the arrow keys to navigate to the app. Press then select Pin to taskbar.
, Pinning more apps to the Start menu From All apps, press and hold the app you want to add to the Start menu, then tap Pin to Start. From All apps, position your mouse pointer over the app you want to add to the Start menu and right-click it, then click Pin to Start. From All apps, press add to the Start menu, then select Pin to Start. on the app that you want to 44 Notebook PC E-Manual Task view Quickly switch between opened apps and programs using the task view feature, you can also use task view to switch between desktops. Launching task view Tap the edge of the screen. icon on the taskbar or swipe form the left Position your mouse pointer over the taskbar and click it. icon on the Press on your keyboard. 45 Notebook PC E-Manual Snap feature The Snap feature displays apps side-by-side, allowing you to work or switch between apps. Snap hotspots You can drag and drop apps to these hotspots to snap them into place. 46 Notebook PC E-Manual Using Snap or 1. 2. 3. 1. 2. 3. Launch the app you wish to snap. Drag the title bar of your app and drop the app to the edge of the screen to snap. Launch another app and repeat the above steps to snap another app. Launch the app you wish to snap. Press and hold the keys to snap the app. key, then use the arrow Launch another app and repeat the above steps to snap another app. 47 Notebook PC E-Manual Action Center Action Center consolidates notifications from apps and presents a single place where you can interact with them. It also has a really useful Quick Actions section at the bottom. Launching Action Center Click the edge of the screen. icon on the taskbar or swipe from the right Position your mouse pointer over the taskbar and click it. icon on the Press on your keyboard. 48 Notebook PC E-Manual Other keyboard shortcuts Using the keyboard, you can also use the following shortcuts to help you launch applications and navigate Windows 10.
\
Launches Start menu Launches Action Center Launches the desktop Launches the File Explorer Opens the Share panel Launches Settings Launches Connect panel Activates the Lock screen Minimizes all currently active windows 49 Notebook PC E-Manual Launches Search Launches Project panel Opens the Run window Opens Ease of Access Center Opens the context menu of the Start button Launches the magnifier icon and zooms in your screen Zooms out your screen Opens Narrator Settings 50 Notebook PC E-Manual Connecting to wireless networks Wi-Fi Access emails, surf the Internet, and share applications via social networking sites using your Notebook PCs Wi-Fi connection. IMPORTANT! Airplane mode disables this feature. Ensure that Airplane mode is turned off before enabling the Wi-Fi connection of your Notebook PC. Connecting Wi-Fi Connect your Notebook PC to a Wi-Fi network by using the following steps:
or 1. 2. 3. 4. Select the icon from the taskbar. Select the icon to enable Wi-Fi. Select an access point from the list of available Wi-Fi connections. Select Connect to start the network connection. NOTE: You may be prompted to enter a security key to activate the Wi-Fi connection. 51 Notebook PC E-Manual Bluetooth Use Bluetooth to facilitate wireless data transfers with other Bluetooth-
enabled devices. IMPORTANT! Airplane mode disables this feature. Ensure that Airplane mode is turned off before enabling the Bluetooth connection of your Notebook PC. Pairing with other Bluetooth-enabled devices You need to pair your Notebook PC with other Bluetooth-enabled devices to enable data transfers. Connect your devices by using the following steps:
1. 2. 3. or Launch Settings from the Start menu. Select Devices, then select Bluetooth to search for Bluetooth-enabled devices. Select a device from the list. Compare the passcode on your Notebook PC with the passcode sent to your chosen device. If they are the same, select Yes to successfully pair your Notebook PC with the device. NOTE: For some Bluetooth-enabled devices, you may be prompted to key in the passcode of your Notebook PC. 52 Notebook PC E-Manual Airplane mode Airplane mode disables wireless communication, allowing you to use your Notebook PC safely while in-flight. NOTE: Contact your airline provider to learn about related in-flight services that can be used and restrictions that must be followed when using your Notebook PC in-flight. Turning Airplane mode on 1. 2. or Launch Action Center from the taskbar. Select the icon to enable Airplane mode. Press
. Turning Airplane mode off 1. 2. or Launch Action Center from the taskbar. Select the icon to disable Airplane mode. Press
. 53 Notebook PC E-Manual Turning your Notebook PC off You can turn off your Notebook PC by doing either of the following procedures:
or Launch the Start menu, then select Shut down to do a normal shutdown.
>
From the log-in screen, select
> Shut down. to launch Shut down Press Windows. Select Shut down from the drop-down list then select OK. If your Notebook PC is unresponsive, press and hold the power button for at least four (4) seconds until your Notebook PC turns off. 54 Notebook PC E-Manual Putting your Notebook PC to sleep To put your Notebook PC to Sleep mode:
or Launch the Start menu, then select Sleep to put your Notebook PC to sleep.
>
From the log-in screen, select
> Sleep. Press Select Sleep from the drop-down list then select OK. to launch Shut down Windows. NOTE: You can also put your Notebook PC to Sleep mode by pressing the power button once. 55 Notebook PC E-Manual 56 Notebook PC E-Manual Chapter 4:
Power-On Self-Test (POST) 57 Notebook PC E-Manual The Power-On Self-Test (POST) The POST (Power-On Self-Test) is a series of software-controlled diagnostic tests that run when you turn on or restart your Notebook PC. The software that controls the POST is installed as a permanent part of the Notebook PCs architecture. Using POST to access BIOS and Troubleshoot During POST, you can access the BIOS settings or run troubleshooting options using the function keys of your Notebook PC. You may refer to the following information for more details. BIOS The BIOS (Basic Input and Output System) stores system hardware settings that are needed for system startup in the Notebook PC. The default BIOS settings apply to most conditions of your Notebook PC. Do not change the default BIOS settings except in the following circumstances:
An error message appears onscreen during system bootup and requests you to run the BIOS Setup. You have installed a new system component that requires further BIOS settings or updates. WARNING! Using inappropriate BIOS settings may result to system instability or boot failure. We strongly recommend that you change the BIOS settings only with the help of a trained service personnel. Accessing BIOS Restart your Notebook PC then press during POST. 58 Notebook PC E-Manual BIOS Settings NOTE: The BIOS screens in this section are for reference only. The actual screens may differ by model and territory. Boot This menu allows you to set your boot option priorities. You may refer to the following procedures when setting your boot priority. 1. On the Boot screen, select Boot Option #1. Aptio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. Main Advanced Boot Security Save & Exit Boot Configuration Fast Boot [Enabled]
Launch CSM [Disabled]
Driver Option Priorities Boot Option Priorities Boot Option #1 [Windows Boot Manager]
Add New Boot Option Delete Boot Option Sets the system boot order
: Select Screen
: Select Item Enter: Select
+/ : Change Opt. F1 : General Help F9 : Optimized Defaults F10 : Save & Exit ESC : Exit Version 2.15.1226. Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. 59 Notebook PC E-Manual 2. Press and select a device as the Boot Option #1. Main Advanced Boot Security Save & Exit Aptio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. Sets the system boot order Boot Configuration Fast Boot [Enabled]
Launch CSM [Disabled]
Driver Option Priorities Boot Option #1 Boot Option Priorities Windows Boot Manager Boot Option #1 [Windows Boot Manager]
Disabled Add New Boot Option Delete Boot Option
: Select Screen
: Select Item Enter: Select
+/ : Change Opt. F1 : General Help F9 : Optimized Defaults F10 : Save & Exit ESC : Exit Version 2.15.1226. Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. 60 Notebook PC E-Manual Security This menu allows you to set up the administrator and user password of your Notebook PC. It also allows you to control the access to your Notebook PCs hard disk drive, input/output (I/O) interface, and USB interface. NOTE:
If you install a User Password, you will be prompted to input this before entering your Notebook PC's operating system. If you install an Administrator Password, you will be prompted to input this before entering BIOS. Aptio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. Main Advanced Boot Security Save & Exit Password Description If ONLY the Administrators password is set, then this only limits access to Setup and is only asked for when entering Setup. If ONLY the users password is set, then this is a power on password and must be entered to boot or enter Setup. In Setup, the User will have Administrator rights. Administrator Password Status NOT INSTALLED User Password Status NOT INSTALLED Administrator Password User Password HDD Password Status : NOT INSTALLED Set Master Password Set User Password I/O Interface Security System Mode state User Secure Boot state Enabled Secure Boot Control [Enabled]
Key Management Set Administrator Password. The password length must be in the following range:
Minimum length 3 Maximum length 20
: Select Screen
: Select Item Enter: Select
+/ : Change Opt. F1 : General Help F9 : Optimized Defaults F10 : Save & Exit ESC : Exit Version 2.15.1226. Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. 61 Notebook PC E-Manual To set the password:
1. 2. 3. On the Security screen, select Administrator Password or User Password. Type in a password then press
. Re-type to confirm the password then press
. To clear the password:
On the Security screen, select Administrator Password or User Password. Type in the current password then press
. Leave the Create New Password field blank then press
. Select Yes in the confirmation box then press
. 1. 2. 3. 4. 62 Notebook PC E-Manual I/O Interface Security In the Security menu, you can access I/O Interface Security to lock or unlock some interface functions of your Notebook PC. Aptio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. Security I/O Interface Security LAN Network Interface [UnLock]
Wireless Network Interface [UnLock]
HD AUDIO Interface [UnLock]
USB Interface Security LAN Network Interface Lock UnLock If Locked, LAN controller will be disabled.
: Select Screen
: Select Item Enter: Select
+/ : Change Opt. F1 : General Help F9 : Optimized Defaults F10 : Save & Exit ESC : Exit Version 2.15.1226. Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. To lock an interface:
1. On the Security screen, select I/O Interface Security. 2. Select an interface you would like to lock then press
. 3. Select Lock. 63 Notebook PC E-Manual USB Interface Security Through the I/O Interface Security menu, you can also access USB Interface Security to lock or unlock ports and devices. Aptio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. Security USB Interface Security USB Interface [UnLock]
External Ports [UnLock]
CMOS Camera [UnLock]
Card Reader [UnLock]
USB Interface Lock UnLock If Locked, all USB device will be disabled
: Select Screen
: Select Item Enter: Select
+/ : Change Opt. F1 : General Help F9 : Optimized Defaults F10 : Save & Exit ESC : Exit Version 2.15.1226. Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. To lock the USB interface:
1. On the Security screen, select I/O Interface Security > USB Interface Security. 2. Select an interface that you would like to lock then select Lock. NOTE: Setting the USB Interface to Lock also locks and hides the External Ports and other devices included under USB Interface Security. 64 Notebook PC E-Manual Set Master Password In the Security menu, you can use Set Master Password to set up a password-enabled access to your hard disk drive. Aptio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. Main Advanced Boot Security Save & Exit Aptio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2011 American Megatrends, Inc. Password Description Set HDD Master Password. If ONLY the Administrators password is set,then this only limits access to Setup
***Advisable to and is only asked for when entering Setup. Power Cycle System If ONLY the users password is set, then after Setting Hard this is a power on password and must be Disk Passwords***
entered to boot or enter Setup. In Setup, the User will have Administrator rights. Administrator Password Status NOT INSTALLED User Password Status NOT INSTALLED Administrator Password User Password HDD Password Status : NOT INSTALLED Set Master Password Set User Password I/O Interface Security
: Select Screen
: Select Item Enter: Select
+/ : Change Opt. F1 : General Help F9 : Optimized Defaults F10 : Save & Exit ESC : Exit Version 2.15.1226. Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. To set the HDD password:
1. On the Security screen, select Set Master Password. 2. Type in a password then press
. 3. 4. Re-type to confirm the password then press
. Select Set User Password then repeat the previous steps to set up the user password. 65 Notebook PC E-Manual Save & Exit To keep your configuration settings, select Save Changes and Exit before exiting the BIOS. Aptio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. Main Advanced Boot Security Save & Exit Save Changes and Exit Discard Changes and Exit Save Options Save Changes Discard Changes Restore Defaults Boot Override Windows Boot Manager Launch EFI Shell from filesystem device Exit system setup after saving the changes.
: Select Screen
: Select Item Enter: Select
+/ : Change Opt. F1 : General Help F9 : Optimized Defaults F10 : Save & Exit ESC : Exit Version 2.15.1226. Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. 66 Notebook PC E-Manual To update the BIOS:
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Verify the Notebook PCs exact model then download the latest BIOS file for your model from the ASUS website. Save a copy of the downloaded BIOS file to a flash disk drive. Connect your flash disk drive to your Notebook PC. Restart your Notebook PC then press during POST. From the BIOS menu, select Advanced > Start Easy Flash, then press
. Aptio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. Main Advanced Boot Security Save & Exit Aptio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2011 American Megatrends, Inc. Start Easy Flash Internal Pointing Device [Enabled]
Wake on Lid Open [Enabled]
Power Off Energy Saving [Enabled]
SATA Configuration Graphics Configuration Intel (R) Anti-Theft Technology Corporation USB Configuration Network Stack Press Enter to run the utility to select and update BIOS.
: Select Screen
: Select Item Enter: Select
+/ : Change Opt. F1 : General Help F9 : Optimized Defaults F10 : Save & Exit ESC : Exit Version 2.15.1226. Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. 67 Notebook PC E-Manual 6. Locate your downloaded BIOS file in the flash disk drive then press
. ASUSTek Easy Flash Utility FLASH TYPE: Generic Flash Type New BIOS Platform: Unknown Version: Unknown Build Date: Unknown Build Time: Unknown Current BIOS Platform: TP301 Version: 101 Build Date: Apr 26 2015 Build Time: 11:51:05 FSO FS1 FS2 FS3 FS4 0 EFI
<DIR>
[]: Switch []: Choose [q]: Exit [Enter]: Enter/Execute 7. After the BIOS update process, select Exit > Restore Defaults to restore the system to its default settings. 68 Notebook PC E-Manual Recovering your system Using recovery options on your Notebook PC allows you to restore the system to its original state or simply refresh its settings to help improve performance. IMPORTANT!
Backup all your data files before doing any recovery option on your Notebook PC. Note down important customized settings such as network settings, user names, and passwords to avoid data loss. Ensure that your Notebook PC is plugged in to a power source before resetting your system. Windows 10 allows you to do any of the following recovery options:
Keep my files - This option allows you refresh your Notebook PC without affecting personal files (photos, music, videos, documents). Using this option, you can restore your Notebook PC to its default settings and delete other installed apps. Remove everything - This option resets your Notebook PC to its factory settings. You must backup your data before doing this option. 69 Notebook PC E-Manual Go back to an earlier build - This option allows you to go back to an earlier build. Use this option if this build is not working for you. Advanced startup - Using this option allows you to perform other advanced recovery options on your Notebook PC such as:
-
-
Using a USB drive, network connection or Windows recovery DVD to startup your Notebook PC. Using Troubleshoot to enable any of these advanced recovery options: System Restore, System Image Recovery, Startup Repair, Command Prompt, UEFI Firmware Settings, and Startup Settings. Performing a recovery option Refer to the following steps if you want to access and use any of the available recovery options for your Notebook PC. 1. Launch Settings and select Update and security. 70 Notebook PC E-Manual 2. Under the Update and security option, select Recovery then select the recovery option you would like to perform. 71 Notebook PC E-Manual 72 Notebook PC E-Manual Tips and FAQs 73 Notebook PC E-Manual Useful tips for your Notebook PC To help you maximize the use of your Notebook PC, maintain its system performance, and ensure all your data are kept secured, here are some useful tips that you can follow:
Update Windows periodically to ensure that your applications have the latest security settings. Use an anti-virus software to protect your data and keep this updated too. Unless absolutely necessary, refrain from using force shutdown to turn off your Notebook PC. Always backup your data and make it a point to create a backup data in an external storage drive. Refrain from using the Notebook PC at extremely high temperatures. If you are not going to use your Notebook PC for a long period of time (at least a month), we recommend that you take out the battery if the battery is removable. Disconnect all external devices and ensure you have the following items prior to resetting your Notebook PC:
-
-
-
-
Product key for your operating systems and other installed applications Backup data Log in ID and password Internet connection information 74 Notebook PC E-Manual Hardware FAQs 1. A black dot, or sometimes a colored dot, appears onscreen when I turn on the Notebook PC. What should I do?
Although these dots normally appear onscreen, they will not affect your system. If the incident continues and subsequently affects system performance, consult an authorized ASUS service center. 2. My display panel has an uneven color and brightness. How can I fix this?
The color and brightness of your display panel may be affected by the angle and current position of your Notebook PC. The brightness and color tone of your Notebook PC may also vary per model. You may use the function keys or the display settings in your operating system to adjust the appearance of your display panel. 3. How can I maximize my Notebook PC s battery life?
You can try doing any of the following suggestions:
Use the function keys to adjust the display brightness. If you are not using any Wi-Fi connection, switch your system into Airplane mode. Disconnect unused USB devices. Close unused applications, especially those that take up too much system memory. 75 Notebook PC E-Manual 4. My battery charge indicator does not light up. Whats wrong?
Check whether the power adapter or battery pack is attached correctly. You may also disconnect the power adapter or battery pack, wait for a minute, then reconnect them again to the power outlet and Notebook PC. If the problem still exists, contact your local ASUS service center for assistance. 5. Why is my touchpad not working?
Press to enable your touchpad. 6. When I play audio and video files, why cant I hear any sound from my Notebook PCs audio speakers?
You can try doing any of the following suggestions:
Press to turn up the speaker volume. Check if your speakers were set to mute. Check if a headphone jack is connected to your Notebook PC and remove it. 7. What should I do if my Notebook PCs power adapter gets lost or my battery stops working?
Contact your local ASUS service center for assistance. 76 Notebook PC E-Manual 8. My Notebook PC cannot do keystrokes correctly because my cursor keeps on moving. What should I do?
Make sure that nothing accidentally touches or presses on your touchpad while you type on the keyboard. You can also disable your touchpad by pressing
. 9. Instead of showing letters, pressing the U, I, and O keys on my keyboard displays numbers. How can I change this?
Press the key or
(on selected models) on your Notebook PC to turn off this feature and use the said keys for inputting letters. 77 Notebook PC E-Manual Software FAQs 1. When I turn on my Notebook PC, the power indicator lights up but nothing appears on my screen. What can I do to fix this?
You can try doing any of the following suggestions:
Force shutdown your Notebook PC by pressing the power button for at least four (4) seconds. Check if the power adapter and battery pack are inserted correctly then turn on your Notebook PC. If the problem still exists, contact your local ASUS service center for assistance. 2. What should I do when my screen displays this message:
Remove disks or other media. Press any key to restart.?
You can try doing any of the following suggestions:
Remove all connected USB devices then restart your Notebook PC. Remove any optical discs that are left inside the optical drive then restart. If the problem still exists, your Notebook PC might have a memory storage problem. Contact your local ASUS service center for assistance. 3. My Notebook PC boots slower than usual and my operating system lags. How can I fix this?
Delete the applications you recently installed or were not included with your operating system package then restart your system. 78 Notebook PC E-Manual 4. My Notebook PC does not boot up. How can I fix this?
You can try doing any of the following suggestions:
Remove all connected devices to your Notebook PC then restart your system. If the problem still exists, contact your local ASUS service center for assistance. 5. Why cant my Notebook PC wake up from sleep mode?
You need to press the power button to resume your last working state. Your system might have completely used up its battery power. Connect the power adapter to your Notebook PC and connect to a power outlet then press the power button. 79 Notebook PC E-Manual 80 Notebook PC E-Manual Appendices 81 Notebook PC E-Manual DVD-ROM Drive Information The DVD-ROM drive allows you to view and create your own CDs and DVDs. You can purchase an optional DVD viewer software to view DVD titles. NOTE: The DVD-ROM Drive is available on selected models. Regional Playback Information Playback of DVD movie titles involves decoding MPEG2 video, digital AC3 audio and decryption of CSS protected content. CSS (sometimes called copy guard) is the name given to the content protection scheme adopted by the motion picture industry to satisfy a need to protect against unlawful content duplication. Although the design rules imposed on CSS licensors are many, one rule that is most relevant is playback restrictions on regionalized content. In order to facilitate geographically staggered movie releases, DVD video titles are released for specific geographic regions as defined in Region Definitions below. Copyright laws require that all DVD movies be limited to a particular region (usually coded to the region at which it is sold). While DVD movie content may be released for multiple regions, CSS design rules require that any system capable of playing CSS encrypted content must only be capable of playing one region. IMPORTANT! The region setting may be changed up to five times using the viewer software, then it can only play DVD movies for the last region setting. Changing the region code after that will require factory resetting which is not covered by warranty. If resetting is desired, shipping and resetting costs will be at the expense of the user. 82 Notebook PC E-Manual Region Definitions Region 1 Canada, US, US Territories Region 2 Czech, Egypt, Finland, France, Germany, Gulf States, Hungary, Iceland, Iran, Iraq, Ireland, Italy, Japan, Netherlands, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Saudi Arabia, Scotland, South Africa, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, Syria, Turkey, UK, Greece, Former Yugoslav Republics, Slovakia Region 3 Burma, Indonesia, South Korea, Malaysia, Philippines, Singapore, Taiwan, Thailand, Vietnam Region 4 Australia, Caribbean (Except US Territories), Central America, New Zealand, Pacific Islands, South America Region 5 CIS, India, Pakistan, Rest of Africa, Russia, North Korea Region 6 China 83 Notebook PC E-Manual Blu-ray ROM Drive Information The Blu-ray ROM Drive allows you to view HD (High-Definition) videos and other disc file formats such as DVDs and CDs. NOTE: The Blue-ray ROM Drive is available on selected models. Region Definitions Region A North, Central and South American countries, and their territories; Taiwan, Hong Kong, Macao, Japan, Korea (South and North), South East Asian countries and their territories. Region B European, African, and South West Asian countries and their territories; Australia and New Zealand. Region C Central, South Asian, Eastern European countries and their territories; China and Mongolia. NOTE: Refer to Blu-ray Disc website at www.blu-raydisc.com/en/Technical/FAQs/Blu-
rayDiscforVideo.aspx for more details. Internal Modem Compliancy The Notebook PC with internal modem model complies with JATE (Japan), FCC
(US, Canada, Korea, Taiwan), and CTR21. The internal modem has been approved in accordance with Council Decision 98/482/EC for pan-European single terminal connection to the public switched telephone network (PSTN). However due to differences between the individual PSTNs provided in different countries, the approval does not, of itself, give an unconditional assurance of successful operation on every PSTN network termination point. In the event of problems you should contact your equipment supplier in the first instance. 84 Notebook PC E-Manual Overview On 4th August 1998 the European Council Decision regarding the CTR 21 has been published in the Official Journal of the EC. The CTR 21 applies to all non voice terminal equipment with DTMF-dialling which is intended to be connected to the analogue PSTN (Public Switched Telephone Network). CTR 21 (Common Technical Regulation) for the attachment requirements for connection to the analogue public switched telephone networks of terminal equipment (excluding terminal equipment supporting the voice telephony justified case service) in which network addressing, if provided, is by means of dual tone multi-frequency signalling. Network Compatibility Declaration Statement to be made by the manufacturer to the Notified Body and the vendor:
This declaration will indicate the networks with which the equipment is designed to work and any notified networks with which the equipment may have inter-
working difficulties. Statement to be made by the manufacturer to the user: This declaration will indicate the networks with which the equipment is designed to work and any notified networks with which the equipment may have inter-working difficulties. The manufacturer shall also associate a statement to make it clear where network compatibility is dependent on physical and software switch settings. It will also advise the user to contact the vendor if it is desired to use the equipment on another network. Up to now the Notified Body of CETECOM issued several pan-European approvals using CTR 21. The results are Europes first modems which do not require regulatory approvals in each individual European country. Non-Voice Equipment Answering machines and loud-speaking telephones can be eligible as well as modems, fax machines, auto-dialers and alarm systems. Equipment in which the end-to-end quality of speech is controlled by regulations (e.g. handset telephones and in some countries also cordless telephones) is excluded. 85 Notebook PC E-Manual This table shows the countries currently under the CTR21 standard. Applied Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Still Pending No Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No Yes Yes Yes More Testing No No Not Applicable Yes No No No No Not Applicable No No Still Pending No No No Yes No Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable No No No Country Austria1 Belgium Czech Republic Denmark1 Finland France Germany Greece Hungary Iceland Ireland Italy Israel Lichtenstein Luxemburg The Netherlands1 Norway Poland Portugal Spain Sweden Switzerland United Kingdom 86 Notebook PC E-Manual This information was copied from CETECOM and is supplied without liability. For updates to this table, you may visit http://www.cetecom.de/technologies/ctr_21. html. 1 National requirements will apply only if the equipment may use pulse dialling
(manufacturers may state in the user guide that the equipment is only intended to support DTMF signalling, which would make any additional testing superfluous). In The Netherlands additional testing is required for series connection and caller ID facilities. Declaration of Conformity (R&TTE directive 1999/5/EC) The following items were completed and are considered relevant and sufficient:
Essential requirements as in [Article 3]
Protection requirements for health and safety as in [Article 3.1a]
Testing for electric safety according to [EN 60950]
Protection requirements for electromagnetic compatibility in [Article 3.1b]
Testing for electromagnetic compatibility in [EN 301 489-1] &
[EN 301 489-17]
Effective use of the radio spectrum as in [Article 3.2]
Radio test suites according to [EN 300 328-2]
87 Notebook PC E-Manual Federal Communications Commission Interference Statement This device complies with FCC Rules Part 15. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
This device may not cause harmful interference. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. WARNING! The use of a shielded-type power cord is required in order to meet FCC emission limits and to prevent interference to the nearby radio and television reception. It is essential that only the supplied power cord be used. Use only shielded cables to connect I/O devices to this equipment. You are cautioned that changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void your authority to operate the equipment.
(Reprinted from the Code of Federal Regulations #47, part 15.193, 1993. Washington DC: Office of the Federal Register, National Archives and Records Administration, U.S. Government Printing Office.) 88 Notebook PC E-Manual FCC Radio Frequency (RF) Exposure Caution Statement WARNING! Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate this equipment. The manufacture declares that this device is limited to Channels 1 through 11 in the 2.4GHz frequency by specified firmware controlled in the USA. This device operates within a 5.15-5.25 GHz frequency range and is restricted for indoor use only. Outdoor operation within 5150-5250 MHz is prohibited (on selected models with 802.11 AC WLAN card). RF Exposure Information (SAR) This device meets the governments requirements for exposure to radio waves. This device is designed and manufactured not to exceed the emission limits for exposure to radio ferquency (RF) energy set by the Federal Communications Commission of the U.S. Government. The exposure standard employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate, or SAR. The SAR limit set by the FCC is 1.6 W/kg. Tests for SAR are conducted using standard operating positions accepted by the FCC with the EUT transmitting at the specified power level in different channels. The FCC has granted an Equipment Authorization for this device with all reported SAR levels evaluated as in compliance with the FCC RF exposure guidelines. SAR information on this device is on file with the FCC and can be found under the Display Grant section of www.fcc.gov/eot/ea/fccid after searching on FCC ID:
MSQ7265NG, PPD-QCNFA222, TX2RTL8192EEBT 89 Notebook PC E-Manual CE Marking CE marking for devices without wireless LAN/Bluetooth The shipped version of this device complies with the requirements of the EEC directives 2004/108/EC Electromagnetic compatibility and 2006/95/EC Low voltage directive. CE marking for devices with wireless LAN/Bluetooth This equipment complies with the requirements of Directive 1999/5/EC of the European Parliament and Commission from 9 March, 1999 governing Radio and Telecommunications Equipment and mutual recognition of conformity. RF Exposure information (SAR) - CE This device meets the EU requirements (1999/519/EC) on the limitation of exposure of the general public to electromagnetic fields by way of health protection. The limits are part of extensive recommendations for the protection of the general public. These recommendations have been developed and checked by independent scientific organizations through regular and thorough evaluations of scientific studies. The unit of measurement for the European Councils recommended limit for mobile devices is the Specific Absorption Rate (SAR). It meets the requirements of the International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP). For next-to-body operation, this device has been tested and meets the ICNRP exposure guidelines and the European Standard EN 50566 and EN 62209-2. SAR is measured with the device directly contacted to the body while transmitting at the highest certified output power level in all frequency bands of the mobile device. 90 Notebook PC E-Manual IC Radiation Exposure Statement for Canada This equipment complies with IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. To maintain compliance with IC RF exposure compliance requirements, please avoid direct contact to the transmitting antenna during transmitting. End users must follow the specific operating instructions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
This device may not cause interference and This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. To prevent radio interference to the licensed service (i.e. co-channel Mobile Satellite systems) this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from windows to provide maximum shielding. Equipment (or its transmit antenna) that is installed outdoors is subject to licensing. This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). CAN ICES-3(B)/NMB-3(B) 91 Notebook PC E-Manual Dclaration dIndustrie Canada relative lexposition aux ondes radio Cet appareil est conforme aux limites dexposition aux radiations dIndustrie Canada dfinies pour un environnement non-contrl. Pour maintenir la conformit avec les exigences dexposition RF dIC, veuillez viter tout contact direct avec lantenne pendant lmission. Les utilisateurs finaux doivent suivre les instructions de fonctionnement spcifiques pour satisfaire la conformit aux expositions RF. Son utilisation est sujette aux deux conditions suivantes:
Cet appareil ne peut pas causer dinterfrence, et Cet appareil doit accepter toute interfrence, y compris les interfrences qui pourraient causer un fonctionnement non souhait de lappareil. Pour viter les interfrences radio avec le service sous licence (cest -dire le partage de canal avec les systmes de tlphonie satellite), cet appareil est destin tre utilis en intrieur et loin des fentres pour fournir un blindage maximal. Tout appareil (ou son antenne dmission) qui est install en extrieur est sujet cette licence. Le present appareil est conforme aux CNR dIndustrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. CAN ICES-3(B)/NMB-3(B) 92 Notebook PC E-Manual Radio Frequency (RF) Exposure Information The radiated output power of the Wireless Device is below the Industry Canada
(IC) radio frequency exposure limits. The Wireless Device should be used in such a manner such that the potential for human contact during normal operation is minimized. This device has been evaluated for and shown compliant with the IC Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) limits when operated in portable exposure conditions. Informations concernant lexposition aux frquences radio (RF) La puissance de sortie mise par lappareil de sans fil est infrieure la limite dexposition aux frquences radio dIndustry Canada (IC). Utilisez lappareil de sans fil de faon minimiser les contacts humains lors du fonctionnement normal. Ce dispositif a t valu pour et dmontr conforme la Taux IC dabsorption spcifique (SAR) des limites lorsquil est utilis dans des conditions dexposition portatifs. 93 Notebook PC E-Manual Wireless Operation Channel for Different Domains N. America 2.412-2.462 GHz Japan 2.412-2.484 GHz Europe ETSI 2.412-2.472 GHz Ch01 through CH11 Ch01 through Ch14 Ch01 through Ch13 France Restricted Wireless Frequency Bands Some areas of France have a restricted frequency band. The worst case maximum authorized power indoors are:
10mW for the entire 2.4 GHz band (2400 MHz2483.5 MHz) 100mW for frequencies between 2446.5 MHz and 2483.5 MHz NOTE: Channels 10 through 13 inclusive operate in the band 2446.6 MHz to 2483.5 MHz. There are few possibilities for outdoor use: on private property or on the private property of public persons, use is subject to a preliminary authorization procedure by the Ministry of Defense, with maximum authorized power of 100mW in the 2446.52483.5 MHz band. Use outdoors on public property is not permitted. In the departments listed below, for the entire 2.4 GHz band:
Maximum authorized power indoors is 100mW Maximum authorized power outdoors is 10mW 94 Notebook PC E-Manual Departments in which the use of the 24002483.5 MHz band is permitted with an EIRP of less than 100mW indoors and less than 10mW outdoors:
01 Ain 02 Aisne 05 Hautes Alpes 08 Ardennes 11 Aude 24 Dordogne 32 Gers 41 Loir et Cher 55 Meuse 60 Oise 12 Aveyron 25 Doubs 36 Indre 45 Loiret 58 Nivre 61 Orne 03 Allier 09 Arige 16 Charente 26 Drme 37 Indre et Loire 50 Manche 59 Nord 63 Puy du Dme 64 Pyrnes Atlantique 66 Pyrnes Orientales 67 Bas Rhin 68 Haut Rhin 70 Haute Sane 71 Sane et Loire 75 Paris 88 Vosges 94 Val de Marne 82 Tarn et Garonne 84 Vaucluse 89 Yonne 90 Territoire de Belfort This requirement is likely to change over time, allowing you to use your wireless LAN card in more areas within France. Please check with ART for the latest information (www.arcep.fr). NOTE: Your WLAN Card transmits less than 100mW, but more than 10mW. 95 Notebook PC E-Manual UL Safety Notices Required for UL 1459 covering telecommunications (telephone) equipment intended to be electrically connected to a telecommunication network that has an operating voltage to ground that does not exceed 200V peak, 300V peak-to-peak, and 105V rms, and installed or used in accordance with the National Electrical Code (NFPA 70). When using the Notebook PC modem, basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons, including the following:
DO NOT use the Notebook PC near water, for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink or laundry tub, in a wet basement or near a swimming pool. DO NOT use the Notebook PC during an electrical storm. There may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. DO NOT use the Notebook PC in the vicinity of a gas leak. Required for UL 1642 covering primary (non-rechargeable) and secondary
(rechargeable) lithium batteries for use as power sources in products. These batteries contain metallic lithium, or a lithium alloy, or a lithium ion, and may consist of a single electrochemical cell or two or more cells connected in series, parallel, or both, that convert chemical energy into electrical energy by an irreversible or reversible chemical reaction. DO NOT dispose the Notebook PC battery pack in a fire, as they may explode. Check with local codes for possible special disposal instructions to reduce the risk of injury to persons due to fire or explosion. DO NOT use power adapters or batteries from other devices to reduce the risk of injury to persons due to fire or explosion. Use only UL certified power adapters or batteries supplied by the manufacturer or authorized retailers. 96 Notebook PC E-Manual Power Safety Requirement Products with electrical current ratings up to 6A and weighing more than 3Kg must use approved power cords greater than or equal to: H05VV-F, 3G, 0.75mm2 or H05VV-F, 2G, 0.75mm2. TV Notices Note to CATV System InstallerCable distribution system should be grounded
(earthed) in accordance with ANSI/NFPA 70, the National Electrical Code (NEC), in particular Section 820.93, Grounding of Outer Conductive Shield of a Coaxial Cable installation should include bonding the screen of the coaxial cable to the earth at the building entrance. REACH Complying with the REACH (Registration, Evaluation, Authorization, and Restriction of Chemicals) regulatory framework, we publish the chemical substances in our products at ASUS REACH website at http://csr.asus.com/english/REACH.htm. Macrovision Corporation Product Notice This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S.A. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. Prevention of Hearing Loss To prevent possible hearing damage, do not listen at high volume levels for long periods. 97 Notebook PC E-Manual Nordic Lithium Cautions (for lithium-ion batteries) CAUTION! Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturers instructions. (English) ATTENZIONE! Rischio di esplosione della batteria se sostituita in modo errato. Sostituire la batteria con un una di tipo uguale o equivalente consigliata dalla fabbrica. Non disperdere le batterie nellambiente. (Italian) VORSICHT! Explosionsgefahr bei unsachgemen Austausch der Batterie. Ersatz nur durch denselben oder einem vom Hersteller empfohlenem hnlichen Typ. Entsorgung gebrauchter Batterien nach Angaben des Herstellers. (German) ADVARSELI! Lithiumbatteri - Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig hndtering. Udskiftning m kun ske med batteri af samme fabrikat og type. Levr det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandren. (Danish) VARNING! Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte. Anvnd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren. Kassera anvnt batteri enligt fabrikantens instruktion. (Swedish) VAROITUS! Paristo voi rjht, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu. Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan sousittelemaan tyyppiin. Hvit kytetty paristo valmistagan ohjeiden mukaisesti. (Finnish) ATTENTION! Il y a danger dexplosion sil y a remplacement incorrect de la batterie. Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie du mre type ou dun type quivalent recommand par le constructeur. Mettre au rebut les batteries usages conformment aux instructions du fabricant. (French) ADVARSEL! Eksplosjonsfare ved feilaktig skifte av batteri. Benytt samme batteritype eller en tilsvarende type anbefalt av apparatfabrikanten. Brukte batterier kasseres i henhold til fabrikantens instruksjoner. (Norwegian)
(Japanese)
!
. (Russian) 98 Notebook PC E-Manual Optical Drive Safety Information Laser Safety Information CD-ROM Drive Safety Warning CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT WARNING! To prevent exposure to the optical drives laser, do not attempt to disassemble or repair the optical drive by yourself. For your safety, contact a professional technician for assistance. Service warning label WARNING! INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN. DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM OR VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS. CDRH Regulations The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration implemented regulations for laser products on August 2, 1976. These regulations apply to laser products manufactured from August 1, 1976. Compliance is mandatory for products marketed in the United States. WARNING! Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein or in the laser product installation guide may result in hazardous radiation exposure. Coating Notice IMPORTANT! To provide electrical insulation and maintain electrical safety, a coating is applied to insulate the device except on the areas where the I/O ports are located. 99 Notebook PC E-Manual CTR 21 Approval (for Notebook PC with built-in Modem) Danish Dutch English Finnish French 100 Notebook PC E-Manual German Greek Italian Portuguese Spanish Swedish 101 Notebook PC E-Manual ENERGY STAR complied product ENERGY STAR is a joint program of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency and the U.S. Department of Energy helping us all save money and protect the environment through energy efficient products and practices. All ASUS products with the ENERGY STAR logo comply with the ENERGY STAR standard, and the power management feature is enabled by default. The monitor and computer are automatically set to sleep after 10 and 30 minutes of user inactivity. To wake your computer, click the mouse or press any key on the keyboard. Please visit http://www.energystar.gov/powermanagement for detail information on power management and its benefits to the environment. In addition, please visit http://www.energystar.gov for detail information on the ENERGY STAR joint program. NOTE: Energy Star is NOT supported on FreeDOS and Linux-based operating systems. Global Environmental Regulation Compliance and Declaration ASUS follows the green design concept to design and manufacture our products, and makes sure that each stage of the product life cycle of ASUS product is in line with global environmental regulations. In addition, ASUS disclose the relevant information based on regulation requirements. Please refer to http://csr.asus.com/english/Compliance.htm for information disclosure based on regulation requirements ASUS is complied with:
Japan JIS-C-0950 Material Declarations EU REACH SVHC Korea RoHS 102 Notebook PC E-Manual ASUS Recycling/Takeback Services ASUS recycling and takeback programs come from our commitment to the highest standards for protecting our environment. We believe in providing solutions for you to be able to responsibly recycle our products, batteries, other components as well as the packaging materials. Please go to http://csr.asus.com/
english/Takeback.htm for detailed recycling information in different regions. Rechargeable Battery Recycling Service in North America For US and Canada customers, you can call 1-800-822-8837
(toll-free) for recycling information of your ASUS products rechargeable batteries. Regional notice for California WARNING! This product may contain chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer, birth defects or other reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling. Regional notice for Singapore Complies with IDA Standards DB103778 This ASUS product complies with IDA Standards. 103 Notebook PC E-Manual Regional notice for India This product complies with the India E-waste (Management and Handling) Rule 2011 and prohibits use of lead, mercury, hexavalent chromium, polybrominated biphenyls (PBBs) and polybrominated diphenyl ethers (PBDEs) in concentrations exceeding 0.1% by weight in homogenous materials and 0.01% by weight in homogenous materials for cadmium, except for the exemptions listed in Schedule-II of the Rule. Notices for removable batteries Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. The battery and its component must be recycled or disposed of properly. Avis concernant les batteries remplaables La batterie de lordinateur portable peut prsenter un risque dincendie ou de brlure si celle-ci est retire ou dsassemble. La batterie et ses composants doivent tre recycls de faon approprie. 104 Notebook PC E-Manual EU Declaration of Conformity We, the undersigned, Manufacturer:
Address:
Authorized representative in Europe:
Address, City:
Country:
declare the following apparatus:
Product name :
Model name :
conform with the essential requirements of the following directives:
Notebook PC UX360C ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC. 4F, No. 150, LI-TE Rd., PEITOU, TAIPEI 112, TAIWAN ASUS TECHNOLOGY HOLLAND B.V. FULTONBAAN 12, 3439 NE, NIEUWEGEIN THE NETHERLANDS 2004/108/EC-EMC Directive EN 55022:2010+AC:2011 EN 61000-3-2:2006+A2:2009 EN 55013:2001+A1:2003+A2:2006 1999/5/EC-R&TTE Directive EN 300 328 V1.9.1(2015-02) EN 300 440-1 V1.6.1(2010-08) EN 300 440-2 V1.4.1(2010-08) EN 301 511 V9.0.2(2003-03) EN 301 908-1 V6.2.1(2013-04) EN 301 908-2 V6.2.1(2013-10) EN 301 908-13 V6.2.1(2014-02) EN 301 893 V1.8.1(2015-03) EN 300 330-2 V1.5.1(2010-02) EN 50360:2001/A1:2012 EN 62479:2010 EN 62311:2008 2006/95/EC-LVD Directive EN 60950-1: 2006 / A12: 2011 EN 60950-1: 2006 / A2: 2013 2009/125/EC-ErP Directive Regulation (EC) No. 1275/2008 Regulation (EC) No. 642/2009 EN 55024:2010 EN 61000-3-3:2008 EN 55020:2007+A11:2011 EN 301 489-1 V1.9.2(2011-09) EN 301 489-3 V1.6.1(2013-12) EN 301 489-4 V2.1.1(2013-12) EN 301 489-7 V1.3.1(2005-11) EN 301 489-9 V1.4.1(2007-11) EN 301 489-17 V2.2.1(2012-09) EN 301 489-24 V1.5.1(2010-09) EN 301 357-2 V1.4.1(2008-11) EN 302 291-2 V1.1.1(2005-07) EN 302 623 V1.1.1(2009-01) EN 50566:2013/AC:2014 EN 50385:2002 EN 60065:2002 / A12: 2011 Regulation (EC) No. 278/2009 Regulation (EU) No. 617/2013 2011/65/EU-RoHS Directive Ver. 151216 CE marking Equipment Class 2 Signature Jerry Shen Printed Name CEO Position
(EU conformity marking) Taipei, Taiwan Place of issue 4/3/2016 Date of issue 2016 Year CE marking was first affixed 105 Notebook PC E-Manual 106 Notebook PC E-Manual
various | Users Manual | Users Manual | 4.50 MiB | March 09 2014 / February 03 2015 |
- 1 Users Manual 2 -
2014. All Rights Reserved. Aspire V 17 Nitro Covers: Aspire VN7-791 This revision: July 2014 Sign up for an Acer ID and enjoy great benefits Open the Acer Portal app from the Start screen to sign up for an Acer ID or sign in if you already have an Acer ID. There are three great reasons for you to get an Acer ID:
Build Your Own Cloud with Acer BYOC. Get the latest offers and product information. Register your device for warranty service. For more information, please visit the AcerCloud website:
www.acer.com/byoc-start Important This manual contains proprietary information that is protected by copyright laws. The information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice. Images provided herein are for reference only and may contain information or features that do not apply to your computer. Acer Group shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained in this manual. Model number: _________________________________ Serial number: _________________________________ Date of purchase: ______________________________ Place of purchase: ______________________________ TABLE OF CONTENTS Table of contents - 3 6 First things first Your guides ............................................. 6 Basic care and tips for using your computer.................................................. 6 Turning your computer off........................... 6 Taking care of your computer ..................... 7 Taking care of your AC adapter.................. 7 Cleaning and servicing................................ 8 Your Acer notebook tour 9 Screen view............................................. 9 Keyboard view....................................... 10 Left view ............................................... 11 Right view ............................................. 12 Information on USB 3.0............................. 12 Base view .............................................. 13 Using the keyboard 14 Lock keys............................................... 14 Hotkeys..................................................... 14 Windows keys........................................ 15 Touchpad 17 Touchpad basics ................................... 17 Touchpad gestures................................ 17 Recovery 19 Creating a recovery backup................... 19 Creating a drivers and applications backup................................................... 21 Recovering your system ........................ 23 Reinstalling drivers and applications......... 24 Returning to an earlier system snapshot .. 26 Returning your system to its factory condition.................................................... 27 Recovering from Windows ........................ 27 Recovering from a recovery backup ......... 30 Connecting to the Internet 33 Connecting with a cable ........................ 33 Built-in network feature ............................. 33 Connecting wirelessly............................ 33 Connecting to a wireless LAN................... 34 Connecting to a 3G network ..................... 34 Using a Bluetooth connection 35 Enabling and disabling Bluetooth .......... 35 Enable Bluetooth and add a device .......... 35 BIOS utility 38 Boot sequence....................................... 38 Setting passwords ................................. 38 Securing your computer 39 Using a computer security lock.............. 39 Using passwords ................................... 39 Entering passwords .................................. 40 Power management 41 Saving power ......................................... 41 Battery pack 43 Battery characteristics ........................... 43 Charging the battery ................................. 43 Optimizing battery life ............................... 44 Checking the battery level......................... 45 Battery-low warning .................................. 45 Traveling with your computer 46 Disconnecting from the desktop ............ 46 Moving around....................................... 46 Preparing the computer ............................ 46 What to bring to meetings......................... 47 Taking the computer home .................... 47 Preparing the computer ............................ 47 What to take with you................................ 48 Special considerations.............................. 48 Setting up a home office ........................... 48 Traveling with the computer................... 48 Preparing the computer ............................ 49 What to take with you................................ 49 Special considerations.............................. 49 Traveling internationally......................... 49 Preparing the computer ............................ 49 What to bring with you .............................. 50 Special considerations.............................. 50 Memory card reader 52 Connectivity options............................... 52 54 Video and audio connectors HDMI 55 56 Universal Serial Bus (USB) Frequently asked questions 58 Requesting service ................................ 60 Tips and hints for using Windows 8.1.... 62 How do I get to Start? ............................... 62 What are "Charms?" ................................. 62 Can I boot directly to the desktop? ........... 63 How do I jump between apps?.................. 63 How do I turn off my computer?................ 63 How do I unlock my computer?................. 63 How do I set the alarm?............................ 65 Where are my apps?................................. 66 What is a Microsoft ID (account)?............. 67 How do I add a favorite to Internet Explorer?................................................... 68 How do I check for Windows updates?..... 68 Where can I get more information?........... 68 Troubleshooting..................................... 69 4 - Table of contents Troubleshooting tips.................................. 69 Error messages......................................... 69 Internet and online security 71 First steps on the net............................. 71 Protecting your computer.......................... 71 Choose an Internet Service Provider........ 71 Network connections................................. 73 Surf the Net!.............................................. 75 Security..................................................... 75 82 Playing Blu-Ray or DVD movies
- 5 Getting started... In this section you will find:
Useful information on caring for your computer and your health Where to find the power button, ports and connectors Tips and tricks for using the touchpad and keyboard How to create recovery backups Guidelines for connecting to a network and using Bluetooth Information on using Acers bundled software 6 - First things first FIRST THINGS FIRST We would like to thank you for making this Acer notebook your choice for meeting your mobile computing needs. Your guides To help you use your Acer notebook, we have designed a set of guides:
First off, the Setup Guide helps you get started with setting up your computer. The Quick Guide introduces you to the basic features and functions of your new computer. For more on how your computer can help you to be more productive, please refer to the Users Manual. This guide contains detailed information on such subjects as system utilities, data recovery, expansion options and troubleshooting. In addition it contains general regulations and safety notices for your notebook. It is available from the desktop; double-click the Help icon and click Users Manual in the menu that opens. Basic care and tips for using your computer Turning your computer off To turn the power off, do any of the following:
Use the Windows shutdown command: Press the Windows key +
<C>, click Settings > Power then click Shut Down. If you need to power down the computer for a short while, but dont want to completely shut it down, you can put it into Hibernate by pressing the power button. First things first - 7 You can also put the computer in sleep mode by pressing the sleep hotkey <Fn> + <F4>. Note If you cannot power off the computer normally, press and hold the power button for more than four seconds to shut down the computer. If you turn off the computer and want to turn it on again, wait at least two seconds before powering up. Taking care of your computer Your computer will serve you well if you take care of it. Do not expose the computer to direct sunlight. Do not place it near sources of heat, such as a radiator. Do not expose the computer to temperatures below 0 C (32 F) or above 50 C (122 F). Do not subject the computer to magnetic fields. Do not expose the computer to rain or moisture. Do not spill water or any liquid on the computer. Do not subject the computer to heavy shock or vibration. Do not expose the computer to dust or dirt. Never place objects on top of the computer. Do not slam the computer display when you close it. Never place the computer on uneven surfaces. Taking care of your AC adapter Here are some ways to take care of your AC adapter:
Do not connect the adapter to any other device. Do not step on the power cord or place heavy objects on top of it. Carefully route the power cord and any cables away from foot traffic. When unplugging the power cord, do not pull on the cord itself but pull on the plug. The total ampere ratings of the equipment plugged in should not exceed the ampere rating of the cord if you are using an extension 8 - First things first cord. Also, the total current rating of all equipment plugged into a single wall outlet should not exceed the fuse rating. Cleaning and servicing When cleaning the computer, follow these steps:
1.Turn off the computer. 2.Disconnect the AC adapter. 3.Use a soft, moist cloth. Do not use liquid or aerosol cleaners. If either of the following occurs:
The computer has been dropped or the body has been damaged;
The computer does not operate normally See Frequently asked questions on page 58. YOUR ACER NOTEBOOK TOUR Your Acer notebook tour - 9 After setting up your computer as illustrated in the Setup Guide, let us show you around your new Acer computer. Screen view 1 2
#
1 2 3 Icon Item Webcam Screen Microphones 3 Description Web camera for video communication. A light next to the webcam indicates that the webcam is active. Displays computer output. Internal stereo microphone for sound recording. 10 - Your Acer notebook tour Keyboard view 3 1 2
#
1 2 3 Icon Item Keyboard Touchpad Power button Description For entering data into your computer. See "Using the keyboard" on page 14. Touch-sensitive pointing device. The touchpad and selection buttons form a single surface. Press down firmly on the touchpad surface to perform a left click. Press down firmly on the lower right corner to perform a right click. Turns the computer on and off. Left view Your Acer notebook tour - 11 1 2 3
#
Icon Item Kensington lock slot 1 2 3 4 5 6 USB ports Optical drive Optical disk access indicator Optical drive eject button Emergency eject hole 4 5 6 Description Connects to a Kensington-
compatible computer security lock. Wrap the computer security lock cable around an immovable object such as a table or handle of a locked drawer. Insert the lock into the notch and turn the key to secure the lock. Keyless models are also available. Connect to USB devices. Internal optical drive; accepts CDs or DVDs. Lights up when the optical drive is active. Ejects the optical disk from the drive. Ejects the optical drive tray when the computer is turned off. Carefully insert a straightened paper clip to eject the optical drive tray. 12 - Your Acer notebook tour Right view
# Icon Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 SD card reader Headset/speaker jack USB ports HDMI port Ethernet (RJ-45) port Power indicator Battery indicator DC-in jack 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Description Accepts one Secure Digital (SD or SDHC) card. Push to remove/install the card. Connects to audio devices (e.g., speakers, headphones) or a headset with microphone. Connect to USB devices. Supports high-definition digital video connections. Connects to an Ethernet 10/100/
1000-based network. Pull the lip down to open the port fully. Indicates the computers power status. Indicates battery status. Charging: The light is amber when the battery is charging. Fully charged: The light is blue. Connects to an AC adapter. Information on USB 3.0 USB 3.0 compatible ports are blue. Compatible with USB 3.0 and earlier devices. For optimal performance, use USB 3.0-certified devices. Defined by the USB 3.0 specification (SuperSpeed USB). Base view Your Acer notebook tour - 13 1 2 3
# Icon 1 2 3 Item Ventilation and cooling fan Battery reset pinhole Speakers Description Allows the computer to stay cool. Do not cover or obstruct the openings. Simulates removing and reinstalling the battery. Insert a paperclip into the hole and press for four seconds. Deliver stereo audio output. 14 - Using the keyboard USING THE KEYBOARD The keyboard has full-sized keys and a separate numeric keypad, separate cursor, lock, Windows, function and special keys. Lock keys The keyboard has three lock keys which you can toggle on and off. Lock key Caps Lock Description When Caps Lock is on, all alphabetic characters typed are in uppercase. When Num Lock is on, the keypad is in numeric mode. The keys function as a calculator (complete with the arithmetic operators +, -, *, and /). Use this mode when you need to do a lot of numeric data entry. When Scroll Lock is on, the screen moves one line up or down when you press the up or down arrow keys respectively. Scroll Lock does not work with some applications. Num Lock Scroll Lock
<Fn> + <F12>
Hotkeys The computer employs hotkeys or key combinations to access most of the computer's controls like screen brightness and volume output. To activate hotkeys, press and hold the <Fn> key before pressing the other key in the hotkey combination. Hotkey
<Fn> + <F3>
Icon Function Description
<Fn> + <F4>
<Fn> + <F5>
Sleep Airplane mode Turns on / off the computer's network devices. Puts the computer in Sleep mode. Switches display output between the display screen, external monitor (if connected) and both. Display toggle Hotkey Icon Function
<Fn> + <F6>
Display off Using the keyboard - 15 Description Turns the display screen backlight off to save power. Press any key to return. Turns the built-in touchpad on and off. Scr Lk Touchpad toggle Speaker toggle Turns the speakers on and off. Turns the keyboard backlight Keyboard backlight on and off. Turns the scroll lock feature on or off. Increases the screen Brightness up brightness. Decreases the screen Brightness brightness. down Increases the sound volume. Volume up Volume down Decreases the sound volume. Play/Pause Stop Previous Next Play or pause a selected media file. Stop playing the selected media file. Return to the previous media file. Jump to the next media file.
<Fn> + <F7>
<Fn> + <F8>
<Fn> + <F9>
<Fn> + <F12>
<Fn> + < >
<Fn> + < >
<Fn> + < >
<Fn> + < >
<Fn> +
<Home>
<Fn> +
<Pg Up>
<Fn> +
<Pg Dn>
<Fn> +
<End>
Windows keys The keyboard has two keys that perform Windows-specific functions. Key Description Pressed alone it returns to the Start screen or to return to the last open app. It can also be used with other keys for special functions, please check Windows Help. Windows key 16 - Using the keyboard Key Application key Description This key has the same effect as clicking the right mouse button; it opens the application's context menu. TOUCHPAD Touchpad - 17 Touchpad basics The touchpad controls the arrow (or 'cursor') on the screen. As you slide your finger across the touchpad, the cursor will follow this movement. Note The touchpad is sensitive to finger movement; the lighter the touch, the better the response. Please keep the touchpad and your fingers dry and clean. The cursor is controlled by some basic gestures:
Single-finger slide: Slide a finger across the touchpad to move the cursor. Single-finger press or tap: Press the touchpad down, or lightly tap the touchpad with your finger, to perform a 'click', which will select or start an item. Quickly repeat the tap to perform a double tap or 'double click'. Single-finger press in the bottom-right corner: Press the bottom right corner of the touchpad to perform a 'right click'. In the Start screen, the app commands, in most apps this will open a context menu related to the selected item. this will toggle Drag: Press and hold the bottom left corner of the touchpad, or tap twice anywhere on the touchtap, then slide a second finger across the touchpad to select all items in an area. Touchpad gestures Windows 8.1 and many applications support touchpad gestures that use one or more fingers. Note Support for touchpad gestures depends on the active application. 18 - Touchpad This allows you to control applications with a few simple gestures, such as:
Swipe in from edge: Access Windows tools by swiping into the center of the touchpad from the right or left edge. Swipe in from right: Toggle the charms. Swipe in from left: Switch to the previous app. Two-finger slide: Swiftly scroll through web pages, documents and playlists by placing two fingers on the touchpad and moving both in any direction. Two-finger pinch: Zoom in and out of photos, maps and documents with a simple finger-and-thumb gesture. RECOVERY Recovery - 19 If you are having trouble with your computer, and the frequently asked questions (see Frequently asked questions on page 58) do not help, you can 'recover' your computer - i.e. return it to an earlier state. This section describes the recovery tools available on your computer. Acer provides Acer Recovery Management, which allows you to create a recovery backup, a drivers and applications backup, and to start recovery options, either using Windows tools, or the recovery backup. Note Acer Recovery Management is only available with a pre-installed Windows operating system. Important We recommend that you create a Recovery Backup and Drivers and Applications Backup and as soon as possible. In certain situations a full recovery will require a USB recovery backup. Creating a recovery backup To reinstall from a USB storage drive, you must first create a recovery backup. The recovery backup includes the entire original contents of your computers hard drive, including Windows and all factory-loaded software and drivers. Using this backup will restore your computer to the same state as when you purchased it, while giving you an option to retain all settings and personal data. Note Since the recovery backup requires at least 16 GB of storage after formatting, it is recommended to use a USB drive with a capacity of 32 GB or larger. 20 - Recovery 1.From Start, type 'Recovery' and then click Acer Recovery Management in the list of apps. 2.Click Create Factory Default Backup. The Recovery Drive window opens. Make sure Copy contents from the recovery partition to the recovery drive is selected. This provides the most complete and safest recovery backup. 3.Plug in the USB drive then click Next. Since the recovery backup requires at least 16 GB of storage after formatting, it is recommended to use a USB drive with a capacity of 32 GB or larger. Recovery - 21 4.You will be shown the backup progress on the screen. 5.Follow the process until it completes. 6.After creating the recovery backup, you can choose to delete the recovery this information, you can only use the USB recovery backup to restore your computer, if you lose or erase the USB drive, you cannot restore your computer. information on your computer. If you delete 7.Unplug the USB drive and label it clearly. Important Write a unique, descriptive label on the backup, such as 'Windows Recovery Backup'. Make sure you keep the backup in a safe place that you will remember. Creating a drivers and applications backup To create a Drivers and Applications Backup, that contains the factory-loaded software and drivers needed by your computer, you 22 - Recovery may use either a USB storage drive or, if your computer features a DVD recorder, one or more blank recordable DVDs. 1.From Start, type 'Recovery' and then click Acer Recovery Management in the list of apps. 2.Click Create Drivers and Applications Backup. Plug in the USB drive or insert a blank DVD into the optical drive, then click Next. If you are using a USB drive, make sure your USB drive has enough capacity before continuing. If using DVDs, it will also show the number of blank, recordable discs you will need to complete the recovery discs. Make sure that you have the required number of identical, blank discs. 3.Click Start to copy files.You will be shown the backup progress on the screen. 4.Follow the process until it completes:
If you are using optical discs, the drive ejects each disc as it completes burning it. Remove the disc from the drive and mark it with a permanent marker. If multiple discs are required, insert a new disc when prompted, then click OK. Continue until the process is complete. If you are using a USB drive, unplug the drive and label it clearly. Recovery - 23 Important Write a unique, descriptive label on each backup, such as 'Drivers and Applications Backup'. Make sure you keep the backup in a safe place that you will remember. Recovering your system To recover your system:
1.Perform minor fixes. If only one or two items of software or hardware have stopped working correctly, the problem may be solved by reinstalling the software or the device drivers. To reinstall software and drivers that were pre-installed at the factory, see Reinstalling drivers and applications on page 24. For instructions on reinstalling software and drivers that were not pre-installed, see that products documentation or support Web site. 2.Revert to a previous system condition. If reinstalling software or drivers does not help, then the problem may be solved by returning your system to a previous state when everything was working correctly. For instructions, see Returning to an earlier system snapshot on page 26. 3.Reset your operating system. If nothing else has solved the problem and you want to reset your system, but keep your user information, see Returning your system to its factory condition on page 27. 4.Reset your system to its factory condition. If nothing else has solved the problem and you want to reset your system to factory condition, see Returning your system to its factory condition on page 27. 24 - Recovery Reinstalling drivers and applications As a troubleshooting step, you may need to reinstall the applications and device drivers that came pre-installed on your computer from the factory. You can reinstall using either your hard drive or the backup you have created. Other applications - If you need to reinstall software that did not come pre-installed on your computer, you need to follow that softwares installation instructions. New device drivers - If you need to reinstall device drivers that did not come pre-installed on your computer, follow the instructions provided with the device. If you are reinstalling using Windows and the recovery information stored on your computer:
1.From Start, type 'Recovery' and then click Acer Recovery Management in the list of apps. 2.Click Reinstall Drivers or Applications. 3.You should see the Contents section of the Acer Resource Center. Recovery - 25 Images for reference only. 4.Click the install icon for the item you want to install, then follow the onscreen instructions to complete the installation. Repeat this step for each item you want to reinstall. If you are reinstalling from a Drivers and Applications Backup on a DVD or USB drive:
1.Insert the Drivers and Applications Backup into the disc drive or connect it to a free USB port. If you inserted a DVD wait for Acer Resource Center to start. If Acer Resource Center does not start automatically, press the Windows key + <E>, then double-click on the optical drive icon. If you are using a USB drive, press the Windows key + <E>, then double-click on the drive that contains the backup. Double-click on ResourceCenter. 26 - Recovery 2.You should see the Contents section of the Acer Resource Center. Images for reference only. 3.Click the install icon for the item you want to install, then follow the onscreen prompts to complete the installation. Repeat this step for each item you want to reinstall. Returning to an earlier system snapshot Microsoft System Restore periodically takes a 'snapshot' of your system settings and saves them as restore points. In most cases of hard-to-resolve software problems, you can return to one of these restore points to get your system running again. Windows automatically creates an additional restore point each day, and also each time you install software or device drivers. Note For more information about using Microsoft System Restore, from Start, type Help and then click Help and Support in the list of apps. Type Windows system restore in the Search Help box, then press Enter. Returning to a restore point 1.From Start, type Control Panel and then click Control Panel in the list of apps. 2.Click System and Security > Action Center, then click Recovery at the bottom of the window. 3.Click Open System Restore, then Next. Recovery - 27 4.Click the latest restore point (at a time when your system worked correctly), click Next, then Finish. 5.A confirmation window appears; click Yes. Your system is restored using the restore point you specified. This process may take several minutes, and may restart your computer. Returning your system to its factory condition If your computer experiences problems that are not recoverable by other methods, you may need to reinstall everything to return your system to its factory condition. You can recover from either your hard drive or the recovery backup you have created. If you can still run Windows and have not deleted the recovery partition, see Recovering from Windows below. If you cannot run Windows, your original hard drive has been completely re-formatted or you have installed a replacement hard drive, see Recovering from a recovery backup on page 30. Recovering from Windows Start Acer Recovery Management:
From Start, type Recovery and then click Acer Recovery Management in the list of apps. Two options are available, Restore Factory Settings (Reset my PC) or Customized Restore (Refresh my PC). Restore Factory Settings deletes everything on your hard drive, then reinstalls Windows and all software and drivers that were pre-installed on your system. If you can access important files on your hard drive, back them up now. See Restore Factory Settings with Acer Recovery Management on page 28. Customized Restore will attempt to retain your files (user data) but will reinstall all software and drivers. Software installed since you purchased your PC will be removed (except software installed from 28 - Recovery the Windows Store). See Customized Restore with Acer Recovery Management on page 29. Restore Factory Settings with Acer Recovery Management 1.Click Restore Factory Settings. Important Restore Factory Settings will erase all files on your hard drive. 2.The Reset your PC window opens. Images for reference only. 3.Click Next, then choose how to erase your files:
a.Just remove my files quickly erases all files before restoring your computer and takes about 30 minutes. b.Fully clean the drive completely cleans the drive after each file is erased, so no files can be viewed after the recovery. Cleaning the drive takes much longer, up to 5 hours, but is much more secure as old files are completely removed. 4.Click Reset. 5.The recovery process begins by restarting your computer, then continues by copying files to your hard drive. 6.After the recovery has finished, you can start using your computer by repeating the first-start process. Recovery - 29 Recovering from the hard drive during startup 1.Turn on your computer and press <Alt> + <F10> during startup. A screen appears asking you to choose the keyboard layout. 2.Several options are now presented. Click Troubleshoot. 3.Click either Refresh your PC or Reset your PC. Note
"Refresh your PC" enables you to restore your computer to the default factory condition with files intact. "Reset your PC" completely removes all your files and resets your computer to factory settings. 4.Click Next. The process will take several minutes. Customized Restore with Acer Recovery Management 1.Click Customized Restore (Retain User Data). 30 - Recovery 2.The Refresh your PC window opens. Images for reference only. 3.Click Next, then Refresh. 4.The recovery process begins by restarting your computer, then continues by copying files to your hard drive. This process takes about 30 minutes. Recovering from a recovery backup To recover from a recovery backup on a USB drive:
1.Find your recovery backup. 2.If your computer does not have a built-in keyboard, make sure a keyboard is attached to your computer. 3.Plug in the USB drive and turn on your computer. 4.If it is not already enabled, you must enable the F12 Boot Menu:
a. Press <F2> when starting your computer. b. Use the left or right arrow keys to select the Main menu. c. Press the down key until F12 Boot Menu is selected, press <F5>
to change this setting to Enabled. d. Use the left or right arrow keys to select the Exit menu. e. Depending on the type of BIOS your computer uses, select Save Changes and Exit or Exit Saving Changes and press Enter. Select OK or Yes to confirm. f. Your computer will restart. 5.During startup, press <F12> to open the boot menu. The boot menu allows you to select which device to start from, select the USB drive. a. Use your arrow keys to select USB Device, then press Enter. b. Windows starts from the recovery backup instead of the normal startup process. 6.Select your keyboard type. 7.Select Troubleshoot and then choose the type of recovery to use:
Recovery - 31 a. Click Advanced then System Restore to start Microsoft System Restore:
Microsoft System Restore periodically takes a snapshot of your system settings and saves them as restore points. In most cases of hard-to-resolve software problems, you can return to one of these restore points to get your system running again. b. Click Reset your PC to start the reset process:
Reset your PC deletes everything on your hard drive, then reinstalls Windows and all software and drivers that were pre-
installed on your system. If you can access important files on your hard drive, back them up now. See Reset your PC from the recovery backup below. c. Click Refresh your PC to start the refresh process:
Refresh your PC will attempt to retain your files (user data) but will reinstall all software and drivers. Software installed since you purchased your PC will be removed (except software installed from the Windows Store). See Refresh your PC from the recovery backup on page 32. Reset your PC from the recovery backup Important Reset your PC will erase all files on your hard drive. 1.The Reset your PC window opens. Images for reference only. 32 - Recovery 2.Click Next. 3.Select the operating system to recover (normally only one option is available). 4.Choose to keep any changes to the hard drive:
a. If you have deleted the recovery partition or otherwise changed the partitions on the hard drive and want to keep these changes, select No. b. To restore your computer to Factory Settings, select Yes. 5.Choose how to erase your files:
a.Just remove my files quickly erases all files before restoring your computer and takes about 30 minutes. b.Fully clean the drive completely cleans the drive after each file is erased, so no files can be viewed after the recovery. Cleaning the drive takes much longer, up to 5 hours, but is much more secure as old files are completely removed. 6.Click Reset. 7.After the recovery has finished, you can start using your computer by repeating the first-start process. Refresh your PC from the recovery backup 1.The Refresh your PC window opens. 2.Click Next. 3.Select the operating system to recover (normally only one option is available). 4.Click Refresh. 5.The recovery process begins by restarting your computer, then continues by copying files to your hard drive. This process takes about 30 minutes. CONNECTING TO THE INTERNET Connecting to the Internet - 33 Note Information in this section may not apply to your computer. This chapter includes basic information on types of connections, and getting connected to the Internet. For detailed information, please refer to Network connections on page 73. Connecting with a cable Built-in network feature The built-in network feature makes it easy for you to connect your computer to the Internet using a cable. But first, an Internet Service Provider (ISP) -- usually a phone or cable company -- will have to go to your home or office to set up Internet service. The ISP will install a small box, called a router, that will allow you to connect to the Internet. Once your router is set up, all you have to do is plug one end of a network cable into the network port on your computer, and the other end into a port on your router. (Refer to the image below.) Then, you'll be ready to get online. Connecting wirelessly 34 - Connecting to the Internet Connecting to a wireless LAN A wireless LAN (or WLAN) is a wireless local area network, which can link two or more computers without using wires. Once connected to WLAN, you can access the Internet. You can also share files, other devices, and even your Internet connection itself. Warning Using wireless devices while flying in aircraft may be prohibited. All wireless devices must be switched off before boarding an aircraft and during take-off, as they may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, disrupt communications, and even be illegal. You may turn on your computers wireless devices only when informed that it is safe to do so by the cabin crew. Your computer's wireless connection is turned on by default and Windows will detect and display a list of available networks during setup. Select your network and enter the password if required. Acer notebook computers feature an Airplane mode hotkey that turns the network connection on or off. You can use the network management options to turn your wireless network on/off or control what is shared over the network. From the Start screen, start typing wireless then select Connect to a network or Change Wi-Fi settings. Otherwise, open the instructions. Internet Explorer and follow Note Please refer to your Internet Service Provider (ISP) or router documentation for details on connecting to the Internet. Connecting to a 3G network If your computer has a SIM slot, you can connect to the Internet using a 3G (cellular phone) network. To do this, you must have a compatible SIM card and a data contract with your cellular provider. Note Please contact your cellular provider for details on connecting to the Internet via 3G. USING A BLUETOOTH CONNECTION Using a Bluetooth connection - 35 Bluetooth is a technology enabling you to transfer data wirelessly over short distances between many different types of devices. Bluetooth-
enabled devices include computers, cell phones, tablets, wireless headsets, and keyboards. To use Bluetooth, you must ensure the following:
1.Bluetooth is enabled on both devices. 2.Your devices are "paired" (or connected). Enabling and disabling Bluetooth The Bluetooth adapter must be enabled on both devices. For your computer, this may be an external switch, a software setting, or a separate Bluetooth dongle plugged into the computers USB port (if no internal Bluetooth adapter is available). Note Please check your devices owners manual to determine how to turn on its Bluetooth adapter. Enable Bluetooth and add a device Every new device must first be "paired" with your computers Bluetooth adapter. This means it must first be authenticated for security purposes. You only need to pair once. After that, simply turning on the Bluetooth adapter of both devices will connect them. Bluetooth on your computer is disabled by default. To enable your computers Bluetooth adapter, do the following:
1.Open the Charms and select Settings > Change PC Settings > PC and devices > Bluetooth, or press the Windows key + <W> and then type Wireless; in the results, click on Bluetooth settings. 2.Click the toggle next to Bluetooth to enable/disable it. 3.Your computer will automatically start searching for devices, as well as make itself visible to other devices. 36 - Using a Bluetooth connection 4.Tap the device you wish to add from the list of discovered devices, and tap Pair. A code displays on your computer, which should match the code displayed on your device. Select Yes. Then, accept the pairing from your device. Note Some devices using older versions of the Bluetooth technology require both devices to enter a PIN. In the case of one of the devices not having any inputs
(as in a headset), the passcode is hardcoded into the device (usually "0000"
or "1234"). Consult your devices user manual for more information.
- 37 Keeping your computer and data safe... In this section you will find:
How to secure your computer Setting passwords What you need to prepare when youre traveling How to get the most out of your battery 38 - BIOS utility BIOS UTILITY The BIOS utility is a hardware configuration program built into your computer's BIOS. Your computer is already properly configured and optimized, and you do not normally need to run this utility. However, if you encounter configuration problems, you may need to run it. To activate the BIOS utility, press <F2> during the POST while the computer logo is being displayed. Boot sequence To set the boot sequence in the BIOS utility, activate the BIOS utility, then select Boot from the categories listed at the top of the screen. Setting passwords To set a password on boot, activate the BIOS utility, then select Security from the categories listed at the top of the screen. Find Password on boot: and use the <F5> and <F6> keys to enable this feature. SECURING YOUR COMPUTER Securing your computer - 39 Your computer is a valuable investment that you need to take care of. Learn how to protect and take care of your computer. Security features include hardware and software locks a security notch and passwords. Using a computer security lock The computer comes with a Kensington-compatible security slot for a security lock. Wrap a computer security lock cable around an immovable object such as a table or handle of a locked drawer. Insert the lock into the notch and turn the key to secure the lock. Some keyless models are also available. Using passwords Passwords protect your computer from unauthorized access. Setting these passwords creates several different levels of protection for your computer and data:
Supervisor Password prevents unauthorized entry into the BIOS utility. Once set, you must enter this password to gain access to the BIOS utility. See Setting passwords on page 38. User Password secures your computer against unauthorized use. Combine the use of this password with password checkpoints on boot-up and resume from Hibernation (if available) for maximum security. Password on Boot secures your computer against unauthorized use. Combine the use of this password with password checkpoints on boot-up and resume from Hibernation (if available) for maximum security. Important Do not forget your Supervisor Password! If you forget your password, please get in touch with your dealer or an authorized service center. 40 - Securing your computer Entering passwords When a password is set, a password prompt appears in the center of the display screen. When the Supervisor Password is set, a prompt appears when you enter the BIOS utility. Type the Supervisor Password and press <Enter> to access the BIOS utility. If you enter the password incorrectly, a warning message appears. Try again and press <Enter>. When the User Password is set and the password on boot parameter is enabled, a prompt appears at boot-up. Type the User Password and press <Enter> to use the computer. If you enter the password incorrectly, a warning message appears. Try again and press <Enter>. Important You have three chances to enter a password. If you fail to enter the password correctly after three tries, the system halts. Press and hold the power button for four seconds to shut down the computer. Then turn on the computer again, and try again. POWER MANAGEMENT Power management - 41 This computer has a built-in power management unit that monitors system activity. System activity refers to any activity involving one or more of following devices: keyboard, mouse, hard disk, peripherals connected to the computer, and video memory. If no activity is detected for a period of time, the computer stops some or all of these devices in order to conserve energy. the Saving power Disable Fast startup Your computer uses Fast startup to start quickly, but also uses a small amount of power to check for signals to start. These checks will slowly drain your computers battery. If you prefer to reduce your computers power requirements and environmental impact, turn off Fast startup:
Note If Fast startup is off, your computer will take longer to start from Sleep. Your computer will also not start if it receives an instruction to start over a network (Wake on LAN). 1.Open the desktop. 2.Click Power Options in the Notification area. 3.Select More Power Options. 4.Select Choose what the power buttons do. 42 - Power management 5.Select Change settings that are currently unavailable. 6.Scroll down and disable Turn on fast startup. 7.Select Save changes. BATTERY PACK Battery pack - 43 The computer uses an embedded Lithium battery that gives you long use between charges. Battery characteristics The battery is recharged whenever you connect the computer to the AC adapter. Your computer supports charge-in-use, enabling you to recharge the battery while you continue to operate the computer. However, recharging with the computer turned off significantly reduces charge time. The battery will come in handy when you travel or during a power failure. Charging the battery Plug the AC adapter into the computer, and connect to a mains power outlet. You can continue to operate your computer on AC power while your battery is charging. However, charging the battery with the computer turned off significantly reduces charge time. Note You are advised to charge the battery before retiring for the day. Charging the battery overnight before traveling enables you to start the next day with a fully charged battery. Conditioning a new battery pack Before you use a battery pack for the first time, there is a conditioning process that you should follow:
1.Connect the AC adapter and fully charge the battery. 2.Turn on the computer and complete setting up the operating system. 3.Disconnect the AC adapter. 4.Operate the computer using battery power. 5.Reconnect the AC adapter and fully charge the battery again. Follow these steps again until the battery has been charged and discharged three times. 44 - Battery pack Use this conditioning process for all new batteries, or if a battery hasn't been used for a long time. Warning Do not expose battery packs to temperatures below 0 C (32 F) or above 45 C (113 F). Extreme temperatures may adversely affect the battery pack. The battery conditioning process ensures your battery accepts the maximum possible charge. Failure to follow this procedure will prevent you from obtaining the maximum battery charge, and will also shorten the effective lifespan of the battery. In addition, the useful lifespan of the battery is adversely affected by the following usage patterns:
Using the computer on constant AC power. Not discharging and recharging the battery to its extremes, as described above. Frequent use; the more you use the battery, the faster it will reach the end of its effective life. An embedded battery has a life span of more than 1,000 charge/discharge cycles. Optimizing battery life Optimizing battery life helps you get the most out of battery operation, prolonging the charge/recharge cycle and improving recharging efficiency. You are advised to follow the suggestions set out below:
Use AC power whenever possible, reserving battery for mobile use. Remove accessories that are not being used (e.g. a USB disk drive), as they can continue to draw power. Store your PC in a cool, dry place. The recommended temperature is 10 C (50 F) to 30 C (86 F). Higher temperatures cause the battery to self-discharge faster. Excessive recharging decreases the battery life. Look after your AC adapter and battery. Checking the battery level The power meter indicates the current battery level. Rest the cursor over the battery/power icon on the taskbar to see the battery's present charge level. Battery pack - 45 Battery-low warning When using battery power pay attention to the power meter. Important Connect the AC adapter as soon as possible after the battery-low warning appears. Data may be lost if the battery is allowed to become fully depleted and the computer shuts down. When the battery-low warning appears, the recommended course of action depends on your situation:
Situation The AC adapter and a power outlet are available. The AC adapter or a power outlet is unavailable. Recommended Action 1. Plug the AC adapter into the computer, and then connect to the main power supply. 2. Save all necessary files. 3. Resume work. Turn off the computer if you want to recharge the battery rapidly. 1. Save all necessary files. 2. Close all applications. 3. Turn off the computer. 46 - Traveling with your computer TRAVELING WITH YOUR COMPUTER This section gives you tips and hints to consider when moving around or traveling with your computer. Disconnecting from the desktop Follow these steps to disconnect your computer from external accessories:
1.Save any open files. 2.Remove discs from optical drive. 3.Shut down the computer or put it into Sleep or Hibernate mode. 4.Close the display cover. 5.Disconnect the cord from the AC adapter. 6.Disconnect the keyboard, pointing device, printer, external monitor and other external devices. 7.Disconnect the Kensington lock if you are using one to secure the computer. Moving around When you are just moving within short distances, for example, from your office desk to a meeting room. Preparing the computer Before moving the computer, close and latch the display cover to place it in Sleep mode. You can now safely take the computer anywhere you go within the building. To wake the computer from Sleep mode, open the display and, if necessary, press and release the power button. If you are taking the computer to a client's office or a different building, you may choose to shut down the computer:
Press the Windows key + <C>, click Settings > Power then click Shut Down Or:
Traveling with your computer - 47 You can put the computer in Sleep mode by pressing <Fn> + <F4> or by closing the display. When you are ready to use the computer again, open the display and, if necessary, press and release the power button. Note The computer may enter Hibernation or Deep Sleep mode after being in Sleep mode for a period of time. What to bring to meetings If your meeting is relatively short, you probably do not need to bring anything with you other than your computer. If your meeting will be longer, or if your battery is not fully charged, you may want to bring the AC adapter with you to plug in your computer in the meeting room. If the meeting room does not have an electrical outlet, reduce the drain on the battery by putting the computer in Sleep mode. Press
<Fn> + <F4> or close the display cover whenever you are not actively using the computer. Taking the computer home When you are moving from your office to your home or vice versa. Preparing the computer After disconnecting the computer from your desktop, follow these steps to prepare the computer for the trip home:
Check that you have removed all media and compact discs from the drive(s). Failure to remove the media can damage the drive head. Pack the computer in a protective case that can prevent the computer from sliding around and cushion it if it should fall. Warning Avoid packing items next to the top cover of the computer. Pressure against the top cover can damage the screen. 48 - Traveling with your computer What to take with you Unless you have some items at home, take the following items with you:
AC adapter and power cord. The printed Setup Guide. Special considerations Follow these guidelines to protect your computer while traveling to and from work:
Minimize the effects of temperature changes by keeping the computer with you. If you need to stop for an extended period of time and cannot carry the computer with you, leave the computer in the trunk of the car to avoid exposing the computer to excessive heat. Changes in temperature and humidity can cause condensation. Allow the computer to return to room temperature, and inspect the screen for condensation before turning on the computer. If the temperature change is greater than 10 C (18 F), allow the computer to come to room temperature slowly. If possible, leave the computer for 30 minutes in an environment with a temperature between outside and room temperature. Setting up a home office If you frequently work on your computer at home, you may want to purchase a second AC adapter for use at home. With a second AC adapter, you can avoid carrying the extra weight to and from home. If you use your computer at home for significant periods of time, you might also want to add an external keyboard, monitor or mouse. Traveling with the computer Important Check with your airline for any special requirements for travelling with Lithium batteries. When you are moving within a larger distance, for instance, from your office building to a client's office building or traveling locally. Traveling with your computer - 49 Preparing the computer Prepare the computer as if you were taking it home. Make sure that the battery in the computer is charged. Airport security may require you to turn on your computer when carrying it into the gate area. What to take with you Take the following items with you:
AC adapter Additional printer driver files if you plan to use another printer Special considerations In addition to the guidelines for taking the computer home, follow these guidelines to protect your computer while traveling:
Always take the computer as carry-on luggage. If possible, have the computer inspected by hand. Airport security X-
ray machines are safe, but do not put the computer through a metal detector. Traveling internationally Important Check with your airline for any special requirements for travelling with Lithium batteries. When you are moving from country to country. Preparing the computer Prepare the computer as you would normally prepare it for traveling. 50 - Traveling with your computer What to bring with you Bring the following items with you:
AC adapter. Power cords that are appropriate for your destination(s). Additional printer driver files if you plan to use another printer. Proof of purchase, in case you need to show it to customs officials. International Travelers Warranty passport. Special considerations Follow the same special considerations as when traveling with the computer. In addition, these tips are useful when traveling internationally:
When traveling in another country, check that the local AC voltage and the AC adapter power cord specifications are compatible. If not, purchase a power cord that is compatible with the local AC voltage. Do not use converter kits sold for appliances to power the computer. If you are using the modem, check if the modem and connector are compatible with the telecommunications system of the country you are traveling in.
- 51 Ports and connectors... In this section you will find:
Information on the ports and connectors fitted to your computer 52 - Memory card reader MEMORY CARD READER Connectivity options Your computer has a card reader and other ports/jacks that allow you to connect peripheral devices to your computer. For instructions on how to connect different external devices to the computer, read the following section. Memory card reader Memory cards are used in a wide selection of digital cameras, PDAs, MP3 players and mobile phones. Inserting a memory card 1.Align the card so that the connector points towards the port, with the connectors facing down. 2.Carefully slide the card into the port. If you find you need to use any force to insert the card, try reorientating the card slightly. 3.Push the card until it clicks into place. A few millimetres of the card will extend from beyond the slot. If the card contains some files, the Windows Auto Play window may appear (this depends on the contents of the card) and ask you if you wish to use a program to access the contents of the card. Select an option here if it is appropriate, otherwise select Cancel. If the card contains no files, or unknown files, a window will open showing the contents of the card. SD, SDHC and SDXC cards Different types of SD cards cover different capacities, while using the same overall design. SD cards contain up to 4 GB, SDHC cards contain up to 32 GB, and SDXC cards can contain up to 2048 GB Memory card reader - 53
(2 TB). Your computer provides an SDHC or SDXC compatible card reader. Note SDXC memory cards can only be used in an SDXC-compatible reader; SD and SDHC cards can be used in either type. Removing a card from a memory card reader 1.Click on Show hidden icons arrow in the Notification Area (next to the clock). 2 2.Click on the Safely Remove Hardware icon. 3.Click on Eject SD Card (or the name of the device). 4.Wait until a Safe to Remove Hardware message is displayed. 5.Remove the card. 1 3 54 - Video and audio connectors VIDEO AND AUDIO CONNECTORS Connect to a monitor with a VGA or DVI port (the type of connection supported depends on your computers configuration). The appropriate cable is usually included with the monitor. Follow these steps to connect an monitor to your computer:
1.Check that the computer is powered off and the monitor power switch is turned off. 2.Attach the video cable to the monitor port on the computer. Secure the cable connection with the screws provided. 3.Connect the monitor power cable and plug it into a properly grounded wall outlet. 4.Follow any setup instructions in the monitor's user's guide. 5.Turn on power to the monitor, then the computer. 6.Make sure that the current resolution and refresh rate do not exceed the specifications of the monitor. If necessary change the display settings used by the computer. Note To access the display controls, press the Windows key (
"Display" and then click on Display.
) + W, type Headphones and microphone These ports allow you to connect audio devices. Use the headphone port to plug in stereo headphones or powered speakers. Plugging an audio device to the headphone port disables the built-in speakers. Use the microphone port to connect an external microphone for mono recording; plugging in an external microphone disables the built-in microphone. Note Some computers have a single "combo" port that allows you to use single-pin headsets with a built-in microphone. These headsets are most commonly used with smartphones. HDMI HDMI - 55 HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is a high-quality, digital audio/video interface. HDMI allows you to connect any compatible digital audio/video source, such as your computer, a set-top box, DVD player, and audio/video receiver to any compatible digital audio and/or video monitor, such as a digital television (DTV) with a single cable. The single cable keeps everything neat and tidy while ensuring easy connection and the best audio and visual quality. 56 - Universal Serial Bus (USB) UNIVERSAL SERIAL BUS (USB) The USB port is a high-speed port which allows you to connect USB peripherals, such as a mouse, an external keyboard, additional storage (external hard disks), or any other compatible device. Note Two USB standards are currently available on Acer computers: USB 2.0
(High-speed USB) and USB 3.0 (SuperSpeed USB). USB 2.0 ports on Acer computers have a black tongue in the port, while USB 3.0 ports have a blue tongue. For best performance, USB 3.0 devices should always be plugged into USB 3.0 ports. Consult your devices documentation to see which standard it supports. You can also charge devices such as tablets, smartphones, or other devices through a USB port. Some USB 3.0 ports support charging devices when the computer is in Hibernate or turned off. Additionally, you can use a USB hub to connect multiple devices to a single USB port. Important When removing a USB storage device, you should right-click on the USB icon in the Windows task bar and select "Eject <device>" to tell the operating system to stop using the device before removing it. Failure to do this may result in data loss or damage to your peripheral.
- 57 Got a question?
In this section you will find:
Frequently asked questions Tips for using Windows 8.1 Troubleshooting information How to protect yourself while online Where to find Acer service center contact information 58 - Frequently asked questions FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS The following is a list of possible situations that may arise during the use of your computer. Easy solutions are provided for each one. I turned on the power, but the computer does not start or boot up. Look at the power indicator:
If it is not lit, no power is being supplied to the computer. Check the following:
If you are using on the battery, it may be low and unable to power the computer. Connect the AC adapter to recharge the battery pack. Make sure that the AC adapter is properly plugged into the computer and to the power outlet. If it is lit, check the following:
Is a disc in the optical drive? Remove it and press <Ctrl> + <Alt>
+ <Del> to restart the system. Do you have a USB storage device (USB disk or smartphone) plugged into your computer? Unplug it and press <Ctrl> + <Alt> +
<Del> to restart the system. Nothing appears on the screen. The computers power management system automatically blanks the screen to save power. Press any key to turn the display back on. If pressing a key does not turn the display back on, three things might be the cause:
The brightness level might be too low. Press <Fn> + < > (increase) to adjust the brightness level. The display device might be set to an external monitor. Press the display toggle hotkey <Fn> + <F5> to toggle the display back to the computer. If the power LED is flashing, the computer may be in Sleep or Hibernate mode. Press and release the power button to resume. No audio is heard from the computer. Check the following:
Frequently asked questions - 59 The volume may be muted. Look at the volume control (speaker) icon in the taskbar. If it is crossed-out, click the icon and deselect the Mute all option. The volume level may be too low. Check the volume from the volume control (speaker) icon in the taskbar. You can also use the volume control buttons to adjust the volume. If headphones, earphones or external speakers are connected to the headphone jack on the computer, the internal speakers automatically turn off. I want to eject the optical drive tray without turning on the power. There is a mechanical eject hole on the optical drive. Simply insert the tip of a pen or straightened-out paperclip into the hole and push to eject the tray. The keyboard does not respond. Try attaching an external keyboard to a USB port on the computer. If it works, contact your dealer or an authorized service center as the internal keyboard cable may be loose. The printer does not work. Check the following:
Make sure that the printer is connected to a power outlet and that it is turned on. Make sure that the printer cable is connected securely to a USB port and the corresponding port on the printer. 60 - Frequently asked questions I want to restore my computer to its original settings. Note If your system is the multilingual version, the operating system and language you choose when you first turn on the system will be the only option for future recovery operations. This recovery process helps you restore the C: drive with the original software content that is installed when you purchased your computer. Warning Your C: drive will be reformatted and all data will be erased. It is important to back up all data files before using this option. Before performing a restore operation, please check the BIOS settings. 1.Check to see if Acer disk-to-disk recovery is enabled or not. 2.Make sure the D2D Recovery setting in Main is Enabled. 3.Exit the BIOS utility and save changes. The system will reboot. Note To activate the BIOS utility, press <F2> when you see the Acer logo during boot up. For more information, see Recovering your system on page 23. Requesting service International Travelers Warranty (ITW) Your computer is backed by an International Travelers Warranty
(ITW) that gives you security and peace of mind when traveling. An ITW passport came with your computer and contains all you need to know about the ITW program. A list of available, authorized service centers is in this handy booklet. Read this passport thoroughly. Always have your ITW passport on hand, especially when you travel, to receive the benefits from our support centers. Attach your proof-of-
purchase to the ITW passport. If the country you are traveling in does not have an Acer-authorized ITW service site, you can still get in contact with our offices worldwide. Please visit www.acer.com. Frequently asked questions - 61 Before you call Please have the following information available when you call Acer for online service, and please be at your computer when you call. With your support, we can reduce the amount of time a call takes and help solve your problems efficiently. If there are error messages or beeps reported by your computer, write them down as they appear on the screen (or the number and sequence in the case of beeps). You are required to provide the following information:
Name: _______________________________________ Address: ______________________________________ Telephone number: _____________________________ Machine and model type: _________________________ Serial number: _________________________________ Date of purchase: ______________________________ Frequently ask 62 - Frequently asked questions Tips and hints for using Windows 8.1 We know this is a new operating system that will take some getting used to, so we've created a few pointers to help you get started. How do I get to Start?
Press the Windows key; click the Start button on the desktop taskbar;
or move your cursor into the upper right-hand corner of the screen and click the Start charm. Wheres the Start button?
The Start button will appear in the desktop taskbar. Clicking it will open Start where you can launch apps. How do I see all of my apps?
Click the arrow icon that appears at the bottom of Start when you move your cursor. Can I make the "All apps" view the default for Start?
Yes, you can, just follow these steps:
1.Go to the desktop. 2.Right-click the taskbar and select Properties from the menu that opens. 3.From the Navigation tab, check Show the Apps view automatically when I go to Start. What are "Charms?"
Charms allow you to perform useful functions, such as sharing content, turning off your PC or changing settings. How do I access the charms?
Move your cursor into the upper right-hand corner of the screen. Frequently asked questions - 63 Can I boot directly to the desktop?
Yes, you can, just follow these steps:
1.Go to the desktop. 2.Right-click the taskbar and select Properties from the menu that opens. 3.From the Navigation tab, check Go to the desktop instead of Start when I sign in. How do I jump between apps?
Move your cursor to the upper left-hand corner of the screen and click the thumbnail of the app that you want to jump to. How do I turn off my computer?
Move your cursor to the upper right-hand corner of the screen, click Settings > Power and select the action you'd like to take. Can I just turn off notifications?
You can turn off notifications during certain hours so that you can leave your computer running, but not be disturbed by notifications. 1.Move your cursor to the upper right-hand corner of the screen and click Settings > Change PC settings > Search & apps >
Notifications. 2.Move the Quiet hours slider to On and select times to start and stop disabling notifications. How do I unlock my computer?
Press the space bar and select a user account icon to unlock the computer. If your account has a password set, you will need to enter the password to continue. Click the preview icon to see the characters you've entered to ensure the password is correct. 64 - Frequently asked questions Can I personalize the Lock screen?
You can personalize the lock screen with a different image, to run a slideshow of images, or to show you quick status and notifications to suit your personal needs. To change the background, move your cursor to the upper right-hand corner of the screen and click Settings > Change PC settings > PC and devices > Lock screen. From here you can:
Select a background image for the lock screen Turn the Slide show on or off Select lock screen apps. How do I set up the lock screen slideshow?
1.Move your cursor to the upper right-hand corner of the screen and click Settings > Change PC settings > PC and devices > Lock screen. 2.Move the slider to On and select if the slideshow should be played while the computer is running on battery power. 3.Click Add a folder and open the folder you wish to use (your Pictures folder will open by default). Click Use this folder > OK. 4.You can see the list of folders under Add a folder. Select a folder name and click Remove to remove the folder from the lock screen slideshow. 5.Change the other settings to suit your needs. How do I move tiles?
Right-click a tile to select it, then drag it to the place on Start that you want it to appear. Other tiles will be moved to accommodate the tile in its new location. Can I arrange tiles in groups?
Yes, you can. Right-click a tile to select it and open the Customize menu. You will see Name group appear above unnamed groups. You can give the group(s) a name and arrange the tiles within the groups to suit your needs. Frequently asked questions - 65 Can I make tiles bigger or smaller?
Right-click anywhere on Start to open the Customize menu, click the tile(s) you wish to resize and click Resize. Select a size from the menu that appears. How do I close an app?
Move your cursor to the top of the screen. You will see it change to a hand, click and drag the hand downwards past the half-way point of the screen. Can I change the screen resolution?
Move your cursor to the upper right-hand corner of the screen and click Search, click the text box to open the onscreen keyboard and start typing 'Control Panel' to display the results; click Control Panel
> Adjust screen resolution. How do I set the alarm?
Your computer can act as an alarm clock. Start typing Alarms to search for the Alarms app. 1.Set the time using the sliders on the left-hand side of the screen. 2.Select AM or PM. 3.Choose which days the alarm should go off. 4.Select the notification. 66 - Frequently asked questions 5.Save the alarm by clicking the Save icon in the upper right-hand corner. Delete Save Hour Minutes Note The alarm will only sound if your computer is awake at the set time. Where are my apps?
Move your cursor to the upper right-hand corner of the screen and click Search, start typing the name of the app you would like to open. Results will be displayed on the right-hand side of the screen. How do I make an app appear on Start?
If you're in All apps and you want to make an app appear on Start, Right-click a tile to select it and open the Customize menu. Click Pin to Start from the menu that appears at the bottom of the screen. How do I remove a tile from Start?
Right-click a tile to select it and open the Customize menu. Click the tile(s) you wish to remove and click Unpin from Start from the menu that appears at the bottom of the screen. Frequently asked questions - 67 How do I make an app appear on my taskbar?
If you're in All apps and you want to make an app appear on the taskbar, right-click a tile to select it and open the Customize menu. Select Pin to taskbar. How do I install apps?
You can download Windows Store apps from Store. You will need to have a Microsoft ID to purchase and download apps from Store. I can't find apps like Notepad and Paint! Where are they?
Move your cursor to the upper right-hand corner of the screen and click Search, type the name of the app you would like to open using the pop-up keyboard. Alternatively, open All apps and scroll to Windows Accessories to see the list of legacy programs. Can I use more than one app at a time?
1.Click on a tile to open an app from the Start screen. 2.Return to the Start screen and repeat the process. 3.Swipe right from the left edge of the screen to display the last app that was opened. 4.Swipe right from the left edge of the screen until you see a column divider to display both apps simultaneously. Up to three apps may be displayed via three columns at the same time. Can I show my desktop apps first?
Yes, you can, just follow these steps:
1.Go to the desktop. 2.Right-click the taskbar and select Properties from the menu that opens. 3.From the Navigation tab, check List desktop apps first in the Apps view when it's sorted by category. What is a Microsoft ID (account)?
A Microsoft account is an email address and password that you use to sign in to Windows. You can use any email address, but it is best if you choose the one you already use to communicate with friends and 68 - Frequently asked questions sign in to your favorite websites. When you sign in to your PC with a Microsoft account, you'll connect your PC to the people, files, and devices you care about. Do I need one?
You do not need a Microsoft ID to use Windows 8.1, but it makes life easier because you can sync data across different machines you sign in to using a Microsoft ID. How do I get one?
If you've already installed Windows 8.1 and didn't sign in with a Microsoft account or you don't have a Microsoft account and want to get one, move your cursor to the upper right-hand corner of the screen and click Settings > Change PC settings > Accounts >
Connect to a Microsoft account, and the onscreen instructions. follow How do I add a favorite to Internet Explorer?
Internet Explorer 10 doesn't have traditional favorites, instead you can pin shortcuts to Start. Once you have the page open, swipe upwards from the bottom edge of the screen to open the menu at the bottom of the screen. Click Pin to Start. How do I check for Windows updates?
Move your cursor to the upper right-hand corner of the screen and click Settings > Change PC settings > Update & recovery >
Windows Update. Click Check now. Where can I get more information?
For more information please visit the following pages:
Windows 8 and 8.1 tutorials: www.acer.com/windows8-tutorial Support FAQs: support.acer.com FREQUENTLY Frequently asked questions - 69 Troubleshooting This chapter shows you how to deal with common system problems. Read it before calling a technician if a problem occurs. Solutions to more serious problems require opening up the computer. Do not attempt to open the computer yourself; contact your dealer or authorized service center for assistance. Troubleshooting tips incorporates an advanced design This computer onscreen error message reports to help you solve problems. If the system reports an error message or an error symptom occurs, see "Error messages" below. If the problem cannot be resolved, contact your dealer. that delivers Error messages Corrective action If you receive an error message, note the message and take the corrective action. The following table lists the error messages in alphabetical order together with the recommended course of action. Error messages CMOS battery bad Contact your dealer or an authorized service center. Contact your dealer or an authorized service CMOS checksum error center. Insert a system (bootable) disk, then press Disk boot failure
<Enter> to reboot. Press <F2> (during POST) to enter the BIOS utility, then press Exit in the BIOS utility to reboot. Contact your dealer or an authorized service center. Contact your dealer or an authorized service center. Contact your dealer or an authorized service center. Hard disk 0 error Hard disk 0 extended type error I/O parity error Equipment configuration error 70 - Frequently asked questions Error messages Keyboard error or no keyboard connected Keyboard interface error Memory size mismatch Corrective action Contact your dealer or an authorized service center. Contact your dealer or an authorized service center. Press <F2> (during POST) to enter the BIOS utility, then press Exit in the BIOS utility to reboot. If you still encounter problems after going through the corrective measures, please contact your dealer or an authorized service center for assistance. INTERNET AND ONLINE SECURITY Internet and online security - 71 First steps on the net Protecting your computer It is vital to protect your computer from viruses and attacks over the Internet (see Security on page 75). A comprehensive Internet security program is offered when you first start your computer. You should activate this protection as soon as possible, certainly before you connect to the Internet. Choose an Internet Service Provider Using the Internet has become a natural part of daily computing. Just a few simple steps can connect you to a vast collection of knowledge and communication tools. To accomplish these steps you should first select an Internet Service Provider (ISP), which supplies the connection between your computer and the Internet. You should research the ISPs available in your region, not forgetting to talk to friends and family about their experiences or to check reviews and consumer reports. The ISP you select will provide instructions on how to connect to the Internet (you may need additional software or a special box that connects to your phone line). Connection types Depending on your computer model, your location and your communication needs, you have several ways to connect to the Internet. Dial-up Some computers include a telephone dial-up (modem) connector. This allows you to connect to the Internet using your telephone line. With a dial-up connection, you cannot use the modem and the telephone simultaneously on a single phone line. This type of connection is recommended only if you have limited use of the 72 - Internet and online security Internet as the connection speed is low and connection time is typically charged per hour. DSL (e.g. ADSL) DSL (Digital Subscriber Line) is an always-on connection that runs over the phone line. As DSL and phone do not use the same frequencies, you can use your telephone at the same time you are connected to the Internet (this requires a micro-filter on each telephone socket to avoid interference). To be eligible for DSL, you must be located near an DSL-equipped phone exchange (service is sometimes unavailable in rural areas). Connection speeds vary depending on your location, but DSL generally provides very fast and reliable Internet connection. As the connection is always-on, it is generally charged at fixed monthly rates. Note A DSL connection requires an appropriate modem. A modem is usually provided by the ISP when you register. Many of these modems include an router that provides network and Wi-Fi access. Cable A cable connection provides fast and always-on Internet service via a cable television line. This service is generally available in large cities. You can use your telephone and watch cable TV at the same time you are connected to the Internet. 3G (WWAN or 'Wireless Wide-Area Network') A 3G connection allows you to use cellular networks (such as those used by a mobile phone) to connect to the Internet while away from home. The socket for a SIM card may be built in to your computer, or may require an external device, such as a USB modem or even an appropriately equipped mobile phone. Note If your computer includes a SIM card slot, you require a compatible SIM card and a contract with a cellular provider. Before using the 3G features, check with your service provider to see if any additional charges will be incurred, especially roaming charges. Internet and online security - 73 Network connections A LAN (Local Area Network) is a group of computers (for example, within an office building or home) that share a common communications line and resources. When you set up a network, you can share files, peripheral devices (such as a printer) and an Internet connection. You can set up a LAN using wired technologies (such as Ethernet) or wireless technologies (such as Wi-Fi or Bluetooth). Wireless networks A wireless LAN or WLAN is a wireless local area network, which may link two or more computers without using wires. Setting up a wireless network is easy and allows you to share files, peripheral devices and an Internet connection. What are benefits of a wireless network?
Mobility Wireless LAN systems allow you and other users of your home network to share access to files and devices connected to the network, for example a printer or scanner. Also you can share an internet connection with other computers in your home. Installation speed and simplicity Installing a wireless LAN system can be fast and easy and eliminates the need to pull cables through walls and ceilings. Components of a wireless LAN To set up your Wireless network at home you need to have the following:
Access point (router) Access points (routers) are two-way transceivers that broadcast data into the surrounding environment. Access points act as a mediator between wired and wireless network. Most routers have a built-in DSL modem that will allow you access to a high speed DSL internet connection. The ISP (Internet Service Provider) you have chosen normally supplies a modem/router with the subscription to their 74 - Internet and online security services. Read carefully the documentation supplied with your Access point/router for detailed setup instructions. Network cable (RJ45) A network cable (also called RJ45 cable) is used to connect the host computer to the access point (see illustration below); this type of cable may also be used to connect peripheral devices to the access point. Wireless adapter An internal wireless adapter is normally already installed in your computer. A button or controls in Windows allow you to activate or deactivate the adapter. Diagram of a working network 1.Access point/router 2.Desktop computer 3.Modem 4.Printer 5.Portable computer 6.PDA/Smartphone 7.Network cables (RJ45) Turning on/off a wireless network connection Most computers feature a Wi-Fi button that turns the network connection on or off. If your computer has wireless access, but does not feature a Communication button, you may turn your wireless network on or off, or control what is shared over the network with the network management options. Press the Windows key (
) + W, type
"HomeGroup" and then click on HomeGroup. Warning Using wireless devices while flying in aircraft is prohibited. Switch off all devices before boarding an aircraft; they may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, disrupt communications, and even be illegal. Internet and online security - 75 Surf the Net!
To surf the Internet, you need a program called an Internet browser. Internet Explorer provides an easy and secure web browsing experience. As soon as you have your Internet access installed and you are connected, from Start, click the Internet Explorer tile or the icon located on the desktop and take your Internet experience to a new level!
Acer website To get you started why not visit our website, www.acer.com. Acer is dedicated to provide you with on-going personalied support. Check out our Support section to get help tailored to your needs. www.acer.com is your portal to a world of online activities and services: visit us regularly for the latest information and downloads!
Security You are probably eager to explore everything the Internet has to offer. In order for you to be safe online, Acer has pre-installed McAfee Internet Security Suite on your computer. McAfee Internet Security Suite runs quietly in the background to block todays complex threats and protect your identity when you shop, bank, or browse online. McAfee Internet Security Suite blocks online identity theft, detects and eliminates spyware, removes viruses and Internet worms, protects against hackers. Definitions What is a virus?
Malicious software, typically called viruses, are programs designed to infect and damage computers. Most viruses are transmitted over the Internet, emails or malicious Web sites. A typical virus will replicate and pass itself undetected to multiple computers. Other forms of nuisance, such as Trojan horses, worms or spam can infect your 76 - Internet and online security computer in various ways, using up resources or clogging up a network. Note Acer guarantees that your computer was 100% virus free at the time of purchase and does not cover damages due to viruses. What is spyware?
Spyware refers to generally unwanted programs that are downloaded onto your computer while connected to the Internet, often without you knowing it. Once it has infected your computer, it can snoop on your browsing activity, collect personal information, cause pop-up ads to appear, or even change the configuration of your computer. Spyware consumes resources on your computer; it can slow down your Internet connection or entire computer system, and even cause crashes. Spyware is sometimes used by unscrupulous companies to monitor and track the sites you visit on the Internet so as to determine your web-surfing habits and display targeted pop-up ads on your screen. However, some kinds of spyware go beyond simple tracking and actually monitor keystrokes and capture passwords, posing a serious security risk. What is malware?
Malicious software, also known as malware, is software designed to deliberately harm your computer. For example, viruses, worms, and Trojan horses are malicious software. To help protect your computer against malware, make sure it is using up-to-date antivirus and anti-
malware software. What is a personal firewall?
A personal firewall is a software program designed to prevent unauthorized access to or from a private network. It acts as a shield to protect your Internet connection from unwanted connections, some of which may attempt to take control of your computer to install or re-
distribute viruses or malicious programs. Each connection to your computer is monitored - programs that attempt to receive information without your permission are detected and the firewall will display an alert. You can then decide if you will allow the connection, if the connection is to a program you are currently using then normally you Internet and online security - 77 would allow it (i.e. a game connecting to a multi-player server or an encyclopaedia making a content update). How to protect your computer Cybercrime prevention can be straight-forward - when armed with a little technical advice and common sense, many attacks can be avoided. In general, online criminals are trying to make their money as quickly and easily as possible. The more difficult you make their job, the more likely they are to leave you alone and move on to an easier target. The tips below provide basic information on how you can prevent online fraud. Keep your computer current with the latest patches and updates One of the best ways to keep attackers away from your computer is to apply patches and other software fixes when they become available. By regularly updating your computer, you block attackers from being able to take advantage of software flaws (vulnerabilities) that they could otherwise use to break into your system. While keeping your computer up-to-date will not protect you from all attacks, it makes it much more difficult for hackers to gain access to your system, blocks many basic and automated attacks completely, and might be enough to discourage less-determined attackers, so they will give up and look for a more vulnerable computer elsewhere. More recent versions of Microsoft Windows and other popular software can be configured to download and apply updates automatically so that you do not have to remember to check for the latest software. Taking advantage of auto-update features in your software is a great start toward keeping yourself safe online. Protect your computer with security software Several types of security software are necessary for basic online security. Security software essentials include firewall and antivirus programs. A firewall is usually your computer's first line of defense-it controls who and what can communicate with your computer online. You could think of a firewall as a sort of "policeman" that watches all the data attempting to flow in and out of your computer on the Internet, allowing communications that it knows are safe and blocking
"bad" traffic such as attacks from ever reaching your computer. 78 - Internet and online security The next line of defense many times is your antivirus software, which monitors all online activities such as email messages and Web browsing and protects an individual from viruses, worms, Trojan horse and other types of malicious programs. Your antivirus and antispyware software should be configured to update itself, and it should do so every time you connect to the Internet. Integrated security suites such as McAfee Internet Security Suite, which combine firewall, antivirus, antispyware with other features such as antispam and parental controls, have become popular as they offer all the security software needed for online protection in a single package. Many people find using a comprehensive security suite an attractive alternative to installing, configuring and updating several different types of security software. A complete version of McAfee Internet Security Suite is pre-installed on your Acer system. It includes a free trial subscription to protection updates. Make sure you Activate it!
Choose strong passwords and keep them safe following Passwords are a fact of life on the Internet today; we use them for everything from ordering flowers and online banking to logging into our favorite airline Web site to see how many miles we have accumulated. The tips can help make your online experiences secure:
Selecting a password that cannot be easily guessed is the first step toward keeping passwords secure and out of the wrong hands. Strong passwords have eight characters or more and use a combination of letters, numbers and symbols (e.g., # $ % ! ?). Avoid using any of the following as your password: your login name, anything based on your personal information such as your last name, and words that can be found in the dictionary, especially
"password." Try to select especially strong, unique passwords for protecting activities like online banking. Keep your passwords in a safe place and try not to use the same password for every service you use online. Change passwords on a regular basis, at least every 90 days. This can limit the damage caused by someone who has already gained access to your account. If you notice something suspicious with one of your online accounts, one of the first steps you can take is to change your password. Protect your personal information Internet and online security - 79 Exercise caution when sharing personal information such as your name, home address, phone number, and email address online. To take advantage of many online services, you will inevitably have to provide personal information in order to handle billing and shipping of purchased goods. Since not divulging any personal information is rarely possible, the following list contains some advice for how to share personal information safely online:
Keep an eye out for phony email messages. Things that indicate a message may be fraudulent are misspellings, poor grammar, odd phrasing, Web site addresses with strange extensions, Web site addresses that are entirely numbers where there are normally words, and anything else out of the ordinary. Additionally, phishing messages will often tell you that you have to act quickly to keep your account open, update your security, or urge you to provide information immediately or else something bad will happen. Don't take the bait. Don't respond to email messages that ask for personal information. Legitimate companies will not use email messages to ask for your personal information. When in doubt, contact the company by phone or by typing in the company Web address into your Web browser. Don't click on the links in these messages as they make take you to fraudulent, malicious Web sites. Steer clear of fraudulent Web sites used to steal personal information. When visiting a Web site, type the address (URL) directly into the Web browser rather than following a link within an email or instant message. Fraudsters often forge these links to make them look convincing. A shopping, banking or any other Web site where sensitive information should have an "S" after the letters "http" (i.e. https://
www.yourbank.com not http://www.yourbank.com). The "s" stands for secure and should appear when you are in an area requesting you to login or provide other sensitive data. Another sign that you have a secure connection is the small lock icon in the bottom of your web browser (usually the right-hand corner). 80 - Internet and online security Pay attention to privacy policies on Web sites and in software. It is important to understand how an organization might collect and use your personal information before you share it with them. Guard your email address. Spammers and "phishers" sometimes send millions of messages to email addresses that may or may not exist in hopes of finding a potential victim. Responding to these messages or even downloading images ensures you will be added to their lists for more of the same messages in the future. Also be careful when posting your email address online in newsgroups, blogs or online communities. Online offers that look too good to be true usually are The old saying "there's no such thing as a free lunch" still rings true today. Supposedly "free" software such as screen savers or smileys, secret investment tricks sure to make you untold fortunes, and contests that you've surprisingly won without entering are the enticing hooks used by companies to grab your attention. While you may not directly pay for the software or service with money, the free software or service you asked for may have been bundled with advertising software ("adware") that tracks your behavior and displays unwanted advertisements. You may have to divulge personal information or purchase something else in order to claim your supposed content winnings. If an offer looks so good it's hard to believe, ask for someone else's opinion, read the fine print, or even better, simply ignore it. Review bank and credit card statements regularly The impact of identity theft and online crimes can be greatly reduced if you can catch it shortly after your data is stolen or when the first use of your information is attempted. One of the easiest ways to get the tip-off that something has gone wrong is by reviewing the monthly statements provided by your bank and credit card companies for anything out of the ordinary. Additionally, many banks and services use fraud prevention systems that call out unusual purchasing behavior (i.e. if you live in Texas and all of the sudden start buying refrigerators in Budapest). In order to confirm these out of the ordinary purchases, they might call you and ask you to confirm them. Don't take these calls lightly; this is your hint Internet and online security - 81 that something bad may have happened and you should take necessary action. Protect your computer with Windows security tools Windows provides a variety of protection applications. Windows Updates If you have an active Internet connection, Windows can check for important updates for your computer and install them automatically. These updates include security patches and program updates that can improve your computing experience and help protect your computer against new viruses and attacks. How do I know when my computer is at risk?
If the Action Center reports an alert, or if your computer behaves erratically, crashes unexpectedly or if some of your programs do not work correctly, your computer may be infected by malicious software. However, do not blame every computer problem on a virus! If you suspect your computer is infected, the first thing to do is update, if you have not already done so, and run your antivirus and anti-spyware software. 82 - Playing Blu-Ray or DVD movies PLAYING BLU-RAY OR DVD MOVIES If your computer is equipped with a Blu-Ray or DVD drive, you can play movies on your computer or on a high-definition TV via the HDMI port. 1.Insert the disc into the drive. 2.After a few seconds, the movie will start playing. 3.If the movie does not start playing, open your movie playback program and open the disc from the File menu. Important When you launch the DVD player for the first time, the program asks you to enter the region code. DVDs are available for 6 regions Region code Country or region 1 2 3 4 5 6 USA, Canada Europe, Middle East, South Africa, Japan Southeast Asia, Taiwan, South Korea Latin America, Australia, New Zealand Former USSR, parts of Africa, India Peoples Republic of China Note To change the region code, insert a DVD movie of a different region into the DVD drive. Once your DVD drive is set to a region code, it will only play DVDs for that region. You can set the region code a maximum of five times (including the first time), after which the last region code set will remain permanent. Recovering your hard disk does not reset the number of times the region code has been set.
- 1 Regulatory Information and Safety Guide 2 -
2013. All Rights Reserved. Regulatory Information and Safety Guide This revision: December 2013 TABLE OF CONTENTS Table of contents - 3 Tips and information for comfortable use 4 Finding your comfort zone .......................... 4 Taking care of your vision........................... 5 Developing good work habits...................... 6 Protecting your hearing............................... 6 Basic care and tips for using your computer 7 Turning your computer on and off............... 7 Taking care of your computer ..................... 7 General ....................................................... 8 Safety instructions ................................... 9 Product servicing ........................................ 9 Cleaning and servicing................................ 9 Battery and adapter information ............ 10 Accessing the power................................. 10 Disconnecting the power source............... 10 Using electrical power............................... 10 Guidelines for safe battery usage ............. 12 Warnings and regulatory information 14 Optical drives......................................... 14 Telephone line safety............................. 14 Emergency calls........................................ 15 Medical devices ..................................... 15 Vehicles ................................................. 16 Potentially explosive environments........ 16 Disposal instructions.............................. 17 ENERGY STAR ..................................... 17 Wireless adapter regulatory information 18 Radio frequency interference.................... 18 Use on aircraft........................................... 19 The wireless adapter and your health....... 19 USA FCC and FAA............................... 19 FCC radio frequency interference requirements............................................. 20 Canada Industry Canada (IC) .............. 22 European Union ........................................ 22 Compliant with Russian regulatory certification................................................ 28 4 - Tips and information for comfortable use TIPS AND INFORMATION FOR COMFORTABLE USE Important Some of the information in this guide may not apply to your computer. Computer users may complain of eyestrain and headaches after prolonged use. Users are also at risk of physical injury after long hours of working in front of a computer. Long work periods, bad posture, poor work habits, stress, inadequate working conditions, personal health and other factors greatly increase the risk of physical injury. Incorrect computer usage may lead to carpal tunnel syndrome, tendonitis, tenosynovitis or other musculoskeletal disorders. The following symptoms may appear in the hands, wrists, arms, shoulders, neck or back:
Numbness, or a burning or tingling sensation. Aching, soreness or tenderness. Pain, swelling or throbbing. Stiffness or tightness. Coldness or weakness. If you have these symptoms, or any other recurring or persistent discomfort and/or pain related to computer use, consult a physician immediately and inform your company's health and safety department. The following section provides tips for more comfortable computer use. Finding your comfort zone Find your comfort zone by adjusting the viewing angle of the monitor, using a footrest, or raising your sitting height to achieve maximum comfort. Observe the following tips:
Refrain from staying too long in one fixed posture. Tips and information for comfortable use - 5 Avoid slouching forward and/or leaning backward. Stand up and walk around regularly to remove the strain on your leg muscles. Take short rests to relax your neck and shoulders. Avoid tensing your muscles or shrugging your shoulders. Install the external display, keyboard and mouse properly and within comfortable reach. If you view your monitor more than your documents, place the display at the center of your desk to minimize neck strain. Taking care of your vision Long viewing hours, wearing incorrect glasses or contact lenses, glare, excessive room lighting, poorly focused screens, very small typefaces and low-contrast displays could stress your eyes. The following sections provide suggestions on how to reduce eyestrain. Eyes Rest your eyes frequently. Give your eyes regular breaks by looking away from the monitor and focusing on a distant point. Blink frequently to keep your eyes from drying out. Display Keep your display clean. Keep your head at a higher level than the top edge of the display so your eyes point downward when looking at the middle of the display. Adjust the display brightness and/or contrast to a comfortable level for enhanced text readability and graphics clarity. Eliminate glare and reflections by:
placing your display in such a way that the side faces the window or any light source, minimizing room light by using drapes, shades or blinds, using a task light, changing the display's viewing angle, using a glare-reduction filter, 6 - Tips and information for comfortable use using a display visor, such as a piece of cardboard extended from the display's top front edge. Avoid adjusting your display to an awkward viewing angle. Avoid looking at bright light sources for extended periods of time. Developing good work habits The following work habits make computer use more relaxing and productive:
Take short breaks regularly and often. Perform some stretching exercises. Breathe fresh air as often as possible. Exercise regularly and maintain a healthy body. Warning We do not recommend using the computer on a couch or bed. If this is unavoidable, work for only short periods, take breaks regularly, and do some stretching exercises. Protecting your hearing Warning Permanent hearing if earphones or headphones are used at high volume for prolonged periods of time. loss may occur To protect your hearing, follow these instructions. Increase the volume gradually until you can hear clearly and comfortably. Do not increase the volume level after your ears have adjusted. Do not listen to music at high volumes for extended periods. Do not increase the volume to block out noisy surroundings. Decrease the volume if you can't hear people speaking near you. BASIC CARE AND TIPS FOR USING YOUR COMPUTER Basic care and tips for using your computer - 7 Read these instructions carefully. Keep this document for future reference. Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the product. Turning your computer on and off To turn on the computer, simply press and release the power button. Please refer to the setup poster for the location of the power button. To turn the power off, do any of the following:
Use the Windows shutdown command: Press the Windows key +
<C>, click Settings > Power then click Shut Down. If you need to power down the computer for a short while, but dont want to completely shut it down, you can put it into Hibernate by:
Pressing the power button. You can also put the computer in sleep mode by pressing the sleep hotkey <Fn> + <F4>. Note If you cannot power off the computer normally, press and hold the power button for more than four seconds to shut down the computer. If you turn off the computer and want to turn it on again, wait at least two seconds before powering up. Taking care of your computer Your computer will serve you well if you take care of it. Do not expose the computer to direct sunlight. Do not place it near sources of heat, such as a radiator. Do not expose the computer to temperatures below 0 C (32 F) or above 50 C (122 F). Do not subject the computer to magnetic fields. Do not expose the computer to rain or moisture. Do not spill water or any liquid on the computer. 8 - Basic care and tips for using your computer Do not subject the computer to heavy shock or vibration. Do not expose the computer to dust or dirt. Never place objects on top of the computer. Do not slam the computer display when you close it. Never place the computer on uneven surfaces. General Do not use this product near water. Do not place this product on an unstable cart, stand or table. If the product falls, it could be seriously damaged. Slots and openings are provided for ventilation to ensure reliable operation of the product and to protect it from overheating. These openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed, sofa, rug or other similar surface. This product should never be placed near or over a radiator or heat register, or in a built-in installation unless proper ventilation is provided. Never push objects of any kind into this product through cabinet slots as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short-out parts that could result in a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind onto or into the product. To avoid damage of internal components and to prevent battery leakage, do not place the product on a vibrating surface. Never use it under sporting, exercising, or any vibrating environment which will probably cause a short-circuit or damage rotor devices, HDD, optical drive, and even exposure risk from the lithium battery pack. The bottom surface, areas around ventilation openings and AC adapter may get hot. To avoid injury, ensure they do not come in contact with your skin or body. Your device and its enhancements may contain small parts. Keep them out of the reach of small children. The surface temperature of the base will rise during normal operation, particularly when plugged in to AC power. Allowing sustained contact with exposed skin can cause discomfort or burns. Basic care and tips for using your computer - 9 Safety instructions Product servicing Do not attempt to service this product yourself, as opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltage points or other risks. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Unplug this product from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel when:
The power cord or plug is damaged, cut or frayed. Liquid was spilled into the product. The product was exposed to rain or water. The product has been dropped or the case has been damaged. The product exhibits a distinct change in performance, indicating a need for service. The product does not operate normally after following the operating instructions. The product exhibits a distinct change in performance, indicating a need for service. The product does not operate normally after following the operating instructions. Note Adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating instructions, since improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage and will often require extensive work by a qualified technician to restore the product to normal condition. Cleaning and servicing When cleaning the computer, follow these steps:
1.Turn off the computer and remove the battery pack. 2.Disconnect the AC adapter. 3.Use a soft, moist cloth. Do not use liquid or aerosol cleaners. 10 - Basic care and tips for using your computer Battery and adapter information Accessing the power Be sure that the power outlet you plug into is easily accessible and located as close to the equipment operator as possible. When you need to disconnect power to the equipment, be sure to unplug from the electrical outlet. Disconnecting the power source Observe the following guidelines when connecting and disconnecting power to the power supply unit:
Install the power supply unit before connecting to the AC power outlet. Unplug before removing the power supply unit from the computer. If the system has multiple sources of power, disconnect power from the system by unplugging all power cords from the power supplies. Using electrical power Do not connect the adapter to any other device. When unplugging the power cord, do not pull on the cord itself but pull on the plug. This product should be operated from the type of power indicated on the marking label. If you are not sure of the type of power available, consult your dealer or local power company. Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord. Do not locate this product where people will walk on the cord. If an extension cord is used with this product, make sure that the total ampere rating of the equipment plugged into the extension cord does not exceed the extension cord ampere rating. Also, make sure that the total rating of all products plugged into the wall outlet does not exceed the fuse rating. Do not overload a power outlet, strip or receptacle by plugging in too many devices. The overall system load must not exceed 80% of the branch circuit rating. If power strips are used, the load should not exceed 80% of the power strip's input rating. Basic care and tips for using your computer - 11 If this product's AC adapter is equipped with a three-wire grounded plug. The plug only fits in a grounded power outlet. Make sure the power outlet is properly grounded before inserting the AC adapter plug. Do not insert the plug into a non-grounded power outlet. Contact your electrician for details. Warning The grounding pin is a safety feature. Using a power outlet that is not properly grounded may result in electric shock and/or injury. Note The grounding pin also provides good protection from unexpected noise produced by other nearby electrical devices that may interfere with the performance of this product. The system can be powered using a wide range of voltages; 100 to 120 or 220 to 240 V or 100-240 V AC. The power cord included with the system meets the requirements for use in the country/region where the system was purchased. Power cords for use in other countries/regions must meet the requirements for that country/
region. For more information on power cord requirements, contact an authorized reseller or service provider. 12 - Basic care and tips for using your computer Guidelines for safe battery usage Warning Batteries may explode if not handled properly. Do not disassemble or dispose of them in fire. Do not tamper with batteries. Keep them away from children. Follow local regulations when disposing of used batteries. Important Replace the battery with the same type as that which came bundled with your product. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. This notebook uses a Lithium battery. Do not use it in a humid, wet or corrosive environment. Do not put, store or leave your product in or near a heat source, in a high temperature location, in strong direct sunlight, in a microwave oven or in a pressurized container, and do not expose it to temperatures over 60 C (140 F). Failure to follow these guidelines may cause the battery to leak acid, become hot, explode or ignite and cause injury and/or damage. Do not pierce, open or disassemble the battery. If the battery leaks and you come into contact with the leaked fluids, rinse thoroughly with water and seek medical attention immediately. For safety reasons, and to prolong the lifetime of the battery, charging will not occur at temperatures below 0 C (32 F) or above 40 C (104 F). The full performance of a new battery is achieved only after two or three complete charge and discharge cycles. The battery can be charged and discharged hundreds of times, but it will eventually wear out. When the operation time becomes noticeably shorter than normal, buy a new battery. Use only the approved batteries, and recharge your battery only with the approved chargers designated for this device. Use the battery only for its intended purpose. Never use any charger or battery that is damaged. Do not short-circuit the battery. Accidental short-circuiting can occur when a metallic object such as a coin, clip or pen causes direct connection of the positive (+) and negative (-) terminals of the battery. (These look like metal strips on the battery.) This might happen, for example, when you carry a spare battery in Basic care and tips for using your computer - 13 your pocket or purse. Short-circuiting the terminals may damage the battery or the connecting object. The capacity and lifetime of the battery will be reduced if the battery is left in hot or cold places, such as in a closed car in summer or winter. Always try to keep the battery between 15 C and 25 C (59 F and 77 F). A device with a hot or cold battery may not work temporarily, even when the battery is fully charged. Battery performance is especially limited in temperatures well below freezing. Do not dispose of batteries in a fire as they may explode. Batteries may also explode if damaged. Dispose of batteries according to local regulations. Please recycle when possible. Do not dispose as household waste. Wireless devices may be susceptible to interference from the battery, which could affect performance. Note Please refer to www.acer.com for battery shipping documents. 14 - Warnings and regulatory information WARNINGS AND REGULATORY INFORMATION Optical drives CAUTION: This appliance contains a laser system and is classified as a "CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT." In case of any trouble with this device, please contact your nearest AUTHORIZED service station. To prevent direct exposure to the laser beam, do not try to open the enclosure. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT CAUTION: INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN. AVOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM. APPAREIL A LASER DE CLASSE 1 PRODUIT LASERATTENTION: RADIATION DU FAISCEAU LASER INVISIBLE EN CAS DOUVERTURE. EVITTER TOUTE EXPOSITION AUX RAYONS. LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE LASER KLASSE 1 VORSICHT:
ABDECKUNG GEFFNET NICHT DEM STRAHLL AUSSETZEN PRODUCTO LSER DE LA CLASE I ADVERTENCIA: RADIACIN LSER INVISIBLE AL SER ABIERTO. EVITE EXPONERSE A LOS RAYOS. ADVARSEL: LASERSTRLING VEDBNING SE STRLEN. VARO! LAVATTAESSA OLET ALTTINA LASERSTEILYLLE. VARNING: LASERSTRLNING NR DENNA DEL R PPNAD L TUIJOTA STEESEENSTIRRA EJ IN I STRLEN VARNING:
PPNADSTIRRA EJ IN I STRLEN ADVARSEL: LASERSTRLING NAR DEKSEL PNESSTIRR IKKE INN I STRLEN LASERSTRLNING NAR DENNA DEL LASERSTRAHLUNG, WENN UNSICHTBARE IKKE IND R I Telephone line safety Warnings and regulatory information - 15 Disconnect all telephone lines from the equipment when not in use and/or before servicing. To avoid the remote risk of electric shock from lightning, do not connect the telephone line to this equipment during lightning or thunderstorms. Emergency calls Warning You cannot make emergency calls through this device. To make an emergency call you shall dial out through your mobile phone or other telephone call system. Medical devices Operation of any radio transmitting equipment, including wireless phones, may interfere with the functionality of inadequately protected medical devices. Consult a physician or the manufacturer of the medical device to determine if they are adequately shielded from external RF energy or if you have any questions. Switch off your device in health care facilities when any regulations posted in these areas instruct you to do so. Hospitals or health care facilities may be using equipment that could be sensitive to external RF transmissions. Pacemakers. Pacemaker manufacturers recommend that a minimum separation of 15.3 centimeters (6 inches) be maintained between wireless devices and a pacemaker to avoid potential interference with the pacemaker. These recommendations are consistent with the independent recommendations of Wireless Technology Research. Persons with pacemakers should do the following:
Always keep the device more than 15.3 centimeters (6 inches) from research by and the pacemaker Not carry the device near your pacemaker when the device is switched on. If you suspect interference, switch off your device, and move it. Hearing aids. Some digital wireless devices may interfere with some hearing aids. If interference occurs, consult your service provider. 16 - Warnings and regulatory information Vehicles RF signals may affect improperly installed or inadequately shielded electronic systems in motor vehicles such as electronic fuel injection systems, electronic antiskid (anti-lock) braking systems, electronic speed control systems, and air bag systems. For more information, check with the manufacturer, or its representative, of your vehicle or any equipment that has been added. Only qualified personnel should service the device, or install the device in a vehicle. Faulty installation or service may be dangerous and may invalidate any warranty that may apply to the device. Check regularly that all wireless equipment in your vehicle is mounted and operating properly. Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gases, or explosive materials in the same compartment as the device, its parts, or enhancements. For vehicles equipped with an air bag, remember that air bags inflate with great force. Do not place objects, including installed or portable wireless equipment in the area over the air bag or in the air bag deployment area. If in-vehicle wireless equipment is improperly installed, and the air bag inflates, serious injury could result. Using your device while flying in aircraft is prohibited. Switch off your device before boarding an aircraft. The use of wireless teledevices in an aircraft may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, disrupt the wireless telephone network, and may be illegal. Potentially explosive environments Warning Do not operate a portable transmitter (including this wireless adapter) near unshielded blasting caps or in an explosive environment unless the transmitter has been modified to be qualified for such use. Switch off your device when in any area with a potentially explosive atmosphere and obey all signs and instructions. Potentially explosive atmospheres include areas where you would normally be advised to turn off your vehicle engine. Sparks in such areas could cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death. Switch off the device at refueling points such as near gas pumps at service stations. Warnings and regulatory information - 17 Observe restrictions on the use of radio equipment in fuel depots, storage, and distribution areas; chemical plants; or where blasting operations are in progress. Areas with a potentially explosive atmosphere are often, but not always, clearly marked. They include below deck on boats, chemical transfer or storage facilities, vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas
(such as propane or butane), and areas where the air contains chemicals or particles such as grain, dust or metal powders. Do not switch the notebook on when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. Disposal instructions Do not throw this electronic device into the trash when discarding. To minimize pollution and ensure utmost protection of the global environment, please recycle. For more from Electrical and Electronics Equipment (WEEE) regulations, visit www.acer-group.com/public/Sustainability information on the Waste ENERGY STAR Acer's ENERGY STAR qualified products save your money by reducing energy cost and protecting the environment without sacrificing features or performance. Acer is proud to offer our customers products with the ENERGY STAR mark. What is ENERGY STAR?
Products that are ENERGY STAR qualified use less energy and prevent greenhouse gas emissions by meeting strict energy efficiency guidelines set by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Acer is committed to offering products and services worldwide that help customers save money, conserve energy and improve the quality of our environment. The more energy we can save through higher energy efficiency, the more we reduce greenhouse gases and the risks to www.energystar.gov or www.energystar.gov/powermanagement. change. More information climate refers of 18 - Warnings and regulatory information Note Information in this section may not apply to your computer. Acer ENERGY STAR qualified products:
Produce less heat and reduce cooling loads, and warmer climates. Automatically go into "display sleep" and "computer sleep" mode after 10 and 30 minutes of inactivity respectively. Wake the computer from sleep mode by pushing keyboard or moving mouse. Computers will save more than 80% energy at "sleep" mode. ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are registered U.S. marks Wireless adapter regulatory information Radio frequency interference Warning For safety reasons, turn off all wireless or radio transmitting devices when using your laptop under the following conditions. These devices may include, but are not limited to: wireless LAN (WLAN), Bluetooth and/or 3G. Remember to follow any special regulations in force in any area, and always switch off your device when its use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. Use the device only in its normal operating positions. This device meets RF exposure guidelines when used normally. To successfully transmit data files or messages, this device requires a good quality connection to the network. In some cases, transmission of data files or messages may be delayed until such a connection is available. Parts of the device are magnetic. Metallic materials may be attracted to the device, and persons with hearing aids should not hold the device to the ear with the hearing aid. Do not place credit cards or other magnetic storage media near the device, because information stored on them may be erased. Use on aircraft Warnings and regulatory information - 19 Warning FCC and FAA regulations may prohibit airborne operation of radio-
frequency wireless devices (wireless adapters) because their signals could interfere with critical aircraft instruments. Ask the cabin crew before turning on your devices wireless adapter whilst on board. The wireless adapter and your health and These recommendations. The wireless adapter, like other radio devices, emits radio frequency electromagnetic energy. The level of energy emitted by the wireless adapter, however, is less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by other wireless devices such as mobile phones. The wireless adapter operates within the guidelines found in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations reflect the consensus of the scientific community and result from deliberations of panels and committees of scientists who continually review and interpret the extensive research literature. In some situations or environments, the use of the wireless adapter may be restricted by the proprietor of the building or responsible representatives of the applicable organization. Examples of such situations may include:
Using the wireless adapter on board airplanes, or Using the wireless adapter in any other environment where the risk of interference with other devices or services is perceived or identified as being harmful. standards If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of wireless adapters in a specific organization or environment (an airport, for example), you are encouraged to ask for authorization to use the adapter before you turn it on. USA FCC and FAA The FCC with its action in ET Docket 96-8 has adopted a safety standard for human exposure to radio frequency (RF) electromagnetic energy emitted by FCC certified equipment. The wireless adapter meets the Human Exposure limits found in OET Bulletin 65, 20 - Warnings and regulatory information supplement C, 2001, and ANSI/IEEE C95.1, 1992. Proper operation of this radio according to the instructions found in this manual will result in exposure substantially below the FCCs recommended limits. The following safety precautions should be observed:
Do not touch or move antenna while the unit is transmitting or receiving. Do not hold any component containing the radio such that the antenna is very close or touching any exposed parts of the body, especially the face or eyes, while transmitting. Do not operate the radio or attempt to transmit data unless the antenna is connected; this behavior may cause damage to the radio. The use of wireless adapters in hazardous locations is limited by the constraints posed by the safety directors of such environments. The use of wireless adapters on airplanes is governed by the Federal Aviation Administration (FAA). The use of wireless adapters in hospitals is restricted to the limits set forth by each hospital. FCC radio frequency interference requirements Note Applies to device supporting IEEE 802.11a wireless adapters. This device is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5.15 to 5.25 GHz and 5.470 to 5.725 GHz frequency ranges. FCC requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency ranges 5.15 to 5.25 GHz and 5.470 to 5.725 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. High power radars are allocated as primary users of the 5.25 to 5.35 GHz and 5.65 to 5.85 GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and /or damage this device. No configuration controls are provided for this wireless adapter allowing any change in the frequency of operations outside the FCC grant of authorization for U.S operation according to Part 15.407 of the FCC rules. USA Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Warnings and regulatory information - 21 Note The radiated output power of the adapter is far below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the adapter should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact during normal operation is minimized. To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, you should keep a distance of at least 20 cm between you
(or any other person in the vicinity), or the minimum separation distance as specified by the FCC grant conditions, and the antenna that is built into the computer. Details of the authorized configurations can be found at www.fcc.gov/oet/ea/ by entering the FCC ID number on the device. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation of the device is subject to the following two conditions:
This device may not cause harmful interference. This device must accept any interference that may cause undesired operation. Interference statement This wireless adapter has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This wireless adapter generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If the wireless adapter is not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, the wireless adapter may cause harmful interference to radio communications. There is no guarantee, however, that such interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this wireless adapter does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception (which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on), the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by taking one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna of the equipment experiencing the interference. Increase the distance between the wireless adapter and the equipment experiencing the interference. 22 - Warnings and regulatory information Connect the computer with the wireless adapter to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the equipment experiencing the interference is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Canada Industry Canada (IC) This device complies with RSS210 of Industry Canada. Cet appareil se conforme RSS210 de Canada d'Industrie. European Union List of applicable countries This product must be used in strict accordance with the regulations and constraints in the country of use. For further information, contact the local office in the country of use. Please see http://ec.europa.eu/
enterprise/rtte/implem.htm for the latest country list. List of national codes This equipment may be operated in the following countries:
Country Austria Belgium Cyprus Czech Republic Denmark Estonia Finland France Germany Greece Hungary Ireland Italy Latvia ISO 3166 2 letter code Country AT BE CY CZ DK EE FI FR DE GR HU IE IT LV Malta Netherlands Poland Portugal Slovakia Slovenia Spain Sweden United Kingdom Iceland Liechtenstein Norway Switzerland Bulgaria ISO 3166 2 letter code MT NL PL PT SK SI ES SE GB IS LI NO CH BG Warnings and regulatory information - 23 Country Lithuania Luxembourg ISO 3166 2 letter code Country LT Romania Turkey LU ISO 3166 2 letter code RO TR Specific absorption rate information This device meets the EU requirements on the limitation of exposure of the general public to electromagnetic fields by way of health protection. The limits are part of extensive recommendations for the protection of the general public. These recommendations have been developed and checked by independent scientific organizations through regular and thorough evaluations of scientific studies. The unit of measurement for the European Council's recommended limit for mobile devices is the "Specific Absorption Rate" (SAR), and the SAR limit is 2.0 W/kg averaged over 10 grams of body tissue. It meets the requirements of International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP). For body worn operation, this device has been tested and meets the ICNIRP exposure guidelines and the European Standard, for use with dedicated accessories. Use of other accessories which contain metals may not ensure compliance with ICNIRP exposure guidelines. The low band 5.15 to 5.35 GHz is for indoor use only. This equipment complies with the essential requirements of the European Union directive 1999/5/EC. See Statements of European Union Compliance, and more details refer to the attached Declaration of Conformity. the English esky
[Czech]
Daansk
[Danish]
Hereby, ACER INC., declares that this devise is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisionns of Directive 1999/5/EC. ACER INC. tmto prohlauje, e toto zazen je ve shod se zkladnmi poadavky a dalmi pslunmi ustanovenmi smrnice 1999/5/ES. Undertegnede ACER INC. erklrer herved, at flgende udstyr overholder de vsentlige krav og vrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF. 24 - Warnings and regulatory information Deutsch
[German]
Eesti
[Estonian]
Espaol
[Spanish]
[Greek]
Franais
[French]
slenska
[Icelandic]
Italiano
[Italian]
Latviski
[Latvian]
Lietuvi
[Lithuanian]
Hiermit erklrt ACER INC., dass sich das Gert Radiolan in bereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den brigen einschlgigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG befindet. Kesolevaga kinnitab ACER INC. seadme vastavust direktiivi 1999/5/E phinuetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele teistele asjakohastele stetele. Por medio de la presente ACER INC. declara que el dispositivo cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE. ACER INC. 1999/5/ . Par la prsente ACER INC. dclare que cet appareil est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/
CE. Hr me lsir ACER INC. yfir v a er samrmi vi grunnkrfur og arar krfur, sem gera r eru tilskipun 1999/5/EC. Con la presente ACER INC. dichiara che questo dispositivo conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE. Ar o ACER INC. deklar, ka ierce atbilst Direktvas 1999/5/EK btiskajm prasbm un citiem ar to saisttajiem noteikumiem. iuo ACER INC. deklaruoja, kad is renginys atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999/5/EB Direktyvos nuostatas. Warnings and regulatory information - 25 Malti
[Maltese]
Magyar
[Hungarian]
Nederlands
[Dutch]
Norsk
[Norwegiann]
Polski
[Polish]
Portugus
[Portuguese]
Slovensko
[Slovenian]
Slovensky
[Slovak]
Suomi
[Finnish]
Svenska
[Swedish]
Hawnhekk, ACER INC., jiddikjara li dan jikkonforma mal- ti ijiet essenzjali u ma provvedimenti o rajn relevanti li he mm fid-Dirrettiva 1999/5/EC. Alulrott, ACER INC. nyilatkozom, hogy a kszlk megfelel a vonatkoz alapveto kvetelmnyeknek s az 1999/5/EC irnyelv egyb elorsainak. Hierbij verklaart ACER INC. dat het toestel voldoet aan de essentile eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG. ACER INC. erklrer herved at utstyret er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og vrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF. Niniejszym ACER INC. owiadcza, e urzdzenie jest zgodne z zasadniczymi wymogami oraz pozostaymi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC. ACER INC. declara que este dispostivo est conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposies da Directiva 1999/5/CE. ACER INC. izjavlja, da je ta naprava skladna z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi doloili Direktive 1999/5/ES. ACER INC. tmto vyhlasuje, e zariadenie spa zkladn poiadavky a vetky prslun ustanovenia Smernice 1999/5/ES. ACER INC. vakuuttaa tten ett tm laite on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja sit koskevienn direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen. Hrmed intygar ACER INC. att denna enhet str i verensstmmelse med vsentliga egenskapskrav och vriga relevanta bestmmelser som framgr av direktiv 1999/5/EG. 26 - Warnings and regulatory information France Pour la France mtropolitaine :
2,400 - 2,4835 GHz (Canaux 1 13) autoris en usage intrieur 2,400 - 2,454 GHz (canaux 1 7) autoris en usage extrieur Pour la Guyane et la Runion :
2,400 - 2,4835 GHz (Canaux 1 13) autoris en usage intrieur 2,420 - 2,4835 GHz (canaux 5 13) autoris en usage extrieur Pour tout le territoire Franais :
Seulement 5,15 -5,35 GHz autoris pour le 802.11a L'utilisation de cet equipement (2,4 GHz WLAN) est soumise certaines restrictions :
La puissance maximale autorise en intrieur est de 100 mW pour 2400 - 2483,5 MHz. La puissance maximale autorise est de 100 mW en extrieur pour 2400 - 2454 MHz. La puissance maximale autorise est de 10 mW en extrieur, 2454 -
2483,5 MHz. Pour les dernires restrictions, voir www.art-telecom.fr. Italy The use of this equipment is regulated by:
1.D.L.gs 1.8.2003, n. 259, article 104 (activity subject to general authorization) for outdoor use and article 105 (free use) for indoor use, in both cases for private use. 2.D.M. 28.5.03, for supply to public of RLAN access to networks and telecom services. Luso degli apparati regolamentato da:
1.D.L.gs 1.8.2003, n. 259, articoli 104 (attivit soggette ad autorizzazione generale) se utilizzati al di fuori del proprio fondo e 105 (libero uso) se utilizzati entro il proprio fondo, in entrambi i casi per uso private. 2.D.M. 28.5.03, per la fornitura al pubblico dellaccesso R-LAN alle reti e ai servizi di telecomunicazioni. Warnings and regulatory information - 27 Belgium Dans le cas d'une utilisation prive, l'extrieur d'un btiment, au-
dessus d'un espace public, aucun enregistrement n'est ncessaire pour une distance de moins de 300 m. Pour une distance suprieure 300 m un enregistrement auprs de l'IBPT est requise. Pour les enregistrements et licences, veuillez contacter l'IBPT. In geval van priv-gebruik, buiten een gebouw, op een openbare plaats, is geen registratie nodig, wanneer de afstand minder dan 300 m is. Voor een afstand groter dan 300 m is een registratie bij BIPT vereist. Voor registraties en te contacteren. licenties, gelieve BIPT Brazil Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio. Pakistan Pakistan Telecommunication Authority (PTA) Approved. Morocco The operation of this product in the radio channel 2 (2417 MHz) is not authorized in the following cities: Agadir, Assa-Zag, Cabo Negro, Chaouen, Goulmima, Oujda, Tan Tan, Taourirt, Taroudant and Taza. The operation of this product in the radio channels 4, 5, 6 and 7 (2425
- 2442 MHz) is not authorized in the following cities: Aroport Mohamed V, Agadir, Aguelmous, Anza, Benslimane, Bni Hafida, Cabo Negro, Casablanca, Fs, Lakbab, Marrakech, Merchich, Mohammdia, Rabat, Sal, Tanger, Tan Tan, Taounate, Tit Mellil, Zag. Japan 5 GHz Korea 28 - Warnings and regulatory information Taiwan
;
Modifications to the product Acer cannot be held responsible for unauthorized modifications made by the user and the consequences thereof, which may alter the conformity of the product. Compliant with Russian regulatory certification
frequency | equipment class | purpose | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
1 | 2016-03-24 | 2402 ~ 2480 | DSS - Part 15 Spread Spectrum Transmitter | Class II permissive change or modification of presently authorized equipment |
2 | 2016-03-11 | 2412 ~ 2462 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | |
3 | 2016-02-19 | 2412 ~ 2462 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | |
4 | 2015-12-01 | 5745 ~ 5825 | NII - Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure TX | |
5 | 2015-08-11 | 2402 ~ 2480 | DSS - Part 15 Spread Spectrum Transmitter | |
6 | 5745 ~ 5825 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | ||
7 | 5660 ~ 5700 | NII - Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure TX | ||
8 | 2015-01-08 | 5745 ~ 5825 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | |
9 | 2402 ~ 2480 | DSS - Part 15 Spread Spectrum Transmitter | ||
10 | 5660 ~ 5700 | NII - Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure TX | ||
11 | 2014-10-09 | 2402 ~ 2480 | DSS - Part 15 Spread Spectrum Transmitter | |
12 | 5745 ~ 5825 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | ||
13 | 5660 ~ 5700 | NII - Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure TX | ||
14 | 2014-09-29 | 2402 ~ 2480 | DSS - Part 15 Spread Spectrum Transmitter | |
15 | 5745 ~ 5825 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | ||
16 | 5660 ~ 5700 | NII - Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure TX | ||
17 | 2014-09-03 | 2402 ~ 2480 | DSS - Part 15 Spread Spectrum Transmitter | |
18 | 5660 ~ 5700 | NII - Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure TX | ||
19 | 5745 ~ 5825 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | ||
20 | 2014-08-28 | 5660 ~ 5700 | NII - Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure TX | |
21 | 5745 ~ 5825 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | ||
22 | 2402 ~ 2480 | DSS - Part 15 Spread Spectrum Transmitter | ||
23 | 2014-06-11 | 5745 ~ 5825 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | |
24 | 5660 ~ 5700 | NII - Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure TX | ||
25 | 2402 ~ 2480 | DSS - Part 15 Spread Spectrum Transmitter | ||
26 | 2013-08-20 | 5745 ~ 5825 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | Original Equipment |
27 | JBP - Part 15 Class B Computing Device Peripheral | |||
28 | 5660 ~ 5700 | NII - Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure TX | ||
29 | 2402 ~ 2480 | DSS - Part 15 Spread Spectrum Transmitter |
app s | Applicant Information | |||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
various | Effective |
2016-03-24
|
||||
various |
2016-03-11
|
|||||
various |
2016-02-19
|
|||||
various |
2015-12-01
|
|||||
various |
2015-08-11
|
|||||
various |
2015-01-08
|
|||||
various |
2014-10-09
|
|||||
various |
2014-09-29
|
|||||
various |
2014-09-03
|
|||||
various |
2014-08-28
|
|||||
various |
2014-06-11
|
|||||
various |
2013-08-20
|
|||||
various | Applicant's complete, legal business name |
Qualcomm Atheros, Inc.
|
||||
various | FCC Registration Number (FRN) |
0003716743
|
||||
various | Physical Address |
1700 Technology Dr
|
||||
various |
San Jose, California 95110
|
|||||
various |
United States
|
|||||
app s | TCB Information | |||||
various | TCB Application Email Address |
L******@ul.com
|
||||
various |
L******@ul.com
|
|||||
various | TCB Scope |
A4: UNII devices & low power transmitters using spread spectrum techniques
|
||||
various |
A1: Low Power Transmitters below 1 GHz (except Spread Spectrum), Unintentional Radiators, EAS (Part 11) & Consumer ISM devices
|
|||||
app s | FCC ID | |||||
various | Grantee Code |
PPD
|
||||
various | Equipment Product Code |
QCNFA222
|
||||
app s | Person at the applicant's address to receive grant or for contact | |||||
various | Name |
P****** G****
|
||||
various | Title |
Vice President, Regulatory Engineering
|
||||
various | Telephone Number |
858-6********
|
||||
various | Fax Number |
858-6********
|
||||
various |
p******@qti.qualcomm.com
|
|||||
app s | Technical Contact | |||||
various | Firm Name |
Bureau Veritas Consumer Products Services (H.K.)
|
||||
various | Name |
A******** W******
|
||||
various |
H******** C******
|
|||||
various | Physical Address |
No.19, Hwa Ya 2nd Rd., Wen Hwa Vil., Kwei Shan Dis
|
||||
various |
No. 81-1, Lu Liao Keng, 9th Ling, Wu Lung Tsuen
|
|||||
various |
Taoyuan City, 33383
|
|||||
various |
Hsin Chu Hsien
|
|||||
various |
Hsin Chu Hsien, 94538
|
|||||
various |
Taiwan
|
|||||
various | Telephone Number |
886 (********
|
||||
various |
886 (******** Extension:
|
|||||
various | Fax Number |
886 (********
|
||||
various |
886 (********
|
|||||
various |
a******@tw
|
|||||
various |
h******@tw.bureauveritas.com
|
|||||
app s | Non Technical Contact | |||||
various | Firm Name |
Bureau Veritas Consumer Products Services (H.K.)
|
||||
various | Name |
A**** W********
|
||||
various |
H******** C******
|
|||||
various | Physical Address |
No.19, Hwa Ya 2nd Rd., Wen Hwa Vil., Kwei Shan Dis
|
||||
various |
No. 81-1, Lu Liao Keng, 9th Ling, Wu Lung Tsuen
|
|||||
various |
Taoyuan City, 33383
|
|||||
various |
Hsin Chu Hsien
|
|||||
various |
Hsin Chu Hsien, 94538
|
|||||
various |
Taiwan
|
|||||
various | Telephone Number |
886 (********
|
||||
various | Fax Number |
886 (********
|
||||
various |
886 (********
|
|||||
various |
a******@tw.bureauveritas.com
|
|||||
various |
h******@tw.bureauveritas.com
|
|||||
app s | Confidentiality (long or short term) | |||||
various | Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | Yes | ||||
various | Long-Term Confidentiality Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | Yes | ||||
various | No | |||||
various | If so, specify the short-term confidentiality release date (MM/DD/YYYY format) | 09/07/2016 | ||||
various | 12/10/2015 | |||||
various | 09/25/2015 | |||||
various | 06/29/2015 | |||||
various | 04/04/2015 | |||||
various | 03/28/2015 | |||||
various | 03/02/2015 | |||||
various | 02/23/2015 | |||||
various | 12/08/2014 | |||||
various | 10/01/2013 | |||||
if no date is supplied, the release date will be set to 45 calendar days past the date of grant. | ||||||
app s | Cognitive Radio & Software Defined Radio, Class, etc | |||||
various | Is this application for software defined/cognitive radio authorization? | No | ||||
various | Equipment Class | DSS - Part 15 Spread Spectrum Transmitter | ||||
various | DTS - Digital Transmission System | |||||
various | NII - Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure TX | |||||
various | JBP - Part 15 Class B Computing Device Peripheral | |||||
various | Description of product as it is marketed: (NOTE: This text will appear below the equipment class on the grant) | PCIE 802.11a/b/g/n 2.4GHz/5GHz + USB BT 4.0 card | ||||
various | PCIE 802.11a/b/g/n 2.4GHz/5GHz + USB BT 4.0card | |||||
various | PCIE 802.11a/b/g/n 2.4GHz/5GHz + USB BT 4.0 | |||||
various | Related OET KnowledgeDataBase Inquiry: Is there a KDB inquiry associated with this application? | No | ||||
various | Modular Equipment Type | Does not apply | ||||
various | Single Modular Approval | |||||
various | Purpose / Application is for | Class II permissive change or modification of presently authorized equipment | ||||
various | Original Equipment | |||||
various | Composite Equipment: Is the equipment in this application a composite device subject to an additional equipment authorization? | Yes | ||||
various | Related Equipment: Is the equipment in this application part of a system that operates with, or is marketed with, another device that requires an equipment authorization? | No | ||||
various | Grant Comments | Class II Permissive Changes to add the specific portable host (ASUSTeK, Model Name: TP501U, J501U, R518U) with new antenna model. Output power is conducted. This module may be installed only by the OEM or an OEM integrator. | ||||
various | Class II permissive change to add the specific portable host (ASUSTeK, Model Name: TP501U, J501U, R518U) with new antenna model. Output power is conducted. This device has 20 and 40 MHz bandwidth modes. This module may be installed only by the OEM or an OEM integrator. This approval is valid when the antenna used for this device in portable configurations is installed in the display section of Notebook/Netbook/Laptop hosts with a minimum antenna to user separation distance of at least 0.5 cm and antenna to antenna separation distance of 3 cm. Other configurations or co-location with other transmitters requires additional evaluation and certification. Grantee must provide instructions and coordinate with OEM integrators to determine applicable host configurations to ensure RF exposure compliance, including simultaneous transmission. The highest reported SAR for standalone and simultaneous transmission are 1.13 W/Kg and 1.30 W/kg respectively. | |||||
various | Class II permissive change to add the specific portable host (ASUSTek Model Name: TP301U and Q303U) with new antenna model. Output power is conducted. This device has 20 and 40 MHz bandwidth modes. This module may be installed only by the OEM or an OEM integrator. This approval is valid when the antenna used for this device in portable configurations is installed in the display section of Notebook/Netbook/Laptop hosts with a minimum antenna to user separation distance of at least 0.5 cm and antenna to antenna separation distance of 3 cm. Other configurations or co-location with other transmitters requires additional evaluation and certification. Grantee must provide instructions and coordinate with OEM integrators to determine applicable host configurations to ensure RF exposure compliance, including simultaneous transmission. SAR requirements according to published KDB 447498. The highest reported SAR values for body-worn and simultaneous transmission are 1.19 W/Kg and 1.37 W/kg respectively. | |||||
various | Class II permissive change. Output power is conducted. This device has 20 and 40 MHz bandwidth modes. This module may be installed only by the OEM or an OEM integrator. This approval is valid when the antenna used for this device in portable configurations is installed in the display section of Notebook/Netbook/Laptop hosts with a minimum antenna to user separation distance of at least 0.8 cm and antenna to antenna separation distance of 3 cm. Other configurations or co-location with other transmitters requires additional evaluation and certification. The 5150-5250 MHz band is for indoor use only. Grantee must provide instructions and coordinate with OEM integrators to determine applicable host configurations to ensure RF exposure compliance, including simultaneous transmission. The highest reported SAR values for stand-alone and simultaneous transmission across all filings under this FCC ID are 1.5 W/kg and 1.5 W/Kg respectively. | |||||
various | Output power is conducted. This module may be installed only by the OEM or an OEM integrator. Class 2 Permissive Change for the addition of a specific 2.4GHz antenna for use with the module as detailed in this filing. This approval is valid when the antenna, detailed in this filing, is used with this module in portable configurations is installed with a minimum antenna to user separation distance of 0.5cm. The highest reported SAR values for body and simultaneous transmission are < 0.10 W/Kg and 0.78 W/kg respectively. | |||||
various | Output power is conducted. This device has 20 and 40 MHz bandwidth modes. This module may be installed only by the OEM or an OEM integrator. This approval is valid when the antenna used for this device in portable configurations is installed in the display section of Notebook/Netbook/Laptop hosts with a minimum antenna to user separation distance of at least 0.8 cm and antenna to antenna separation distance of 3 cm. Other configurations or co-location with other transmitters requires additional evaluation and certification. Grantee must provide instructions and coordinate with OEM integrators to determine applicable host configurations to ensure RF exposure compliance, including simultaneous transmission. SAR requirements according to published KDB 447498. The highest reported SAR values for body-worn and simultaneous transmission are 0.66 W/Kg and 0.76 W/kg respectively. Class 2 Permissive Change to disable the 5GHz band and the addition of a specific 2.4GHz antenna for use with the module as detailed in this filing. This approval is valid when the antenna, detailed in this filing, is used with this module in portable configurations is installed with a minimum antenna to user separation distance of 0.5cm. The highest reported SAR values for body and simultaneous transmission are 0.78 W/Kg and 0.78 W/kg respectively. | |||||
various | Output power is conducted. This device has 20 and 40 MHz bandwidth modes. This module may be installed only by the OEM or an OEM integrator. This approval is valid when the antenna used for this device in portable configurations is installed in the display section of Notebook/Netbook/Laptop hosts with a minimum antenna to user separation distance of at least 0.8 cm and antenna to antenna separation distance of 3 cm. Other configurations or co-location with other transmitters requires additional evaluation and certification. The 5150-5250 MHz band is for indoor use only. Grantee must provide instructions and coordinate with OEM integrators to determine applicable host configurations to ensure RF exposure compliance, including simultaneous transmission. SAR requirements according to published KDB 447498. The highest reported SAR values for body-worn and simultaneous transmission are 0.40 W/Kg and 0.50 W/kg respectively. Class 2 Permissive Change to disable the 5GHz band as detailed in this filing. | |||||
various | Class II permissive change to add the specific portable host Acer MS2398 with antenna described in this filing. Output power is conducted. This device has 20 and 40 MHz bandwidth modes. This module may be installed only by the OEM or an OEM integrator. This approval is valid when the antenna used for this device in portable configurations is installed in the display section of Notebook/Netbook/Laptop hosts with a minimum antenna to user separation distance of at least 0.8 cm and antenna to antenna separation distance of 3 cm. Other configurations or co-location with other transmitters requires additional evaluation and certification. Grantee must provide instructions and coordinate with OEM integrators to determine applicable host configurations to ensure RF exposure compliance, including simultaneous transmission. The highest reported SAR values for body-worn and simultaneous transmission are 0.81 W/Kg and 1.59 W/kg respectively. The highest reported SAR values for body-worn and simultaneous transmission across all filings under this FCC ID are 1.50 W/kg and 1.59 W/Kg respectively. | |||||
various | Class II permissive change to add the specific portable host Acer MS2398 with antenna described in this filing. Output power is conducted. This module may be installed only by the OEM or an OEM integrator. The highest reported SAR values for stand-alone and simultaneous transmission are <0.1 W/Kg and 1.59 W/kg respectively. The highest reported SAR values for stand-alone and simultaneous transmission across all filings under this FCC ID are <0.1 W/kg and 1.59 W/Kg respectively. | |||||
various | Class II permissive change to add the specific portable host Acer MS2398 with antenna described in this filing. Output power is conducted. This device has 20 and 40 MHz bandwidth modes. This module may be installed only by the OEM or an OEM integrator. This approval is valid when the antenna used for this device in portable configurations is installed in the display section of Notebook/Netbook/Laptop hosts with a minimum antenna to user separation distance of at least 0.8 cm and antenna to antenna separation distance of 3 cm. Other configurations or co-location with other transmitters requires additional evaluation and certification. The 5150-5250 MHz band is for indoor use only. Grantee must provide instructions and coordinate with OEM integrators to determine applicable host configurations to ensure RF exposure compliance, including simultaneous transmission. The highest reported SAR values for body-worn and simultaneous transmission are 0.70 W/Kg and 1.15 W/kg respectively. The highest reported SAR values for body-worn and simultaneous transmission across all filings under this FCC ID are 1.26 W/kg and 1.15 W/Kg respectively. | |||||
various | Class II permissive change to add the specific portable host Acer ZS8 with antenna described in this filing. Output power is conducted. This module may be installed only by the OEM or an OEM integrator. | |||||
various | Class II permissive change to add the specific portable host Acer ZS8 with antenna described in this filing. Output power is conducted. This device has 20 and 40 MHz bandwidth modes. This module may be installed only by the OEM or an OEM integrator. This approval is valid when the antenna used for this device in portable configurations is installed in the display section of Notebook/Netbook/Laptop hosts with a minimum antenna to user separation distance of at least 0.8 cm and antenna to antenna separation distance of 3 cm. Other configurations or co-location with other transmitters requires additional evaluation and certification. Grantee must provide instructions and coordinate with OEM integrators to determine applicable host configurations to ensure RF exposure compliance, including simultaneous transmission. SAR requirements according to published KDB 447498. The highest reported SAR values for body-worn and simultaneous transmission are 0.89 W/Kg and 1.47 W/kg respectively. The highest reported SAR across all filings under this FCC ID is 1.50 W/kg | |||||
various | Class II permissive change to add the specific portable host Acer ZS8 with antenna described in this filing. Output power is conducted. This device has 20 and 40 MHz bandwidth modes. This module may be installed only by the OEM or an OEM integrator. This approval is valid when the antenna used for this device in portable configurations is installed in the display section of Notebook/Netbook/Laptop hosts with a minimum antenna to user separation distance of at least 0.8 cm and antenna to antenna separation distance of 3 cm. Other configurations or co-location with other transmitters requires additional evaluation and certification. The 5150-5250 MHz band is for indoor use only. Grantee must provide instructions and coordinate with OEM integrators to determine applicable host configurations to ensure RF exposure compliance, including simultaneous transmission. SAR requirements according to published KDB 447498. The highest reported SAR values for body-worn and simultaneous transmission are 0.76 W/Kg and 1.15 W/kg respectively. The highest reported SAR across all filings under this FCC ID is 1.5 W/kg | |||||
various | Class II permissive change to add the specific portable host (Acer SW5-171, SW5-171P) with antenna described in this filing. Output power is conducted. This module may be installed only by the OEM or an OEM integrator. | |||||
various | Class II permissive change to add the specific portable host (Acer SW5-171, SW5-171P) with antenna described in this filing. Output power is conducted. This device has 20 and 40 MHz bandwidth modes. This module may be installed only by the OEM or an OEM integrator. Also, this approval is valid when the antenna used for this device in portable configurations is installed in the display section of Notebook/Netbook/Laptop hosts with a minimum antenna to user separation distance of at least 0.8 cm and antenna to antenna separation distance of 3 cm. Other configurations or colocation with other transmitters requires additional evaluation and certification. Grantee must provide instructions and coordinate with OEM integrators to determine applicable host configurations to ensure RF exposure compliance, including simultaneous transmission. SAR requirements according to published KDB 447498. The highest reported SAR value across all filings under this FCC ID is 1.50 W/kg. The highest reported SAR for the device in this C2PC filing is 1.50 W/kg. | |||||
various | Class II permissive change to add the specific portable host (Acer SW5-171, SW5-171P) with antenna described in this filing. Output power is conducted. This device has 20 and 40 MHz bandwidth modes. This module may be installed only by the OEM or an OEM integrator. Also, this approval is valid when the antenna used for this device in portable configurations is installed in the display section of Notebook/Netbook/Laptop hosts with a minimum antenna to user separation distance of at least 0.8 cm and antenna to antenna separation distance of 3 cm. Other configurations or colocation with other transmitters requires additional evaluation and certification. The 5150-5250 MHz band is for indoor use only. Grantee must provide instructions and coordinate with OEM integrators to determine applicable host configurations to ensure RF exposure compliance, including simultaneous transmission. SAR requirements according to published KDB 447498. The highest reported SAR across all filings under this FCC ID is 1.26 W/kg. The highest reported SAR value for the device in this C2PC filing is 1.26 W/Kg. | |||||
various | Class II permissive change to add the specific portable host (Acer MS2395) with antenna described in this filing. Output power is conducted. This module may be installed only by the OEM or an OEM integrator. | |||||
various | Class II permissive change to add the specific portable host (Acer MS2395) with antenna described in this filing. Output power is conducted. This device has 20 and 40 MHz bandwidth modes. This module may be installed only by the OEM or an OEM integrator. Also, this approval is valid when the antenna used for this device in portable configurations is installed in the display section of Notebook/Netbook/Laptop hosts with a minimum antenna to user separation distance of at least 0.8 cm and antenna to antenna separation distance of 3 cm. Other configurations or colocation with other transmitters requires additional evaluation and certification. The 5150-5250 MHz band is for indoor use only. Grantee must provide instructions and coordinate with OEM integrators to determine applicable host configurations to ensure RF exposure compliance, including simultaneous transmission. SAR requirements according to published KDB 447498. The highest reported SAR across all filings under this FCC ID is 0.56 W/kg. The highest reported SAR value for the device in this C2PC filing is 0.21W/Kg. | |||||
various | Class II permissive change to add the specific portable host (Acer MS2395) with antenna described in this filing. Output power is conducted. This device has 20 and 40 MHz bandwidth modes. This module may be installed only by the OEM or an OEM integrator. Also, this approval is valid when the antenna used for this device in portable configurations is installed in the display section of Notebook/Netbook/Laptop hosts with a minimum antenna to user separation distance of at least 0.8 cm and antenna to antenna separation distance of 3 cm. Other configurations or colocation with other transmitters requires additional evaluation and certification. Grantee must provide instructions and coordinate with OEM integrators to determine applicable host configurations to ensure RF exposure compliance, including simultaneous transmission. SAR requirements according to published KDB 447498. The highest reported SAR value across all filings under this FCC ID is 0.76 W/kg. The highest reported SAR for the device in this C2PC filing is 0.33 W/kg. | |||||
various | Class II permissive change to add the specific portable host (Acer MS2391)with antenna described in this filing. Output power is conducted. This device has 20 and 40 MHz bandwidth modes. This module may be installed only by the OEM or an OEM integrator. This approval is valid when the antenna used for this device in portable configurations is installed in the display section of Notebook/Netbook/Laptop hosts with a minimum antenna to user separation distance of at least 0.8 cm and antenna to antenna separation distance of 3 cm. Other configurations or colocation with other transmitters requires additional evaluation and certification. The 5150-5250 MHz band is for indoor use only. Grantee must provide instructions and coordinate with OEM integrators to determine applicable host configurations to ensure RF exposure compliance, including simultaneous transmission. SAR requirements according to published KDB 447498. The highest reported SAR values for body-worn and simultaneous transmission are 0.40 W/Kg and 0.50 W/kg respectively. The highest reported SAR value across all filings under this FCC ID is 0.77W/Kg. | |||||
various | Class II permissive change to add the specific portable host (Acer MS2391)with antenna described in this filing. Output power is conducted. This device has 20 and 40 MHz bandwidth modes. This module may be installed only by the OEM or an OEM integrator. This approval is valid when the antenna used for this device in portable configurations is installed in the display section of Notebook/Netbook/Laptop hosts with a minimum antenna to user separation distance of at least 0.8 cm and antenna to antenna separation distance of 3 cm. Other configurations or colocation with other transmitters requires additional evaluation and certification. Grantee must provide instructions and coordinate with OEM integrators to determine applicable host configurations to ensure RF exposure compliance, including simultaneous transmission. SAR requirements according to published KDB 447498. The highest reported SAR values for body worn and simultaneous transmission are 0.66 W/Kg and 0.76 W/kg respectively. The highest reported SAR value across all filings under this FCC ID is 0.68 W/Kg. | |||||
various | Class II permissive change to add the specific portable host (Acer MS2391) and antenna with power reduction as described in this filing. Output power is conducted. This module may be installed only by the OEM or an OEM integrator. | |||||
various | Class II permissive change to add the specific portable host (Acer MS2392)with antenna described in this filing. Output power is conducted. This device has 20 and 40 MHz bandwidth modes. This module may be installed only by the OEM or an OEM integrator. This approval is valid when the antenna used for this device in portable configurations is installed in the display section of Notebook/Netbook/Laptop hosts with a minimum antenna to user separation distance of at least 0.8 cm and antenna to antenna separation distance of 3 cm. Other configurations or colocation with other transmitters requires additional evaluation and certification. Grantee must provide instructions and coordinate with OEM integrators to determine applicable host configurations to ensure RF exposure compliance, including simultaneous transmission. SAR requirements according to published KDB 447498. The highest reported SAR values for body worn and simultaneous transmission are 0.66 W/Kg and 0.76 W/kg respectively. The highest reported SAR for the device is 0.64 W/kg.The highest reported SAR value across all filings under this FCC ID is 0.66 W/Kg. | |||||
various | Class II permissive change to add the specific portable host (Acer MS2392)with antenna described in this filing. Output power is conducted. This device has 20 and 40 MHz bandwidth modes. This module may be installed only by the OEM or an OEM integrator. This approval is valid when the antenna used for this device in portable configurations is installed in the display section of Notebook/Netbook/Laptop hosts with a minimum antenna to user separation distance of at least 0.8 cm and antenna to antenna separation distance of 3 cm. Other configurations or colocation with other transmitters requires additional evaluation and certification. The 5150-5250 MHz band is for indoor use only. Grantee must provide instructions and coordinate with OEM integrators to determine applicable host configurations to ensure RF exposure compliance, including simultaneous transmission. SAR requirements according to published KDB 447498. The highest reported SAR values for body-worn and simultaneous transmission are 0.40 W/Kg and 0.50 W/kg respectively. The highest reported SAR for the device is 0.56W/kg. The highest reported SAR value across all filings under this FCC ID is 0.56W/Kg. | |||||
various | Class II permissive change to add the specific portable host (Acer MS2392)with antenna described in this filing. Output power is conducted. This module may be installed only by the OEM or an OEM integrator. | |||||
various | Output power is conducted. This device has 20 and 40 MHz bandwidth modes. This module may be installed only by the OEM or an OEM integrator. This approval is valid when the antenna used for this device in portable configurations is installed in the display section of Notebook/Netbook/Laptop hosts with a minimum antenna to user separation distance of at least 0.8 cm and antenna to antenna separation distance of 3 cm. Other configurations or co-location with other transmitters requires additional evaluation and certification. Grantee must provide instructions and coordinate with OEM integrators to determine applicable host configurations to ensure RF exposure compliance, including simultaneous transmission. SAR requirements according to published KDB 447498. The highest reported SAR values for body-worn and simultaneous transmission are 0.66 W/Kg and 0.76 W/kg respectively. | |||||
various | Output power is conducted. This device has 20 and 40 MHz bandwidth modes. This module may be installed only by the OEM or an OEM integrator. This approval is valid when the antenna used for this device in portable configurations is installed in the display section of Notebook/Netbook/Laptop hosts with a minimum antenna to user separation distance of at least 0.8 cm and antenna to antenna separation distance of 3 cm. Other configurations or co-location with other transmitters requires additional evaluation and certification. The 5150-5250 MHz band is for indoor use only. Grantee must provide instructions and coordinate with OEM integrators to determine applicable host configurations to ensure RF exposure compliance, including simultaneous transmission. SAR requirements according to published KDB 447498. The highest reported SAR values for body-worn and simultaneous transmission are 0.40 W/Kg and 0.50 W/kg respectively. | |||||
various | Output power is conducted. This module may be installed only by the OEM or an OEM integrator. | |||||
various | Is there an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application? | No | ||||
various | If there is an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application, has the associated waiver been approved and all information uploaded? | No | ||||
app s | Test Firm Name and Contact Information | |||||
various | Firm Name |
DEKRA TESTING AND CERTIFICATION CO., LTD.
|
||||
various |
DEKRA Testing and Certification Co., Ltd.
|
|||||
various |
DEKRA TESTING AND CERTIFICATION CO., LTD. LinKou
|
|||||
various |
Bureau Veritas CPS (H.K.) Ltd. Taoyuan Branch
|
|||||
various |
SGS TAIWAN LTD.
|
|||||
various |
SGS Taiwan Ltd.
|
|||||
various |
Bureau Veritas CPS (H.K.) Ltd., Taoyuan Branch
|
|||||
various | Name |
W**** L******
|
||||
various |
S****** H********
|
|||||
various |
R****** C****
|
|||||
various |
N**** B****
|
|||||
various |
J**** L******
|
|||||
various | Telephone Number |
886-3******** Extension:
|
||||
various |
886-2******** Extension:
|
|||||
various |
+886-******** Extension:
|
|||||
various |
886-3******** Extension:
|
|||||
various |
886-2******** Extension:
|
|||||
various |
886-2******** Extension:
|
|||||
various |
88633******** Extension:
|
|||||
various |
+886-******** Extension:
|
|||||
various | Fax Number |
886-3********
|
||||
various |
886-2********
|
|||||
various |
+886-********
|
|||||
various |
886-3********
|
|||||
various |
886 3********
|
|||||
various |
886-2********
|
|||||
various |
886 2********
|
|||||
various |
88632********
|
|||||
various |
+886-********
|
|||||
various |
w******@dekra.com
|
|||||
various |
s******@quietek.com
|
|||||
various |
s******@dekra.com
|
|||||
various |
r******@tw.bureauveritas.com
|
|||||
various |
n******@sgs.com
|
|||||
various |
j******@sgs.com
|
|||||
Equipment Specifications | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 1 | 15C | CC | 2402.00000000 | 2480.00000000 | 0.0070000 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 1 | 15C | CC MO | 2412 | 2462 | 0.43 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 2 | 15C | CC | 2402 | 2480 | 0.0039 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 1 | 15C | CC MO | 2402 | 2480 | 0.0039 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 2 | 15C | CC MO | 2412 | 2462 | 0.43 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 1 | 15E | 38 CC MO | 5180 | 5240 | 0.042 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 2 | 15E | 38 CC MO | 5260 | 5320 | 0.057 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 3 | 15E | 38 CC MO | 5500 | 5580 | 0.055 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 4 | 15E | 38 CC MO | 5660 | 5700 | 0.056 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 5 | 15E | 38 CC MO | 5745 | 5825 | 0.054 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 1 | 15C | CC | 2402.00000000 | 2480.00000000 | 0.0070000 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6 | 1 | 15C | CC MO | 2402 | 2480 | 0.0039 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6 | 2 | 15C | CC MO | 2412 | 2462 | 0.43 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6 | 3 | 15C | CC MO | 5745 | 5825 | 0.177 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
7 | 1 | 15E | CC MO | 5180 | 5240 | 0.042 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
7 | 2 | 15E | CC MO | 5260 | 5320 | 0.057 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
7 | 3 | 15E | CC MO | 5500 | 5580 | 0.055 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
7 | 4 | 15E | CC MO | 5660 | 5700 | 0.056 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
8 | 1 | 15C | CC MO | 2402 | 2480 | 0.0039 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
8 | 2 | 15C | CC MO | 2412 | 2462 | 0.43 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
8 | 3 | 15C | CC MO | 5745 | 5825 | 0.177 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
9 | 1 | 15C | CC | 2402.00000000 | 2480.00000000 | 0.0070000 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
10 | 1 | 15E | CC MO | 5180 | 5240 | 0.042 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
10 | 2 | 15E | CC MO | 5260 | 5320 | 0.057 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
10 | 3 | 15E | CC MO | 5500 | 5580 | 0.055 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
10 | 4 | 15E | CC MO | 5660 | 5700 | 0.056 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
11 | 1 | 15C | CC | 2402.00000000 | 2480.00000000 | 0.0070000 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
12 | 1 | 15C | CC MO | 2402 | 2480 | 0.0039 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
12 | 2 | 15C | CC MO | 2412 | 2462 | 0.43 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
12 | 3 | 15C | CC MO | 5745 | 5825 | 0.177 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
13 | 1 | 15E | CC MO | 5180 | 5240 | 0.042 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
13 | 2 | 15E | CC MO | 5260 | 5320 | 0.057 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
13 | 3 | 15E | CC MO | 5500 | 5580 | 0.055 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
13 | 4 | 15E | CC MO | 5660 | 5700 | 0.056 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
14 | 1 | 15C | CC | 2402.00000000 | 2480.00000000 | 0.0070000 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
15 | 1 | 15C | CC | 2402 | 2480 | 0.0039 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
15 | 2 | 15C | CC | 2412 | 2462 | 0.43 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
15 | 3 | 15C | CC | 5745 | 5825 | 0.177 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
16 | 1 | 15E | CC | 5180 | 5240 | 0.042 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
16 | 2 | 15E | CC | 5260 | 5320 | 0.057 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
16 | 3 | 15E | CC | 5500 | 5580 | 0.055 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
16 | 4 | 15E | CC | 5660 | 5700 | 0.056 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
17 | 1 | 15C | CC | 2402.00000000 | 2480.00000000 | 0.0070000 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
18 | 1 | 15E | CC | 5180 | 5240 | 0.042 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
18 | 2 | 15E | CC | 5260 | 5320 | 0.057 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
18 | 3 | 15E | CC | 5500 | 5580 | 0.055 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
18 | 4 | 15E | CC | 5660 | 5700 | 0.056 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
19 | 1 | 15C | CC | 2402 | 2480 | 0.0039 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
19 | 2 | 15C | CC | 2412 | 2462 | 0.43 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
19 | 3 | 15C | CC | 5745 | 5825 | 0.177 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
20 | 1 | 15E | CC | 5180 | 5240 | 0.042 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
20 | 2 | 15E | CC | 5260 | 5320 | 0.057 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
20 | 3 | 15E | CC | 5500 | 5580 | 0.055 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
20 | 4 | 15E | CC | 5660 | 5700 | 0.056 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
21 | 1 | 15C | CC | 2402 | 2480 | 0.0039 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
21 | 2 | 15C | CC | 2412 | 2462 | 0.43 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
21 | 3 | 15C | CC | 5745 | 5825 | 0.177 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
22 | 1 | 15C | CC | 2402.00000000 | 2480.00000000 | 0.0070000 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
23 | 1 | 15C | CC | 2402 | 2480 | 0.0039 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
23 | 2 | 15C | CC | 2412 | 2462 | 0.43 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
23 | 3 | 15C | CC | 5745 | 5825 | 0.177 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
24 | 1 | 15E | CC | 5180 | 5240 | 0.042 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
24 | 2 | 15E | CC | 5260 | 5320 | 0.057 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
24 | 3 | 15E | CC | 5500 | 5580 | 0.055 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
24 | 4 | 15E | CC | 5660 | 5700 | 0.056 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
25 | 1 | 15C | CC | 2402.00000000 | 2480.00000000 | 0.0070000 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
26 | 1 | 15C | CC | 2402 | 2480 | 0.0039 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
26 | 2 | 15C | CC | 2412 | 2462 | 0.43 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
26 | 3 | 15C | CC | 5745 | 5825 | 0.177 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
27 | 1 | 15B | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
28 | 1 | 15E | CC | 5180 | 5240 | 0.042 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
28 | 2 | 15E | CC | 5260 | 5320 | 0.057 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
28 | 3 | 15E | CC | 5500 | 5580 | 0.055 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
28 | 4 | 15E | CC | 5660 | 5700 | 0.056 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
29 | 1 | 15C | CC | 2402.00000000 | 2480.00000000 | 0.0070000 |
some individual PII (Personally Identifiable Information) available on the public forms may be redacted, original source may include additional details
This product uses the FCC Data API but is not endorsed or certified by the FCC